Home

DL1720E/DL1740E/DL1740EL Digital Oscilloscope User`s Manual

1. T T1 12 Specified determination time V Center position when zooming v Start point for next search Auto Scroll The zoom position automatically moves auto scroll in the specified direction You can confirm the zoomed waveform and stop the scroll operation at an arbitrary position 2 26 IM 701730 01E 2 6 Analyzing and Searching Waveforms Cursor Measurements lt For the setup procedure see section 10 5 gt Cursors can be placed on the displayed waveform within the display record length See appendix 1 and various types of measured values at the cross point of the cursor and waveform can be displayed Four types of cursors are available Horizontal Cursors Two broken lines horizontal cursors are displayed on the horizontal axis X axis The Y axis values at the cursor positions can be measured The level difference between cursors can also be measured Vertical Cursors Two broken lines vertical cursors are displayed on the vertical axis Y axis The time X axis values from the trigger point to each vertical cursor and the time difference between the vertical cursors can be measured In addition the signal level Y axis value at each cursor position and the level difference between the cursors can be measured Marker Cursors Four markers are displayed on the selected waveform The level Y axis value at each marker the time X axis value from the trigg
2. High intensity Red 28 to Red 896 to A Pink 24 to 27 Pink 768 to 895 Orange 20 to 23 Orange 640 to 767 Yellow 16 to 19 Yellow 512 to 639 White 12 to 15 White 384 to 511 Cyan 8to11 Cyan 256 to 383 Green 4to7 Green 128 to 255 Blue 1to3 Blue 1 to 127 Black 0 Black 0 When Grade width 4 When Grade width 128 For example the point dot that is drawn one hundred times on the screen as a result of accumulation is red when the grade width is 4 and blue when the grade width is 128 Notes on Accumulating Waveforms Automated measurement of waveform parameters and GO NO GO determination are executed on the most recent waveform e Ifall the history waveforms are displayed when accumulation is in progress all the history waveforms are displayed using the specified accumulate mode However the waveform display is slowed down The built in printer optional prints accumulated waveforms using two tones Onan external printer only the newest waveform is printed If waveform acquisition is stopped by pressing the START STOP key accumulation is aborted When waveform acquisition is restarted the displayed waveforms are cleared and new accumulation is started Clearing Accumulated Waveforms You can clear accumulated waveforms by pressing the CLEAR TRACE key 8 6 IM 701730 01E 8 4 Zooming the Waveform lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 18
3. PC Block diagram Primary Acquisition _ VGA video Pre memory memory output ATT AMP Multiplexer A D t t gt Color LCD CH1 o J l lt Display Dispiay processing CH2 o gt gt Primary Primary circuit lt Built in printer Optional 3 data data processing processing CH3 o y lt gt circuit circuit Display memory CH4 o j S 5 Data ey gt processing Keyboard memory gt GP IB CPU le USB FDD or i l i Trigger Time base PC card circuit External clock input t gt _ Ethernet Optional External trigger input Trigger gate input O Trigger output CH3 and CH4 not available on the DL1720E On the DL1720E an input terminal is provided in the CH4 position that can be used alternately for an external trigger external clock or trigger gate IM 701730 01E 2 1 suon uny jo uoneuejdxg 2 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram Signal Flow The signal applied to each signal input terminal is first passed to the vertical control circuit consisting of an attenuator ATT and pre amplifier At the attenuator and pre amplifier the voltage and amplitude of each input signal is adjusted according to the settings such as the input coupling probe attenuation ratio V div and offset voltage The adjusted input signal is then passed to the multiplexer
4. weasune pps Ta ead Sd Gea aren sco srnrsror sranrisror located above the soft keys sem i mace i For a description of the operation using a USB CHORIZONTAL o i SEARCH R keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 a o GmeLe ennanceD wove reson DELAY 2S 1 Press DISPLAY The DISPLAY menu appears 2 Press the Graticule soft key to select the graticule DISPLAY Fornat Interpol f Graticule Scale Trace Accumulate Value Label Next Single Sine A EX FF on fp oN OFF a72 Explanation You can select from the following three types 2004704713 15 54 09 jp Morral 200470443 15 54 16 pS Normal Stopped 108 T SMS S_ZOOMSA Stnpped ion T SASS 2004s nage chi nage onl F fatto auto 6 230 u 0 290 u iTSPTAY DISPLAY Format erpa oratie Seas Trace prccanirate Format J interpol oratieure seiie trace pecunutats value Laber Next value Latet Tert single siwe SH 2 m oon ow OFF an Singe sme A OB on oN OFF aa i ale EE Stopped Nornal SMS S ZO0USiw Tage CHa F nuto 0 230 U TTSPIAY Fornat Interpol Graticule Scale f Tace piccunutate value f Label Next simie sine fE OO E ON on orr a 8 14 IM 701730 01E 8 8 Turning the Sc
5. Parameter Instrument display menu Parameter display menu Instrument None Not selected NOVERSHOOT OShot AVERAGE Avg NWIDTH Width AVGFREQ AvgFreq PERIOD Period AVGPERIOD AvgPriod PNUMBER Pulse BWIDTH1 Burst1 POVERSHOOT OShot BWIDTH2 Burst2 PTOPEAK P P DELAY Delay Detailed settings can be entered using Delay Setup on the instrument DUTYCYCLE Duty PWIDTH Width FALL Fall RISE Rise FREQUENCY Freq RMS Rms HIGH High SDEVIATION Sdev LOW Low TY1INTEG Inti TY MAXIMUM Max TY2INTEG Int2TY Marker M1 lt 2 gt M1 lt 2 gt XY1IINTEG Int1 XY Cursor measurement marker cursors MINIMUM Min XY2INTEG Int2XY Setting the Marker Position Set the marker position if Marker M1 or Marker M2 is selected as the waveform parameter 13 36 IM 701730 01E 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Setting the Conditions for Retrieving the Measured Values of Waveform Parameters Common Number of Displayed Measured Values Data Number Select the number of measured values measured values retrieved from the instrument into the PC to be displayed in the cells of Excel from the following 10 20 50 100 200 and 500 If the number of measured values exceeds the selected number the values are cleared from the oldest values to display the newest measured values 10 20 50 100 200 500 Retrieve Interval Select the retrieve interval from the following 2 s 5s 10 s 30 s and 60 s However of the selected waveform pa
6. PRESET__ Select Type Probe j U div fj Offset etrig Lei Exec All MOS SY 10 1 2 00 U 0 00 V 2 50 U 3 Press the All or CH1 to CH4 2 soft key to select the channel for setting the preset Pressing All will select all the channels The CH3 and CH4 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720E All CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Selecting the Probe Attenuation Current to Voltage Conversion Ratio 4 Press the Probe soft key The Probe menu appears PRESET ig Lut 2 50 V E PRESET Select Probe UAliv ie Offset j Trig Lvl Exec All CMOS SY 10 1 2 00 U 0 00 V 2 50 V 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired attenuation current to voltage conversion ratio PRESET 10A 1U 100A 1U 1 1 10 1 100 1 1000 1 1U A 0 01U7A Exec ss SSS SS IM 701730 01E 5 11 sexy JE UOZHOH pUe JeIIHA eo 5 7 Using the Preset Function Selecting the Preset Type 6 Press the Type soft key The Type menu appears PRESET Select Type Probe Yediv fie Offset f Trig Lyi All Ea 10 1 2 00 V 0 00 U 2 50 V ee 7 Press the CMOS 5 V CMOS 3 3 V ECL or User soft key Select MOS 3 3 ECL User All If you selected User for Type in step 7 proceed to step 8 If you selected a Type other than user proceed to step 12 PRESET Exec Trig Lyi a 2 50 U Setting V div the Offset Voltage and the Trigger Level When Type is
7. FD 1 NetWork 1 lt 88 ea 8e 9e i gt 12 0001 WY 12 0000 WU 9 Record the directory and file name by following the procedure in section 4 2 i Specifying the File and Properties to Be Displayed on the File List Window 10 The procedure is the same as steps 22 to 25 on page 12 15 Creating a Directory Display the Function menu according to steps 1 to 3 on page 12 50 4 Press the Make Dir soft key Utility C FILE Delete Copy Rename Make Dir Format Attr Delete Exec jal Selecting the Medium and Directory 5 The procedure is the same as steps 13 to 15 on page 12 14 Creating a Directory 6 Press the Dir Name soft key A keyboard appears 7 Record the directory and file name by following the procedure in section 4 2 Utility FILE Function fa a Filter Dir Name Property Attr Make Dir w File List Path NetWork Softuare Space 2147483647 byte File Name m INSERT FD NetWork 1 lt 88 ea 8e 9e i gt 12 0001 WwW DeRBEBEPESPLNEL 12 0000 w PE Tela BIC METIH J TKIL NY 1 Utility FILE i J IM 701730 01E 12 51 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 12 13 Changing the Directory or File Name of the Storage Medium and Creating Directories Explanation Specifying the File and Properties to Be Displayed on the File List Window
8. Procedure To exit the menu during operation press ESC Trace ag SHOT HELP located above the soft keys r O SY O e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog CETE Ce gene 2 aca rare co srr sranrr0 shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of setup pispcay copy mace ae seal selecting setting items and entering values using Dos D ES Gano the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys reser sexe ennianceD For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and vow TMEV ACTION DELAY 4 2 aa er Se e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 s 1 Press FILE The FILE menu appears 2 Press the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List window appear pO File Item Data Type a Save Load untoaa utitity Waveform f Binary 3 Press the Function soft key The Function menu appears mI i r Ty Function set Reset Delete Filter Ba Set property i Delete Exec 4 Press the Copy soft key Delete Copy Renane Make Dir Format attr Delete Exec a Selecting the Copy Source e Selecting the Medium and Directory of the Copy Source 5 The procedure is the same as steps 13 to 15 on page 12 14 Utility FILE 12 46 IM 701730 01E 12 12 Copying Files 6 7 8 9 10 Selecting Resetting the Copy Source Files One at a Time Turn th
9. SEAR TRIG D 2 2 smeue ennanced vzDIv TIME 7DIV O TOIS SB Setting the Acquisition Mode 1 Press ACQ The ACQ menu appears 2 Press the Mode soft key The Mode menu appears ACQ Record Mode 5 Count interleave Repetitive Time Base Length 10k Nornal Inf inite ON ON Ext 3 Press a soft key to select the acquisition mode You may not be able to select some modes depending on the trigger mode setting see section 6 1 ACY Record Normal Envelope Average Box Avg petitive Time Base Length 10k OFF ON Ext Setting the Acquisition Count 4 Press the Count soft key Cannot be specified when the trigger mode is Single or Single N AC Record Mode E Count interleave Repetitive Time Base Length 10k Nornal Inf inite ON ON Ext 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the acquisition count e Pressing RESET resets the value to Infinite e If the acquisition mode is Average and you set Count to Infinite proceed to step 6 Setting the Attenuation Constant When the Acquisition Mode Is Average and Count Is Infinite 6 Press the Weight soft key Weight is set as the item under jog shuttle control ACQ O Record Mode Count r Weight iter leave Repetitive Time Base Length 10k Average Infinite 16 F ON PFF ON Ext 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the attenuation constant IM 701730 01E 7 5 uosinboy woane M a 7 5 Settin
10. 1 Press FILE The FILE menu appears 2 Press the File Item soft key The File Item setting menu appears FILE File Item a ja a Save Load Utility Setup 3 Press the Setup soft key FILE Setup javeforn Snap Measure Image Utility E ae al ele E Saving the Setup Data Selecting the Save Destination Medium Directory 4 Press the Save soft key The Save menu appears FILE FILE File Item a a Save Load Utility Setup 12 20 IM 701730 01E 12 6 Saving Loading Settings 5 Press the File List soft key to display the File List window 6 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the save destination medium indicated by brackets Save FILE a File Nam File List ave Exec 12 0000 Setup File List Path FD Space 585216 byte File Name Size Date Attr a FD 1 NetWork 1 M Save FILE fa File Nang a Filter Property ave Exec 12 0000 e SET Setup Selecting the Save Destination Directory Perform this operation when directories are present on the medium 7 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the save destination directory indicated by lt gt The selected medium directory is displayed in Path located in the upper left of the File List window Select lt gt to move to the parent directory Setting the File Name and Comment 8 Press the File Name soft key The File Name a
11. The values inside the thick frame are for repetitive sampling mode App 4 IM 701730 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Specified Record Length 250 kW When set to a mode other than envelope mode Rep Repetitive sampling mode When set to envelope mode When interleave mode is OFF When interleave mode is ON Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON When interleave mode is OFF When interleave mode is ON Display Display record Sample record length rate length Word S s Word Sample rate S s Display record length Word Display record length Word Display Sample record rate length S s Word Display Sample record rate length S s Word 250 k 500 250 k 250 k 250 k 400 M 250 k 800 M 250 k 200 k 1k 200 k 200 k 200 k 400 M 200 k 800 M 200 k 200 k 2k 200 k 200 k 200 k 400 M 200 k 800 M 200 k Roll mode display The values inside the thick frame are for repetitive sampling mode Set to normal mode even if envelope mode is specified IM 701730 01E App 5 E x pu ddy Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Specified Record Length 500 kw When set to a mode other tha
12. C a A R SEARCH O TRIG D j ee Freser me ewe vsbIv S TIME DIV selecting setting items and entering values using the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and ACTION DELAY 4 2 cS So For a description of the operation using a USB OF a keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press MEASURE The MEASURE menu appears 2 Press the Mode soft key The Mode menu appears MEASURE Mode Cycle Mod feT Rangei Iten Delay 5 000dit Next Setup Setup ON er Range 172 Entering a Menu for Automatic Measurement of Dual Areas of Waveform Parameters 3 Press the ON Statistics or History Statistics soft key i MEASURE OFF T Rangei 5 000di Next T Range2 172 5 000di ON tatistics Cycle History tatistic Btatistics 4 Press the Item Setup soft key The Item Setup menu and Item Setup dialog box appear Node Cycle Mod lT Rangel Item neiay 5 000dir Next JE Setup Setup ON fST Range2 172 5 000dis 5 Press the Dual Area soft key to select ON The Dual Area menu appears a fjeT Rangei fsT Range f Dual Area Item 5 000dir 5 000 Setup tte for pr 5 000dir 5 000 6 Press the Item Setup soft key The Item Setup dialog box opens MEASURE fST Rangel T Range3 Dual Area Iten 5 0004di 5 0004i Setup fST Rangez i T Range4 OFF PN 5 000di 5 000di IM 701730 0
13. _T Printer DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL Note Connect the printer directly without going through a hub Do not connect USB devices other than USB keyboard USB mouse USB printer and USB storage that can be used to the USB PERIPHERAL connector Do not connect multiple printers to the USB PERIPHERAL connector Do not turn OFF the printer or remove the USB cable while the printer is printing Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable after the power is turned ON until key operation is ready approximately 20 to 30 s IM 701730 01E 11 3 Printing Using a USB Printer Page Description Language or Printer Type Format You can select a page description language and printer type from ESC P ESC P2 LIPS3 PCL5 or BJ can be used on models that support the BUC 35 V native commands Output Resolution Only when the page description language or printer type is set to BJ You can select the print resolution of screen images to match the resolution of the USB compatible BJ printer 180dpi 300dpi 360dpi 600dpi Comment A comment text of up to twenty characters can be printed at the bottom of the print page The entered comment is displayed at the lower right section of the screen Turning Color Printing ON and OFF You can select whether to print in color if the page description language or printer type is set to ESC P ESC P2 PCL5 or BJ ON Outputs in color the same as on the
14. 3 Press the Width or the OR soft key Type 5 count fatoid OFF Bet Pattern Levels us A gt BCN Coupling 1 0 08 f a A Delay B Pattern Width OR T Setting a Window Trigger NHANCED Hold Of us 0 08 4 Press the Window soft key to select ON Set the status and trigger condition of each channel according to the procedures given in section 6 11 or 6 12 ENHANCED Type idth Type fja a Window et Pattern Level Coupling feTine us Width Pulse lt T jHold OFF cus 0 01 Setting the Center Level and Window Width 5 Press the Level Coupling soft key The Level Coupling dialog box opens The settings related to CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720E 6 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the window center level and the window width ENHANCED Type idth Type STimeus Window Width Pulse lt T a et Patte Levely Coup ing Levei Coup1 ing Center Width Coupling HF Rej CH1 1 50 UL 2 00 v e_o CH2 1 50 UL 2 00 V_c oF LoF CHS 1 50 VL 2 00 VT CH4 1 00 UL 2 00 V c OFF fatoid OFF cus 6 001 OFF pN 0 08 1 Set the window position of each channel 2 Set the window width of each channel IM 701730 01E 6 31 s n el 6 13 Setting a Window Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection 7 The setup procedure of the trigger coupling and HF rejection is common to the A gt B N
15. Format Interpol Dual R sine Al Clearing the Menu Left click an area outside the menu e Setting Values For menu items with a or 6 icon the numeric value can be entered as follows To select a menu item with a or 6 icon left click the center of the menu item If there are two setup items in a single menu item you can repetitively left click to select either item e Turn the mouse wheel downward to increase the value e Turn the mouse wheel upward to decrease the value To change the selected digit move the pointer to the left or right of the value The pointer changes to or Left click to the left or right of the value If you point to the left of the value and left click the current digit moves to the left if you point to the right of the value and left click the current digit moves to the right The current digit moves one digit at a time for each left click e To restore a value s default setting right click on the value s menu item HL Display OS it ion coupling Probe i Offset J Bandwidth Next OFF pr 00 DCANR 10 1 000kY Full 172 Moving the pointer in this menu causes the pointer shape to change Left click to move the current digit Right click on the menu parameter to reset the value to default 4 10 IM 701730 01E 4 3 Operating the instrument Using a USB Keyboard or a USB Mouse Selecting Toggle Box Items on the Dialog Box Left click the
16. Attached Image File 1 MailBaseTime Interval DFF Mail Test You can set the interval for sending mail in the range of 1h to 24h Sends mail to the specified mail recipient Setting the Conditions for Sending Mail Action Mail Perform steps 1 to 6 on the previous page A mail is sent when the following conditions are met e When a Trigger Is Activated For the setup procedure see section 6 15 e Through GO NO GO Determination For the setup procedure see sections 10 9 and 10 10 Note The sender From address of the mail messages sent by the instrument is the same as the specified recipient address If the transmitted contents indicate error logs the most recent error is at the top of the error log To use this function you must configure TCP IP according to the procedure given in section 13 2 If you set Interval to OFF periodic mail is not sent 13 14 IM 701730 01E 13 5 Sending Periodic or Action Mail SMTP Client Function Explanation Periodic Mail The instrument status can be sent periodically to a specified mail address on the network Action Mail Information such as the trigger time can be sent to a specified mail address on the network as an action of GO NO GO determination or action on trigger Mail e Mail Server You can specify the IP address of the network mail server On networks supporting DNS you can specify the host an
17. IM 701730 01E 8 15 Aejdsig uoiewuoju pue Aejdsig woane M e 8 9 Setting Waveform Labels Procedure Setting Waveform Labels lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 20 gt T NEO ete f HELP e To exit the menu during operation press ESC ueasune cuRsOR FILE misc conosco mara XY_ MENU MENU setup pisPLay Copy mace save a sHiFr HORIZONTAL Ay SEARCH ame D ACTION DELAY EpHaSe Aca sco srnrsror srarrssror swexe ennianceD RESET reo located above the soft keys e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press one of the CH1 to CH4 2 keys to select the channel on which to set labels Press the Next 1 2 soft key The page 2 menu appears ac fePosition Coupling DCINa Probe 6 Offset Bandu rath 10 1 0 000 V Full E E Press the Label soft key A keyboard used to enter values and strings appears Display OFF O 0 00div Variable 0 500 V inear Sci Z z EB ON Label CHL CHI AD Back 272 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the waveform label Ae i a al IM 701730 01E 8 9 Setting Waveform Labels Turning the Waveform Label Display ON and OFF CLEAR uae TRACE 7 i J NG SNAP HELP COO po FILE misc conosco mara D RESET Ga JENU MENU pass
18. Switches between uppercase and lowercase and a portion of the symbols IERT D Deletes the character before the entry position ICH E Switches the insert overwrite mode When in insert mode the INSERT indicator on the keyboard illuminates in red Edge CH1 F TEST F Recalls the temporary stored string A B Ga c Ei e I See Recall described later CAPS BS INS a ENT G Confirms the displayed characters Cc D E F G Keyboard for entering lowercase letters toggle using the CAPS soft key Temporary Storage of Character Strings Up to eight confirmed strings are automatically stored When the number of confirmed strings exceeds 8 the strings are deleted in order starting from the oldest string For items with a string set as a default value such as channel labels up to eight strings including the initial string can be temporarily stored Even when the number of confirmed string exceeds 8 the default string is not cleared The oldest of the seven confirmed strings excluding the default string is deleted IM 701730 01E 4 2 Entering Values and Strings Recalling Note that the unconfirmed string that is displayed in the entry box of the keyboard is overwritten when a string is recalled using the procedure in step 1 below 1 Every time the 9 soft key is pressed strings that are temporarily stored appear in order from the newest strin
19. 5ok_ ratio of the display record length with gt Green frame respect to the specified record length Display position Interleave Mode lt For the setup procedure see section 7 3 gt This mode allocates the memory of even channels to the odd channels for example allocating the memory of CH2 to CH1 to enable the use of twice the normal memory When interleave mode is turned ON even channels can no longer be used but parameters such as the history memory acquisition count of sequential store and record length can be set twice their normal values In addition since two A D converters can be used to sample a single input signal and raise the maximum sample rate a sample rate of 2 GS s can be achieved in realtime sampling mode For the relationship between interleave mode time axis record length and sample rate see appendix 1 Sampling Mode lt For the setup procedure see section 7 4 gt As explained in Relationship between the Time Axis Setting and Sampling Mode in section 2 2 the sampling mode can be switched between realtime sampling mode and repetitive sampling mode depending on the time axis and record length settings The time axis range that allows repetitive sampling mode varies depending on the acquisition setting For details see appendix 1 Acquisition Mode lt For the setup procedure see section 7 5 gt When storing sampled data in the acquisition memory see Signal Flow in section 2 1 it is
20. FD 1 NetWork 1 12 0001 68126 2004 05 13 19 39 12 0000 68126 2004 05 13 19 38 oad Exec Binary Filter lv a Property Aborting the Load Operation 10 Press the Abort soft key The load operation is aborted At the same time the Abort soft key changes to the Load Exec soft key Specifying the File and Properties to Be Displayed on the File List Window 11 The procedure is the same as steps 22 to 25 on page 12 15 Unloading the Waveform Data Selecting a Waveform to Unload 6 After step 5 of page 12 12 press the Unload soft key The Unload menu is displayed FILE File Iten Data Type a a a Save Load Unload Utility Waveform f Binary 7 Press the Trace soft key The Trace menu appears Trace pey mload Exe All Binary hides 8 Press the All CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 or Math2 soft key to select the waveform to Unload e On the DL1740E DL1740EL you can select from All CH1 to CH4 Math1 and Math2 e On the DL1720E you can select All CH1 CH2 and Math1 e Pressing All will select all channels for unloading All CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math 12 16 IM 701730 01E 12 5 Saving Loading the Waveform Data Explanation Executing the Unload Operation 9 Press the Unload Exec soft key The unload operation is executed Trace nioad a All Binary ou Data Type and Extension e Binary The sampled data in the acquisition memory is saved
21. cccccecceceeeseeeeeneeseeeeeeseaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeetsaeeseeeeatens 16 2 16 3 Performing a Self Test sairin tate ke steeds oae tin sedi bniec eee ie 16 7 16 4 Display an Overview of the System Conditions Overview ccceeceeeeeeeeeneeeeees 16 10 16 5 Replacing the Power FUSGC cceeceeceseeeeeeseeeeeeneeteseeeneeaneesnaeesesenenenaeeseneeeeteanens 16 11 16 6 Recommended Replacement Parts esccesceeeeseeeeeneeeeesneeeeeeeeseneeeesseeeesneeeseees 16 12 Specifications 171 INput SeCtion es siti s edi See a hace hee ee asain eh el 17 1 17 2 TRQQEr Sectio hss ee edea a degli a a len thet eee er Ta 17 2 17 3 TIMEAXS aa ine ane nd atid ae tin hed ey 17 3 1 45 DiSplaycsss atkie hath eet hetacl del Ate Gath hale ibe eames 17 4 xii IM 701730 01E Contents A75 FUNCIONS einna a a a rates Pacnnavhaeediaettatagee cadet enue eevee 17 4 17 6 Built in Printer Optional 2 0 20 c 3ssieic eee ne Aleta 17 7 ETE Eo E o R T E E E aeastin cates 17 7 17 8 USB Peripheral Interface ssinsrenNninnnnicis n r a aaa inaa 17 7 17 9 Auxiliary V O S CtiON 0 cece ccceeeeeceeeeneeeeaeecseeeeaeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeesaeeseaeeseaeseaeessaeeeaeessaees 17 8 17 10 G mp ter Interface cunea antuan ea ea a ea piaia aea E Nr E 17 9 17 11 General Specifications cece ceeeeneeeeee sence seeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeeteeeseeeseaeetieeeeaeene 17 10 17 12 Dimensional Drawings 0 eeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenae
22. 2 CH2 menu 2 3 CH3 menu 3 4 CH4 menu 4 5 5 6 6 i 7 7 amp 8 8 9 9 0 0 Enter Return Enter Select Same as left Return Enter Same as left Return Enter Same as left Esc Escape Same as left Escape Same as left Escape Same as left Back Space Back Space Same as left Tab Space Bar Space Bar Same as left SETUP Same as left MISC menu Execute HELP 2 Caps Lock Caps Lock Same as left App 18 IM 701730 01E Appendix 5 Key Assignments of the USB Keyboard F1 Select soft key1 Same as left Select soft key1 Same as left Select soft key1 Same as left F2 Select soft key2 Same as left Select soft key2 Same as left Select soft key2 Same as left F3 Select soft key3 Same as left Select soft key3 Same as left Select soft key3 Same as left F4 Select soft key4 Same as left Select soft key4 Same as left Select soft key4 Same as left F5 Select soft key5 Same as left Select soft key5 Same as left Select soft key5 Same as left F6 Select soft key6 Same as left Select soft key6 Same as left Select soft key6 Same as left F7 Select soft key7 Same as left Select soft key7 Same as left Select soft key7 Same as left F8 Escape Same as left Escape Same as left Escape Same as left F9 F10 F11 u Same as left F12 START STOP Same as left Q Same as left START STOP Same as le
23. Amount of Shift You can set the amount of shift The selectable range is a time value in the range of record length 2 to record length 2 The resolution is 1 sample rate The sample rate varies depending on the record length or T div setting For details on the sample rate see appendix 1 Note Ifthe waveforms to be computed that were selected in sections 9 2 to 9 7 and 9 9 are phase shifted the phase shifted waveforms are used in the computation e If you change T div after setting the amount of shift the amount of shift time value does not change The displayed waveform is only expanded or reduced along the time axis e The selectable range and resolution of the amount of shift vary depending on the T div setting The behavior when you change T div after setting the amount of shift is indicated below If you change T div back to the original setting without changing the amount of shift the original amount of shift returns e When T div is set faster the T div value is decreased and the specified amount of shift exceeds the selectable range of the amount of shift at the new T div setting the amount of shift is set to the maximum value of the selectable range at the new T div setting e When T div is set slower the T div value is increased and the specified resolution of the amount of shift falls below the resolution of the amount of shift at the new T div setting the resolution is set to the resolution of the am
24. FILE File Item a ja a Save Load Utility Setup 3 Press the Waveform soft key J FILE Setup we Snap Measure Image a Utility CM Saving the Waveform Data Selecting the Data Type 4 Press the Data Type soft key The Data Type menu appears File Ite Data Type ja a a a Save Load Unload Utility Waveform Binary 5 Press the Binary ASCII or Float soft key to select the data type Only the data saved in binary can be loaded as described later File Item Binary Waveforn FILE ASCIT Float ja a Load Unload Utility 12 12 IM 701730 01E 12 5 Saving Loading the Waveform Data Selecting the Waveform to Be Saved 6 Press the Save soft key The Save menu appears FILE File Item Data Type a i a Save Load Unload Utility Waveform f Binary 7 Press the Trace soft key The Trace menu appears a a File Nai Trace Range History P P Comp File List ave Exec 12 0000 all Main all ON cBinary 8 Press the soft key corresponding to the channel of the waveform to be saved e If you select All all the channels are saved e CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1720E evs i All CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 ear Selecting the Range of the Waveform to Be Saved 9 Press the Range soft key The Range menu appears Save FILE fa faFile Nar Trace Range History P P Comp File List ave Exec 12 0000 all Main all ON
25. Mail Setup Mail Server Enter the IP address of the mail server Hail address AbC AbC COR Enter the mail recipient using up to Comment fifteen characters Attached Image Pite Enter a comment using up to thirty characters Turn image data attachments ON or OFF MailBaseTime Interval Mail Test IM 701730 01E 13 13 Ieuondo suonesaiunwwos 3u1 4 3 g 13 5 Sending Periodic or Action Mail SMTP Client Function Setting the Transmission Time of Periodic Mail For action mail see Setting Conditions for Sending Mail Action Mail on the next page Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to enter the MailBaseTime time when mail is to be 8 sent Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the Interval interval for sending mail in the range of 1h to 24h If you are only using action mail set this to OFF Mail Setup Mail Server Mail Address Comment abc com abceabt con E Attached Image File 1 MailBaseTine 9 Interval DFH Enter the time to send mail Mail Test Sending a Test Mail Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Mail Test and press SELECT to senda 10 test mail to the specified recipient Mail Setup Mail Server Mail Address Comment abc com abceabe con E
26. T Time of the cursor from the trigger point X X axis value of the cursor Y Y axis value of the cursor 10 37 swu1oj neM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy 5 10 5 Cursor Measurements Movement Range of Cursors e When X Y Waveforms Are Not Displayed Horizontal cursors The movement range is 4 divisions The resolution is 0 01 divisions Vertical cursors marker cursors and angle cursors The movement range is 5 divisions The resolution is ten division display record length For a description of the display record length see appendix 1 e When X Y Waveforms Are Displayed Horizontal cursors and vertical cursors The movement range is 4 divisions The resolution is 0 01 divisions Marker cursors The movement range is 5 divisions The resolution is ten division display record length For a description of the display record length see appendix 1 Jumping the Cursor to the Zoom Waveform Display Frame When X Y Waveforms Are Not Displayed You can jump M1 to M4 marker cursors and Cursor1 and Cursor2 vertical cursors or angle cursors to the zoom waveform display frame The cursors can be jumped in the following manner e Marker Cursors to Z1 Make the selected marker jump to the Z1 window to Z2 Make the selected marker jump to the Z2 window e Vertical Cursors and Angle Cursors C1 to Z1 Make Cursor1 jump to the Z1 window C1 to Z2 Make Cursor1 jump to the Z2 window C2 to Z1 Make Cursor2 jump
27. Zoom Expand the displayed waveform along the time axis up two locations using separate zoom rates Display format Split display of analog waveforms 1 2 3 4 and 6 windows 1 2 and 3 windows on the DL1720E Display interpolation Select interpolation OFF dot display of sample points sine interpolation display linear interpolation display or pulse interpolation display Graticule Select from three graticule types Auxiliary display ON OFF Turn ON OFF the scaled values and waveform labels X Y display Two X Y waveform displays are available XY1 and XY2 only XY1 is available on the DL1720E Accumulation Accumulates waveforms on the display Select persistence mode or color grade mode Snapshot Retains the current displayed waveform on the screen Snapshot waveforms can be saved and loaded Clearing traces Clears the displayed waveform Vertical Horizontal Axis Setting Item Description Channel ON OFF ON OFF on each channel CH1 to CH4 Input filter Set 100 MHz or 20 MHz bandwidth limit on each channel CH1 to CH4 Vertical position setting Waveforms can be moved vertically in the range of 4 div from the center of the waveform display frame Linear scaling Set the scaling factor offset value and unit on each channel CH1 to CH4 Roll mode Roll mode display is enabled when the trigger mode is set to auto auto level or single at the following time
28. lt For a description of this function refer to pages 2 7 and 2 14 gt SNAP HELP z O O e To exit the menu during operation press ESC MEASURE CURSOR XY MENU MENU PHA located above the soft keys setup DIsPLay CoPY MAGE SAVE O SHIFT e Fora description of the operation using a USB VERTICAL A CCHORIZONTAL K C CD Gaan Oo vsDIV aes ow SEARCH g D a Oo Grafer ACTION DELAY a5 A keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 oo Explanation 1 Press ACQ The ACQ menu appears 2 Press the Repetitive soft key to select ON or OFF ACT f Record Mode E Count Inter leave Repetitive ime Base Length 10k Nornal Inf inite ON ON nt Ext You can turn repetitive sampling ON or OFF When repetitive sampling mode is turned ON the sample rate is set greater than or equal to 1 GS s greater than or equal to 2 GS s when interleave mode is ON for certain T div settings When repetitive sampling is turned OFF sampling is performed at a rate of up to 500 MS s or 1 GS s when interleave mode is ON When the number of displayed data points is less than 500 data is interpolated and displayed However even when repetitive sampling is turned OFF repetitive sampling may be performed depending on the time axis setting Possible T div Settings for Performing Repetitive Sampling If repetitive sampling mode is turned ON and the time axis is set acc
29. x Y MENU _ MENU Setup DIsPLay CoPY MAGE SAVE D santero shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of selecting setting items and entering values using comma p CHORZONTAL O TRIG D JCD vsDIV a oaa the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys a Oo sme ennanced For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and TIME sD1V ACTION DELAY 4 2 Qe e For a description of the operation using a USB i R keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Note Before carrying out the procedures in this section you must first carry out the procedures for displaying and labeling computed waveforms in section 9 1 The setup procedures for computed waveform Math1 are described below Perform similar steps for Math2 Press the M1 Setup soft key The M1 Setup dialog box opens C mm 1 Display faM1 Setup 11 Labet Z Display a MZ Setup Mz Label OFF pN C1 C2 Math ON C3 C4 Mathz Setting the Equation Scaling Unit and Smoothing 2 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the operator or and the waveform on which to perform computation When the M1 Setup dialog box is closed by pressing ESC or another key the specified equation appears in the M1 Setup menu column Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the scaling unit and smoothing of computed waveform Math1 Press ESC The M1 Setup dialog box closes HI Setup Select the waveform on which to p
30. Chapter 17 Specifications 17 1 Input Section Item Description Number of input channels 4 CH1 CH4 DL1720E is 2 CH1 CH2 Input coupling AC 1MQ DC 1MQ DC 502 GND Input connector BNC connector Input impedance 1 MQ 1 0 approx 20 pF 50 Q 1 0 VSWR1 4 or less DC 500 MHZz Voltage axis sensitivity setting For 1 MQ input 2 mV div to 10 V div 1 2 5 steps For 50 Q input 2 mV div to 1 V div 1 2 5 steps Maximum input voltage For 1 MQ input at a frequency of 1 kHz or less 400 V DC ACpeak 282 Vrms CAT Il For 50 Q input 5 Vrms or 10 Vpeak not to exceed either of the two values Maximum DC offset setting range When the probe attenuation is set to 1 1 2 mV div to 50 mV div 1 V 100 mV div 500 mV div 10 V 1 V div 10 V div 100 V Vertical voltage axis accuracy DC accuracy 1 5 of 8 div offset voltage axis accuracy Offset voltage axis 2 mV div to 50 mV div 1 of the setting 0 2 mV accuracy 100 mV div 500 mV div 1 of the setting 2 mV 1 V div 10 V div 1 of the setting 20 mV Frequency characteristics 3 dB point when a sine wave of amplitude 4 divisions is input For 50 Q input 1 V div 10 mV div DC 500 MHz 5 mV div 2 mV div DC 400 MHz For 1 MQ input when measuring from the probe tip of the 700988 passive probe 10 V div 10 mV div _DC 400 MHz 5 mV div 2 mV div DC 300 MHz Lower 3 dB attenuation point when AC coupled 10 Hz or less
31. TMAGE jaFile Namg 12 0051 a Format Color Ja a Thumbna i Comment File List BMP OFF i w Press the TIFF BMP Post Script PNG or JPEG soft key to select the data format of the screen image data whose thumbnail is to be displayed a Thumbnai 1 TIFF BMP PS 12 0052 Displaying the Thumbnails of the Specified Screen Image Data 4 Press the File List soft key The File List window appears File List Path NetWork Software Space 2147483647 byte File Nane Size Date Attr FD 1 NetWork 1 12 0055 2004 05 14 14 12 2004 05 14 14 12 2004 05 14 14 11 2004 05 14 14 11 2004 05 14 14 11 2004 05 14 13 48 2004 05 14 13 42 2004 05 14 13 42 2004 05 14 13 42 M IMAGE a Thumbna 1 Comment BMP OFF Fornat Color fa File Nane File List 12 0056 IM 701730 01E 12 37 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 12 10 Thumbnails of the Saved Screen Image Data can be Displayed 5 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the screen image data file in the File List window The thumbnail of the selected screen image data file is displayed at the upper right section of the File List window To clear the thumbnail turn the jog shuttle Fe List Thumbnails of selected files Path NetWork Sof tware Space 2147483647 byte File Na
32. The number of waveforms N that can be acquired and held as history waveforms varies from 1 to 2048 depending on the record length and interleave mode settings The waveform currently displayed on the screen newest waveform is counted as the 1st waveform and up to N 1 waveforms in the past can be displayed You can search history waveforms that meet specified conditions when waveform acquisition is stopped Zone Search lt For the setup procedure see section 10 2 gt You can search history waveforms that pass or do not pass a specified search zone History waveforms Valin n Specified search zone wey U w toe 1 l Selected Record No 0 7 Detects waveforms that pass through the specified search zone Selected Record No 25 Waveform Parameter Search lt For the setup procedure see section 10 3 gt You can search history waveforms that meet or do not meet the specified search parameter conditions History waveforms i tot tod ny PAN vty yoy foi ia tod Sek Selected Record No 0 Search parameter P P Status of the search parameters for the searched waveform OUT Co Detects this section P P i Selected Record No 28 a Search range IM 701730 01E 2 23 suon uny jo uoneuejdxg 2 6 Analyzing and Searching Waveforms Search and Zoom lt For the setup procedure see section 10 4 gt When waveform acquisition is stop
33. eceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 11 1 11 2 Printing Using the Built in Printer Optional c cc eceeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeteeeeseeeeeeeraees 11 3 11 3 Printing Using a USB Printer eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseaeeseesneeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaees 11 6 11 4 Printing Using a Network Printer Optional cecceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeneeeas 11 10 Chapter 12 Saving and Loading Data 12 1 Storing and Recalling Setup Data e ee ecceeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeseaeesseeeeaeesseeeeeeeeeeeeaees 12 1 12 2 Floppy Disks and PC Cards cccsceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeneeeeaeeseaeeeseeseaeeseeseaeeseaeeneetaaes 12 3 12 3 Connecting USB Storage MO Disk Drive Hard Disk Flash Memory to the USB PERIPHERAL Interface cccceceeececeseeseeeeeeeesseeeeaeeeseeseaeeeseeeeaeeseeeseaeeteaeeeaeetaas 12 6 12 4 Formatting the Storage Medium eeceeceeteeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeeeetaeseaeesieeseeeenees 12 8 12 5 Saving Loading the Waveform Data ceceeeceeseeeseeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeene 12 12 12 6 Saving Loading Settings sinisisi nna ai eines 12 20 IM 701730 01E xi _ A Contents Chapter 13 Chapter 14 gt gt e Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 12 7 Saving Loading the Snapshot Waveforms cecccecceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeesseeeeieeeeaeenaees 12 26 12 8 Saving Automated Measurement Values of Waveform Parameters ceeeeee 12 30 12 9 S
34. m INSERT GELRUGELCELPLELIMNEES ee TelALBICIDTELFUGTHTTTITKIL ND creSLINLOLPLQURESTTTULULUTXTY ZT erectile LCD elut COPY a a A E a EA Selecting the Output Resolution Selectable only if the page description language or printer type is set to BJ in step 6 10 Press the Resolution soft key The Resolution menu appears COPY 11 Press the 180dpi 300dpi 360dpi or 600dpi soft key to set the output resolution Copy to Fornat Color 180dpi Net Print BJ pFF oN Printing 12 Press COPY The screen image is printed on the network printer To abort printing press COPY while printing is in progress While printing is in progress E is indicated at the upper left corner of the screen Copy to Format Color fa esolution Comment Net Print BJ ON 180dpi 300dpi 360dpi 600dpi 11 11 sobew uese10s Hunund Ey 11 4 Printing Using a Network Printer Optional Explanation Like the built in printer you can print the screen image on a network printer via the Ethernet network Printing is possible on a printer or via a printer server supporting the TCP IP protocol Page Description Language or Printer Type Format You can select the page description language and printer type Post Script LIPS3 PCL5 ESC P ESC P2 or BJ can be used on models that support the BJC 35 V native commands Output Resolution Only when the page description language
35. 6 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the trigger slope of the clock channel to f or 7 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select H L or X for the status of each channel 8 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set Condition to True or False Clock ch Select from CH1 through CH4 2 for the clock li am Select the trigger slope of the clock channel w2 CH3 Select H L or X for the status of each channel w XT Condition True_ Fi Set Condition to True or False 9 Press ESC The Set Pattern dialog box closes Setting the Clock CH Level Hysteresis Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection 10 Press the Level Coupling soft key The Level Coupling dialog box opens The settings related to CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720E ENHANCED Type a fa fetiold OFF et Pattei i Levels us Pattern Coup1 ing 0 08 Levei Coup1 ing Setting the level of each channel Set the hysteresis of each 7 I oor ou Le ee channel to 77 or 4 CH2 1 50 VU I I DC I OFF 3 Level Hys Coupling HF Rej 9 Set the trigger coupling of each channel to DC or AC 4 Set the HF rejection of each channel to OFF 20 MHz or 15 kHz CH3 1 50 VI Lic F CH4 1 00 UI _10c___orF_ 11 Like in the case of the A gt B N trigger see section 6 8 set the level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection 12 Press ESC The Level Coupling dialog box closes Setting th
36. 676 Unknown file format Check whether the data is in a format that the 12 5 to DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL can handle 12 9 Change the extension 677 P P compression cannot be used to save FFT Turn OFF the P P compression and save the data 12 5 waveforms 679 Data that have been P P compressed and saved cannot be loaded 680 Illegal printer head position Move the release arm to the HOLD position 11 1 681 Paper empty Install the roll paper 11 1 682 Printer overheated Turn OFF the power immediately Servicing required 683 Printer overheated Turn OFF the power immediately Servicing required 684 Printer is not installed Check the specifications to see if your model has Page ii the optional printer 685 Printer time out Servicing required 691 The printer has malfunctioned Servicing required 692 Printer error Turn the power of the printer from OFF to ON IM 701730 01E 16 3 z uon s dsu pue eoueusjuley BunooysajqnoiL 16 2 Messages and Corrective Actions Code Message Corrective Action Sections 693 Printer offline 694 Out of paper 695 Printer is in use 696 Cannot detect printer Turn ON the printer Check connectors 697 No files supporting the thumbnail display window 12 10 701 Cannot be executed while data acquisition is Press the START STOP key to stop the wavef
37. A gt DEF ON OFF px Grade 172 16 IM 701730 01E 8 5 Aejdsig uoiewuoju pue Aejdsig woane M e 8 3 Accumulating Waveforms Explanation Normally the display is updated every time a trigger is activated making it difficult to capture transient conditions such as sudden distortion of waveforms By using the accumulate function the waveform display of the acquired data remains on the screen for the specified time Accumulate Mode Persist Persistence mode Accumulates waveforms using each channel color The intensity is gradually reduced and the waveform disappears after the specified accumulation time Color Color grade mode Accumulates waveforms using eight colors indicating data frequency information Setting the Accumulation Time When in Persist Mode In persistence mode you can select the time until the waveform disappears from the following If you select Infinite the waveform does not disappear The default setting is 100 ms 100ms 200ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s 10s 20s 50s Infinite Grade Width When in Color Mode When in color grade mode the frequency of the data is distinguished using eight colors as shown in the following figure You can set the boundary value width of the colors from the following The default setting is 16 Note that when in color grade mode data is superimposed indefinitely 2 to 2048 2 steps
38. Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters lt For the setup procedure see section 10 6 gt You can automatically perform measurement on channels of specified rise times pulse widths and other parameters Up to twenty seven items can be measured Up to twelve parameters from the selected parameters of all the channels can be displayed Measurement is performed on the data stored in the acquisition memory Statistical Processing lt For the setup procedure see section 10 7 gt You can perform statistical processing on the automatically measured values above The following five statistics can be determined on the two measured values of automated measurement parameters Maximum value Max e Minimum value Min e Average value Avg e Standard deviation Sdv e Number of measured values used in the statistical processing Cnt 2004 04 15 17 13 16 J Stopped 36 jox Normal SMS S_Z0OnS tiv T H l lt Measurement range gt TAME SE f a l i H J H I Par P P C3 1 020830 Max C3 854 167mU _4 Automated measurement values of statistics Max 1 020830 Max 854 167nU Min 1 02083U Min 854 167nU aug 1 02083V iaug 854 167mV Statistical processing results Sdy 00000U J Sdy 90000U Cnt 1 Cnt 1 j The following three statistical processing methods are available e Normal Statis
39. DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL Operating the Instrument Using a USB Mouse lt For the setup procedure see section 4 3 gt You can use a USB mouse to operate the instrument as you would using the front panel keys In addition you can point to a desired item on a menu and click the item This is analogous to pressing a soft key corresponding to a menu and pressing the SELECT key USB PERIPHERAL USB mouse DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL Initialization lt For the setup procedure see section 4 4 gt You can perform initialization using a simple panel key operation However certain settings communication settings and setting information saved with the store recall function are not initialized To initialize the settings excluding the date time setting display ON OFF is initialized to their factory default conditions turn ON the power while holding down the RESET key Release the RESET key after a beep is heard Auto Setup lt For the setup procedure see section 4 5 gt This function automatically sets the voltage axis time axis trigger settings and other settings to suit the input signal This is useful when the characteristics of the input signal are unknown However the auto setup function may not work depending on the input signal Preset lt For the setup procedure see section 5 7 gt This function sets the V div input coupling trigger level and other settings to values that are suitable for CMOS and ECL signals
40. Do Not Remove the Case Do not remove the instrument from the case Some sections inside the instrument have high voltages and are extremely dangerous For internal inspection or adjustment contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative Unplug If Abnormal Behavior Occurs If you notice smoke or unusual odors coming from the instrument immediately turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord If such an irregularity occurs contact your YOKOGAWA dealer Do Not Damage the Power Cord Nothing should be placed on the power cord The cord should be kept away from any heat sources When unplugging the power cord from the outlet never pull by the cord itself Always hold and pull by the plug If the power cord is damaged contact your dealer for replacement Refer to page iii for the part number when placing an order General Handling Precautions Do Not Place Objects on Top of the Instrument Never place other instruments or objects containing water on top of the instrument otherwise a breakdown may occur Do Not Apply Shock to the Input Section Vibration or shock to the input connectors or probes may turn into electrical noise and enter the instrument via the signal lines Do Not Damage the LCD Since the LCD screen is very vulnerable and can be easily scratched do not allow any sharp objects near it Also it should not be exposed to vibrations and shocks Unplug during Extended Non Use Unplug the power cord from the outlet IM 70173
41. Exe Count 10 NG Count 10 Result 000X GO NO GO_ Hode a fjeT Ranget To Edit Setup 5 000dit Exec Zone Menu 6T Range2 5 000di Displays the determination results of each determination zone in the order Zone1 to Zone6 Displays the determination results of determination zones whose Mode is ON Zone1 determination results Zone2 pene When the conditions of the determination zone are not met O OOOX When the conditions of the ae determination zone are met X When the mode is not turned ON Zone5 Zone4 IM 701730 01E 10 61 swu1ojaneM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy 5 10 9 Performing GO NO GO Determination Using Zones Explanation This section explains the setup procedures for creating determination zones based ona reference waveform and performing GO NO GO determination on whether the waveform exits or enters the determination zones Determination Target Waveform The waveform on which GO NO GO determination is performed is CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 or Math2 On the DL1740E DL1740EL the waveform is CH1 to CH4 Math1 or Math2 On the DL1720E you can select CH1 CH2 and Math1 Determination Zones e The reference waveform for creating the zone is selected from the displayed waveforms and six determination zones Zone1 to Zone6 are created and registered The selectable range of the zone is as follows Selectable range in the up and down direction 8 divisions above and below the ref
42. H Status When Thru Upper Is Exceeded L Status When Thr Lower is Not Reached X No determination If you execute Clear Pattern all sixty four points are set to Xs IM 701730 01E 10 25 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy 5 10 4 Searching Waveforms Using the Search and Zoom Function Search Start Point You can set the search start point The selectable range is 5 divisions The resolution is ten division display record length For a description of the display record length see appendix 1 However when Clock CH is set to None the start point for searches is defined as follows Taking the first rising or falling edge located to the right of the specified Start Point on the screen as the reference point the search start point is set to the point 1 2 the specified interval to the right of the reference point Edge detection reference point 7 Thr Upper y 4 Thr Lower B ae A ae A J i A A Search start point when a Tibia 12 Start Point search is executed When the interval between the Start Point and the search start position defined above is greater than the detection interval the search start point is set by moving the point back by intervals specified by Interval so that the interval between the Start Point and the search start point is within Interval and the Start Point is not exceeded the search start point shall not be to the left
43. Note An FTP server program must be running on the PC or workstation to which the instrument is to be connected In addition the following points need attention regarding the server program settings e Set the list output string returned by the dir command to UNIX format Set the home directory and its subdirectories to allow writing e The client cannot move above the home directory e The newest file is not necessarily displayed at the top of the file list e The length of file names and directory names that can be accessed varies depending on the server software Depending on the server the symbol lt gt that indicates a higher directory may not be displayed e The time information in the file list will not be displayed correctly for the following cases On Windows NT when the time stamp is displayed using am and pm Servers that return characters other than ASCII characters in the list The following operations are not possible e Turning file protect ON and OFF on saved files e Formatting a network drive Copying between network drives Renaming a file on the network e This function cannot be used when using the FTP server function or the Web server function e To use this function you must configure TCP IP according to the procedure given in section 13 2 To apply new settings that are made while connected to a network drive drop the connection using disconnect and reconnect If you are
44. SELECT gj mace save o sHIFT vzDiV ae aC aie 2 C mn 9 TED ACTION DELAY A TIME DIV 4 a g Setting the Trigger Type To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the term jog shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of selecting setting items and entering values using the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and 4 2 For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press ENHANCED The ENHANCED menu appears 2 Press the Type soft key The Type menu appears ENHANCED ja Count Bet Pattern Levels A gt BCN Coupling 1 Type a 3 Press the A Delay B soft key fatoid OFF us f gt B N A Delay Pattern Width OR NHANCED Hold OFF uS 0 08 Setting the Status and Condition of Condition A and Condition B 4 Press the Set Pattern soft key The Set Pattern dialog box opens The settings related to CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720E 5 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the status of condition A of each channel to H L Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the condition of condition A to Enter or Exit s n el 7 Set the status of condition A B for each channel to H L or X m Set the Condition of condition A B to Enter or Exi
45. Setup DISPLaY CoPY MAGE SAVE O SHIFT vertical CCHORIZONTAL 49 t SEARCH LY O TRIG D Tar a e2 Smee enranceD vsDIv TIME DIV ACTION DELAY POSITION 4 T Displaying the Self Test Menu e To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys e Fora description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 are Next 2 1 Press the MISC The MISC menu appears 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key The page 2 menu appears fal ibratio Renote Netuork systen verview Control Conf ig 3 Press the Selftest soft key The Self Test menu appears a a ja F LCD Graphic Setup Self Test USB Back Color Info 272 Executing Accuracy Tests of the Memory Floppy Disk Drive PC Card and Printer 4 Press the Test Item soft key The Test Item menu appears Seif Test MISC Test Item Test FDD Exec Press the Memory FDD or PC CARD Printer or Accuracy soft key to select Self Test MISC Test Exec 5 the test item Included on certain models only E Menory FDD Printer ka 6 Press the Test Exec soft key The Test of the selected item is executed MISC Test Item Test FDD Exec IM 701730 01E 16 7 z uon s dsu pue edueusjuley BunooysajqnoiL 16 3 Performing a Self Test Executing the Key Test 4 Press the Test Item soft key T
46. The trigger position mark that appears at the top of the screen indicates the trigger position with respect to the display record length 0 100 t t at x Trigger position mark IM 701730 01E s n el 6 2 Setting the Trigger Position Notes on Setting the Trigger Position If you change the trigger position while waveform acquisition is stopped the new setting will not become effective until acquisition is started and the waveform is updated e Note that cursor time measurements are with respect to the trigger position Changing the trigger position therefore changes the measurement values except when in roll mode display If you change the T div setting the time axis setting is rescaled with respect to the trigger position IM 701730 01E 6 4 6 3 Setting the Trigger Delay Procedure lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 12 gt ya LI YZ O To exit the menu during operation press ESC weasune cursOR FILE misc cono co XY MENU MENU PHA located above the soft keys setup _ pisPLaY Copy MAGE SAVE C VERTICAL 4 CHORIZO Ta 7 F f r keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Explanation Press SHIFT POSITION The DELAY menu appears Press the soft key corresponding to the desired unit of time ms us ns or ps If you are not specifying a time unit ms us ns or ps press the DELAY soft k
47. The type of characters that can be used are those displayed on the keyboard The specified unit is displayed along with the scaled value section 8 4 Smoothing Smoothing refers to the operation of deriving the weighted moving average every five points of the waveform to be computed Since the process is performed on the waveform data stored in the acquisition memory it can be performed even when acquisition is stopped Smoothing has the frequency characteristics shown in the following diagram with respect to the sample rate The 3 dB point is at approximately 13 of the sample rate 0dB __ 3 dB Attenuation rate f Sampling frequency I 1 1 I 1 I i 1 lt 0 13f 0 5f f Frequency f You can select whether to perform computation using the smoothed waveform data for computed waveforms Math1 and Math2 separately ON Perform computation using the smoothed waveform data OFF Perform computation using the waveform data that is not smoothed The smoothing setting applies to all computations of addition subtraction multiplication binary computation waveform inversion differentiation and integration If the smoothing setting is changed on one of the computation settings the change takes effect on all other computations addition subtraction multiplication binary computation waveform inversion differentiation and integration However Math1 and Math2 can be set separately Effects of
48. The values inside the thick frame are for repetitive sampling mode Set to normal mode even if envelope mode is specified IM 701730 01E App 3 E x pu ddy Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Specified Record Length 100 kW Rep Repetitive sampling mode When set to a mode other than envelope mode When set to envelope mode When interleave mode is OFF When interleave mode is ON When interleave When interleave Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON mode is OFF mode is ON Display Display Display Display Display Display Sample record Sample record Sample record Sample record Sample record Sample record rate length rate length rate length rate length rate length rate length S s Word S s Word S s Word S s Word S s Word S s Word 200 100 k 200 100 k 200 100 k 200 100 k 400 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 500 100 k 500 100 k 500 100k 500 100 k 400 M 100 k 800 M 100 k ik 100 k 100 k 100 k ik 100 k 400 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 1G 100 k Roll mode display Set to normal mode even if envelope mode is specified
49. Type idth Type ry Tine us ji Window fgHoid OFF et Pattern Levels us Width f Puise lt T Coupling 6 003 FF DN 6 08 15 Turn the jog shuttle to set the determination time Pressing RESET resets the pulse width to 0 001 us 0 002 us for Time2 ei o 00f When Width Type is fetinezus T1 lt Pulse lt T2 Setting the Hold Off 16 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in section 6 4 This setting is for activating a trigger by determining whether the time over which the specified condition is met or not met is shorter or longer than the determination time set in advance Determination Type Pulse gt T A trigger is activated when the time over which the status pattern condition is met becomes longer than the specified determination time and the condition changes Pulse lt T A trigger is activated when the time over which the status pattern condition is met is shorter than the specified determination time T1 lt PLS lt T2 A trigger is activated when the time over which the status pattern condition is met is between the two specified determination times Time Out A trigger is activated when the time width over which the status pattern condition is met becomes longer than the specified determination times The point where the trigger occurs differs between Pulse gt T and Time Out as shown in the figure below 400 ns L l 500 ns gt 100s 500 ns 1100 ns I 1f I CH1 CH1 Triggers Trig
50. 1 Hz or less when using the 10 1 probe provided Skew between channels When using the same settings 1 ns or less Residual noise level 1 25 mV or 0 15 div whichever is greater typical value Isolation between channels At 500 MHz 34 dB typical value same voltage sensitivity A D conversion resolution 8 bit 24 LSB div Probe attenuation setting 1 1 10 1 100 1 1000 1 10A 1 V 100A 1 V Bandwidth limit Turn ON OFF the 100 MHz or 20 MHz bandwidth limit for each channel Maximum sample rate Realtime sampling mode When interleave is ON 1 GS s When interleave mode is OFF 500 MS s Repetitive Sampling Mode 100 GS s Maximum record length DL1740E When interleave is ON 2 MW CH When interleave mode is OFF 1 MW CH DL1740EL When interleave is ON 8 MW CH When interleave mode is OFF 4 MW CH DL1720E When interleave is ON 1 MW CH When interleave mode is OFF 500 kWord CH 1 Value measured under standard operating conditions see section 17 12 after thirty minute warm up and after calibration with the time base set to internal clock 2 Value in the case of a repetitive phenomenon The frequency bandwidth of a single shot phenomenon is the smaller of the two values DC to sampling frequency 2 5 and the frequency bandwidth of a repetitive phenomenon 3 When the input section is shorted the record length set to 10 kW the acquisition mode set to normal mode the accumulation set to OFF and the
51. 1 kHz from the probe compensation output terminal on the front panel Overview Check the system status of the instrument Self test Memory test key test printer test floppy disk drive test PC card test and accuracy test are possible Menu language setting Menus can be displayed in English or Chinese Help Displays help concerning the settings select Chinese English or Japanese Thumbnail Shows thumbnails of the screen image data When the Ethernet interface option is installed 17 6 IM 701730 01E 17 6 Built in Printer Optional Item Description Printing system Thermal line dot system Dot density 8 dots mm Paper width 112mm 17 7 Storage Built in Storage e Floppy Disk Drive Item Description Number of drives 1 Size 3 5 inch Capacity 1 44MB e PC Card Interface Item Description Number of slots 1 Supported cards Flash ATA card PC card TYPE II You can select a built in storage device of floppy disk drive or PC card interface USB Storage Item Description Supports USB mass storage USB mass storage class hard disk drive MO disk drive and flash memory For detailed specifications see USB PERIPHERAL interface in the next section 17 8 USB Peripheral Interface Item Description Connector type USB type A connector receptacle Electrical and mechanical USB Rev 1 1 Data rate 12 Mbps ma
52. 14 The procedure is the same as step 13 and 14 on page 10 15 Redisplaying the Detected Waveforms 15 The procedure is the same as step 15 and 16 on page 10 16 Changing the Zoom Rate and Zoom Position of the Detected Waveforms 16 Change the zoom rate and zoom position of the waveform according to the procedures given in section 8 4 IM 701730 01E 10 21 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy 5 10 4 Searching Waveforms Using the Search and Zoom Function Auto Scroll Search Explanation 1 Press SHIFT ZOOM SEARCH The SEARCH menu appears Selecting the Auto Scroll Search Method 2 Press the Type soft key The Type menu appears SEARCH Type Z1 Mag 6 Z1 Pos Searched Setup Pattern Exec Edge x 10 4 000diy No Match 3 Press the Auto Scroll soft key Edge Serial Width Parallel Auto Searched Pattern Pattern Scroll Pattern Exec do Match Setting the Auto Scroll Conditions 4 Press the Direction soft key to set the auto scroll direction to lt lt or gt gt 5 Press the Speed soft key 6 Turn the jog shuttle to set the auto scroll speed SEARCH Type Direction Z1 Mag 6 Z1 Pos ye Speed Exec Auto lt lt x 16 1 800 4 Scrol1_ Selecting the Window for Displaying the Auto Scrolled Waveform Zoom Waveform Display Frame 7 The procedure is the same as step 12 on page 10 15 Executing Aborting Auto Scroll 8 Press the Exec soft key Auto scroll is executed and the word Exec c
53. 6 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the slope rising or falling for detecting the synchronization clock Pattern box Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the level for detecting the synchronization clock Level box Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the hysteresis width of the level for detecting the synchronization clock Hysteresis box When Clock CH is set to CH1 to CH4 2 Setup Clock CH CH1 Pattern Level Hysteresis Select which slope edge rising or falling of the synchronization clock is to be detected Set the hysteresis width of the level for detecting the synchronization clock F_ T 6 500 V 0 3 L 6 000 V0 3aiv_ L 0 000 VI 9 3div 0 000 VI 3div Mathi 0 OOdiv L6 3tiv Math2 L_ 0 00 0 3 Start Poin 5 000A Set the level for detecting the synchronization clock Setting the Determination Pattern Level and Hysteresis of the Status of Waveforms CH and Math Other Than the Waveform of the Channel Selected as the Synchronization Clock Signal 9 10 11 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the status determination pattern from H L and X Pattern box Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the level for determining whether the status is high or low Level box Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the hysteresis width of the level for detecting high or low Hysteresis box
54. 6 19 6 23 6 27 6 30 6 33 trigger Delay oo eee ssesseeseesseseseeseseeeseeceseesseneeaeeees 2 12 6 5 trigger gatesi einasi aana aiana a ainda 2 12 6 40 trigger gate input terminal sssessesseeeesisrresrrerresrnerrernrene 14 3 trigger hold off isinisisi sirsie iniri eeraa snsias 2 13 trigger hysteresis ssesssessesriessesrusreerrnrenserrrrnsenerrnsenerenenn 2 13 trigger level ETE 2 8 6 9 6 12 6 16 6 19 6 23 6 27 6 30 6 35 trigg MOG sevvccecsesrivtasseiececsccousecevscneeredsedtecetvedeeyy 2 11 6 1 trigger output terminal cece eeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeee 14 4 trigger POSITION cesceeseccccceceesicercoscaesesenstenecseneteonteares 2 12 6 3 trigger Section ariin ee a Aca 17 2 trigger slope 2 8 6 9 6 12 trigger source 2 8 6 9 6 12 6 13 trigger typie gn a ann ea feted ERa Laa EI reeled 2 8 EV ANIQQON cvecevenvesecsieetcncceuavesteestepecndsysenvtebeosdavcesesere 2 11 6 34 ee UNIOAG nn a a iaat 12 19 USB keyboard n se 2 32 4 6 USB keyboard language ceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeaees 15 3 USB MOUS ise hae aa raoa arenai Tapa eA Rna EEEa 2 32 4 8 USB PERIPHERAL connector sese 4 6 4 8 11 8 USB peripheral interface USB printer madini ai eii Nare eatit ya USB Storage siia aE E a E User NAME za esii enea aE ra Aeee AAEE V VIAN atasanana aeaa V DIV knob VAN ADI Csi cerencreereestseeeenqnrersneveeceipareesteeess ceueceaseronedeensssehetenes vertical axis ver
55. 6 8 Setting the A gt B N Trigger ENHANCED lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 8 gt Procedure To exit the menu during operation press ESC NOP HELP located above the soft keys ee Esg SHOT r O b O e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog eama Cue misc P shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of XY__ MENU setup eee eras Do GHT selecting setting items and entering values using the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and 4 2 For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 o ARCH 2o vzDIV TIME7DIV SOLO ESN L Setting the Trigger Type 1 Press ENHANCED The ENHANCED menu appears 2 Press the Type soft key The Type menu appears ENHANCED Type m E Comt fatoid OFF Set Pattern Levels us A gt BON Coupling 1 0 08 3 Press the A gt B N soft key E Setting the Status and Condition of Condition A and Condition B 4 Press the Set Pattern soft key The Set Pattern dialog box opens The settings related to CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720E 5 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the status of condition A of each channel to H L or X 6 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the condition of condition A to Enter or Exit 7 Likewise set condition B NHANCED 1 Delay B Pattern
56. 8 The procedure is the same as steps 22 to 25 on page 12 15 Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory Media to and from which saving and loading are possible are displayed on the File List window e Display Examples of Storage Media FD Floppy disk PC Card PC card NetWork Network drive when the Ethernet interface option is installed USB USB storage Selecting the File Attribute Select the file attribute of each file from the following e R W Read and write possible e R Read only Cannot write to the file or delete the file Renaming a Directory or File Number and Types of Characters That Can Be Used Item Number of Characters Characters That Can Be Used File name 1 to 14 characters 0to9 AtoZ _ However a directory name that starts with FD NDOOO for example is not allowed Creating a Directory You can create a new directory on the storage medium See above for the assignment of the directory name when creating a new directory Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Window Specify the type of files to be displayed e x extension Displays only the data file that was selected in the File Item setup menu and the data type menu Properties Displays information about the selected file including the name extension the file size the date the file was saved the attribute and the comment Reduce Image Display on the File List When you select a screen image data file on the Fil
57. 8 TT LL yoo CEE Cene msc conosco mara feser ELEC MENU MENU pangs Aca aca stanrssror SETUP asec Corr IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT Samy A CHORIZONTAL A SEARCH TIME sDIV D QD Setting the Trigger Source To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press SIMPLE The SIMPLE menu appears 2 Press the Source soft key The Source menu appears SIMPLE Source 3 Level Slope CH1 1 50 VIF ft AC OFF 3 Press the Line soft key The CH3 and CH4 soft keys are not displ Coupling HF Re ject Hysteresis A z SIMPLE faHold OFF us 0 08 ayed on the DL1720E CH1 Setting the Hold Off Ext Line dold Off SIMPLE uS 0 0 4 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Source Line Explanation This setting is used for activating a trigger on feHold OFF cus 0 03 the rising edge of the waveform of the power being supplied to the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL Waveforms can be observed by synchronizing to the commercial Selecting the Trigger Source Select Line Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time power supply frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz IM 701730 01E 6 13 s n el
58. 9 12 IM 701730 01E 2 3 Triggers Trigger Hysteresis lt For the setup procedure see sections 6 5 6 8 to 6 12 gt If there is insufficient trigger level width and noise is present in the trigger source the trigger point fluctuates each time a trigger is activated This causes the displayed waveforms to be unstable Therefore a given margin hysteresis is added to the specified trigger level You can select Z narrow hysteresis or A wide hysteresis on the instrument When set to ZZ the hysteresis widens thereby reducing the fluctuation of the trigger point caused by noise Thus a stable waveform display is achieved However this setting tends to make the trigger point ambiguous On stable waveforms without noise set the hysteresis to make the trigger point more accurate N Hysteresis width Ji Trigger is activated Trigger Hold Off lt For the setup procedure see section 6 4 gt The trigger hold off function temporarily stops detection of the next trigger once a trigger has been activated This function is useful when observing a pulse train signal such as a PCM code and you wish to display the waveform in sync with repetitive cycles or when using the history memory function described later see page 2 16 and you want to change the waveform acquisition period Period of repetition T Trigger level k Input signal 4 4 4 4 4 4 b 4 f b 4d ca de EPP CUG signal
59. Aca START STOP CseTep PY MAGE SAVE O SHIFT HORIZONTAL y SEARCH TRIG D Q o Gram To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys e Fora description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 ACTION DELAY aD Press DISPLAY The DISPLAY menu appears Press the Trace Label soft key to select ON or OFF When OFF 2004 05 06 16 28 44 j ick Normal ri Stopped 1796 SMS S 200HSAiv lt lt Maint 10k gt gt CH1 10 1 0 500 Udiv DC Full J Edge CH1 F Auto 0 290 V DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace Fcumu late Value Label Next Single Sine y EH BFF on ay When ON 2004 05 06 16 28 50 qj ick Normal ri Sts 1796 E SMS s 20OHSAiv lt lt Maint TOK gt gt CHI 10 1 0 500 Udiv DC Full Waveform Label J p 3 rammene seamen rere Edge CH1 F Auto 0 290 V DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule Value EH BFF on Single Sine y Scale Explanation Trace fcumu late Label Next OFF pN OFF ay Turning the Waveform Label Display ON and OFF Trace Label You can select whether to display the label assigned to the channel of the displayed waveform Setting Waveform Labels You can arbitrarily set the waveform label of each channel using up to eig
60. Capture Waveform Binary Abort Capture Exec Load Setup Load Input Password Note Depending on the operation condition of the instrument such as when measurement is in progress data save and setup data load operations may not be possible When data is being saved or the setup data is being loaded other Web server functions cannot be used e When loading the setup data or when aborting the save operation a temporary file zzzftpzzztmpzzz bat is created in the start directory of the Internet Explorer After the operation is complete the temporary file will be deleted If you execute the data save operation when there is no waveform data or waveform parameter an error is displayed on the instrument screen and a 0 byte file is saved Controlling the Instrument You can use the PC to set the display format and the data save conditions of the instrument The settings entered here apply to the display format and save conditions used to save the data on the previous page Starting and Stopping Waveform Acquisition Starting Acquisition Click Start Waveform data acquisition starts Stopping Acquisition Click Stop Waveform data acquisition stops Turning Waveform Display ON and OFF and Setting the Vertical Position Channel Selecting the Target Waveform From the channel box select the channel for turning ON OFF the display and setting the vertical position Chan1 to Chan4 channels 1 to 4 Chan
61. Color Color mode ON Reverse Color mode ON Reverse Gray Color mode ON Gray 12 40 IM 701730 01E 12 10 Thumbnails of the Saved Screen Image Data can be Displayed e Thumbnail Display Format The number of files displayed on the thumbnail screen the number of thumbnails displayed in the waveform area is 4 The display order is the same as the order for displaying files in the File List window In addition the files are displayed from left to right and top to bottom e Scrolling the Thumbnail Screen If the number of thumbnails exceeds the maximum number of thumbnails that can be displayed 4 the thumbnail screen can be scrolled one row two thumbnails at a time To scroll the files upward turn the jog shuttle counter clockwise To scroll the files downward turn the jog shuttle clockwise e Thumbnails on the File List When you select a screen image data file on the File List the thumbnail of the screen image data is displayed at the upper right section of the File List The file name is not displayed on the thumbnail screen on the File List Displaying Thumbnails from the FILE Menu When you select a screen image data file on the File List the thumbnail of the screen image data is displayed at the upper right section of the File List The file name is not displayed on the thumbnail screen on the File List Note ____ The screen image data and thumbnail data are saved in pairs of files For example if you set the data fo
62. Initial Auto Store Undo Undo ize Setup Recall Initial Auto ize Setup Storing 3 Press any soft key from Store 1 to Store 3 to store the setup data When the setup data is stored the date of storage is displayed in the soft key menu Str Rc11 SETUP eca11 1 fReca11 2 f Reca11 2 tore 1 tore 2 tore 3 Store Detail 4 Press the Store Detail soft key to display the details of the store operation To enter a comment follow the procedure described in section 4 2 There is a lock switch that you can use to protect lock overwriting the stored data Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the lock button corresponding to the store number that you wish to lock Press SELECT to lock the data Press SELECT again to release the lock Store Detail Date Time Store 1 04 05 13 14 28 30 EE Store 2 04 05 13 14 28 52 _TEST_ Ca lecall 3 tore 1 tore 2 04 05 13 TEST Comment Lock Store 3 Str Rc11 SET a Store Detail B ma Recalling 3 Press one of the soft keys Recall 1 to Recall 3 to recall the setup data ia m im 2 E 3 Str Rc11 SETUP a tore 3 Store Detail IM 701730 01E 12 1 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Burnes 12 1 Storing and Recalling Setup Data Explanation Stored Items All of the information that you entered using the soft
63. Lot Qty 5 rolls Handling the Roll Paper The paper is a thermalsensible paper that changes color with the application of heat Take note of the following points Storage Precautions The printer s thermalsensible paper gradually begins to yellow at approximately seventy degrees Celsius It is affected by heat humidity light and chemicals regardless of whether the paper has been used Store the paper rolls in a cool dry and dark place After opening the package use it quickly e Ifthe paper is left in contact with plastic film such as a vinyl chloride film or Scotch tape containing plasticizers for an extended time the paper will lose some of its ability to reproduce color If you are going to store the paper in a folder for example use a folder made of polypropylene or wood fiber When using glue on the paper do not use glue containing organic solvents such as alcohol or ether as they will change the color of the paper For prolonged storage we suggest you make copies of the results printed on the roll paper Due to the characteristics of the thermalsensible paper it may lose color over time Handling Precautions Be sure to use only genuine paper rolls provided by YOKOGAWA Touching the paper with sweaty hands can leave finger print marks or blur the printing Rubbing the surface with a hard object can cause the paper to change color due to the heat caused by friction If chemicals oil or other
64. MEASURE Sorting the Measured Values in Ascending or Descending Order 15 Press the Sort soft key to select FWD or REV If FWD is selected the measured values are sorted If REV is selected the measured values are sorted in ascending order left to right on the screen in descending order right to left on the screen Measure Paraneter List Measure Parameter List P P C1 Max C1 Min C1 Avg C1 1 02083U 812 S00mU 1 208 333mU 294 880mU 1 02683U 812 500mU 208 333mU t 297 471mU 1 02083V 812 500mU 208 333mU 294 672nU 1 04167U 812 500mU 4 229 167my 295 398nU P P C1 Max C1 Min C1 Avg C1 1 041670 812 500mU 229 167mV 295 294mU 1 02083 812 500mU 208 333mU 295 916mU 1 02083U 812 500mU 208 333nU 296 227mU 1 02083 812 500mU 208 333nY 294 672nU 1 02083 812 500mU 208 333nY 295 191mU 1 02083 791 667mU 229 167nY 295 605mU 1 041670 812 S00mU 229 167mU 295 502mU 1 1 600000 4 791 667mU 208 333nY 294 154my 1 02083 812 500mU 208 333nU 294 362mV 1 041670 812 S00mU 229 167mU 4 293 532my 1 02083 812 500mU 208 333mV 294 776mU 1 02083 812 500mU 208 333nV 293 843mU 1 02083 812 500mU 208 333nY 295 SOZ2nU 1 020830 812 500my 208 333nU 296 331ny 1 02083 812 500mU 208 333nU 296 331mU t 1 062500 833 333mU 229 167mY 294 569mU 1 02083 812 S00mU 208 333nY 295 SOZmU 1 02083 812 500mU 208 333nY 295 813mU 1 020830 812 500mU 208 333mU 294
65. OUT or Logic AND when the waveform enters the range IN Sequence _Single__Pontinue is considered true ACQ Count 10__ Action Buzzer Save to File 6 Hard Copy Set the determination logic to AND or OR Image Save Send Mail Mail Count C 100 Set the determination operation to Single or Continue Set the number of waveform acquisitions Set the action taken by the instrument when the condition is met 11 Press ESC The Setup dialog box closes Setting the Determination Range 12 Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to T Range1 T Range2 or both T Range1 and T Range 2 If you select T Range1 you can move T Range1 If you select T Range2 you can move T Range2 If you select both T Range1 and T Range2 you can move T Range1 and T Range2 horizontally without changing the spacing between the two The value of the digit being specified by T Range1 changes GO NO GO_ a _ _ Mode a Setup 5 000dir Exec T Range2 5 OG0di Paraneter IM 701730 01E 10 65 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy es 10 10 Performing GO NO GO Determination Using Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Executing Aborting the Determination 13 Press the Exec soft key GO NO GO determination is executed The Exec soft key changes to the Abort soft key To abort GO NO GO determination press the Abort soft key or press START STOP GO
66. Press HISTORY The HISTORY menu appears 2 Press the Search Mode soft key The Search Mode menu appears HISTORY fe Select Display eSstart m bel earch Mod Record Show Map mel p a a i 3 Press the Parameter soft key Select Display eStart Rega OFF Zone Paraneter Record Shou Map o ALL 6 End Rec 12 Setting the Search Parameters and Search Conditions 4 Press the Search Setup soft key The Search Setup menu appears L HISTORY fj Select Display Start Rega earch Mod ja Record 59 Shou Map Search Search 96 Mmg an fe aan sa Paramete i Setup Exec Selecting the Parameters for Registering Search Conditions 5 Press the Select Param soft key The Select Param menu appears Fenny Enron TSTORY Select condition Ja Ta Upper Logic Rangel Param G000E 0 5 000di Parami FF N OUT ain P w D Lover AND oR fT Rangez 5 000di 6 Press any of the Param1 to Param4 soft keys to select the parameter in which search conditions are to be registered Fenn Parami Paran2 Paran3 Paran4 Logic feT Rangei 5 000dit I OR T Hanged Selecting the Condition of the Waveform to Search in the Search Parameters 7 Press the Condition soft key to select OFF IN or OUT Fenn Fenn Enero TSTORY Select Kee one rig Logic feT Rangei Param Setup 5 000dit Parami i N ouT Hi P P fo Touer AND OR fT Range2 5 0
67. Q 100 kWord 1 8 16 1 4 8 3 250 kWord 1 4 8 1 2 4 D 1 MWord 1 2 1 2 2 MWord 1 a The values in parentheses are selectable when interleave mode is ON 3 e For the DL1740EL Record length Count When in Normal Mode Count When in Box Average Mode 1 kWord 1 1024 2048 1 1024 2048 10 kWord 1 128 256 1 128 256 50 kWord 1 32 64 1 32 64 100 kWord 1 16 32 1 16 32 250 kWord 1 8 16 1 8 16 1 MWord 1 2 4 1 2 4 2 MWord 1 2 1 2 4 MWord 1 1 1 8 MWord 1 The values in parentheses are selectable when interleave mode is ON Procedure Displayed waveforms can be recalled and displayed in the same manner as with the history memory function For details see section 10 1 Notes on Performing Sequential Store e Sequential store is not possible in repetitive sampling mode and roll mode e If you stop acquisition by pressing START STOP sequential store also stops Sequential store starts from the beginning when acquisition resumes IM 701730 01E 7 9 Chapter 8 Waveform Display and Information Display 8 1 Procedure Changing the Display Format lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 17 gt e To exit the menu during operation press ESC SNAP SHOT HELP DA IITTI Nevo located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the term jog FLE JENU MISC_ GONO GO MATH Ea qd amO ca S
68. The resolution is 0 one divisions The interval from the point where the level of the search target waveform passes from below the specified lower limit of hysteresis to above and including the upper limit of hysteresis to the point where the level changes from above the specified upper limit of hysteresis to below and including the lower limit of hysteresis is determined to be the high pulse width The interval from the point where the level of the search target waveform passes from above the specified upper limit of hysteresis to below and including the lower limit of hysteresis to the point where the level changes from below the specified lower limit of hysteresis to above and including the upper limit of hysteresis is determined to be the low pulse width When the change in the search target level does not apply to high or low conditions described above it is not detected as a high or low pulse width Handled as an area where the search condition is not met Detected as a high pulse width r a E a a A A Upper limit of hysteresis Level Baa a a a acca Wy a a Lower limit of hysteresis Detected as a low pulse width Determination Time Time Time1 Time2 You can set the time used as a determination reference The value specified here and the pulse width detected by the specified search condition are compared and determination is made as to whether the result matches the selected type The selectable range is 1 sample
69. The covers should be removed by YOKOGAWA s qualified personnel only Opening the cover is dangerous because some areas inside the instrument have high voltages e Ground the Instrument before Making External Connections Securely connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement or an external control unit If you are going to touch the circuit make sure to turn OFF the circuit and check that no voltage is present To prevent the possibility of electric shock or an accident connect the ground of the probe and input connector to the ground of the item being measured vi IM 701730 01E Conventions Used in This Manual Safety Markings The following markings are used in this manual AN Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or damage to the instrument This symbol appears on the instrument to indicate that the user must refer to the user s manual for special instructions The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the user s manual to identify those instructions In the manual the symbol is used in conjunction with the word WARNING or CAUTION WARNING Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent serious injury or death to the user Caution Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent minor or moderate injury or damage to the instrument Note Provides important information for the proper operation of the instrume
70. The following two types of GO NO GO determination are available Determination using zones on the screen Determination using the result of the automated measurement of waveform parameters Specify an action for NO GO result Possible actions are screen image data output waveform data storage buzzer notification and e mail transmission 1 Or CH1 and CH2 on the DL1720E 2 When the Ethernet interface option is installed Saving and Printing of the Screen Image Data Item Description Built in printer optional Prints screen image data External printer Outputs the screen image to an external printer via the USB PERIPHERAL terminal or the Ethernet network Supports page description languages and printer types such as ESC P ESC P2 LIPS3 PCL5 Post Script only via the Ethernet network and BJ s a suoeaoads Floppy disk or PC card network drive1 USB storage Output data format PostScript TIFF BMP JPEG and PNG 1 When the Ethernet interface option is installed 2 Select floppy disk drive or PC card interface for the built in media drive IM 701730 01E 17 5 17 5 Functions Data Storage Item Description History memory When interleave is ON Automatically save up to 2048 acquisition data points When interleave mode is OFF Automatically save up to 1024 acquisition data points Floppy disk or PC card network drive USB storage Saves setup data waveform dat
71. The print image of the selected page is displayed To exit from the print image preview press the Quit soft key You can also exit from the print image preview by pressing other soft keys and panel keys excluding a portion of the keys Turning the Additional Information and Comments ON and OFF 12 Press the Information soft key to select ON or OFF E Copy to Format Information cceaidite Built in Normal Lol faa 13 Press the Comment soft key A keyboard used to enter values and strings appears 14 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the comment copy Copy to Format m of ja Comment Built in lew el DFF oN C peprrErEpE INEE P fetal BIC D ETN DTH RD 0 SC a NA San FEI ea GE Printing 15 Press COPY The screen image is printed on the built in printer To abort printing press COPY while printing is in progress While printing is in progress Kk is indicated at the upper left corner of the screen 11 4 IM 701730 01E 11 2 Printing Using the Built in Printer Optional Explanation Print Format In addition to normal printing one page per screen long printing that allows the waveforms of the specified print range to be printed by expanding the time axis is available The magnification varies depending on the T div setting and the record length Magnification The range is from 2 to 500000 times The selectable range varies depending on the T div setting and the re
72. The search is executed and the words Search Exec change to Search Abort To abort the search press the Search Abort soft key The search is aborted and the words Search Abort change to Search Exec elect Zong Condition Source fe Upper 6 Left Logic 30div 2 BOOdi Search Zonet FF N OUT CHL Lover 6 Right OR Exec 0 70div 2 300di Displaying the Found Waveform 17 Press ESC The screen returns to the HISTORY menu 18 Display the waveform according to the procedure given in section 10 1 The history map lists the record numbers and time stamps of the searched waveforms Resetting the Search Results 19 Set the Search Mode to OFF in the HISTORY menu or turn OFF Zone1 to Zone4 and execute the search The search result is reset This section explains the setup procedures for searching history waveforms that pass or do not pass a specified search zone Search Zone Select Zone You can register up to four search zones Zone1 to Zone4 For each search zone you can set the search conditions below You can also set whether to use AND or OR logic of the search conditions of the four search parameters to perform the search see Search Logic described later Status of the search parameter for the searched waveform e Waveform to search Search zone range Status of the Search Parameter for the Searched Waveform Condition You can select the condition of the target waveform to be searched in the search zo
73. The summation of the triangular area of the X Y waveform Int2XY The summation of the trapezoidal area of the X Y waveform For details on the derivation of the area see appendix 2 Delay between Waveforms The time difference between the rising or falling edge between waveforms and the time difference from the trigger point to the rising or falling edge of waveforms can be measured Measurement range E 1st time Nith time Reference waveform setup example e Polarity J Rising e Edge Count N1 integer between 1 and 9 Mesial line Delay between waveforms N2th time Measured waveform setup example e Polarity Falling e Edge Count N2 integer between 1 and 9 Measurement Mode You can select the measurement mode OFF Delay between waveforms is not measured Time Displays the delay between waveforms using time Degree Displays the delay between waveforms using angles Converting equation Angle Delay s Period s x 360 deg The period is that of a reference waveform e Reference point You can select the reference point used when measuring the delay between waveforms Trace The reference point is set to the edge of the reference waveform Trig The reference point is set to the trigger position e Slope Polarity You can select which slope rising or falling of the waveform to be measured or reference waveform is to be detected f Rising slope Falling slope e Detection Count Edge Count
74. Trigger condition met CH3 and CH4 not available on the DL1720E e Activating a Trigger in Synchronization with the Clock Channel You can select conditions for activating triggers from the following True A trigger is activated on the rising or falling edge of the clock channel while the status pattern is met False A trigger is activated on the rising or falling edge of the clock channel while the status pattern is not met CH1 input __ CH1 H CH2 L CH2 input CH4 X CH3 Clock CH CH3 input A Condition True l l 1 I i 1 l I Pattern not gt Pattern met gt lt Pattern gt Pattern lt met I met met Trigger condition met CH3 and CH4 not available on the DL1720E 6 22 IM 701730 01E 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Trigger Level Selectable range Eight divisions of the screen Resolution 0 01 divisions For example the resolution for 2 mV div is 0 02 mV Setting the Hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that triggers are not activated by small changes in the trigger signal J Approximately 0 3 divisions of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approximately one division of hysteresis around the trigger level The value above is an approximate value It is not strictly warranted Setting the Trigger Coupling You can select from the following AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from
75. Trigger point Synchronization pulse Trigger point Trigger level _ J Other than above i SaS A Trigger level E ee Trigger point Trigger Level Set the difference between the trigger level and the start value of the sync pulse in units of divisions The selectable range is 0 1 to 2 0 divisions within the screen The resolution is 0 one divisions By default the trigger level for NTSC PAL and SECOM is 0 5 divisions For all other broadcasting types the trigger level is 1 0 division IM 701730 01E 6 35 s n el 6 14 Setting the TV Trigger ENHANCED Line Number A trigger is activated at the start of the line of the selected number e NTSC 5 to 1054 The following line numbers are those when the field number is set to 1 if the field number is set to 2 the numbers are assigned sequentially by setting 268 to 5 Line numbers inside the parentheses cannot be set ee dT aun Ay IN lala l lalslelztslololil12lisl14lis 161171 18 19 20121122123 Line number 524525526 gt 548 1049 1060 1051 gt 1054 iu AN TLL py Wy Line number el lzs2l263l264l265l266l267l268l269l270l2711272l273l274l275l276l277l278l279l280l281282l283l284 bes e For PAL or SECAM 2 to 1251 The following line numbers are those when the field number is set to 1 if the field number is set to 2 the numbers are assigned sequentially by s
76. When the search target waveform exceeds the specified upper limit of hysteresis it is determined to be high When the search target waveform is below the specified lower limit of hysteresis it is determined to be low For a description of the determination of the status when the search target waveform is within the specified hysteresis including the upper and lower limits of hysteresis see the explanation given below Set the status determination pattern level hysteresis for waveforms other than those on channels selected as synchronized clock signals CH or Math Select a status of H L or X sai Set the level for determining the status of High or Low roan oie Set the hysteresis the width of the level for pattern Level hysteresis detecting high low CH1 F 0 50 V03 CH2 H I 0 000 UT_0 3div__ CH3 X 0 000 V 6 3div CH4 X 0 000 VI_ 0 3div Math1 X _ 6 00div___0 3tiv_ Math2 X L 0 00div__T_0 3tiv_ Start Point IM 701730 01E 10 19 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy es 10 4 Searching Waveforms Using the Search and Zoom Function Setting the Search Start Point 12 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the search start point Start Point box Setup Clock CH CH1 Pattern Level Hysteresis CH1 F__ 0 500 VJ_0 3aiv_ CH2 H I 0 000 UI_0 3div__ CH3 x 6 000 VI 0 3div CH4 x I 0
77. carrying the instrument sseeseseesierierierrierrnrrrerrerresresrrens 3 2 A center A Delay B trigger scesscsssesscsssesssesssessssssssesssesseesstesssssesseeees 2 9 GQHANNG TEE 5 1 A delay B trigger c ccssessessessssesssssesessesstssessesseesteseeateeees 6 17 eerca aro EEEE TEE TE 3 2 A gt B N trigger 2 8 6 14 CLEAR TRACE o ssscecsssesseeesseeesstesssseeessiseaseensiiensneessnienn 1 7 AG Sennen One Arcee ere ERE NOE Rae E eee perenne Tel 2 12 clear trace 2 19 AC1 MQ oaasis wn 2 4 clearing trace 8 13 accumulated display 2 18 click sound ve 15 1 accumulating waveform 1 8 5 color mode 12 35 accuracy test eee 16 9 COMMANG siisii rara rsin aeie R EEk aaa ASEA 2 30 ACQ a 16 COMMENT 2 c csveizssncctssscizncnsts 11 5 11 9 11 12 12 36 13 15 ACO COUN cececcccccccccecccccecceccececccceccecsecteccectatststesesteceeeeres 6 39 commercial power supply 6 13 acquisition mode 2 14 7 5 COMMON Operation ccccececsecseescesceecteessesenecteeseesseaeeaeees 1 5 ACTION COUNL ceccecccccccccecccoccccccscsecececccsceeecesccacceseeseceaseeversesess 6 39 communication 2 30 ISH CSI OPN cas dects De cxontesece E T 13 13 compensating 311 ACTION ON TIQQEN eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeereeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeees 2 13 6 38 compress mode 12 35 adding COMPUTATION c ccisccssssisiczsccnsstascacrcracasesssessstasteazeasaasieceannaiacs 2 21 addition COMPUTATION parameter cceece
78. cono coj mari X Y_ MENU _ MENU PHA setup pispLay Copy mace Save o SHIFT C wm A C HORIZONTAL gt T i a t Re keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Grejem SHOP HELP FOG b To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys e Fora description of the operation using a USB 1 Press ACQ The ACQ menu appears 2 Press the Record Length soft key ACQ Record Mode E Count mter leave Repetitive Tine Base Length 10k Norma 1 Inf inite ON ON Ext 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the record length from 1k to 8M Explanation You can set the record length the number of data points to be stored to the acquisition memory The selectable maximum record length varies depending on the model DL1720E 1 kWord 10 kWord 50 kWord 100 kWord 250 kWord 1 MWord model 500 kWord 1 MWord DL1740E 1 kWord 10 kWord 50 kWord 100 kWord 250 kWord 500 kWord 2 MWord model 1 MWord 2 MWord DL1740EL 1 kWord 10 kWord 50 kWord 100 kWord 250 kWord 500 kWord 8 MWord model 1 MWord 2 MWord 4 MWord 8 MWord The value inside the parentheses is selectable only when interleave mode is ON see the next section Notes on Setting the Record Length The sample rate and display record length vary depending on the T div setting For more details about this relationship see appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Sample R
79. device Data in CSV format are saved as comma separated files The CSV file is one of the common data formats used to exchange data between spreadsheet and database applications The data that is saved is the measured results of the parameters that are specified in the automated measurement of waveform parameters Restrictions When Saving the Automated Measurement Values of Waveform Parameters When saving the following restrictions apply Up to 24000 the number of items that are turned ON data points before the point at which the save operation is executed are saved However the data points that are saved are limited to those that are acquired after fixing T div V div and Measure settings e Output Example DL1740E CH1 P P CH1 Max CH1 Avg CH2 P P CH2 Max a Ke K Vi A Max 3 708333E 02 1 833333E 02 1 439439E 00 1 133333E 01 5 750000E 00 Min 3 625000E 02 1 791667E 02 9 124088E 01 1 125000E 01 5 583333E 00 Avg 3 681818E 02 1 821970E 02 1 106889E 00 1 129545E 01 5 651515E 00 Sdv 2 678435E 00 Cnt 1 100000E 01 1 855674E 00 1 100000E 01 1 885480E 01 5 000000E 00 4 149413E 02 1 100000E 01 4 791330E 02 1 100000E 01 3 708333E 02 1 833333E 02 1 439439E 00 1 125000E 01 5 583333E 00 3 666667E 02 1 791667E 02 9 124088E 01 1 133333E 01 5 750000E 00 3 666667E 02 1 833333E 02 9 507383E 01 1 125000E 01 5 583333E 00 3 666667E 02 1 791667E 02 1 066977E
80. gt Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC TRACE Shor fol located above the soft keys m OC vO e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog FILE msc Gono Go MATH ea sano SELECT shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of JENU MENU PHASE seri gpr MAGE save o SHIT selecting setting items and entering values using y ARCH 2 O TRIGD zi the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys a o2 For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and ACTION DELAY 4 2 2 OILO lt For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Selecting the Display Mode 1 Press ZOOM The ZOOM menu appears 2 Press the Mode soft key The Mode menu appears Com Mode Main 3 Press any soft key from Main to Main amp Z1 amp Z2 to select the display method If you select Main the procedure is complete Main 21 Only 22 Only Main amp aZ1 Main amp Z2 21822 la in amp Z1 amp Z2 Setting the Display Format 4 Press the Format soft key The Format menu appears If you set Mode to Main the Format menu does not appear zom Tode Format Pz eg 5 Zi Pos location 0 104dit z Meas it Meas a in amp z1 amp zi Main z tag 22 Pos fis sa to Z1 Rng to 22 8 000di 5 Press a soft key from Main to Hexa to select the display format Quad and Hexa are not available on the DL1720E Mode Main Single Dual Triad Quad Hexa
81. other history waveforms at the same time as the found waveform are also displayed Waveform to Search e For the DL1740E DL1740EL You can select the target waveform from CH1 to CH4 Math1 and Math2 e For the DL1720E You can select from CH1 to CH2 and Math1 Search Measurement Items Same as the measurement parameters of the automated measurement of waveform parameters See section 10 6 Determination Range of the Measured Value of the Search Measurement Parameter You can set the upper and lower limits of the determination range The selectable range is 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 The upper limit Upper must be greater than or equal to the lower limit Lower Search Logic You can select the AND logic or OR logic of the search conditions of the four search parameters in performing the search AND Searches for waveforms that meet all search conditions of Param1 to Param4 OR Searches for waveforms that meet one of the search conditions of Param1 to Param4 Search Range T Range1 T Range2 The selectable range is 5 divisions and the resolution is ten divisions display record length The right end of the search range T Range2 must be greater than or equal to the left end of the search range T Range1 10 12 IM 701730 01E 10 3 Searching the History Waveforms Using Automatic Measurement of Parameters History Search History Waveform Range You can search the history waveforms in the range specified by Start Re
82. record Sample record Sample record Sample record rate length rate length rate length rate length rate length rate length S s Word S s Word Word S s Word S s Word S s Word 5k 25M 5k 2 5 M 25M 5k 25M 400M 25M 800M_ 25 M2 10k 2M 10k 2M 2M 10k 2M 400M 2M 800M 2M 20k 2M 20k 2M 2M 20k 2M 400M 2M 800M 2M 50k 2 5M 50k 2 5 M 25M 50k 25M 400M 25M 800M_ 2 5M2 100k 2M 100k 2M 2M 100k 2M 400M 2M 800M 2M 200k 2M 200k 2M 2M 200k 2M 400M 2M 800M 2M 500 k 2 5M 500k 2 5M 2 5M 500k 25M 400M 25M soom 2 5M 1M 2M 1M 2M 2M 1M 2M 400M 2M 800M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 400M 2M 800M 2M 5M 2 5 M 2 5 M 2 5 M 25M 400M 25M 800M_ 2 5M2 10M 2M 2M 2M 2M 400M 2M 800M 2M 20M 2M 2M 2M 2M 400M 2M 800M 2M 50M 2 5 M 2 5 M 2 5 M 2 5M 400M 25M 800M_ 25Me 100M 2M 2M 2M 2M 400M 2M 800M 2M 200M 2M 2M 2M 2M 400M 2M 800M 2M 500M 2 5 M 2 5 M 2 5 M 2 5 M 1G 2 5 M 500M 1M 2M 2M 500M 500k 1M 500M 250k 500 k 500M 100k 200 k 500M 50k 100k 500M 25k 50k 500M 10k 20k 500M 5k 10k 500M 2 5k 5k 500 M 500 M 500 M 500 M Roll mode display Set to normal mode even if envelope mode is specified 1 This record length cannot be specified on the DL1720E Also this record length cannot be specified on the DL1740E when interleave mode
83. see section 4 3 1 Press FILE The FILE menu appears 2 Press the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List window appear i ja File Iten Data Type a ra Save Load Unload Utility Waveform Binary 3 Press the Function soft key The Function menu appears Function a Filter et Reset All Set Property Attr Delete Delete lied Exec Renaming a Directory or File 4 Press the Rename soft key Utility J C FILE Delete Copy Rename Jake Dir Format attr Delete Exec a Selecting the Medium and Directory 5 The procedure is the same as steps 13 to 15 on page 12 14 Changing the File Attribute 6 The procedure is the same as steps 4 to 5 on page 12 42 12 50 IM 701730 01E 12 13 Changing the Directory or File Name of the Storage Medium and Creating Directories Renaming a Storage Medium Directory or File Excluding Net Drive 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select a directory name or file name 8 Press the File Name soft key A keyboard appears The name of the selected directory or file is displayed in the entry box of the keyboard Utility FILE Function fa a Filter File Name Property Attr Renane Sted File List Path NetWork Softuare Space 2147483647 byte 12 0001 WUF File Name m INSERT Z2BE4GBEPECPLNEM ee lela lBIC MIELE Le IHU ITKEL AL AS 0 0 0 0 a HES Pd Es ed 0 Fa eluf
84. subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 Smoothing The operation is the same as for addition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 Effects of Linear Scaling The operation is the same as for addition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 Maximum Record Length That Can Be Computed The operation is the same as for addition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 IM 701730 01E 9 9 uonendwog WAdJOAe e 9 5 Differentiating and Integrating Waveforms lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 21 gt Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the term jog shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of SNAP SHOT HELP SS SELECT wE ueasune cursoR FILE misc co XY setup pispa Copy mace save o si o ARCH MATH zm HFT O TRIG D selecting setting items and entering values using the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys GO oa vsDIV oa ow TIME DIV For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and 4 2 For a description of the operation using a USB a o Smere ENHANCED ACTION DELAY MODE POSITION keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Note Before carrying out the procedures in this section you must first carry out the procedures for displaying
85. the displayed waveforms stop when a trigger is activated TT l 2 7 suon uny jo uoneuejdxg 2 3 Triggers Trigger Source Trigger Slope and Trigger Level Trigger Source Trigger source refers to the signal against which trigger conditions are checked Trigger Slope Trigger slope refers to the movement of the signal from a low level to a high level rising edge or from a high level to a low level falling edge When the slope is used as one of the trigger conditions it is called a trigger slope Edge refers to the point where the trigger source slope passes the trigger level or when trigger hysteresis see page 2 13 is specified the point where the slope passes the hysteresis level Trigger Level Trigger level refers to the level at which a trigger is activated when passed by the trigger source With simple triggers such as the edge trigger described later a trigger is activated when the level of the trigger source passes through the specified trigger level aE ee ee Trigger level 1 I Trigger source Trigger activates here on a rising edge 4 Trigger Type lt For the setup procedure see chapter 6 gt The triggers used on the instrument can be classified into two main types simple triggers and enhanced triggers Simple Triggers This function activates triggers on a single trigger source e Edge Trigger lt For the setup procedure see sections 6 5 to 6 7 gt This fun
86. the waveforms can be displayed by setting the sensitivity to 0 4 or 0 5 to 10 times the vertical axis setting that was used to acquire the waveforms Variable If 1 00 V div is changed to 0 500 V div Vertical position mark P T GND level mark 41 div 1 00 V 1 div 0 500 V Note Voltage Axis Sensitivity Setting and Measurement Resolution For precise voltage measurements set the voltage axis sensitivity so that the amplitude of the displayed waveform is maximized The instrument uses 8 bit A D converters to sample the input signal at a resolution of 255 levels LSB On the screen the waveforms are displayed using twenty four levels per division on the grid Valid Data Range Assuming that the output value from the A D converter is in the range of 0 to 255 the data point at the center of the screen corresponds to 128 of the A D output However because the full range of the A D converter is 255 levels the 256th level on the screen is not used In addition the instrument handles the output values of the A D converter as Os and 1s Therefore the valid data range of the instrument is approximately 5 29 divisions from the center of the screen If the vertical axis position is moved after stopping data waveform acquisition the valid data range also moves by the same amount Vertical Position of the Waveform lt For t
87. then acquisition stops This mode is useful when you are observing a single shot signal Single N Mode Waveforms are acquired and stored in different memory areas each time a trigger is activated the specified number of times Then acquisition is stopped and all the acquired waveforms are displayed For details on the acquisition method of waveforms in Single N mode see Sequential Store on page 2 16 IM 701730 01E 2 11 suoloun jo uoneuejdxg 2 3 Triggers Trigger Position lt For the setup procedure see section 6 2 gt When you start waveform acquisition a trigger is activated according to a specified trigger condition and the waveform acquired to the acquisition memory is displayed If the trigger delay described below is set to 0 s the point at which the trigger is activated trigger point and the trigger position match By moving the trigger position on the screen you can change the display ratio of the pre data the waveform data stored in the acquisition memory before the trigger point pre trigger section and the postdata data after the trigger point post trigger section Display record length gt 0 Trigger position 100 Pre trigger section Post trigger section N 7 s z s S 7 a Trigger Delay lt For the setup procedure see section 6 3 gt Normally the waveform around the trigger point is displaye
88. 00 1 125000E 01 5 666667E 00 3 708333E 02 1 833333E 02 1 164884E 00 1 133333E 01 5 666667E 00 For a description of the automated measurement of waveform parameters see section 10 6 IM 701730 01E 12 31 ejeg Bulpeo7 pue Burnes 12 8 Saving Automated Measurement Values of Waveform Parameters Data Size The data size can be derived from the following equation Data size the number of measurement parameters x 15 x the number of history waveforms bytes Extension The extension is CSV The selection of the medium directory file name comments auto naming function specification of the files to be displayed in the File List window and properties are the same as those for saving loading normal waveform data For the explanation and procedure see section 12 5 Note An error occurs if a key other than the Abort key is pressed while saving e This function cannot be used when using the FTP server function FTP client function the LPR client function or the Web server function 12 32 IM 701730 01E 12 9 Saving Screen Image Data AN CAUTION Do not remove the storage medium disk or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the storage medium is blinking Doing so can damage the storage medium or destroy the data on the medium Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC Trace SNOT HELP located above the soft keys so O LS AV O e Inthe procedur
89. 000 UI_0 3div__ Mathi X 0 00div 6 3div Math2 X 0 00div_T_0 3tiv_ Start Point Set the search start point 13 Press ESC The Setup dialog box closes Selecting the Window for Displaying the Searched Waveform Zoom Waveform Display Frame 14 The procedure is the same as step 12 on page 10 15 Executing Aborting the Search 15 The procedure is the same as step 13 and 14 on page 10 15 Redisplaying the Detected Waveforms 16 The procedure is the same as step 15 and 16 on page 10 16 Changing the Zoom Rate and Zoom Position of the Detected Waveforms 17 Change the zoom rate and zoom position of the waveform according to the procedures given in section 8 4 Pulse Width Search 1 Press SHIFT ZOOM SEARCH The SEARCH menu appears Selecting the Width Search Method 2 Press the Type soft key The Type menu appears SEARCH Type Z1 Mag 6 21 Pos Searched Setup Pattern Exec Edge x 10 4 000diy No Match 3 Press the Width soft key SEARCH Edge Serial Width farallel Auto Searched Pattern fattern Scroll Pattern Exec No Match ae Setting the Search Condition 4 Press the Setup soft key The Setup dialog box opens SEARCH Type e Zi Mag 6 Z1 Pos OSearched Setup Pattern Exec Width x 10 1 800diy No Match Setting the Pulse Width Determination Type Search Target Waveform Level Polarity Hysteresis Pulse Width and Search Start Point 5 Use jog shuttle am
90. 1 00us gt ErrNo 004 Completed GO NO GO ErrNo 806 GO NO GO is in execution Please press the Abort key ErrNo 004 Completed GO NO GO ErrNo 806 GO NO GO is in execution Please press the Abort key Stop e Action Mail Comment aaaaaa ACQ Status Stopped 1 Trigger Date and Time 2004 05 17 17 28 59 38 GO NOGO Status Success 9 Fail 1 NOGO Factor Param4 Ch4 twWd Max C1 4 16667 V SDv C2 697 941 mV Freq C3 500 0000kHz Wd C4 1 00us gt IM 701730 01E 13 17 Ieuondo suonesaiunwwos 3u1 4 3 g 13 6 Accessing the Instrument from a PC or Workstation FTP Server Function Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC SNOT HELP located above the soft keys e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog r G 1s ED aca pma shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of XY MENENY setup DIsPLay oPY maGE SAVE O SHIFT selecting setting items and entering values using ae D TERRO R the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys oa g o GmPLE enance For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and vsDIV TIME sDIV o s ACTION DELAY 4 2 o s ED A e For a description of the operation using a USB o keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 User Account Settings 1 2 Press the MISC The MISC menu appears Press the Network soft key The Network menu appears i ai ee fe systen ia Next Control Conf ig 172 Press
91. 1 kHz damage may occur even when the voltage is below this value e The maximum input voltage for 50 Q input is 5 Vrms or 10 Vpeak Applying a voltage exceeding either of the two values can damage the input section DL1740E DL1740EL 1MQ 20pF lt 400Vpk CATI A 500S 5Vrms 10Vpk A DL1720E C4mai2opr lt 400Vpk CATI A 500 lt 5Vrms 10Vpk _ 1M0 20pF lt 40Vpk Ce Precautions to Be Taken When Connecting Cables When connecting a probe to the instrument for the first time perform phase correction of the probe as described in section 3 5 Compensating the Probe Phase Correction Failure to do so will cause unstable gain across different frequencies thereby preventing correct measurement Perform the phase correction on each channel to which a probe is to be connected Note that if the object being measured is directly connected to the instrument without using a probe correct measurements may not be possible due to loading effects Use caution when formatting a storage medium IM 701730 01E 3 4 Connecting the Probe Probes Specifications of the Probe Model 700988 That Comes Standard after Calibration Item Description Requirement When attenuation is 10 1 When attenuation is 1 1 Input resistance 10 MQ 2 approx 14 pF 1 MQ 1 0 approx 150 pF When used on the capacity instrument Attenuation 10 1 3 2 When used on the instrumen
92. 360 1 to Z1 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set the reference angle 2 000 Ref2 2 0006 Degree CH1 Cursor2 Type Trace j ursori je Refi 4 000di 4 000di Jumping the Cursor to the Zoom Waveform Display Frame 12 Press the Cursor Jump soft key The Cursor Jump menu appears CURSOR Type Trace f Cursoriffs Refi feRef Val Cursor Jum 4 000di 2 000d Jump Exec Degree CH1 fe Cursor2 je Ref2 360 C1 to 21 4 000di 2 000di 13 Press the C1 to Z1 C1 to Z2 C2 to Z1 or C2 to Z2 soft key to select the cursor and the jump destination Type Trace 6 Cursori 4 C1 to 21 4 0004i Degree CH1 Cursor2 4 4 000diy SS C1 to 22 to Z1 to 22 14 Press the Jump Exec soft key The cursor jumps to the specified zoom waveform display frame aren Type Trace e Cursoriff Refi eRef Vaiuetursor Ju 4 000dir 2 000dit ump Exec Degree CH1 Cursor2 e Ref2 360 C1 to 21 4 000di 2 000di This section explains the setup procedures for placing cursors on the displayed waveform within the display record length see appendix 1 and displaying various types of measured values at the cross point of the cursor and waveform The following four types of cursors are available e Horizontal cursors e Vertical cursors e Marker cursors e Angle cursors Limitations Cursor measurements cannot be made on the following waveforms Snapshot waveforms e Accumulated
93. 44 Overview of the Web Server Function FTP Server Function on a Web Browser View the list of files stored on the storage medium of the instrument built in storage medium and transfer files to the PC Data Capture The following operations can be performed Change the display format of the instrument and display data that is acquired in the history memory e Display the screen image of the instrument e Save the waveform data and setup data to the PC e Load the setup data stored on the PC into the instrument Displaying the Measurement Trend of Waveform Parameters Using the Excel function display the trend of the selected waveform parameter values The statistics of the measured values can also be computed Control Script Control the instrument using communication commands see the Communication Interface User s Manual IM701730 17E Log Displays the past log of errors that occurred on the instrument GO NO GO determination and action on trigger Up to the thirty newest incidents are logged Instrument Information Displays the model of the instrument the presence absence of options the ROM version firmware version etc 13 20 IM 701730 01E 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Link You can view the Web page for the instrument Operating Conditions PC Environment PC A machine capable of supporting the operating system and hardware described below Os Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition Mi
94. 5 Compensating the Probe Phase Correction AN CAUTION Do not apply external voltage to the probe compensation signal output terminal Doing so can damage the internal circuits Procedure 1 Turn ON the power switch 2 Connect the probe to the input terminal to which the signal is to be applied 3 Connect the tip of the probe to the probe compensation signal output terminal and the ground wire to the functional ground terminal 4 Perform auto setup according to the procedures given in section 4 5 5 Insert a flat head screwdriver to the phase correction hole and turn the variable capacitor to make the displayed waveform a correct rectangular wave Phase correction hole Probe compensation signal output terminal Functional ground terminal Explanation Necessity of Phase Correction of the Probe When using the oscilloscope with a probe the probe phase must be corrected by adjusting the variable capacitor inside the probe so that the gain is constant relative to the frequency Measurements will not be accurate unless this adjustment is made therefore you should make sure to perform this phase correction when using the probe for the first time The input capacitance differs depending on the oscilloscope It can also vary slightly from channel to channel even on the same oscilloscope Even if the phase has been previously corrected you must perform the correction again if you move the probe to a new oscilloscope or a different
95. 51 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy es 10 7 Statistical Processing of the Automated Measurement Values of Waveform Parameters CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 Math2 Performs automated measurement of waveform parameters on all target waveforms per cycle of the specified channel and performs statistical processing You can select up to CH2 and Math1 on the DL1720E and up to CH4 and Math2 and Math2 on the DL1740E DL1740EL respectively Own Determines the cycle for each target waveform performs automated measurement of waveform parameters for each cycle and performs statistical processing However if signals of different cycles are applied to multiple channels automated measurement of waveform parameters and statistical processing are performed for the number of cycles of the channel whose cycle is the slowest on all other channels The following parameters cannot be measured Waveform Used to Determine the Cycle If you selected Own for the method of determining the cycle described earlier all the waveforms are waveforms used to determine the cycle Avg Freq average frequency Avg Period average period Pulse pulse count Int1 XY area Int2XY area and Delay Other Waveforms Int1 XY area Int2XY area and Delay Cannot be used simultaneously with 1 cycle mode see page 10 44 Measurement and Statistical Processing of History Waveforms Measurement and statistical processing of the sele
96. 880mV Sort i MaxMin MaxMin Maxin MaxMin Iten4 REV Item1 Iten2 Iten3 1 04167U 812 500mU 229 167mU 294 465mU 1 02083U 812 500mU 208 333mV 293 636mU 1 04167U 812 500mU 229 167mU 295 398mU 1 64167U 812 500mU 229 167mV 293 843nU 1 02083V 812 500mV 208 333mV 294 983mV 1 02083V 812 500mU 208 333mU 295 087mU 1 02083V 812 500mU 208 333mV 293 947mU 1 04167U 812 500mU 229 167mU 294 776nU 1 04167U t 833 333ny 208 333nU 294 672nU 1 02083U 812 500nU 208 333nU 296 124mU 1 02083U 812 500mU 208 333mU 295 916mU 1 02083U 812 500mU 208 333mU 293 947mU 1 02083V 812 500mU 208 333mV 294 983mU 1 04167U 812 500nU 229 167nU 294 983mV 1 041670 812 500mU 229 167mU 294 362mV MaxMin MaxMin MaxMin Item1 Item2 Iten3 SWJOJaAe Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy Sort MaxMin Iten4 FUD IM 701730 01E 10 49 10 7 Statistical Processing of the Automated Measurement Values of Waveform Parameters Measurement and Statistical Processing of History Waveforms Explanation 3 Press the History Statistics soft key 4 MEASURE _ OFF ON statistics Cycle History T Rangei tatistic Btatistics 5 000di Next T Range2 172 5 000di Perform the following setup procedures as necessary For the operating procedure see section 10 6 Selecting the measurement parameters steps 4 to 8 on page 10 39 Setting the delay measurement between waveforms steps 9 to 18
97. A and B 9 9999E 30 9 9999E 30 Default settings A 1 0000E 00 B 0 0000E 00 Setting the Unit You can set the unit using up to four alphanumeric characters Displaying the Scale Value The upper and lower limits of the vertical axis of each channel can be displayed using linear scaled values see section 8 8 5 16 IM 701730 01E 5 10 Selecting the Time Base Procedure lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 6 gt yA LI ESC A O To exit the menu during operation press ESC easure cursOR FILE misc cono co mari EPH p located above the soft keys x Y MENU _ MENU setup _ pisPLaY Copy mace SAVE O SHIFT e For a description of the operation using a USB C VERTICAL CHORZONTAL TRIGGER D t SEARCH O TRIG D as a ED keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 i o smece ENHANCED TIME 7DIV ACTION DELAY Explanation g 1 Press ACQ The ACQ menu appears 2 Press the Time Base soft key to select Int or Ext Length Record Mode E Comt Inter leave Repetitivi Time Base 10k Normal Inf inite ON ON Ext Setting the Threshold Level When Using an External Clock 3 Press SIMPLE In the menu that appears set the trigger source to EXT and set the level This operation is common with the trigger level settings For details on the Procedure see section 6 6 Selecting the Ti
98. B9850NX B9989EX B9989FA C2 gt e User s Manual this document 1 Communication Interface Operation Guide 1 oe Serial Bus Signal Analysis Function User s Manual 1 1 The DL1720E comes with two and the DL1740E DL1740EL comes with four 2 Provided only on models with the built in printer 3 Provided only on models with serial bus signal analysis function F5 Optional Accessories Sold Separately The optional accessories below are available for purchase separately Check that no accessories are missing or damaged For inquiries regarding accessories please contact the dealer from which you purchased the instrument FET probe 100 1 probe Differential probe Differential probe 700978 700924 701921 Probe power cable Differential probe Differential probe for 700924 and 700925 791920 701922 B9852MJ Current probe Current probe GO NO GO cable 701930 701931 366973 700937 701932 The 701921 comes with a probe power cable model B9852MJ IM 701730 01E iii Checking the Contents of the Package Spare Parts Sold Separately The spare parts below are available for purchase separately Check that no accessories are missing or damaged For inquiries regarding spare parts please contact the dealer from which you purchased the instrument Name Part No Lot Qty Notes Roll paper for printer B9850NX 5 Thermalsensible paper total length of 30m 400 MHZ passive probe 700988 1 In
99. BTD 0000 SET 0001 BMP 0001 BTD E ty Compe yY a a 0002 BMP 0002 BTD 0003 BMP 0003 BTD Note Up to two PCs can log into the file transfer function simultaneously You cannot manipulate the files simultaneously from two PCs When the instrument is printing or operating on files file operation from the front panel key or file transfer using the FTP server function the Web server function cannot be used To use the FTP server on a Web browser a network user account on the instrument must be configured For the procedure of setting user accounts see steps 1 to 6 in section 13 6 An authentication login dialog box may appear on the Web browser when the FTP icon on the Web server window is clicked If it does enter the user name and password that were entered in section 13 6 13 28 IM 701730 01E 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Performing Data Capture Before using this function check that the communication interface of the instrument is set to Network see page 13 23 Click the Data Capture icon on the Web server window The Data Capture window showing the screen image of the instrument and the control panel that allows data saving and loading appears Web Server Window File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Q ax Q 2B x SE Links gt Test and Measurement x 2 A Search Se Favorites media E ess http dl1700e_1 Contents wWwewewwwewweew vw DL1740E 1 DL 1740 E
100. CH2 and None When the Clock Channel Is Set to None Detection Interval You can set the interval for detecting the pattern When the Clock Channel Is Set to CH1 to CH4 2 You can set the detection level slope and hysteresis of the selected synchronization clock signal Level You can set the level for detecting the synchronization clock The selectable range is eight divisions within the screen The resolution is 0 01 divisions Slope Polarity You can select which slope edge rising or falling of the synchronization clock is to be detected F Rising slope Falling slope Hysteresis You can set the hysteresis The selectable range is 0 3 divisions to 4 0 divisions The resolution is 0 one divisions e When the level of the search target waveform changes from below the specified lower limit of hysteresis to above and including the upper limit of hysteresis it is detected as a synchronization clock e When the level of the search target waveform changes from above the specified upper limit of hysteresis to below and including the lower limit of hysteresis it is detected as a synchronization clock e For all other cases it is not detected as a synchronization clock 10 24 IM 701730 01E 10 4 Searching Waveforms Using the Search and Zoom Function Waveform to Search Source You can select the search target waveform e For the DL1740E DL1740EL You can select the target waveform from CH1 to CH4 Math1 and Math2
101. Cnt 4 Perform the following setup procedures as necessary For the operating procedure see section 10 6 Selecting the measurement parameters steps 4 to 8 on page 10 39 Setting the delay measurement between waveforms steps 9 to 18 on page 10 40 Turning ON OFF 1 cycle mode step 19 on page 10 41 Setting the measurement range steps 20 and 21 on page 10 41 Setting distal mesial and proximal values steps 22 to 31 on page 10 41 Setting high and low values step 32 on page 10 42 10 46 IM 701730 01E 10 7 Statistical Processing of the Automated Measurement Values of Waveform Parameters Measurement per Cycle and Statistical Processing within the Measurement Range 3 Press the Cycle Statistics soft key Statistic Cycle tatistics 4 Perform the following setup procedures as necessary For the operating procedure see section 10 6 Selecting the measurement parameters steps 4 to 8 on page 10 39 Setting the measurement range steps 20 and 21 on page 10 41 Setting distal mesial and proximal values steps 22 to 31 on page 10 41 Setting high and low values step 32 on page 10 42 Selecting the Waveform for Determining the Cycle 5 Press the Cycle Trace soft key The Cycle Trace menu appears MEASURE Mode ry ycle Trace feT Rangei Iten Shou Measure 5 000di Next Cycle Setup CH1 Result Exec 6T Range2 172 tat istics 5 000di 6 Press the Own
102. Display Display Display Display Display Display Sample record Sample record Sample record Sample record Sample record Sample record rate length rate length rate length rate length rate length rate length S s Word S s Word S s Word S s Word S s Word S s Word 20k 10M 20k 10 M 800M 10M 50 k 10M 50k 10 M 800M 10M 100 k 10M 100k 10 M 800M 10M 200 k 10M 200k 10 M 800M 10M 500k 10M 500k 10 mM 800M 10M 1M 10M 1M 10 M 800M 10M 2M 10 M 10 M 800M 10M 5M 10 M 10 M 800M 10M 10M 10 M 10 M 800M 10M 20M 10 M 10 M 800M 10M 50M 10 M 10 M 800M 10M 100M 10 M2 10 M 800M 10M 200M _ 10 M2 10 M 800M 10M 500M 10 M2 10 M 1G 10 M 1G 10 M 10 M Roll mode display This record length cannot be used 1G 5M This record length Set to normal mode even if envelope mode is specified when interleave mode is OFF 1G 2M cannot be used 1G 1M when interleave 1G 500 k mode is OFF 1G 200 k 1G 100 k 1G 50 k 1G 20k 1G 10k 1G 5k 1G 1G 1G 1G 1 This record length cannot be specified on the DL1720E or DL1740E 2 Since the number of data points acquired is 8 MW only eight divisions of the waveform is displayed along the time axis In addition the trigger posit
103. History Waveforms Using Automatic Measurement of Parameters History Search Explanation This section explains the setup procedures for searching history waveforms that meet or do not meet the specified search parameter conditions Search Parameters You can register up to four search parameters Param1 to Param4 For each search parameter you can set the search conditions below You can also set whether to use AND or OR logic of the search conditions of the four search parameters to perform the search see Search Logic described later e Status of the search parameter for the searched waveform Target waveform search measurement item e Determination range of the measured value of the search measurement parameter Search range Status of the Search Parameters for the Searched Waveform Condition You can select from the following OFF No search is performed IN Searches for waveforms whose measured value of the search and measurement parameter is within the determination range of the specified search parameter Search is also made on boundary values OUT Searches for waveforms whose measured value of the search and measurement parameter is not within the determination range of the specified search parameter Selecting the Search Target Waveform Search Measurement Item You can select the target waveform and the measurement parameter to be used as a search condition If a waveform that meets the search condition is found
104. However in envelope mode the maximum and minimum values are determined from the data sampled at 400 MS s or 800 MS s or 1GS s when interleave mode is ON at time intervals two times that of the sampling period of normal mode and are stored as pairs in the acquisition memory Envelope mode is useful when you want to avoid aliasing see section 2 2 since the sample rate is kept high irrespective of the time axis setting It is also useful when you want to detect glitches pulse signals which rise very fast or display an envelope of a modulating signal Li PEENI Envelope curve Ead wly l occ Box Average The moving average of the data sampled at 400 MS s or 800 MS s or 1GS s when interleave mode is ON is determined stored in the acquisition memory and displayed Box averaging is useful for eliminating small amounts of noise from the input signal It can also remove noise from a single shot signal oe 36 i 20 21 Input signal o At 20 MS s S interleave OFF Time Box averaged data 2 a s gt Time IM 701730 01E 2 15 suoloun jo uoneuejdxg 2 4 Waveform Acquisition and Display Conditions Sequential Store lt For the setup procedure see section 7 6 gt This function stores waveform data in the acquisition memory the specified number of times and displays the data when in realtime sampling mode The operation stops when acquisition is finis
105. Inspection 16 1 Malfunction First Investigate Corrective Actions When Abnormalities Occur Description The power cannot be turned ON Nothing is displayed The display is odd e Refer to the following pages when error messages appear on screen Contact the dealer from which you purchased the instrument if servicing is required or if the instrument fails to operate normally after taking appropriate corrective actions Probable Cause Using a power supply outside the ratings Corrective Action Use a correct power supply Reference Section The main power switch on the rear panel is not turned ON The backlight is turned OFF The screen colors are not appropriate The system is not operating properly Turn ON the main power switch Press any key Set the screen color Power cycle the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL The waveform display does not update Keys do not work Waveform data was loaded from an external storage medium The DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL is in remote mode Unload the loaded waveform data Press SHIFT CLEAR TRACE to enable local mode Other causes Perform a key test If the test fails servicing is required Trigger does not activate The trigger gate is enabled Turn OFF the trigger gate 6 16 The trigger settings are not appropriate Set the trigger conditions correctly Chapter 6 Measured values are not correct I
106. KD located above the soft keys e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 2 Press SHIFT MODE ACTION The ACTION menu appears Press the soft key corresponding to the action to be enabled and select ON If Send Mail is turned ON use the jog shuttle to set the mail transmission count MailCount ACTION Buzzer Saver to Hard Copy image Save ACQ Count Send Mail PFF ON Exec DFF ON e on PFF ON DFF ON Infinite sta lenun Setting the Action Count Turn the jog shuttle to set the action count ACQ Count Pressing RESET sets the count to Infinite 3 Executing and Canceling the Action Trigger Press the Exec soft key The waveform acquisition starts and action on trigger is executed Exec changes to Abort To abort an action on trigger press the Abort soft key or START STOP The waveform acquisition stops and action on trigger is aborted 4 ie to Hard Copy image Save fgAcg Count Send Mait Buzzer F DFF ON DF ON OFF ON BFF on DFF on Infinite plac 6 38 IM 701730 01E 6 15 Setting the Action on Trigger Explanation A specified action can be executed each time a trigger is activated Action to Be Performed When the Trigger Condition Is Met Buzzer Sounds a buzzer Save to File Saves waveform data measured waveform parameters and snapshot waveforms to the storage medium flop
107. MISC menu Execute HELP I Caps Lock Caps Lock Same as left App 20 IM 701730 01E Appendix 5 Key Assignments of the USB Keyboard F1 Select soft key1 Same as left Select soft key1 Same as left Select soft key1 Same as left F2 Select soft key2 Same as left Select soft key2 Same as left Select soft key2 Same as left F3 Select soft key3 Same as left Select soft key3 Same as left Select soft key3 Same as left F4 Select soft key4 Same as left Select soft key4 Same as left Select soft key4 Same as left F5 Select soft key5 Same as left Select soft key5 Same as left Select soft key5 Same as left F6 Select soft key6 Same as left Select soft key6 Same as left Select soft key6 Same as left F7 Select soft key7 Same as left Select soft key7 Same as left Select soft key7 Same as left F8 Escape Same as left Escape Same as left Escape Same as left F9 F10 F11 u Same as left F12 START STOP Same as left Q Same as left START STOP Same as left Print Sereen Execute COPY Same as left Scroll Lock Execute IMAGE SAVE Same as left Pause Execute SNAPSHOT Same as left Insert Insert condition Same as left Home Decrement V Div Same as left Decrement V Div Same as left Page Up Decrement T Div Same as left Decrement T Div Same as left Delete Delete Same as left End Increment V Div Same as left Increment V Div Same as left Pag
108. Maine lok gt gt i CH1 10 1 2 00 Vzdi DC Full CH2 10 1 2 00 Udiv DC Full CH3 10 1 2 00 Vzdi 2 00 Vzdi DC Full SPI Bus Auto Executes auto setup Initial ize After auto setup 2004 04 14 13 Be z fi Stopped 4 J ox Normal SOOMS S ZOONS tiv y Ze Pains Ik gt gt _SETUP__ ne Auto Store Undo Undo Setup Recall Initial Auto a iZe SEtUp BNET cist eae Unter ent eae ae rene eee LAA a CH1 10 1 1 00 Vrdiv DC Full CH2 10 1 1 00 Udiv DC Full CH3 10 1 1 00 Uzdi DC Full CH4 10 1 1 00 Uzdiv DC Full Edge CH4 F Auto 0 08 V EI EI Initial Store Undo ize Reca11 Initial a i Zem Canceling Auto Setup 3 condition futo 3 J Cancels auto setup se Press the Undo Auto Setup soft key The settings are set back to their original IM 701730 01E 4 15 4 5 Executing Auto Setup Explanation The auto setup function automatically sets the key settings such as V div T div and trigger level that are appropriate for the input signal Center Position after Auto Setup The center position after auto setup is 0 V Applicable Channels Auto setup is performed on all channels Loaded Waveforms After Auto Setup loaded waveforms are unloaded Press the Undo Auto Setup soft key to recover unloaded waveforms Canceling Auto Setup Pressing the
109. Message Corrective Action Sections 755 FTP Error Rm Check network configuration and connection Chapter 13 756 FTP Error List Check network configuration and connection Chapter 13 757 FTP Error Mkdir Check network configuration and connection Chapter 13 758 FTP Error Rmdir Check network configuration and connection Chapter 13 759 FTP Error Get Check network configuration and connection Chapter 13 760 FTP Error Put Check network configuration and connection Chapter 13 761 FTP Error GetData Check network configuration and connection Chapter 13 762 FTP Error PutData Check network configuration and connection and Chapter 13 disk space 763 FTP Error AppendData Check network configuration and connection and Chapter 13 disk space 764 FTP Error Client Handle Check network configuration and connection Chapter 13 765 FTP Error Others Check network configuration and connection Chapter 13 785 Cannot send data to a network printer Check network configuration and connection Chapter 13 786 Cannot send the e mail message Check network configuration and connection Chapter 13 797 Connecting to a NetDrive Wait until Chapter 13 connection has been established Errors in Setting 800 to 899 Code Message Corrective Action Sections 800 Illegal date time Set them correctly 3 6 801 Illegal file name Illegal character exists or the file name is restricted 4 2 by MS DOS Enter a different file name 804 Cannot change this parameter while data Pre
110. Note e Multiple characters cannot be entered consecutively e File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AAUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COM9 and LPT1 to LPT9 IM 701730 01E 4 5 suoljeiodg uowwog eS 4 3 Operating the instrument Using a USB Keyboard or a USB Mouse Operations Using a USB Keyboard You can connect a USB keyboard for entering file names comments and other information In addition the functions of each key on the front panel of the instrument are assigned to the keys on the keyboard see appendix 5 Thus the keyboard can be used to carry out operations that are the same as the key operations on the instrument Keyboards That Can Be Used Keyboards that can be used depend on the USB keyboard language that you selected in section 15 2 English or Japanese The following keyboards that conform to USB Human Interface Devices HID Class Version 1 1 can be used e When the USB keyboard language is English 104 keyboard and 89 keyboard e When the USB keyboard language is Japanese 109 keyboard and 89 keyboard The default setting is the language specified by the message language selection see section 15 1 To use a Japanese keyboard change the USB keyboard language according to the procedures given in section 15 2 Note Connect only the keyboards that are allowed e The operation of USB keyboards connecte
111. ON When interleave When interleave mode is OFF mode is ON Display Display Display Display Display Display record record record record record record length length length length length length Word Word Word M M M M M M Roll mode display SISISIS SIlSI SISI SI SI SI SI SI FIE SlSISISI SlSISISISISI SI SI SI FIJE SISISISI SISISISISISI SI SI SISITIE SSIS IS SIlSI SISISISISI SI SI SIFIE Set to normal mode even if envelope mode is specified SS SS S SS S S S S S SS S S SS S S SS Z S aSa a a S S S aS a a a SS S S 1 This record length cannot be specified on the DL1720E when interleave mode is OFF 2 Box averaging is not available on the DL1740E 3 Box averaging is not available on the DL1720E 4 The values inside the thick frame are for repetitive sampling mode IM 701730 01E App 7 E x pu ddy Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Specified Record Length 2 MW Rep Repetitive sampling mode When set to a mode other than envelope mode When set to envelope mode When interleave mode is OFF When interleave mode is ON When interleave When interleave Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON mode is OFF mode is ON Display Display Display Display Display Display Sample record Sample record Sample
112. Parameters on Dual Areas Explanation Setting the Measurement Range Area2 of the Second Measurement Parameter 13 Press the T Range3 T Range4 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to T Range3 T Range4 or both T Range3 and T Range4 If you select T Range3 you can move T Range3 If you select T Range4 you can move T Range4 If you select both T Range3 and T Range4 you can move T Range3 and T Range4 horizontally without changing the spacing between the two The value of the digit being specified by T Range3 changes MEASURE a fjeT Range f T Range3 y Jual Area Iten 5 000 5 0004i Setup ST Range eo FF N 5 000 5 000di T lt lt Mainfiok gt gt T 1 l H i Measurement range Measurement range Area1 Area2 14 Turn the jog shuttle to set the Area2 measurement range Setting the Distal Mesial and Proximal Values and High and Low Values 15 The procedure is the same as steps 22 to 32 on page 10 41 to 10 42 This section explains the setup procedures for performing automated measurement of various measurement parameters waveform parameters on dual areas simultaneously or performing computation using the measured values on the displayed waveform within the display record length see appendix 1 Limitations Automated measurement of waveform parameters cannot be performed on the following waveforms Snapshot w
113. Select Pass Thru Mi Setup Select the waveform on which to perform computation Operation Source CHT puto Mamar C 0 0000800_ LE LPEE N Set the scaling used to display computed waveform Math1 to Auto auto scaling or Manual manual scaling Scale Center Sensitivity Mi scaling is set to Manual set the vertical center line level on the screen voltage value if set to voltage and the sensitivity voltage per division if set to voltage Unit Smoothing Set the unit of computed waveform Math1 Turn ON OFF zooming 9 14 IM 701730 01E 9 7 Smoothing Waveforms Explanation Turning the Computed Waveform Display and Computed Waveform Label ON and OFF See section 9 1 Operator Select the operator Pass Thru as the operator for Math1 and Math2 Select the Pass Thru operator when displaying the waveform to be computed that has been simply scaled or smoothed For details smoothing see section 9 2 e When using the Pass Thru operator and smoothing is ON The waveform to be computed is displayed after smoothing e When using the Pass Thru operator and smoothing is OFF The waveform to be computed is displayed without smoothing Waveform to Be Computed The waveforms on which computation can be performed are as follows e For the DL1740E DL1740EL Computation Name Source Math1 One channel from CH1 to CH4 Math2 One channel from CH1 to CH4 or Math1 On the menu CH1
114. Selectable only when the data format is set to BMP in step 3 and the color mode is set to ON ON Reverse or ON Gray in step 5 6 Press the Compression soft key to select ON or OFF IMAGE a Format Color Ja ompress ion e File Nameg Thumbnai 1 Comment File List BMP ON DF oN 12 0051 Entering Comments 7 Press the Comment soft key A keyboard used to enter values and strings appears 8 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the comment Enter comment using up to twenty five characters IMAGE a Format Color ffa ry aFile Nane Thumbnail Comment File List BMP OFF 12 0051 E o m INSERT 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 oot NET Pe LelABICUDTELFIGUHUT JT KILI ME PSL INTOUPTOURUS TT UY Wl YL Ere eE SAEC LCD elut EE EA EA Ae 9 Press ESC Selecting the Storage Medium for Saving 10 Press the File List soft key The save destination File List window appears 11 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the save destination medium indicated by brackets File List Path NetWork Software Space 2147483647 byte File Name Size Date Attr FD 1 NetWork 1 12 0055 2004 05 14 14 12 12 0054 5 2004 05 14 14 12 12 0052 2004 05 14 14 11 12 0053 3 2004 05 14 14 11 12 0051 2004 05 14 14 11 2004 05 14 13 48 2004 05 14 13 42 2004 05 14 13 42 12 0048 7 2004 05 14 13 42 M Format Color fa L AGEL ry a Thumbnail Comment File List File Na
115. Set to User 8 Press the V div soft key 9 Turn the jog shuttle to set the V div value PRESET Exec Select Type Probe All CMOS SY 10 1 2 00 V 0 00 U 2 50 V fe viv Brig Lvi 10 Press the Offset or Trig Lvl soft key 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set the offset voltage or trigger level PRESET Select Type Probe U7divf fe Offset J eTrig Lyi Exec All CMOS SY 10 1 2 00 V 0 00 U 2 50 U Executing Presets 12 Press the Exec soft key to execute the presets STT Select Type Probe U div j6 Offset etrig Ly Exec All CMOS SY 10 1 2 00 V 0 00 U 2 50 N te ee ee ee eee If you selected User for the Type in step 7 Type automatically reverts to User when the V div Offset or Trig Lvl settings are changed 5 12 IM 701730 01E 5 7 Using the Preset Function Explanation The key settings of V div input coupling trigger level and other items are automatically set to the optimum values or arbitrary values for the CMOS signal or ECL signal You can also automatically set them to the optimum values for the current probe 700937 701930 701931 or 701932 sold separately You can set each channel separately or set all the channels to the same settings Setup after Executing Preset Preset type CMOS 5 V CMOS 3 3 V ECL User Input coupling DC1 MQ DC1 MQ DC1 MQ DC1 MQ Trigger coupling DC DC DC DC Probe 1 1 10 1 100 1 1000 1 10 A 1 V 0 1 V A 100 A 1 V S
116. T Range1 e Ifyou select T Range2 you can move T Range2 12 Turn the jog shuttle to set the range of the partial zone to be edited 13 Press the Upper Lower soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Upper or Lower e If you select Upper you can edit the zone upward with respect to the reference waveform in the range between T Range1 and T Range2 e If you select Lower you can edit the zone downward with respect to the reference waveform in the range between T Range1 and T Range2 GO NO GO ci Store as 5 06div Store IE amp 6T Range2 Zone1 Exec TopMenu 5 OOdiv 14 Turn the jog shuttle to edit part of the zone Edit hole Pari Upper Lower e Registering the Edited Zone 15 Press the Store as soft key The Store as menu appears G0 N0 G0 Edit ja Upper sT Rangei Store as mm Store Quit amp hole Part Lover f T al Zone1 Exec TopMenu 5 00div 16 Press one of the soft keys from Zone1 to Zone6 to select the registration destination J0 N0 G0 Zonet Zone Zone3 Zone4 ZoneS Zone6 Quit amp Toptenu T Ly 1 I T 17 Press the Store Exec soft key The edited zone is registered to the selected destination Edit B Upper aT Rangei Store as ers O0div Ed hole Part Lower fi T Range2 Zone1 Ed 5 00div 5GO NO GO_ fs amp fs IM 701730 01E 10 59 SWJOJaAeM Buiyoseas pue HulzAjeuy es 10 9 Performing GO NO GO Dete
117. Target Waveform Trace You can select the waveforms to be saved using the trace box All all waveforms 1 to 4 channels 1 to 4 Math1 to Math2 computed waveforms All 1 to 2 channels 1 to 2 and Math1 on the DL1720E Selecting the Save Area Range Select the area in which the target waveform to be saved is displayed Main Z1 Z2 or Z1_Z2 displayed as Z1 amp Z2 on the instrument menu For the meanings of the selections see the explanation in section 12 5 Setting the History Waveform Display Selecting by History Waveform Number History No Specify the number of the history waveform to be displayed Selecting the Newest or Oldest Data You can specify the newest or the oldest waveform among the history waveforms to be displayed Selecting One or All e One Click One A single history waveform that is selected by the history waveform number or selected by newest or oldest is displayed e All Click All All the history waveforms are displayed Updating the Setup Condition Panel Update Click Panel Update The control panel settings on the Data Capture window PC are updated to match the newest setup condition on the instrument IM 701730 01E 13 33 Ieuondo SuOHedUNWWOD JeUI9U A g 13 7 Using the Web Server Function e Automatically Updating Screen Images Confirmation Select the Confirmation check box The screen image is automatically updated using the same conditions as Color OFF when you change the
118. USB a i S keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Setting the Trigger Type 1 2 3 Press ENHANCED The ENHANCED menu appears Press the Type soft key The Type menu appears count fatoid OFF Bet Pattern Level us Coupling 1 0 08 Type A gt BOND Press the Pattern soft key NHANCED gt BCND A Delay Pattern Width OR TU Hold Off us 9 08 Setting the Status and Condition 4 Press the Set Pattern soft key The Set Pattern dialog box opens The settings related to CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720E ENHANCED Type z feHold OFF et Pattern Level us Pattern toupling 0 08 e Activating a Trigger Only on the Status Pattern 5 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set Clock CH to None These are not displayed on the DL1720E Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select H L or X for the status of each channel Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set Condition to Enter or Exit Proceed to step 9 Set Pattern Clock cH More Select None for the clock channel CA Select H L or X for the status of each channel Conatt tm Set Condition to Enter or Exit 6 20 IM 701730 01E 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED Activating a Trigger in Synchronization with the Clock Channel 5 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set Clock CH to CH1 through CH4 2 CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720E
119. a certain period of time timeout time the instrument decides that the transmission to the FTP server is not possible and closes the connection You can set the value in the range of 1 to 3600 The default setting is 15 s 13 10 IM 701730 01E 13 4 Entering Settings for Printing Screen Images on the Network Printer LPR Client Function Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC ENAP HELP located above the soft keys y e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog a shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of sTaRT sTOP selecting setting items and entering values using aca Y ae PLA Gory ane SAVE O SHIFT ee a C HORZONTAL 4 C mn 2 BR vzDiv TIME DIV 7 O TRIG D the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys Oo For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and GED DELAY 4 2 Ow e Fora description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Cen Network Printer Settings 1 2 Press the MISC The MISC menu appears Press the Network soft key The Network menu appears tat ibration nenote Network system se iew Control Conf ig Press the Net Print Setup soft key The Net Print Setup dialog box opens 3 3 Network a a y TCP IP User Mail Net Driv Net Print J Others Connect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List Use jog shuttle
120. a Exec MISC MISC futo Cal Deskew OFF PN ON 4 18 IM 701730 01E 4 6 Performing Calibration Explanation Calibration The following items are calibrated Perform calibration when you wish to measure waveforms with high accuracy Ground level and gain of the vertical axis Trigger threshold level Time measurement value during repetitive sampling Note ___ The calibration described above is performed automatically when the power switch is turned ON Precautions to Be Taken When Performing Calibration Always allow the instrument to warm up for at least thirty minutes after the power is turned ON before starting calibration If calibration is performed immediately after the power is turned ON the calibration may be inaccurate due to drift caused by fluctuation in the temperature of the instrument Calibration must be performed when the temperature of the instrument is stable and is between 5 and 40 C preferably at 23 C 2 C Do not apply a signal when performing calibration Calibration may be executed incorrectly when an input signal is being applied Auto Calibration Calibration is automatically performed when T div is changed and waveform acquisition is started for the first time after the following time elapses after turning ON the power 3 minutes 10 minutes 30 minutes 1 hour and every hour thereafter If calibration was executed while a signal was being
121. a rising edge When the level of the search target waveform changes from above the specified upper limit of hysteresis to below and including the lower limit of hysteresis it is detected as a falling edge e For all other cases it is not detected as an edge Detection Count You can set the edge detection count The available setting range is 1 to 1000000 Ifthe search is aborted in the middle of the operation and the next search is resumed the rising or falling edge of the previous detection position is counted as the 1st edge detection count IM 701730 01E 10 23 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy eS 10 4 Searching Waveforms Using the Search and Zoom Function Search Start Point You can set the search start point The selectable range is 5 divisions The resolution is ten division display record length For a description of the display record length see appendix 1 Example of an Edge Search of hysteresis When the edge is set to rising and the detection count is set to 2 This rising slope is not counted as an edge Detection position Specified level Search start position Serial Pattern Search Conditions The following conditions can be specified Clock Channel Clock CH Detects the status pattern in sync with the selected clock signal clock channel For the DL1740E DL1740EL You can select from CH1 to CH4 and None For the DL1720E You can select from CH1 to
122. ainaZ1a2z2 z RA i aa M 9 IM 701730 01E 8 7 Aejdsig uonewno uj pue Aejdsiq woane M e 8 4 Zooming the Waveform Setting the Waveform to Be Zoomed 6 Press the Allocation soft key The Allocation dialog box appears CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1720E Allocation all ON all OFF CH1 z cH3 4 Mathi Math2 zom ode Fornat 5 a es 21 Pos piiocation 0 104diy Fit Meas it Meas Hainaziazz Main 22 Mag 22 Pos fRng to 24 IRng to 22 Lx 40 0 000i 7 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the waveform to be zoomed If All ON is executed using jog shuttle amp SELECT all the waveforms currently displayed are selected If All OFF is executed using jog shuttle amp SELECT all the waveforms are deselected Setting the Zoom Factor 8 Press the Z1 Mag Z2 Mag soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Z1 Mag If you select Z1 on the Mode menu Z1 Mag is displayed If you select Z2 Z2 Mag is displayed If you select Z1 and Z2 Z1 Mag Z2 Mag is displayed 9 Turn the jog shuttle to set the zoom rate of zoom box Z1 00m Hode Format Zi res Zi Pos ki locatio x 0 104diy Fit Meas it Meas ain amp Z1azz Main oz tag 5 22 Pos Rng to 21 Rng to 22 O 000di 10 Likewise set the zoom rate of zoom box Z2 with Z2 Mag If you select Z1 Mag you can set the zoom rate of Z1 If you select Z2 M
123. amp SELECT to enter the LPR Server IP address of the printer server If you are using DNS you can specify the server by name Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to enter the LPR Name printer name Net Print Setup LPR Server 11 0 0 0 Enter the IP address of the printer server LPR Nane PASSTHRU Enter the printer name Printing Screen Images 5 Print screen images according to the procedures given in section 11 4 Note To use this function you must configure TCP IP according to the procedure given in section 13 2 Printing is possible on printers that support the TCP IP protocol This function cannot be used when using the FTP server function or Web server function or when performing file operations IM 701730 01E 13 11 Ieuondo SsuoHedUNWWOD 3u1 4 3 g 13 4 Entering Settings for Printing Screen Images on the Network Printer LPR Client Function Explanation As with the built in printer optional you can print the screen image on a network printer via the Ethernet network Network Printer e LPR Server You can specify the IP address of the network printer server On networks supporting DNS you can specify the host and domain by name instead of the IP address e Printer Name LPR Name You can specify the name of the printer on which screen images will be printed 13 12 IM 701730 01E 13 5 Sending Periodic or Action Mail SMTP Client Function Procedure e To exit
124. axis settings 1 MW or less 50 ms div to 50 s div except 50 ms to 5 s div for 1kW 2 MW or less 100ms div 50s div 4 MW or less 200ms div 50s div 8 MW or less 500ms div 50s div Or CH1 and CH2 on the DL1720E 17 4 IM 701730 01E 17 5 Functions Computation Analysis and Search Item Description Computation X binary computation invert differentiation integration and power spectrum The maximum record length that can be computed is as follows DL1740E DL1720E All record lengths DL1740EL When interleave is ON 4 MWord When interleave mode is OFF 2 MWord However select the range 1 kW or 10 kW for power spectrum computation FFT Phase shift You can shift the phase on CH1 to CH4 and observe the resultant signals Computation is performed using the phase shifted results History search function Search for and display waveforms from the history memory that meet specified conditions Select the search method from the following two types Zone Set an area on the screen then extract and display only those waveforms that pass through the area Pass mode or do not pass through the area Bypass mode Parameter Extract and display only the results of the automated measurement of waveform parameters that meet the specified condition Search and zoom function Search a section of the displayed waveform data and display the section expanded Select the search method f
125. cBinary 10 Press one of the soft keys Main to Z1 amp Z2 to select the range of the waveform to be saved a ja File Nam Trace File List Main 21 22 21822 11 Press the History soft key to select whether to save all the data in the history memory All or save only the selected waveform One If you select All after searching the history memory data only the waveforms that are found are saved 12 0600 All Save FILE a a File Nang Trace Range History P P Comp File List ave Exec 12 0000 all Main all GFF ON cBinary Compressing Data When Binary Is Selected for the Data Type 12 Press the P P Comp soft key to select ON or OFF e If you select ON the data is compressed and saved e If you select OFF the data is saved without compression e If P P Comp is turned ON when saving waveform data only the maximum and minimum values of the multiple data points existing at the same time position are saved Consequently the file size is reduced FILE a aFile Nam Trace Range History P P Comp File List ave Exec 12 0000 all Main all ON Binary 12 13 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 12 5 Saving Loading the Waveform Data Selecting the Save Destination Medium Directory 13 Press the File List soft key to display the File List window 14 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the save destination medium indicated by brackets Save FILE a
126. channel Probe Compensation Signal The probe compensation signal output terminal outputs the following rectangular wave signal Frequency Approximately 1 kHz Amplitude Approximately 1 V IM 701730 01E 3 11 s usWaINseayy 10 suonesedeig BUNEN el 3 5 Compensating the Probe Phase Correction Differences in the Waveform due to the Phase Correction of the Probe Correct waveform Over compensated Under compensated the gain in the high the gain in the high frequency region is up frequency region is low 3 12 IM 701730 01E 3 6 Setting the Date and Time Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC A zgr SHOT HELP located above the soft keys bz O In the procedural explanation below the term jog weasuRE cuRSOR Fi MISC G XY MEI EI setup _ pisPLaY Copy mace SAvVE O SHIFT o MATH shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of selecting setting items and entering values using C VERTICAL CCHORIZONTAL gt TRIGGER D t SEARCH v O TRIG D ia o2 VzDIV HCD oQ the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and TIME D1V ACTION DELAY 4 2 Geel ea _ e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboa
127. communication functions of Communication Interface the communication interface User s Manual CD ROM DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL IM701730 51E Explains the operating procedures of the Serial Bus Signal Analysis Function optional serial bus signal analysis function User s Manual The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functions The figures given in this manual may differ from those that actually appear on your screen Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer e Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is strictly prohibited The TCP IP software of this product and the document concerning the TCP IP software have been developed created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking Software Release 1 that has been licensed from California University e Microsoft Internet Explorer MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe Acrobat and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated e UNIX is either a registered trademark or trademark of The Open Group in the U
128. count 2 steps Exponential averaging Cannot be specified at the same time when in roll mode or when the trigger mode is Single or Single N Simple averaging Cannot be specified at the same time when in roll mode or repetitive sampling mode The maximum record length is 2 MW 4 MW The value in parentheses is valid when interleave mode is ON For details on the roll mode and repetitive sampling mode see appendix 1 Box Average Box Avg At sample rates that allow box averaging data is normally sampled at 400 MS s or 1 GS s or 800 MS s when interleave mode is ON and the sampled data is thinned according to the T div setting and stored to the acquisition memory When you use the box averaging function the operation is different The moving average is computed on a given number of data points and the result is sampled and stored to the acquisition memory In this case the internal sample rate is the same as the envelope mode For details see appendix 1 ji Input signal S at 20 MS s interleave mode ON S Box averaged data 1 a S Time IM 701730 01E 7 5 Setting the Acquisition Mode e Sample Rate and Number of Moving Average Points Sample Rate Number of Moving Average Points When interleave mode is OFF When interleave is ON 500 MS s BoxAverage unavailable 2 points every two points of 1 GS s 200 MS s 2 points every 2 points of 400 MS s 4 points every 4 points of 800 MS s 100 MS
129. disconnected by the server when using the FTP client you will be automatically reconnected if you perform a file operation This also holds true if the network drive is selected for Save to File when using an action trigger or GO NO GO When loading waveform data from a network drive the loading may take time depending on the network conditions If there is enough free space on the storage medium you can reduce the time by copying the waveform data from the network drive to the storage medium and loading the data from the storage medium As with the floppy disk drive and PC card drive you can save or load waveform data or setup data or save screen image data to a network drive via the Ethernet network Network Drives FTP Server You can enter the IP address of the FTP server the PC or workstation running the FTP server on the network to which waveform and setup data will be saved On networks supporting DNS you can specify the host and domain by name instead of the IP address Login Name You can enter the login name using up to fifteen characters The default setting is anonymous The characters that can be used are all the ASCII characters on the keyboard Password You can enter the password corresponding to the login name using up to fifteen characters The characters that can be used are all the ASCII characters on the keyboard Time Out When an FTP server is accessed from the instrument and data is not transmitted for
130. e For the DL1720E You can select from CH1 to CH2 and Math1 Level for Determining Status Thr Upper Thru Lower You can set the level for determining the status of the search target waveform The selectable range is eight divisions within the screen The resolution is 0 01 divisions The resolution is 0 01 V div Thr Upper must be greater than or equal to Thr Lower e Level for Determining High Thr Upper You can set the level for determining the high status When the search target waveform exceeds the specified level it is determined to be high e Level for Determining Low Thr Lower You can set the level for determining the low status When the search target waveform is below the specified level it is determined to be low Between Thr Upper and Thr Lower The status when the search target waveform is between the levels specified by Thr Upper and Thr Lower including the Thr Upper and Thr Lower values A and B in the figure below is determined to be the same status true as the status at the same point of the determination pattern specified on the next page and is handled as a section where the search condition is met p High 7 Thr Upper Thr Lower A B Always determined to be true Low Low lt ______ Status Determination Pattern You can set four types A to D of status determination patterns The status of sixty four points can be specified using the H High L Low and X Don t Care designations
131. in This Manual ecceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeseeeseaeesiaeeeaeeseatees vii FIOW OF Operation issenensis nna eaaa a aaa aa a aa a EEA EEE E E a aa a aaaeaii viii Names and Functions of Parts 1 1 Front Panel Rear Panel and Top Panel ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeaes 1 1 1 2 Panel Keys and Knobs emminna mensne E A ce 1 4 1 3 Display Screens Explanation of Functions 2 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram T 2 2 Vertical and Horizontal AX S ccccccccesscceceeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseaeeesaeesscaeeesseneeeseseeessneeeeseaees Vertical Sensitivity V div Vertical Position of the Waveform Input Coupling Probe Attenuation Current to Voltage Conversion Ratio Offset Voltage Bandwidth Limit Linear Scaling Horizontal Axis Time Axis 2 3 a lE E ec gdp aldose ii delhs Seeasb eee Ca ed 2 8 Trigger Source Trigger Slope and Trigger Level Trigger Type Trigger Mode Trigger Position Trigger Delay Trigger Coupling HF Rejection Trigger Gate Trigger Hysteresis Trigger Hold Off Action on Trigger 2 4 Waveform Acquisition and Display Conditions ccceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeeneetens 2 14 Record Length Interleave Mode Sampling Mode Acquisition Mode Sequential Store History Memory Display Format Display Interpolation Accumulated Display Zooming the Waveform X Y Waveform Display Snapshot Clear Trace Other Waveform Display Settin
132. in binary format e The data that is saved can be loaded to display the waveform and compute numeric data A header file that is used when analyzing the waveform on a PC is automatically created The header file cannot be opened on the instrument For details on the header file format see appendix 3 e The extension is WVF The extension of the header file name is HDR e When saving waveform data in binary format a header file is automatically created with the extension HDR When the instrument is used to copy delete change the names of or change the file attribute of waveform data files files with WVF extension the header files are automatically updated to reflect the changes Do not delete only the header file or only the waveform data file as this may cause a system malfunction e ASCII e The units of the sampled data in the acquisition memory are converted per the specified range and saved in ASCII format The data can be used to analyze the waveform on a PC e The file cannot be loaded into the instrument e The extension is CSV e Float e The units of the sampled data in the acquisition memory are converted per the specified range and saved in 32 bit floating format The data can be used to analyze the waveform on a PC e The order of the data is little endian Intel format e The file cannot be loaded into the instrument e The extension is FLD Data Size The following table shows the data size when the rec
133. internal lithium battery Battery life Approx 5 years at ambient temperature of 23 C Accessories Power cord 1 400 MHz passive probe DL1740E DL1740EL 4 DL1720E 2 Power fuse A1352EF 1 Probe case B9918EZ 1 Front panel protection cover B9989FA 1 Roll paper for printer 1 roll with specification code B5 Rubber Feet B9989EX 1 4 pcs User s Manual 1 this document Operation guide 1 Communications interface manual 1 CD ROM 17 10 IM 701730 01E 17 11 General Specifications Item Description Safety Standards Standards Compliance EN61010 1 Overvoltage category II e Pollution degree2 Emission Standards Compliance EN61326 Class A C Tick AS NZS 2064 applies to 701715 701730 701740 700988 and 700939 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 This product is a Class A for commercial environment product Operation of this product in a residential area may cause radio interference in which case the user is required to correct the interference Cable condition Also used as an external trigger external clock trigger gate input terminal Use a BNC cable and attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT2035 0930A YOKOGAWA A1190MN on one end instrument end Trigger output terminal Same as the external trigger input terminal above e Video signal output VIDEO OUT VGA terminal Use a 15 pin D Sub VGA shielded cable e USB peripheral connector Attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT1325 0530A YOKOGAWA A1181MN on on
134. is 0 one divisions e When the level of the search target waveform changes from below the specified lower limit of hysteresis to above and including the upper limit of hysteresis it is detected as a synchronization clock e When the level of the search target waveform changes from above the specified upper limit of hysteresis to below and including the lower limit of hysteresis it is detected as a synchronization clock e For all other cases it is not detected as a synchronization clock Waveform to Search The search target waveforms are all the waveforms that are not selected as the clock channel For each waveform you can set the determination status Pattern and the level and hysteresis for determining the status e Determination Status The status of each waveform can be specified using the H High L Low and X Don t Care symbols H Status When Thru Upper Is Exceeded L Status When Thr Lower is Not Reached X No determination e Level You can set the level used to determine whether the status is high or low The selectable range is eight divisions within the screen The resolution is 0 01 divisions e Hysteresis You can set the hysteresis The selectable range is 0 3 divisions to 4 0 divisions The resolution is 0 one divisions e When the search target waveform exceeds the specified upper limit of hysteresis it is determined to be high e When the search target waveform is below the specified lower limit of hyster
135. is OFF 2 Since the number of data points acquired is 2 MW only eight divisions of the waveform is displayed along the time axis In addition the trigger position in this case is set by taking eight divisions as 100 3 Box averaging is not available on the DL1740E 4 The values inside the thick frame are for repetitive sampling mode App 8 IM 701730 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Specified Record Length 4 MW When set to a mode other than envelope mode Rep Repetitive sampling mode When set to envelope mode When interleave mode is OFF Display record length Word Display record length Word When interleave mode is ON Display record length Word Display record length Word When interleave mode is OFF Display record length Word When interleave mode is ON Sample rate S s Display record length Word 5 M 5 M 5 Me 5 Me 5 M 800 M 5 Me 4M 4M 4M 4M 4M 800 M 4M 5 M 5 M 5 Me 5M 5 M 800 M 5 M 5 M 5 M 5 M 5 M 5 M 800 M 5 M 4M 4M 4M 4M 4M 800 M 4M 5 M 5 M 5 M 5 M 5 M 800 M 5 M 5 M 5 M 5 M 5 mM 5 M 800 M 5 M Roll mode display 4M 4M 4M 4M 4M 800 M 4M 5 M 5 M 5 M 5 M 5 M 8
136. is greater than the number of display points Multiple data existing on the same display line on the time axis are connected by a line and displayed When the display record length is less than the number of display points The display is interpolated see section 2 4 ecord length loaded into Sampled data the acquisition memory P o y o R i Display record length LP o n fo Voltage axis y On the screen gt Time axis m 500 lines Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length The sample rate and record length of the data loaded into the acquisition memory changes when the time axis setting is changed For more details about this relationship see appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Sample Rate and Record Length 2 6 IM 701730 01E 2 2 Vertical and Horizontal Axes Relationship between the Time Axis Setting and Sampling Mode Depending on the time axis setting you can switch the mode used to sample the input signal sampling mode The time axis settings that allow the sampling mode to be changed vary depending on the acquisition mode and other settings For more details about this relationship see appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Sample Rate and Record Length e Realtime Sampling Mode By changing the time ax
137. key menu or jog shuttle menu START STOP and the ON OFF conditions of channels are stored Selecting the Storage Destination of the Setup Data You can store data to any of three internal memories Store 1 to Store 3 If setup data is already stored the stored data is overwritten with the new data However an error message is displayed if the data is locked Selecting Setup Data to Recall You can select stored data from any of three internal memories Store 1 to Store 3 You can only select a memory to which setup data was stored Note The stored setup data is not cleared even if you initialize the settings on the instrument 12 2 IM 701730 01E 12 2 Floppy Disks and PC Cards A floppy disk drive or PC card either type is selected at the time of purchase is available as an internal storage medium Floppy Disks Floppy Disks That Can Be Used The following type of 3 5 floppy disk can be used Formatting is also possible on the instrument 2HD Formatted to 1 44 MB using MS DOS Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Floppy Disk Drive Turn the disk so that the label faces left and insert shutter first into the slot Insert the disk until the eject button pops out Removing the Disk from the Floppy Disk Drive Check that the access indicator is turned OFF and press the eject button CAUTION Do not remove the floppy disk or turn the instrument OFF when the access indicator is illuminated Doing so can damage the storage
138. keys In the procedural explanation below the term jog shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of selecting setting items and entering values using the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and 4 2 For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press the MISC The MISC menu appears 2 Press the Network soft key The Network menu appears tat ibratio nenote Network system iew Control Conf ig A A 3 Press the Others soft key The Others dialog box opens a a TCP IP User Mail Setup Account Setup fa a Net Drive f Net Prin Setup Setup others ieee ear ear List Turning the FTP Passive Mode ON and OFF 4 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select ON or OFF Setting the LPR Timeout Time 4 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set LPR Time Out Setting the SMTP Timeout Time 4 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set SMTP Time Out Others FTP Passive LPR Tine Out sec SMTP Time Out sec Time Difference Fron GMT Time Hour Minute Sets FTP passive mode Set the LPR Timeout time Exec at Power On Server Time Out sec Set the SMTP Timeout time IM 701730 01E 13 49 Ieuondo suonesaiunwwos 3u1 4 3 g 13 10 Setting the FTP Passive Mode and LPR SMTP Timeout Explanation You can enter special settings related t
139. length display record length Version number of the instrument Phase information lead lag Name of each waveform Actual display offset of the phase shifted waveform DisplayPointNo PhaseShift IM 701730 01E App 15 Ey xipueddy Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format Creation of ASCII Header Files When waveform data Waveform is stored to a floppy disk or PC card the following two files will be created automatically in the DL_WAVE directory Waveform display data file wvf ASCII header file hdr The waveform data file can be recalled to the instrument using the FILE menu The ASCII header files explained here cannot be viewed on the instrument Use the data such as when analyzing the waveforms on your PC 1 Endian mode when saving data Big Motorola 68000 family data Ltl Intel 86 family data Storage format of the binary waveform data Trace Groups into blocks each block for a single waveform Block Groups into blocks each block for a given time interval Start point of the binary waveform data Offset from the beginning of the file Maximum number of blocks in the group Maximum number of blocks applies if the number of blocks varies between waveforms Y axis conversion equation for each waveform Y axis value VResolution x raw data VOffset Data Type ISn n byte signed integer lUn n byte unsigned integer FSn n byte signed real number FUn n byte unsigned
140. m cone Dual Capture Window Address http di1700e_1 DataCapture2htm vco inks a Control Panel image Cantal Data Control Monitor and Capture Capture a Play Stop Update Interval Abort Capture Exec 10s x Data Capture Display 2004 06 09 13 35 02 al Normal Running 130251 5MS S_200HS div Waveform Binary v Load Color Setup Load ON X Input Password instrument Cantraf Acquisition Display Stat Sto Foxe P Sings Channel Label Chant I Display I TraceLabel Position I ScaleValue 0 00 Div k History File HistoryNo Trace Curent H Al Ei Newest Oldest Range DISPLAY Main z One All Interpol Next I Confirmation Panel Update Single Sine DFF 172 DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL screen image Control panel IM 701730 01E 13 29 Ieuondo suonesaiunwwos 3u1 34 3 g 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Displaying and Saving the Screen Image Image Control The screen image of the instrument can be displayed on the PC screen and saved e Updating the Screen Image Monitor amp Capture Play Click Play The update indicator illuminates in green and the updating of the screen image at the specified display update interval starts see below Stop Acquisition of waveform data stops The update indicator turns off and the updating of the screen image stops Update Click Update The screen image is updated Int
141. of the Search Measurement Parameter 13 Press the Upper Lower soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Upper or Lower If you select Upper you can move the upper limit of the determination range If you select Lower you can move the lower limit of the determination range Fenn Hamog Upper Logic fT Rangei S aal 5 000diy Search Lower be OR JET Fanges Exec 14 Turn the jog shuttle to set the upper and lower limits of the determination range 15 Repeat steps 5 to 14 to set Param1 to Param4 Select Condition fa scan Param Param FF N OUT cuit PP Selecting the Search Logic 16 Press the Logic soft key to select AND or OR Search HISTORY 5T Rangei 5 000diy Search 5T Rangez Exec 5 000di Select Condition Ja Ties Upper Logic Paran tup 5 Q000E Parami FF N OUT a P P Jo Louer a E OR 10 10 IM 701730 01E 10 3 Searching the History Waveforms Using Automatic Measurement of Parameters History Search Setting the Search Range 17 18 Press the T Range1 T Rangez2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to T Range1 T Range2 or both T Range1 and T Range 2 lf you select T Range1 you can set the left edge of the search range If you select T Range2 you can set the right edge of the search range If you select both T Range1 and T Range2 you can move the search range without changing the spacing between the two The value of the digit being specif
142. of the Start Point on the screen Edge detection reference point Thr Upper i Thr Lower i B gt lt A by gS As A Interval A B Interval 2 A Search start point when a search is executed C lt Interval Start Point Rising and falling edges are not detected in the hysteresis range including the upper and lower limits of hysteresis of the Clock CH Parallel Pattern Search Conditions The following conditions can be specified Clock Channel Detects the status pattern in sync with the selected clock signal clock channel For the DL1740E DL1740EL You can select from CH1 to CH4 and None For the DL1720E You can select from CH1 to CH2 and None When the Clock Channel Is Set to None The status patterns of all waveforms are determined 10 26 IM 701730 01E 10 4 Searching Waveforms Using the Search and Zoom Function When the Clock Channel Is Set to CH1 to CH4 2 You can set the detection slope level and hysteresis of the selected synchronization clock signal e Slope You can select which slope edge rising or falling of the synchronization clock is to be detected Rising slope Falling slope e Level You can set the level for detecting the synchronization clock The selectable range is eight divisions within the screen The resolution is 0 01 divisions e Hysteresis You can set the hysteresis The selectable range is 0 3 divisions to 4 0 divisions The resolution
143. on page 10 40 Setting the measurement range steps 20 and 21 on page 10 41 Setting distal mesial and proximal values steps 22 to 31 on page 10 41 Setting high and low values step 32 on page 10 42 Executing Aborting Measurement and Statistical Processing of History Waveforms 5 6 Press the START STOP key to stop waveform acauisition Press the Measure Exec soft key Measurement and statistical processing are executed on the history waveforms The words Measure Exec change to Measure Abort To abort the measurement and statistical processing press the Measure Abort soft key The measurement and statistical processing are aborted and the words Measure Abort change to Measure Exec MEASURE _ pT Rangel Measure 5 0004i Next Exec jT Range2 172 5 000di Mode a a a Item Delay Show History Setup Setup Result Statistics Statistical values display example lt lt flamnp TUR gt gt cn CUDUDOUPW OOD UP UROD PODER OO UU POU OPO TO POUR OOO MOTEL a MS Tareik gt SAA TZET Sa bed Le P PULCI LEDIGA Max C1 12 1S06nv Lt Max 1 062504 Max 133 333M Min 1 041670 Min 12 500mU AYg 1 04657U AYg 17 402mU iSdy 8 83714nyU iSdy 83714nU Cnt 17 Cnt 2 Displaying Measured Values 7 The procedure is the same as steps 9 to 15 on page 10 48 This section explains the setup procedures for performing measurement and statistical processi
144. operating correctly If Pass is displayed it is operating correctly If Failed is displayed contact your YOKOGAWA dealer Floppy Disk Drive or PC Card Test Tests whether the floppy disk or PC card drive is operating properly If Failed is displayed after executing the test contact your YOKOGAWA dealer Included on certain models only Printer Test Tests whether the built in printer is operating properly If the tint is printed correctly the operation is normal If the printer does not print correctly contact your YOKOGAWA dealer Accuracy Test Tests the accuracy of the A D converter If Failed is displayed contact your YOKOGAWA dealer Key Test Tests whether the front panel keys are operating properly If the name of the key being pressed appears highlighted the key is operating correctly If it appears in inverse video contact your YOKOGAWA dealer e Soft Key Test Tests whether the soft keys are operating properly If the characters on the keyboard used to enter values and strings are entered correctly the soft keys are operating correctly If the keys do not operate correctly contact your YOKOGAWA dealer IM 701730 01E 16 9 a uondedsuy pue eoueusjuley BunooysajqnoiL 16 4 Display an Overview of the System Conditions Overview Procedure To exit the menu during operation press ESC Cr PHASE ACQ START STOP ee 2 SAVE O SHIFT VERTICAL lo
145. or printer type is set to BJ You can select the print resolution of screen images to match the resolution of the BJ printer on the network 180dpi 300dpi 360dpi 600dpi Comment A comment text of up to twenty characters can be printed at the bottom of the print page The entered comment is displayed at the lower right section of the screen Turning Color Printing ON and OFF You can select whether to print in color only if the page description language or printer type is set to PCL5 ESC P ESC P2 or Bu ON Outputs in color the same as on the screen However the background is omitted and grids and other outlines are printed in black OFF Prints the image using the same colors as the image printed using the built in printer 11 12 IM 701730 01E Chapter 12 Saving and Loading Data 12 1 Storing and Recalling Setup Data Procedure CLEAR TRACE p PLAY COPY IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH D O TAC D xCD n a a CD smece ENHANCED vsDIV TIME sDIV o Es ACTION DELAY Ea os oT LT ILIS FILE I MISC conoad MATH A RESET SELECT xY MENU MENU PHASE ACQ START STOP EA e To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys e Fora description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 OF f 1 Press SETUP The SETUP menu appears 2 Press the Store Recall soft key The Str Rcll menu appears SET ra
146. power cord plug to the power connector on the rear panel Use the power cord that came with the package 3 Connect the other end of the cord to an outlet that meets the conditions below The AC outlet must be of a three prong type with a protective earth ground terminal The AC outlet must be of a three prong type with a protective earth ground terminal Rated supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC 220 to 240 VAC Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 132 VAC 198 to 264 VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Permitted supply voltage frequency range 48 to 63 Hz Maximum power consumption when using the printer 200 VA The instrument can use a 100 V or a 200 V system for the power supply Check that the voltage supplied to the instrument is less than or equal to the maximum rated voltage of the provided power cord see page ii before using it Main power switch 3 prong outlet 2l Power cord included in the package IM 701730 01E 3 5 s usWaINseayy 10 suoNesedaig BUNEN el 3 3 Connecting the Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF Turning the Main Power Switch ON and OFF The main power switch is located in the right center of the rear panel Press the switch on the ON side to turn the power ON and on the OFF side to turn the power OFF MAIN POWER OFF ON O Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF Items to Be Checked before Turning ON the Power That
147. press a CH key before operating the V DIV knob to display the menu for the channel the channel becomes controllable using the V DIV knob The indicator to the left of each CH key illuminates when the channel is ON There are two channel keys CH1 and CH2 on the DL1720E and four channel keys CH1 to CH4 on the DL1740E DL1740EL The notation CH1 to CH4 2 is used in this manual to indicate that CH1 to CH2 or CH1 to CH4 can be controlled or configured on the DL1720E and the DL1740E DL1740EL respectively Note The setup menu used to specify whether the offset voltage is applied to the measured and computed results is located in the menu that appears when the MISC key see section 1 7 is pressed V DIV Knob Section 5 2 e Sets the vertical sensitivity Before turning this knob press one of the CH1 to CH4 2 keys to show the menu for the channel and have the channel selected If you change the vertical sensitivity setting when waveform acquisition is stopped the new setting takes effect when you restart waveform acquisition In the attenuation current to voltage conversion ratio setting of the probe if the probe attenuation is specified the voltage sensitivity is set If the current to voltage conversion ratio is specified the current sensitivity is set PRESET Key Section 5 7 e Displays a menu used to automatically set the probe attenuation current to voltage conversion ratio V div offset voltage trigger level and
148. rate to the display range For a description of the sample rate see appendix 1 Search Start Point You can set the search start point The selectable range is 5 divisions The resolution is ten division display record length For a description of the display record length see appendix 1 Auto Scroll Search Conditions The following conditions can be specified When auto scroll is in progress you can only set the direction and speed of the auto scroll operation Auto Scroll Direction You can select the auto scroll direction lt lt The zoom box automatically scrolls to the left It can scroll up to the left end of the screen gt gt The zoom box automatically scrolls to the right It can scroll up to the right end of the screen Speed You can set the auto scroll speed The available setting range is 1 to 7 The larger the value the faster the scrolling IM 701730 01E 10 29 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy es 10 4 Searching Waveforms Using the Search and Zoom Function Window for Displaying the Found Waveform When the zoom waveform display mode is Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 you can select the zoom waveform display frame Z1 or Z2 where the waveforms that are found are to be displayed For all other modes the menu does not appear because the selection is not necessary Detection Count and Redisplay of the Detected Waveform Detection Count For serial pattern parallel pattern and pulse wi
149. real number Bm m bit data X axis conversion equation for each waveform X axis value HResolution x Data No 1 HOffset App 16 IM 701730 01E Appendix 4 List of Default Values Key Soft Key Default Setting CH1 thru 4 or CH1 thru 2 on the DL1720E Display ON Position Odiv Coupling DC1 MQ Probe 10 1 Offset 0 00 V Bandwidth Full Variable 50 V Linear Scl OFF Label Channel name Vidiv 50V div T div 1ms div PRESET Select All Type CMOS 5 V Probe 10 1 MODE Mode Auto SIMPLE Source CH1 Level OV Slope Rising Coupling DC HF Reject OFF Hysteresis Small Hold Off 0 08 us POSITON Position 50 DELAY Delay 0S ACTION Buzzer OFF Save to File OFF Hard Copy OFF Image Save OFF ACQ Count Infinite Send Mail OFF Mail Count 100 ACQ Record Length 10k Mode Normal Count Infinite Interleave OFF Repetitive OFF Time Base Int HISTORY Select Record 0 Display Mode One Start Rec 0 End Rec Oldest number Show Map No 1 Search Mode OFF ZOOM Mode Main Key Soft Key Default Setting SEARCH Type Edge Z1 Mag x2 Z1 Pos 0 div DISPLAY Format Quad DL1720E Dual Interpolation Sine Graticule Grid Scale Value OFF Trace Label OFF Accumul e OFF Translucent OFF Mapping Auto X Y Mode T Y FILE File Item Setup MEASURE Mode OFF Item Setup Source CH1 Item OFF Delay Setup Source CH1 Mode OFF 1Cycle Mode OFF T Range1 5 000 div T Range
150. required 7 When the data capture measurement trend or command script function of the Web server function is used for the first time three files Msvbvm60 dll cmdlgjp dll and comdlg32 0cx are automatically downloaded from the Microsoft Web site and installed in the PC At this point a dialog box for confirming the installation appears Click OK You may need to restart the PC during the installation After the installation completes successfully proceed to step 9 on the next page Security Warning s x Do you want to install and run Microsoft Common Dialog Control signed on 5 24 2000 6 47 AM and distributed by Microsoft Corporation Publisher authenticity verified by VeriSign Commercial Software Publishers CA Caution Microsoft Corporation asserts that this content is safe You should only install view this content if you trust Microsoft Corporation to make that assertion JT Always trust content from Microsoft Corporation Yes More Info or Security Warning 7 x Do you want to install and run Microsoft Runtime signed on 12 7 2000 4 01 AM and distributed by Microsoft Corporation Publisher authenticity verified by VeriSign Commercial Software Publishers CA Caution Microsoft Corporation asserts that this content is safe You should only install view this content if you trust Microsoft Corporation to make that assertion JT Always trust content from Microsoft Corporation Y
151. s 4 points every 4 points of 400 MS s 8 points every 8 points of 800 MS s 50 MS s 8 points every 8 points of 400 MS s 16 points every 16 points of 800 MS s 20 MS s 16 points every 20 points of 400 MS s 32 points every 40 points of 800 MS s 10 MS s 32 points every 40 points of 400 MS s 64 points every 80 points of 800 MS s 5 MS s 64 points every 80 points of 400 MS s 128 points every 160 points of 800 MS s 2 MS s 128 points every 200 points of 400 MS s 256 points every 400 points of 800 MS s 1 MS s 256 points every 400 points of 400 MS s_ 256 points every 800 points of 800 MS s 500 kS s or 256 points every 800 points of 400 MS s 256 points every 1600 points of 800 MS s less The interval at which data is resampled varies depending on the sample rate However the maximum number of data points that is box averaged is 256 e Possible Record Lengths DL1720E 250 kWords or less 500 kWords or less when in interleave mode DL1740E 500 kWords or less 1 MWords or less when in interleave mode DL1740EL 2 MWords or less 4 MWords or less when in interleave mode e Possible Sample Rates The rate can be set at 200 MS s or less or 500 MS s or less when in interleave mode If the sample rate exceeds 200 MS s or 500 MS s when in interleave mode the acquisition mode is set to normal mode even when box average is specified Acquisition Count You can set the acquisition count If you set the value to Infinite acquisition will continue until y
152. see section 9 2 gt Normally auto scaling is performed when computed waveforms are displayed However you can also select manual scaling When auto scaling is used the vertical center line level and sensitivity of the display frame are automatically determined from the computed waveform and the computed waveform is displayed When manual scaling is used you can set the center and sensitivity as necessary 1 Voltage in the case of voltage waveforms 2 Voltage per division in the case of voltage waveforms IM 701730 01E 2 21 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 2 5 Waveform Computation Power Spectrum Display lt For the setup procedure see section 9 6 gt The power spectrum of the input signal can be computed and displayed by taking the FFT Fast Fourier Transform This is useful when you wish to check the frequency distribution of the input signal Tein eT Y 9 1797E 00 Y 3 Power spectrum waveform You can select the time window from Rectangular Hanning and Flattop The rectangular window is best suited to transient signals such as impulse waves which attenuate completely within the time window The Hanning and flattop windows allow continuity of the signal by gradually attenuating the parts of the signal located near the ends of the time window down to the 0 level Hence it is best suited to continuous signals With the Hanning window the frequency resolution is high compared to the fla
153. set the HF rejection of each channel to OFF 20MHz or 15kHz 14 Press ESC The Level Coupling dialog box closes Setting the Number of Times Condition B Is to Be Met 15 Press the Count soft key Type lx Count faHold OFF et Pattern Levels us A gt BIND Coup1 ing 1 0 08 16 Turn the jog shuttle to set the count Pressing RESET resets the value to 1 Setting the Hold Off 17 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in section 6 4 Note e The status settings of conditions A and B apply to the A gt B N trigger and A Delay B trigger The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to both simple and enhanced triggers IM 701730 01E 6 15 s n el 6 8 Setting the A gt B N Trigger ENHANCED Explanation A trigger is activated the nth time condition B becomes true after condition A has become true Setting Conditions A and B e Status of Each Channel You can select from the following three choices H Above the preset trigger level L Below the preset trigger level X Don t Care e Condition You can select from the following two choices Enter Trigger is activated when all channels match the specified condition Exit Trigger is activated when any of the channels no longer match the specified condition Setting the Number of Times Pattern B Is to Be Met 1 to 108 times Setting the Trigger Level Selectable range Eight divisions of the
154. settings of the above items that would cause the screen image to change Clear the check box to not update automatically History File HistoryNo Trace Curent H Al Newest Oldest Range Main X One All V Confirmation Panel Update Note You cannot set the history waveform display when the instrument is making measurements e Setting the history waveform display when there are no history waveforms results in error The time out time on the PC when controlling the instrument is thirty seconds Depending on the condition of the instrument the time out time may be reached causing control of the instrument to be terminated 13 34 IM 701730 01E 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Displaying the Measurement Trend of Waveform Parameters Before using this function check that the communication interface of the instrument is set to Network see page 13 23 Click the Measurement Trend icon on the Web server window The Measurement Trend window in which the trend display of the waveform parameter values can be set appears Web Server Window corets DLI740E F Measurement Trend Window vali Measurement Trend Page Graphl r Trace Parameter Chant None MarkerPosition 0 00 Div e lt Control panel Graph Control pane Trace Parameter Chant None MarkerPosition 0 00 Div Common r Data Number Interval ho gt 2s Range Updat Range 0 00 Div Urdate_
155. signal is high the waveform is acquired Active Low When the external signal is high the waveform is not acquired even when the trigger condition is met When the trigger condition is met when the external signal is low the waveform is acquired When trigger gate is set to Active A gt B N trigger and A delay B trigger cannot be selected Level High or Low is determined by referring to the external trigger level See section 6 6 An external signal can be alternately applied to the EXT TRIG IN EXT CLOCK IN TRIG GATE IN terminal on the rear panel or front panel on the DL1720E Trigger Gate Input Terminal The trigger gate input terminal is also used as an external trigger input terminal The terminal is used when you wish to activate the trigger using an external signal Item Specification Connector type BNC Maximum input voltage 40 V DC ACpeak or 28 Vrms when the frequency is 10 kHz or Frequency range DC to 50 MHz Input impedance Approximately 1 MQ and approximately 20 pF Input range 2 V for the DL1740E DL1740EL 1 V when set to the 1 V range on the DL1720E 10 V when set to the 10 V range on the DL1720E Minimum input amplitude 0 1 Vp p for the DL1740E DL1740EL 0 1 Vp p when set to the 1 V range on the DL1720E 1 Vp p when set to the 10 V range on the DL1720E Minimum pulse width 10 ns or more for high and low Input terminal For the DL1740E DL1740EL For the DL17420E terminal on the rear pane
156. siieeeesdiaavereneniee eae 6 40 Waveform Acquisition 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 Starting Stopping Waveform Acquisition cc cceceeeeceeeeeeesneeeeseeeeeeaeeesseeesseeeeeseaeees 7 1 Setting the Record Length cceeceesceeseeceeeesseeeeeecseeeeaeeeeeeeseeseaeeeaeeseaeesieeseaeeseaeeeeetaas 7 2 Using Interleave Mode w si cc ccceececctvetus becvaneevsun cd eelin es dueeteecuned alee evi cae dese ceeventeveeuaneverteeent 7 3 Turning Repetitive Sampling Mode ON and OFF cecceecceeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteaeeeeeeteatens 7 4 Setting the ACQUiSitiON MOE e a a r re a a aa a aG 7 5 Performing Sequential Store SINGLE N Mode eeecesceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeeeaees 7 8 IM 701730 01E Contents Chapter 8 Waveform Display and Information Display 8 1 Changing the Display Format 0 ccce ee eects cee ete eeee cee eeae sees tae see sae tees saeseaeeeeeaeeeeaaas 8 1 8 2 Setting the Display Interpolation Method cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeseaeeeeeteaeeeneeeeaees 8 3 8 3 ACCUMUTating WavefOrMs 000 eeeceeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaaeeteaeeeeaeeeesaeesesaeeeseeeeennaeeeeaes 8 5 8 4 Zooming the Waveform eesceeeesceeseneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeenaeeeseaeeessaaeeeenaeeeseneteneaes 8 7 8 5 Displaying the X Y Waveform 0 0 0 ee ccceeseeeeeneeeeeeneeeeseeeeeneeeeseaeeessaneeesaeeeseeeesenneeeesaeees 8 10 8 6 Taking Snapshots and Clearing Traces cccceeceeseeteeee
157. steps for Math2 Press the M1 Setup soft key The M1 Setup dialog box opens C mm 2 Display aM Setup M2 Label DFF oN C3 C4 Math2 C1 C2 Mathi OFF px 1 Dispiat ii Label Setting the Equation Scaling Unit Integration Start Point Number of Computed Points and the Time Window 2 3 4 Explanation Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the power spectrum computation operator PS and the waveform on which to perform computation When the M1 Setup dialog box is closed by pressing ESC or another key the specified equation appears in the M1 Setup menu column Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the scaling unit computation start point the number of computed points and the time window of computed waveform Math1 Press ESC The M1 Setup dialog box closes Select PS Mi Setup Select the waveform on which to perform computation Operation Source Scale Center Sensitivity Unit Start Point FFT Points FFT Window puto Mamar a a r Set the scaling used to display computed waveform Math1 to Auto auto scaling or Manual manual scaling Dt scaling is set to Manual set the vertical center line level on the screen voltage value if set to voltage and the sensitivity voltage per division if set to voltage Set the unit of computed waveform Math1 Set the computation start point Select the number of comput
158. storage medium of floppy disk PC card external USB device or network drive when the Ethernet interface option is installed For details on saving data to the network drive see section 13 3 Data Format and Extension Data in the following formats can be saved to a specified storage medium The extension that is automatically attached and the data size reference value are indicated below Data Format Extension Data Size TIFF TIF Approximately 40 KB approximately 310 KB BMP BMP Approximately 40 KB approximately 310 KB Post Script PS Approx 80 KB PNG PNG Approximately 6 KB approximately 14 KB JPEG JPG Approximately 400 KB approximately 400 KB 1 When color is OFF 2 The file size inside the parentheses is for the case when color is ON Color Mode You can select the color mode only when the data format is set to TIFF BMP PNG or JPEG ON Output using 256 colors ON Reverse Do not output the background of the screen in color ON Gray Output the data using a tint of sixteen gray levels OFF Output in black and white Compress Mode When the output format is set to BMP the data can be output by compressing using RLE However data is not compressed if the color is OFF IM 701730 01E 12 35 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Burnes 12 9 Saving Screen Image Data Comment A comment of up to twenty five characters can be added to the lower section of the screen and saved Comments are option
159. stored using the store recall function English Japanese language setting USB keyboard language Canceling Initialization If you initialize the settings by mistake you can press the Undo Initialize soft key to return to the conditions that existed before the initialization Initializing All the Settings When the power is turned ON while holding down the RESET key all settings excluding the date time setting display ON OFF is initialized are initialized to the factory defaults Setup data that has been stored using the store recall function is also initialized If you initialize the instrument in this fashion the settings cannot be set back to their original condition 4 14 IM 701730 01E 4 5 Executing Auto Setup Procedure 8 LLIS Ee msc conosco mati feser tect MENO MENU Pane Aca aca srarrssror S DIgpLAY COPY IMAGE SOn GED To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys e Fora description of the operation using a USB TIME DIV a D o smece ENHANCED ACTION DELAY ee keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 ST f suoljeiodg uowwog s Executing Auto Setup 1 2 Press SETUP Press the Auto Setup soft key Auto setup executes When auto setup is executed waveform acquisition starts automatically Before Auto setup 2004 04 14 13 40 41 4 Stopped 538 F qiook Normal SOOMS s 2HSAliv
160. that meet all search conditions of Zone1 to Zone4 OR Searches for waveforms that meet one of the search conditions of Zone1 to Zone4 Search Range You can search the history waveforms in the range specified by Start Rec and End Rec of the HISTORY menu see section 10 1 Search Method Search is performed in order from the newest history waveform Post Search History Map Search Results The record numbers and time stamps of the waveforms that are found can be listed on the history map If you set the Search Mode to OFF in the HISTORY menu or turn OFF Zone1 to Zone4 and execute the search the search result is reset Note ___ If you wish to search for a computed waveform whose computation conditions were changed during or after waveform acquisition you must first change the display mode to All 10 8 IM 701730 01E 10 3 Searching the History Waveforms Using Automatic Measurement of Parameters History Search Procedure lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 23 gt SNAP HELP l VOO e To exit the menu during operation press ESC X Y MENU _ MENU UEASUREJOURSOR Cau mse Jaonoad war 2 RESET GELE located above the soft keys setup Tpsecay ory mace save a sHFr e For a description of the operation using a USB Sem A CHORIZONTAL A D i anon keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 a ores cane TIME D1V ACTION DELAY a 1
161. the Measured Values of the Waveform Parameters e Start Click Start Stop The indicator illuminates in yellow and retrieval of the measured values of waveform parameters starts at the specified retrieve interval At the same time Microsoft Excel starts and the measured values and trend graphs are displayed drawn If the statistical display is turned ON the statistics are also displayed The retrieval of the measured value of waveform parameter continues until the operation is stopped Stop e Click Start Stop while the trend display is in progress The indicator turns OFF and the display and drawing of the measured values and trend graph stop e If you attempt to save the data to a file or close Excel while the trend display is in progress a runtime error occurs In this case select No on the runtime error dialog box and close the dialog box Then click Start Stop on the measurement trend window to stop the trend display After stopping the trend display save the file or close Excel Range2 0 00 Div y Statistics Start Stop Indicator Display Example of Measured Values Trend Graphs and Statistics Measurement Trend FAE JET Trend graph Graph1 Chani AVERAGE 1 050E 02 1 433E 02 1 383E 02 2 333E 02 0 000E 00 2 150E 02 1 117E 02 2 058E 02 1 667 E 02 1 000E 02 1 358E 02 2 066E 02 2 500E 02 1 800E 02 2 000E 02 1 508E 02 2 458E 02 1 042E 02 2 775
162. the instrument is properly installed 3 2 Installing the Instrument e That the power cord is properly connected Connecting the Power Cord page 3 5 Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF The power switch is located in the lower left corner of the front panel The power switch is a push button Press once to turn it ON and press again to turn it OFF e k 3 rere Power Up Operation Self test and calibration start automatically when the power switch is turned ON If the check results are satisfactory the normal waveform display screen will appear Note Allow at least ten seconds after turning OFF the main power switch and the power switch before turning it ON again e If self test and calibration do not start when the power is turned ON or if the normal waveform display screen does not appear turn OFF the main power switch and the power switch and check the following points That the power cord is plugged in properly That the correct voltage is coming to the power outlet see page 3 5 That the power fuse has not blown gt See section 16 5 If the instrument still fails to power up when the main power switch and the power switch is turned ON after checking these points contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 3 6 IM 701730 01E 3 3 Connecting the Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF Warm Up and Calibration To ensure accurate measurements allow the instrument to warm up
163. the network environment and browser settings Check with your network administrator to select the zone General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings Mica Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet Local intranet This zone contains all Web sites that Sites are on your organization s intranet Security level for this zone Custom Custom settings To change the settings click Custom Level To use the recommended settings click Default Level Custom Level Default Level 13 26 IM 701730 01E 13 7 Using the Web Server Function 12 Click Custom Level The Security Settings dialog box opens Settings ActiveX controls and plug ins Download signed Activex controls Disable Enable Prompt C Download unsigned Activex controls Disable Enable Prompt C Initialize and script Activex controls not marked as safe Disable Enable O Prompt AA tuum ActiunY ankeaa and mln ine of E Reset custom settings Reset to Miedumiow Ret ma 13 Enter the security settings as shown in the following table Item Security Level Run ActiveX controls and plug ins Enable Script ActiveX controls marked safe for scripting Enable Execute the control script Download signed ActiveX controls Display the dialog box 14 Click OK
164. the screen The pointer changes to Left click on the V div value of the channel you wish to set The target V div value is enclosed in a box and selected Turning the mouse wheel upward increases the V div value turning it downward decreases the V div value Setting the T div Point near the T div value displayed at the upper right corner of the screen The pointer changes to Turning the mouse wheel upward increases the T div value turning it downward decreases the T div value Moving the pointer to the position indicated below changes the pointer display N You can change the V div or T div setting by turning the wheel in this condition 2004 04 14 10 18 45 j jiok Normal Stopped 536 El SMS s_200HS liv Rs z000 lt Maint 10k gt gt CH3 10 1 0 500 Vzdiv DC Full ENI Edge CH3 F Auto 0 355 V TEST CH3 1000 ous ogo v 1000 bus Display Position Coupling Probe fe Offset Banduidth Next OFF PN O OOdiv DCMR 10 1 9 000 U Full 172 4 12 IM 701730 01E 4 4 Initializing Settings Procedure oe SNAP HELP Or N O O To exit the menu during operation press ESC P e mse Ese mamy located above the soft keys pippcay Copy mace SAVE a SHIFT e For a description of the operation using a USB VERTICAL a c HORZONTAL v Ea 7 keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 ao vsDIv TIME DIV o Es O ACTION DELAY
165. the trigger source signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as is Turning the HF Rejection ON and OFF Specify 15 kHz or 20 MHz if you wish to use a signal that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger source signal as the trigger source Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Notes on Setting the Pattern Trigger If you change the trigger type setting the pattern trigger setting is disabled However if the trigger type is set to pattern trigger again the previous setting is activated The operation is set to auto mode even when the trigger mode is set to auto level mode You can set the trigger status to all trigger sources On the channel selected to be the clock channel select the trigger slope e When activating a trigger in synchronization with the clock signal if the setup time of the pattern for the clock signal is 1 ns or more keep the hold time at 1 ns or more IM 701730 01E 6 23 s n el 6 11 Activating a Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 and Time Out Trigger ENHANCED Procedure lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 10 gt e To exit the menu during operation press ESC won OO located above the soft keys Or ZO e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog e CEE msc eonosco am cajera CED feser tect shuttle amp SELECT refers to
166. trigger section 6 8 8 Press ESC The Level Coupling dialog box closes Note The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to both simple and enhanced triggers Explanation You can set window triggers for the signals input on channels 1 through 4 or channels 1 and 2 for the DL1720E Selecting the Trigger Conditions e Width Trigger e IN The interval over which the trigger source is within a specified width is assumed to be the time over which the condition is met e OUT The interval over which the trigger source is outside a specified width is assumed to be the time over which the condition is met e OR Trigger e IN A trigger is activated when the trigger source enters a specified width e OUT A trigger is activated when the trigger source exits from a specified width IN Trigger is activated OR trigger OUT Trigger is activated OR trigger Width Window Width Window Center P Center EN Trigger is activated EN 7 OR trigger Time over which the condition is met Time over which the condition is met Width trigger Width trigger Setting a Window A window is defined by its center level and width Selectable Range of Center Eight divisions of the screen setting resolution of 0 01 div for example 0 01 V when 1 V div Selectable Range of Width 4 divisions centered on Level setting resolution of 0 02 div for example 0 02 V when 1 V div Note The wi
167. used when you wish to observe only the amplitude of the AC signal eliminating the DC component from the input signal Input terminal Vertical o control 1 MQ circuit DC1 MQ The input signal is directly coupled to the attenuator of the vertical control circuit Use this setting if you wish to observe the entire input signal DC component and AC component Input uS Vertical control 4Mo circuit DC50 Q This setting is similar to DC1 MQ described above except the input impedance is 50 Q Use caution because the allowable maximum input voltage is decreased Input terminal Vertical control 502 circuit GND The input signal is coupled to the ground not to the attenuator of the vertical control circuit You can use this setting to check the ground level on the screen Input terminal 7 Vertical g control circuit 2 4 IM 701730 01E 2 2 Vertical and Horizontal Axes Probe Attenuation Current to Voltage Conversion Ratio lt For the setup procedure see section 5 5 gt Normally a probe is used in connecting the circuit being measured to the measurement input terminal Using a probe has the following advantages Avoids disturbing the voltage and current of the circuit being measured Inputs the signal with no distortion Expands the voltage range that the instrument can measure The instrument comes standard with 400 MHz passive probes The probe att
168. v SEARCH V the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys o For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and oes ACTION DELAY 4 2 a oA O O SS For a description of the operation using a USB i R keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press MEASURE The MEASURE menu appears 2 Press the Mode soft key The Mode menu appears S MEASURE Mode Cycle Hod faT Ranget Iten Delay 5 000dit Next OFF Setup Setup ON fST Range2 172 5 000d 3 Press the ON soft key OFF ON tatistics yt Selecting the Measurement Item 4 Press the Item Setup soft key The Item Setup menu and Item Setup dialog box appear MEASURE Mode a y cycle Modi faT Rangei Iten Delay 5 000dir Next ON Setup Setup ON fST Range2 A 5 000di 5 Press the CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 or Math2 soft key to select the waveform to measure e On the DL1740E DL1740EL you can select from CH1 to CH4 Math1 and Math2 On the DL1720E you can select CH1 CH2 and Math1 Ttem Setup P P Freq aAvgFreq Max Period AvgPer iod Min Rise IntitTy Avg Fall IntzTY Rms Width Intixy Sdev Width Int2xy High Duty Low Burst1 0shot Burstz Shot Pulse AIT Clear Copy To AIT Trace_ MEASURE Dual Area CH1 CH2 CH3 cH4 Mathi Mathz F oN IM 701730 01E 10 39 swuojaneM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy
169. value that is specified for each channel can be subtracted from the input signal and used for computation and automated measurement OFF The offset value is not applied to computed results and the results of automated measurements Waveform is observed without subtracting the offset voltage DC voltage from the input signal The vertical position of the screen corresponds to the offset voltage ON The offset value is applied to computed results and the results of automated measurements The offset value specified for each channel can be used to subtract the offset voltage DC voltage from the input signal for waveform observation The vertical position is set to 0 V Note The Offset Cancel setting applies to all channels To specify whether to cancel or not cancel the offset voltage for each channel separately use the linear scaling function IM 701730 01E 15 5 suoijei9d 19410 al 15 4 Setting the Screen Color and Intensity Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC SNOT HELP located above the soft keys v e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of r a an PHASE Aca srsarsroe setup pispLay ory mace savE o SHIFT selecting setting items and entering values using VERTICAL E CD Gaon veDIV aC GD a C HORZONTAL 4 uz ence TIME sDIV the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET key
170. when the jog shuttle is turned ON and OFF The default setting is ON 15 2 IM 701730 01E 15 2 Changing the USB Keyboard Language and Checking the Connected USB Keyboard Procedure SNAP HELP O O e To exit the menu during operation press ESC anlar ia located above the soft keys GSeTuP TESPA Corr HAGE eS e For a description of the operation using a USB Coser 2 ce D CHORON Y OTAGO 7 keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 TS ETS vzDiv TIME D1V ACTION DELAY Se 1 Press the MISC The MISC menu appears 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key The page 2 menu appears ca a a r alibration Remote Netuork systen very ieu Control Conf ig 3 Press the USB soft key graph ic Ea Se 1f Tesi Color ee Setting the Keyboard Language 4 Press the Keyboard soft key to select JPN or ENG evice Li DPN ENG Checking the Connected Keyboard 4 Press the Device List soft key The USB Device List window appears USB MISC USB Device List Device Address Product Name Keyboard 2 Mitsumi USB Keyboard Printer 3 USB Printer m MISC a feyboard evice Lis TPN ENG IM 701730 01E 15 3 suoijei9d 19410 al 15 2 Changing the USB Keyboard Language and Checking the Connected USB Keyboard Explanation USB Keyboard Language You can select the language of the USB keyboard that is
171. window position and width trigger coupling and HF rejection The setting is the same as the window trigger See section 6 13 Tupe idth Type Ja a Tines Window igHold OFF et Patte Levely us Width Pulse lt T Coupling 0 001 OFF pN 0 08 4 When Window is ON Level7Coupl ing When Window is Level Coupl ing Level Hys Coupling HF Rej Center Width Coupling HF Rej s n e a EA m m o CH2 1 50 VI I TC I OFF CH3 1 50 VI I DC I OFF a a a CH1 1 50 UL 2 00 V mc _ 0FF_ CH2 1 50 UL 2 00 V DC OFF CH3 1 50 UL 2 00 v c_o CH4 1 0 UL zov e oF 4 92 3 4 1 Setting the level of each channel 2 Set the hysteresis of each channel to ZZ or 3 Set the trigger coupling of each channel to DC or AC 4 Set the HF rejection of each channel to OFF 20 MHz or 15 kHz 5 Set the window position of each channel 6 Set the window width of each channel 13 Press ESC The Level Coupling dialog box closes Note The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to both simple and enhanced triggers IM 701730 01E 6 25 6 11 Activating a Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 and Time Out Trigger ENHANCED Explanation Setting the Determination Time 14 Press the Time soft key If Width Type is T1 lt PLS lt T2 press the Time1 Time2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Time1 or Time2
172. 0 RH Error in supply voltage and frequency Within 1 of rating Warm up time At least thirty minutes Storage conditions Temperature 20 60 C Humidity 20 to 80 RH no condensation Operating Conditions Temperature 5 40 C Humidity 20 to 80 RH when the printer is not used However no condensation 35 to 80 RH when the printer is used may be present Storage altitude 3 000m or less Operating altitude 2000 m or less Rated supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC 220 to 240 VAC Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 132 VAC 198 to 264 VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Permitted supply voltage 48 to 63 Hz frequency range Power fuse 250 V 4A time lag VDE SEMKO UL CSA certified Maximum power consumption 200 VA when using the printer Withstanding voltage 1 5 kVAC for one minute between power supply and case Insulation resistance 500 VDC 10 MQ or more at between power supply and case External dimensions 220mm W x 265 8mm H x 264 1mm D details on the next page When printer cover stored excluding projections Weight DL1740E DL1740EL Approximately 5 4kg No options DL1720E Approximately 5 2kg Instrument s cooling method Forced air cooling exhaust from rear Installation position Horizontal note that the stand can be used to tilt the instrument or vertical stacking prohibited Recommended calibration 1 year period Battery backup Setup data and clock are backed up with the
173. 0 01E 3 1 s usWaINseayy 10 suonesedeig Huyel el 3 1 Handling Precautions When Carrying the Instrument Remove the power cord and connecting cables Always carry the instrument by the handle on the top as shown below or carry it with both hands Cleaning When cleaning the case or the operation panel first remove the power cord from the AC outlet Then wipe with a dry soft clean cloth Do not use volatile chemicals since this might cause discoloring and deformation 3 2 IM 701730 01E 3 2 Installing the Instrument Installation Conditions Install the instrument in a place that meets the following conditions Flat Even Surface Install the instrument in the correct orientation on a stable horizontal surface The recording quality of the built in printer optional may be hindered when the instrument is used in an unstable place Well Ventilated Location Ventilation holes are located on the bottom of the instrument In addition there are exhaust holes for the cooling fan on the rear panel To prevent internal overheating allow for enough space around the instrument see the figure below and do not block the ventilation and exhaust holes If a printer comes with your DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL allow extra space for operation and do not place objects on top of the printer MMMM 10 cm or more Y 5cm orZY more Yor o o gt 09 A _ Ambient Temperature an
174. 0 V to 1 0 V 0 1 V div to 0 5 V div 10 0 V to 10 0 V 1 V div to 10 V div 100 0 V to 100 0 V except 1 V div only for DC50 Q The resolution is 0 01 divisions For 2 mV div the resolution is 0 02 mV The values are 10 times 100 times and 1000 times the values shown above when the probe attenuation is 10 1 100 1 and 1000 1 respectively If the probe current to voltage conversion ratio is 10 A 1 V the values are the same 10 times the values shown above with the unit changed to A If the ratio is 100 A 1 V the values are 100 times the values shown above with the unit changed to A Resetting the Offset Value Pressing the RESET key resets the offset value to 0 V Notes on Setting the Offset Voltage Only the display position changes when acquisition is stopped The new offset voltage is applied to the acquired data the next time waveform acquisition is started You can select whether to apply the offset voltage to cursor measurement values automated measurement values of waveform parameters and computation See section 15 3 If you change the probe attenuation the offset changes proportionally to reflect the new attenuation rate If you change the vertical axis sensitivity after setting the offset voltage value the offset voltage value does not change The selectable range and resolution of the offset voltage value vary depending on the vertical axis sensitivity setting The behavior when you change the vert
175. 00 M 5 M 5 M 5 M 5 M 5M 5 M 800 M 5 M 4M 4M 4M 4M 4M 800 M 4M 5 M 5 M 5 M 5 M 5 M 800 M 5 M 5 M 5 M 5 M 5 M 5 M 800 M 5 M 4M 4M 4M 4M 4M 800 M 4M 5 M 2 5M 5 M 5 M 5M 5 M 1M 2M 5M 500 k 1M 250 k 100 k 50 k 25k 10k 5k 25k 1k 500 250 100 1 This record length cannot be specified on the DL1720E or DL1740E 1G 5 Me Set to normal mode even if envelope mode is specified 2 Since the number of data points acquired is 4 MW only eight divisions of the waveform is displayed along the time axis In addition the trigger position in this case is set by taking eight divisions as 100 3 Box average averaging simple average and computation cannot be performed 4 The values inside the thick frame are for repetitive sampling mode IM 701730 01E App 9 E x pu ddy Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Specified Record Length 8 MW Rep Repetitive sampling mode When set to a mode other than envelope mode When set to envelope mode Setting When interleave mode is OFF When interleave mode is ON When interleave When interleave Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON mode is OFF mode is ON
176. 00di IM 701730 01E 10 9 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy z 10 3 Searching the History Waveforms Using Automatic Measurement of Parameters History Search Selecting the Search Target Waveform Search Measurement Item 8 Press the Item Setup soft key The Item Setup dialog box opens Search HISTORY a Item Upper Logic eT Range1 Setup XXX 5 000diy Search CH1 P P Lower OR fT Range2z Exec L XXX 5 000di 9 Press the CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 or Math2 soft key to select the search target waveform CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1720E Select Condition Param Parami IN OUT Ttem Setup P P Freq AvgFreq Max Period AvgPer iod Nin Rise Intity Aug Fall ImtzTY Rms Width Intixy Sdev Width ImtzxY High Duty Lou Burst1 0Shot Burst2 0Shot Pulse Delay _ Source CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 10 Turn the jog shuttle to select the measurement parameter to be used as a search condition 11 Press SELECT The mark to the left of the measurement parameter is highlighted The measurement item whose mark to the left of the item is highlighted is the measurement item used as a search condition You can set one measurement parameter to one search parameter 12 Press ESC The Item Setup dialog box closes Setting the Determination Range of the Measured Value
177. 04 06 14 11 42 01 05 Param 1 Ch1 Max Param2 Ch1 Min Buzzer File _ FDO 0009WVF Image _ FDO O006 TIF Maito 2004 06 14 11 40 59 00 Param1 Ch1 Max Param2 Ch1 Min Buzzer File FDO 0008WVF Image FDO OO05TIF nfaitto 2004 06 14 11 39 58 45 Param1 Ch1 Max Param2 Ch1 Min Buzzer File FDO 0007WVF Image FDO O004TIF Maito 2004 06 14 11 38 59 40 Param Ch1 Max Param2 Ch1 Min Buzzer File FDO O006WVF Image FDO O003TIF Matto 1 2004 06 14 11 37 58 12 Param1 Ch1 Max Param2 Ch1 Min BuzzerFile _ FDO O005WVF Image FD0 0002TIF Maio i If screen image data or waveform data files are being saved in the GO NO GO determination or action on trigger the files can be saved on the PC from the Log display window v wl amp The drive is indicated in the log as follows CAO PC Card FDO Floppy disk NDO Network drive when the Ethernet interface option is installed US L USB strage Partition number or LUN Logical Unit Number Address number Note When the instrument is printing or operating files file operation from the front panel key or file transfer using the FTP server function files cannot be saved on the PC In addition other Web server functions cannot be used while saving files e Files on the network drive NetWork cannot be saved to the PC 13 42 IM 701730 01E 13 7 Using the Web Server Function
178. 0EL 50 mV 10 of the trigger level 1 V range of the DL1720 500 mV 10 of the trigger level 10 V range of the DL1720 Probe attenuation setting for external trigger 1 1 10 1 Trigger sensitivity2 CH1 CH4 For DC 500 MHz 1divP P EXT DC to 100 MHz 100 mVP P DL1740E DL1740EL DC to 100 MHz 100 mVP P 1 V range of the DL1720E DC to 100 MHz 1 VP P 10 V range of the DL1720E Trigger position Can be set in 1 increments of the display record length Trigger delay range Oto4s Hold off time range 80nsto10s Trigger slope Rising falling rising and falling for edge trigger Trigger type Edge Activate the trigger on the edge of a single trigger source A gt B N Trigger occurs nth time condition B becomes true after condition A becomes true Count 1 108 Condition A Enter Exit OR Condition B Enter Exit OR A Delay B Trigger occurs first time condition B becomes true after specified delay following condition A true Specified time 3nsto5s Condition A Enter Exit OR Condition B Enter Exit OR OR Trigger occurs on the OR logic of the trigger conditions set to multiple trigger sources Trigger conditions are Edge and Window and Rise IN Fall Out or Don t Care can be set to each channel CH1 to CH4 Pattern Trigger occurs on the edge of the clock channel with respect to the True False condition of the parallel pattern set to multiple trigger sources If the clock channel is set to D
179. 0s 30s 60s e Starting Periodic Transmission Start Click Start Stop The indicator illuminates in yellow and the command transmission and response display start at the specified transmission interval e Stopping Periodic Transmissions Stop Click Start Stop while the periodic transmission is in progress The indicator turns OFF and the command transmission and response reception display stop However if the last command before stopping the periodic transmission was a query command the response to that command is displayed in the response display area Note Ifa wrong command is sent the error message is not automatically displayed in the Control Script window The error code and message are displayed by entering the status error command in the transmission command input area You can also confirm the error on the screen image displayed using the data capture function and also on the instrument screen Binary data cannot be received or displayed The time out time for transmissions is thirty seconds If a transmission is sent or received for over thirty seconds a time out error occurs If all the commands specified in the transmission command entry area is sent and the responses to the commands are not received within 30 s a timeout error occurs 13 40 IM 701730 01E 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Displaying the Log Before using this function check that the communication interface of the instrument is set to
180. 1 1 Front Panel Rear Panel and Top Panel Rear Panel DL1740E DL1740EL Ethernet port optional Used when connecting to a network gt Section 13 1 Video signal output connector Used when displaying the instrument s screen image on an external display gt Section 14 3 _ B GP IB connector Used when carrying out communications via the GP IB interface For details on the D cee a communication function excluding the Ethernet OL an communications see the Communication TI A cto eCe N Interface User s Manual IM701730 17E Main power switch A gt Section 3 3 Power connector gt Section 3 3 GO NO GO determination output terminal Outputs GO NO GO determination results gt Section 10 11 Exhaust holes Probe power supply terminal A gt Section 3 2 Used to supply power to the FET probe or current probe made by YOKOGAWA The DL1740E DL1740EL comes with four terminals gt Section 3 4 Trigger output terminal Used when outputting the trigger signal externally gt Section 14 2 External trigger external clock trigger gate input terminal A Used when inputting external trigger clock or trigger gate signals gt Sections 6 6 6 16 and 1
181. 1 10 1 10 1 DC Full 0 000 VY 0 000 V 0 000 U 0 000 U Position 6 06div O OOdiv O OOdiv O OOdiv Bandwidth Full Full Full Full HORIZONTAL Edge Tdiv SNMSfliv Auto Sample Rate 200kS S Position 50 0 ACQ Mode Normal Delay 0 us Record Length Main 10k Hold Off 6 08uS Zi 1k Gate OFF z2 200 Source CH1 Time Base Int Inter leave OFF Edge CH1 Auto CH1 CH3 CH4 Ext 0 300 V Level 0 300 V 0 000 U 0 000 U 0 000 V Slope F F Coupling DC DC HFRe j OFF OFF Hys fam E 1 10 IM 701730 01E Chapter 2 Explanation of Functions 2 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram System Configuration Input USB PERIPHERAL 0 interface Data save load USB mouse Built in printer optional Input EER Print screen images EEEE eee Eeee USB storage External clock input _ External trigger input Trigger gate input USB PERIPHERAL LY A interface i _ I Screen data USB printer GO NO GO determination lt Waveform data P output gt i Setup data A RGB video signal output Screen image GP IB interface USB interface Trigger output gg p data Ethernet interface optional Waveform data measurement Signal input Screen image data Yy L a Floppy disk or PC card
182. 1 to Chan2 channels 1 to 2 on the DL1720E Display ON OFF To display the waveform of the selected channel turn it ON select the Display check box Clear the check box to not display the waveform of the selected channel OFF Vertical Position Set the vertical position of the waveform of the selected channel For a description of the selectable range of the vertical position see section 5 3 13 32 IM 701730 01E 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Setting the Display Condition Display Format You can set the number of divided windows for displaying waveforms Single Dual Triad Quad Hexa Quad and Hexa are not available on the DL1720E For the meanings of the selections see the explanation in section 8 1 Turning the Display of the Waveform Labels and Scale Values Label ON and OFF e Display Waveform Label TraceLabel To display the labels of the displayed waveforms select the TraceLabel check box Clear the check box to not display the labels Turning the Display of the Upper and Lower Limits of the Displayed Waveforms ON and OFF ScaleValue To display the upper and lower limits of the displayed waveforms select the ScaleValue check box Clear the check box to not display the upper and lower limits Jastument Contral Acquisition Display Start Sto Foma p Single X Channel 2 Label Chani M Display I TraceLabel Position I ScaleValue 0 00 Div Selecting the Waveform to Be Saved File Selecting the
183. 1730 01E 10 45 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy eS 10 7 Statistical Processing of the Automated Measurement Values of Waveform Parameters lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 28 gt Procedure CLEAR SNAP HELP l j z O O e To exit the menu during operation press ESC jn oa ae located above the soft keys SETUP PISPA GOP mace sAve o SHFr For a description of the operation using a USB C VERTICAL A CCHORIZONTAL K Comer m ED eee 4 a keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 reser use sane x vsDIV TIME sDIV icon DELA 3 Je cL 1 Press MEASURE The MEASURE menu appears 2 Press the Mode soft key The Mode menu appears MEASURE Mode r Cycle Hod feT Rangei Iten Delay 5 000dit Next OFF Setup Setup ON fST Range2 Tl 5 000di Measuring Waveform Parameters and Performing Statistical Processing Normal Statistical Processing 3 Press the Statistics soft key The waveforms are measured and statistical processing is performed Then statistics are displayed ON tatistics Cycle tatistics B Display example of statistics pope TN n y IA per REE goo cece seeded ieee ty ES f TN AA ZZTETRS HSAN TZET Sa tJ LP Li86250N Max CL 33 Lasanv Lom Max 1 06250U Max 133 333M Min 1 062500 Min 33 333M sAUg 1 06250U AYg 33 333mMV Sdu O 00000Y iSdy 00000 Cnt 1
184. 1E 10 53 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy z 10 8 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas Setting Computation Parameters 7 10 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the following items of computation item User1 e Turn the display of the computed items ON or OFF Mode Box e For the first waveform constant to be measured you can select from CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 None or Const1 to Const4 Trace box for Areat Select the first measurement parameter Item box for Area1 e Select the operator from and Open box e For the second waveform constant to be measured you can select from CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 None or Const1 to Const4 Trace box for Area2 Select the Second Measurement Parameter Item Box for Area2 Set the units as necessary Unit box On the DL1740E DL1740EL you can select from CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 None or Const1 to Const4 On the DL1720E you can select from CH1 to CH2 Math1 None or Const1 to Const2 Repeat step 7 to set computation items User2 through User4 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set Consti to Const4 Select the first measurement Select the operator from and For the first waveform constant to For the second waveform constant to be be measured you can select from measured you can select from CH1 to CH4 CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 None Math1 Math2 None or Const1 to Const4 or Const to Const4 Select the secon
185. 2 Press the Start Rec End Rec soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Start Rec or End Rec e If you select Start Rec you can select the record number for starting the accumulation e If you select End Rec you can select the record number for ending the accumulation is Select Record i All Display fastart Rec o show Map 6 End Rec 122 Bearch Mode OFF HISTORY 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the record number at which accumulation is to be started or ended 4 Press the Display soft key to select All The waveforms in the range between Start Rec and End Rec shown on the menu are accumulated on the screen The waveform of the record number indicated in Select Record on the menu is highlighted is Select Display Record J One All HISTORY gstart Rega earch Hod o Show Map 5 End Rec OFF f 127 IM 701730 01E 10 1 swuoj neM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy eS 10 1 Displaying History Waveforms Selecting the Highlighted Waveform 5 6 Press the Select Record soft key HISTORY e Select Display start Rega earch Mod Record o Show Map me All fS End Rec OFF 12 Turn the jog shuttle to select the number of the record to be high lit The waveform of the selected record number is highlighted Selecting the Waveforms to be Displayed on the History Map 2 Displaying the History Map Press the Start Rec End Rec soft key to set the jog shuttle control to S
186. 2 10 IM 701730 01E 2 3 Triggers e TV Trigger lt For the setup procedure see section 6 14 gt This trigger is used when observing video signals The following broadcasting types are supported NTSC PAL SECAM 1080 60i 1080 50i 720 60p 480 60p 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 24sF and 1080 60p f l l Trigger Mode lt For the setup procedure see section 6 1 gt Sets the conditions for updating the displayed waveforms The following five trigger modes are available Auto Mode If a trigger occurs within a specified amount of time approximately 100 ms referred to as the timeout time the displayed waveforms are updated If a trigger is not activated within the timeout time the displayed waveforms are automatically updated Auto Level Mode If a trigger occurs within the timeout period the waveform is displayed in the same fashion as in auto mode If a trigger is not activated within the timeout time then the center value of the amplitude of the trigger source is detected and the trigger level is changed to that value A trigger is activated using the new value and the displayed waveforms are updated 1 2 the amplitude Trigger level Amplitude 1 2 the amplitude Normal Mode The displayed waveforms are updated only when a trigger occurs The displayed waveforms are not updated if a trigger does not occur Single Mode When a trigger is activated displayed waveforms are updated only once
187. 2 5 000 div Trace CH1 Distal 90 Mesial 50 Proximal 10 High Low Auto CURSOR Type OFF GO NO GO Mode OFF MATH M2 Math2 not available on the DL1720E M1 Display OFF M1 Setup C1 C2 M1 Label Math1 M2 Display OFF M2 Setup C3 C4 M2 Label Math2 PHASE Mode OFF COPY MENU Copy to Built in Format Normal Information OFF IMAGE SAVE MENU Format TIFF Color OFF File Name 0000 IM 701730 01E App 17 Ey xipueddy Appendix 5 Key Assignments of the USB Keyboard 104 Keyboard US 89 Keyboard US When the Soft Keyboard 1s Displayed omer When Pressed with the Control Key a ACQ menu Same as left a A b MATH menu Same as left b B c Execute COPY Same as left c Cc d DISPLAY menu Same as left d D e ENHANCED menu Same as left e E f FILE menu Same as left f F g GO NOGO menu Same as left g G h HISTORY menu Same as left h H i Execute IMAGE SAVE Same as left i l j PRESET menu Same as left j J k k K l l L m MEASURE menu Same as left m M n n N o o o p POSITION menu Same as left p P q Execute CLEAR TRACE Same as left q Q r Execute RESET Same as left r R s SHIFT condition Same as left s S t TRIGMODE menu Same as left t T u CURSOR menu Same as left u U v v V w SIMPLE menu Same as left w Ww x x X y y Y z ZOOM menu Same as left z Z 1 CH1 menu 1
188. 30 01E 4 3 4 2 Entering Values and Strings Entering Strings 2004 04 13 16 27 13 ik Normal A Stopped CAT The keyboard displayed on the screen is used to enter character strings such as file names and comments The jog shuttle SELECT key and arrow keys are used to operate the keyboard to enter the character strings Operating the Keyboard 1 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the character to be entered You can also press the soft keys corresponding to A and WY to move the cursor vertically 2 Press the SELECT key to enter the character If a character string has already been entered move the cursor to the position in the string at which you want to enter a character 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter all the characters in the string 4 Selecting ENT on the keyboard and pressing SELECT confirms the string and the keyboard disappears You can also press the ENT soft key to confirm the string and clear the keyboard At the same time the confirmed string is temporarily stored If you wish to clear the entire string that you have entered press RESET before confirming the string Keyboard for entering capital letters toggle using the CAPS soft key Input character string INSERT indicator Moves the cursor upward 162 F 200kS s_SOOHS iv BU OUEFOT lt lt Main Tk gt gt CH1 10 1 20 0 Vdiv DC Full CH2 10 1 0 500 Vzdi DC Full c Oo Moves the cursor downward
189. 32769 32769 VillegalData 32769 32769 VMaxData 32767 32767 VMinData 32768 32768 HResolution 2 0000000E 01 5 0000000E 09 HOffset 0 0000000E 00 2 5000000E 06 HUnit Hz S Date 2004 06 25 2004 06 25 Time 01 45 00 01 45 00 Privatelnfo DisplayBlockSize 1002 1002 1002 1002 1002 1002 DisplayPointNo 1 1 1 1 1 1 ModelVersion 1 00 PhaseShift 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 PTraceName CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Math1 Math2 Note The header file is common to many of YOKOGAWA s measuring instruments Therefore data that is not required by this instrument Os is also included CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not available on the DL1720E IM 701730 01E App 14 Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format Publicinfo Common Information Header file version number common to YOKOGAWA s header FormatVersion Model Endian DataFormat GroupNumber TraceTotalNumber DataOffset files Model name Endian mode when saving data Big Ltl Storage format of the binary waveform data Trace Block The number of Group s indicated below Total number of selected waveforms Start position of the binary waveform data Group1 Group Information TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize Vresolution Voffset VdataType Vunit VplusOverData VminusOverDat a VmaxData VminData Hresolution Hoffset Hunit Date Time Number of waveforms in this group Number of blocks
190. 4 1 USB connector for connecting to a PC Used when connecting a PC with a USB interface gt Communication Interface User s Manual IM701730 17E USB connector for connecting peripheral devices A Used when connecting a USB printer USB keyboard USB mouse or USB storage gt Sections 4 3 11 3 and 12 3 DL1720E Probe power supply terminal A Used to supply power to the FET probe or current probe made by YOKOGAWA The DL1720E comes with two gt Section 3 4 Trigger output terminal Used when outputting the trigger signal externally gt Section 14 2 1 2 IM 701730 01E 1 1 Front Panel Rear Panel and Top Panel Ei Top Panel Handle sed JO suoljouny pue soweN Built in printer optional Prints screen images or setup data gt ID ITITI Sections 11 1 and 11 2 IM 701730 01E 1 3 1 2 Panel Keys and Knobs Vertical Axis SD a VZDIV 5 al a Horizontal Axis TIME DIV CH1 to CH4 Keys Sections 5 1 to 5 10 and 8 9 Each key displays a menu used to turn ON OFF the channel s display and set the vertical position coupling probe attenuation current to voltage conversion ratio offset voltage bandwidth limit expansion or reduction of the vertical axis linear scaling and waveform labels Ifyou
191. 4 r Executing Initialization 1 Press SETUP 2 Press the Initialize soft key Initialization executes 2004 04 14 16 44 43 j ick Normal Stopped 536 cr SMS S 200HSAiv y Z Maine 10k gt gt CH3 10 1 0 500 Vzdiy DC Full Edge CH3 F Auto 0 355 V TEST ii SETUP Initial Auto Store Undo Undo ize Setup Reca11 Initial Auto 1 iZe Setup Cancels initialization Executes initialization Canceling Initialization 3 Press the Undo Initialize soft key The settings return to the conditions that existed immediately before initialization Note When you turn OFF the power switch the settings that existed immediately before initialization are cleared Therefore the Undo Initialize operation is not possible in this case IM 701730 01E 4 13 suoleiodg uowwo0g s 4 4 Initializing Settings Explanation Values set using keys can be restored to their original conditions upon shipment from the factory This is useful when you wish to clear previous settings or start measurement from scratch Initialization Initialization refers to the act of restoring the factory default conditions For a description of the conditions of the instrument upon shipment from the factory see appendix 4 List of Default Settings Settings That Cannot Be Initialized e Date Time settings e Communication related settings Setup data that has been
192. 420E Circuit Diagram of the Output Section 5V 5V L oes 470 Q 47 Q Output Timing Trigger activates Trigger signal 50 ns max H Trigger output L 14 4 IM 701730 01E 14 2 Trigger Output TRIG OUT Low Level High Level Hold Time Trigger activates Trigger activates H Trigger output i Post trigger time internal processing time 2 1 Pre trigger time internal processing time Trigger Trigger Pre Post Pre Post trigger trigger trigger y trigger Waveform acquisition 1 HIGH high level interval Indicates the pre trigger and internal processing time 100 ns minimum 2 LOW low level interval Indicates the post trigger and internal processing time 1 u s minimum IM 701730 01E 14 5 u01 9aS O I Aseixny joueg we8y z 14 3 Video Signal Output VIDEO OUT VGA AN CAUTION e Connect the cable after turning OFF the instrument and the monitor Do not short the VIDEO OUT VGA terminal or apply external voltage to it Doing so can cause damage to the instrument Video Output Terminal The instrument display can be output to a monitor through the RGB output Connectable monitors are VGA monitors or multi sync monitors capable of displaying VGA Pin No Signal Name Description 1 Red 0 7 Vp p 2 Green 0 7 Vp p 3 Blue 0 7 Vp p 4 z 5 6 GND 7 GND 8 GND 9 10 GND 11 5 12 13 Horizontal sync signal A
193. 5 21 12 0001 BMP 38462 2004 05 14 15 20 12 0002 BMP 38462 2004 05 14 15 20 12 0000 BMP 38462 2004 05 14 15 19 Select a file with the jog shuttle then press SELECT FILE Function ja Filter et Reset All Set f Property Attr Delete Delete e BMP Exec Note ___ e Ifthe selected screen image data file does not have data file for thumbnail display an error message appears You can press ESC to clear the thumbnail but in this case the File List window is also cleared To clear only the thumbnail display turn the jog shuttle H Thumbnails of the screen image data that are saved on a storage medium can be displayed Thumbnail Display from the IMAGE Menu Thumbnail Screen Thumbnails are displayed for the screen image data files files with TIF BMP PS PNG and JPG extensions in the directory selected using File List in the IMAGE menu The data used to display thumbnails is separate from the screen image data but is created simultaneously when the screen image data is created The extension of thumbnail data varies depending on the data format of the original screen image data as follows TIFF file TTD BMP file BTD PS file PTD PNG file NTD JPEG file JTD The data size is approximately 2 to 6 KB for all formats e Thumbnail Items The following three items are displayed e Thumbnail of the waveform area e File name Color information Mono Color mode OFF see page 12 35
194. 50 UF ft ac OFF 3 Press the Ext soft key Coupling J HF Re ject Hysteresis SIMPLE faHold OFF us A 0 08 The CH3 and CH4 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720E CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 l Ext Setting the Trigger Level 4 Press the Level soft key SIMPLE Line pHoid Off Cus SIMPLE Source fe Level Slope Probe Ext 6 000 Uf Ft 10 1 Hold OFF us 0 01 On the DL1720E the Range item is displayed in this position 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger level Pressing RESET resets the trigger level to 0 V Setting the Trigger Slope 6 Press the Slope soft key to select f or ft Setting the Probe Attenuation 7 Press the Probe soft key to select 1 1 or 10 1 SIMPLE Source B Levely Slope Probe Ext 9 000 f EI 10 1 Hold OFF us 0 01 IM 701730 01E 6 11 s n el 6 6 Setting the External Trigger SIMPLE Explanation Setting the Range DL1720E 8 Press the Range soft key to select the range Select either 1 V or 10 V when 1 1 was selected for the probe or 10 V or 100 V when 10 1 was selected for the probe SIMPLE Source te Level Slope Range Probe Hold Off uS Ext 0 000 v F ET nof Eg 10 1 0 0 Setting the Hold Off 9 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time You can activate a trigger based on the external signal applied to t
195. 55302 y 200kS s__5ms div lt lt Maink io gt gt CH1 10 1 0 500 Urdiyv DC Full co NNINAONAOAANAONAA AANA E FUUUUUUUUUUDDUDUUDDUUUUUUOURUUPUPRDDUPOUPODUO PR DOR E Detected waveform gt E ams TE 2 Ela EE 2 ga ee C SS Edge CH1 Auto gt Detected waveform that has been zoomed 3 v z L SEARCH E Type a Zi Mag 6 Z1 Pos Searched a Setup Pattern Exec Edge x 10 1 800 34 N Detected waveform number Changing the Zoom Rate and Zoom Position of the Detected Waveforms 17 Change the zoom rate and zoom position of the waveform according to the procedures given in section 8 4 Serial Pattern Serial Status Pattern Search 1 Press SHIFT ZOOM SEARCH The SEARCH menu appears Selecting the Serial Pattern Search Method 2 Press the Type soft key The Type menu appears SEARCH Type Zi Mag 6 21 Pos Searched Setup Pattern Exec Edge x 10 4 000diy No Match 3 Press the Serial Pattern soft key SEARCH Edge Serial Width Parallel Auto Searched Pattern Pattern Scroll Pattern i No Match art a Setting the Search Condition 4 Press the Setup soft key The Setup dialog box opens SEARCH Type fa Zi Mag 6 Zi Pos searched Setup Pattern Exec Serial x 10 1 800di 34 Pattern 10 16 IM 701730 01E 10 4 Searching Waveforms Using the Search and Zoom Function Setting the Timing for Detecting the Status Pattern 5 6 Us
196. 6 34 IM 701730 01E 6 14 Setting the TV Trigger ENHANCED Explanation Selecting the Field Number 10 Press the Field soft key to select the number This value cannot be specified when the TV Type is set to 720 60p 480 60p 1080 25p 1080 24p or 1080 60p Selecting the Line Number 11 Press the Line soft key 12 Turn the jog shuttle to set the line number Pressing RESET sets the minimum line setting to 8 5 or 2 depending on the TV Type setting Selecting Frame Skip 13 Press the Frame Skip soft key to select Frame Skip Type TV Type Polarityfj Level Field Jf Line rane Skip Ty NTSC Posi osav Jf 2 x 5 248 This setting is for activating a trigger on a video signal applied to CH1 Broadcast Types That TV Trigger Supports You can select the broadcast mode from the following NTSC PAL SECAM 1080 60i 1080 50i 720 60p 480 60p 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 24sF and 1080 60p Field Number You can select the field number to be detected 1 Detect a field in which the start of the vertical sync pulse and the start of the line is at the same time 2 Detect a field in which the start of the vertical sync pulse is delayed by 1 2 H H is the horizontal scan interval of the start of the line X Detect both Polarity You can select Pos positive or Neg negative Polarity Pos Polarity Neg NTSC PAL Tri level Me eis nae SECAM rigger level T_J UU TT as t i 480 60P Trigger a a Ln
197. 8 9 Aejdsig uonewno uj pue Aejdsig woane M e 8 5 Displaying the X Y Waveform lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 19 gt Procedure HISTORY OL be O O e To exit the menu during operation press ESC ao located above the soft keys e Fora description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 You can select the display mode 1 Press SHIFT DISPLAY X Y 2 Press the Mode soft key The Mode menu appears Mode TY 3 Press the T Y X Y or T Y amp X Y soft key to select the mode xy eal Steps 4 to 11 are necessary only when X Y or T Y amp X Y is selected Selecting the X Axis Mode Applies to the DL1740E DL1740EL 4 Press the X Axis soft key to select Single or Dual Mode X Axis Select Display X Trace Y Trace T Ranget 5 000di T Y amp X Dual Ya xY2 OFF px CHL CH2 ST Range2 5 000di Selecting the X Y Waveform Applies to the DL1740E DL1740EL 5 Press the Select soft key to select the X Y waveform to be set 6 Press the Display soft key to turn ON OFF the X Y waveform display Mode X Axis T Y amp X Y Bingie Dua CH1 cH2 feT Rangez 5 000di Select Display X Trace Y Trace T Range1 OOO 5 000 i Kyi xy2 Orr 8 10 IM 701730 01E 8 5 Displaying the X Y Waveform Setting the X Axis and Y Axis 7 Press the X Trace soft key The X Trace me
198. ATH Key Sections 9 1 to 9 7 Displays a menu used to set waveform computation SHIFT MATH PHASE Key Section 9 8 Displays a menu used to set phase shifts HISTORY Key Sections 10 1 to 10 3 Displays a menu used to display and search waveforms using the history memory function Waveforms that have been sequentially stored can also be displayed and searched ACQ Key Sections 5 10 and 7 2 to 7 5 Displays a menu used to set the record length acquisition mode interleave mode sampling mode time base and other parameters for waveform acquisition START STOP Key Section 7 1 Starts Stops waveform acquisition according to the trigger mode Waveform acquisition is in progress when the indicator above the START STOP key is illuminated Printing Screen Images and Saving and Loading Data IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT FILE Key Sections 12 4 to 12 8 and 12 11 to 12 13 e Displays a menu used to save or load various data from the storage medium built in storage medium external USB storage or net drive e You can display thumbnails of the screen image data that are saved COPY Key Chapter 11 Executes the printing of the screen image on a printer built in printer USB printer or network printer SHIFT COPY MENU Key Sections 11 2 to 11 4 Displays a menu used to print screen images on a printer IMAGE SAVE Key Section 12 9 Executes the saving of the screen image da
199. B devices successively Allow at least ten seconds between the connection and disconnection of a USB device and the connection and disconnection of the next USB device Do not disconnect the USB cable after the power is turned ON until key operation becomes possible approximately 20 to 30 s Confirming the Type of Keyboard That Is Connected To determine the type of keyboard that is connected to the instrument follow the procedure given in section 15 2 Entering File Names Comments and Other Items When a keyboard is displayed on the screen you can enter the file name comment and other items using a USB keyboard The character that is entered through each key of the USB keyboard varies depending on the keyboard type For details see appendix 5 Executing Functions Corresponding to the Front Panel Keys of the Instrument The functions corresponding to the front panel keys of the instrument are assigned to the keys on the USB keyboard By pressing the keys on the keyboard you can operate the instrument in a similar fashion The assignment of functions varies depending on the keyboard type For details see appendix 5 Entering Values from a USB Keyboard You can enter values from a USB keyboard for items with the or 6 icon Value entered from the keyboard Edge CH1 f futo 15 0 V OFF pN o ooaiw ncing Press the corresponding soft key to enter a numerical va
200. CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 or Math2 soft key to select the waveform used to determine the cycle e On the DL1740E DL1740EL you can select from Own CH1 to CH4 Math1 and Math2 e On the DL1720E you can select Own CH1 CH2 and Math1 Own CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 p as cong Executing Aborting Measurement per Cycle and Statistical Processing within the Measurement Range 7 Press the START STOP key to stop waveform acquisition 8 Press the Measure Exec soft key Measurement per cycle and statistical processing within the measurement range are performed on the displayed waveform from the left end to the right end of the screen from the oldest waveform The words Measure Exec change to Measure Abort To abort the measurement and statistical processing press the Measure Abort soft key The measurement and statistical processing are aborted and the words Measure Abort change to Measure Exec Cycle Setup CH1 Result MEASURE 51 Range Measure 5 000di Next Exec jT Range2 172 tat istics 5 060di Statistical values display example lt lt parT gt gt Iten Show Hode ja ycie Traca ANNA AAA i i i i H f EEA S ZTS ISA TZET TT by LP LEDIGA Maxe C1 12 100m Lt Max 1 06250U Max 33 333MV Min 1 00000U Min 91 667mU Avg 1 02849 Aug 12 9Z5mY Sdy 11 6748nU Sdy 64137mU Cnt 49 Cnt 3 IM 701730 01E 10 47 swuojaneM B
201. Contrai r Capture waveform Binary Waveform ASCII Waveform Float Capture Exec Using the dialog box that appears when you click Capture Exec set the save destination and file name and save the data Zata Cantaf r Capture Waveform Binary w Abort Capture Exec r Load Abort To abort the save operation while data is being saved click Cancel on the dialog box Then click Abort on the Control Panel 3 of webdc_wvf w f Completed 7 loj xj amp Opening Bata Cantref webdo_wvf wvf from d7000 p eue EE Waveform Binary v Estimated time left 1 min 35 sec 199 KB of 8 00 MB copied gt Abort thse Download to Temporary Folder PENE Transfer rate 84 6 KB Sec Load T Close this dialog box when download completes You must enter a password to abort One Open Fo Cancel For details see Input Password in Open Open Folger Cancel i nee el the next section IM 701730 01E 13 31 Ieuondo suonesaiunwwos 3u1 34 3 g 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Loading the Setup Data from the PC into the Instrument Load Input Password Enter the password see page 13 24 that you used to log into the Web server instrument If the user name of the user account is set to anonymous default setting the password is not required Setup Load Click Setup Load The Open dialog box opens Select the setup data file you wish to load and click OK to execute the load operation Data Contraf
202. DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL Digital Oscilloscope USER S MANUAL YOKOGAWA Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 701730 01E 1st Edition Product Registration Thank you for purchasing YOKOGAWA products YOKOGAWA provides registered users with a variety of information and services Please allow us to serve you best by completing the product registration form accessible from our homepage http www yokogawa com tm PIM 103 01E Foreword Notes Trademarks Revisions 1st Edition July 2004 YK Thank you for purchasing the DL1720E DL1740E or DL1740EL Digital Oscilloscope This user s manual contains useful information about the functions and operating procedures of the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL and lists the handling precautions To ensure proper use of the instrument please read this manual thoroughly before beginning operation Keep this manual in a safe place for quick reference in the event a question arises The following manuals are provided for the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL Manual Title Manual No Description DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL IM701730 01E This manual Explains all functions and User s Manual procedures of the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL excluding the communication functions DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL IM701730 02E Provides a brief explanation of the functions Operation Guide and basic operating procedures of the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL IM701730 17E Describes the
203. Displaying Instrument Information Before using this function check that the communication interface of the instrument is set to Network see page 13 23 Click the Information icon on the Web server window The Information window that displays the instrument model Model the maximum record length available Record Length the storage media type Media the presence of options Option ROM version firmware version software version and product ID and other information appears Web Server Window Smart Search SHIFT ZOOM Searches for an edge serial pattern parallel pattern or SOC a Ties Ly R E aS Contents Model 701730 RecordLength Max2MW 1MW CH Media FDD J1 Option Printer Yes Others No Soft Version 1 00 Product ID IM 701730 01E 13 43 Ieuondo suonesaiunwwos 3u1 4 3 g 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Viewing the Link Before using this function check that the communication interface of the instrument is set to Network see page 13 23 Click the Link icon on the Web server window You can view the Web page for the instrument Web Server Window Saart Search SHIFT ZOON Searches for an edge serial pattern parallel pattern or ane ee Ns eS E Digital Osilloscope DL1700E Series Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools H
204. E you can select the CH1 CH2 or Math1 soft key O NO GO CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 To Top Menu 1 10 58 IM 701730 01E 10 9 Performing GO NO GO Determination Using Zones e Editing the Entire Zone 7 Press the Edit soft key to select Whole GO NO GO Edit Upper Left Store as 8 00div Eai div EA amp Ee Lower ff Right Zone1 EA 0 00div O OBdiv 8 Press the Upper Lower or Left Right soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Upper Lower Left or Right e If you select Upper you can edit the zone upward with respect to the reference waveform e If you select Lower you can edit the zone downward with respect to the reference waveform e If you select Left you can edit the zone toward the left with respect to the reference waveform e If you select Right you can edit the zone toward the right with respect to the reference waveform GO NO GO Edit i Left Store as O 00div Store Quit amp Whole Par Right Zone1 Exec TopMenu an oot saa 9 Turn the jog shuttle to edit the entire zone fe Upper O 00div E Lover 9Odiv Editing Parts of Zones 10 Press the Edit soft key to select Part 4 GO NO GO Edit Upper ous nange Store as 5 00div Ea ES amp bec Part Louer BT Range2 Zonet Ea ES 5 0 div 11 Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to T Range1 or T Range2 e Ifyou select T Range1 you can move
205. E 02 3 000E 02 1 941E 02 6 416E 03 2 341E 02 1 800E 02 Statistics1 2 708E 02 1 308E 02 Current Value 1 083E 02 Count 25 1 333E 02 1 217E 02 A Max 1 042E 02 lt Statistics 1 350E 02 2 191E 02 Min 2 708E 02 1 700E 02 1 075E 02 Newest measured value Average 1 695E 02 1 158E 02 1 766E 02 EY e Trend graph Graph2 Chani AVERAGE 1 200E 02 2 050E 02 1 592E 02 8 999E 03 0 000E 00 1 592E 02 5 000E 03 25 31 37 43 49 55 61 67 73 79 85 91 9 1 042E 02 1 708E 02 1 000E 02 2 150E 02 2 166E 02 2 050E 02 1 958E 02 2 000E 02 1 083E 02 1 192E 02 3 000E 02 Statistics2 List of measured values Current Value 1 192E 02 Count 25 A Max 5 000E 03 lt Statistics Min 2 775E 02 Newest measured value Average LT 634E 02 13 38 IM 701730 01E 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Using Control Scripts Before using this function check that the communication interface of the instrument is set to Network see page 13 23 Click the Control Script icon on the Web server window The Control Script window used to send communication commands see the Communication Interface User s Manual IM701730 17E to the instrument and display the responses from the instrument Web Server Window coments DL 1740 E DLIV0L m oom Control Script Panel Command IEEE488 2 Channel disp on Channel disp Transmission command entry area Clear Command Area Resp
206. File Name Trace Range History P P Comp File List ave Exec 12 0000 all Main all ON Tey File List Path FD Space 585216 byte File Name Size Date Attr a FD 1 NetWork 1 v Save a File Nang Filter Property ave Exec 12 0000 ee Binary Selecting the Save Destination Directory Perform this operation when directories are present on the medium 15 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the save destination directory indicated by lt gt The selected medium directory is displayed in Path located in the upper left of the File List window Select lt gt to move to the parent directory Setting the File Name and Comment 16 Press the File Name soft key The File Name amp Comment dialog box opens File List Path FD Space 0 byte File Nane amp Comment File Name auto Naning File Name 12 coment 2 FD 1 NetWork 1 M FILE ja File Nam ja Filter Property ave Exec 12 0000 SET Setup 17 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the auto naming function e If you select ON the auto naming function is enabled If you select OFF the auto naming function is disabled 18 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to call up the keyboard and set the file name or comment Enter the file name using up to fourteen characters Enter comment using up to twenty f
207. GO determination signal output externally do not mistakenly connect a different signal pin Doing so may damage the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL or the device connected to it Do not accidentally insert a USB cable into the GO NO GO output terminal Doing so can cause damage to the instrument It is recommended to use the accessory GO NO GO cable part no 366973 sold separately for connections with external devices Do not use the GO NO GO cable part no 366973 for any purpose other than GO NO GO determination on this instrument Specifications of the GO NO GO Cable part no 366973 Approximately 1 5 m To the GO NO GO output connector on the rear panel 6 of the main unit gt Stripped wire modify as necessary O 1 RJ 12 modular jack Color Pin No Signal Logic Yellow 2 NC White 3 GO OUT Negative Green 4 NO GO OUT Negative Blue 5 GND IM 701730 01E 10 69 SWJOJaAe Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy Ss Chapter 11 Printing Screen Images 11 1 Installing the Roll Paper into the Built in Printer Optional Roll Paper for Printer The instrument uses a dedicated roll paper provided by YOKOGAWA Do not use other types of roll paper When you are using the printer for the first time use the roll paper that came with the package When the roll paper runs out contact your YOKOGAWA dealer Part No B9850NX Specifications Thermalsensible paper 30 m
208. H1 H CH2 H Enter Delay 1 us cm 4 oe APP Trigger CH1 H L H L H CH2 L H L H L H L H L H L H L l 1 us lt Condition A true Condition B true Pattern Trigger lt For the setup procedure see section 6 10 gt With pattern triggers the multiple trigger sources are set and a trigger is activated when all of the trigger conditions of the trigger sources are met or when the trigger conditions are no longer met Trigger conditions are specified by combining the status high or low of each trigger source In addition one of the trigger sources can be set to the clock signal and the trigger can be activated in sync with the clock signal Condition CH1 L CH2 L CH3 H CH4 L cH y fh f oe AAAF on of F E a CH1 L H L JH L H L cH2 L H L H L H L H L CH3 L H L H CHa L H L I 1 1 CH3 and CH4 not Trigger is activated available on the DL1720E IM 701730 01E suoloun jo uoneuejdxg 2 3 Triggers e Width Trigger lt For the setup procedure see section 6 11 gt A trigger is activated by determining whether the time width over which the specified condition is met or not met is shorter or longer than the determination time width set in advance The condition is set on the AND logic of the status High Low or Don t Care of each channel or the AND logic of the window condition IN OUT or Don t Care of each cha
209. IM 701730 01E 13 27 Ieuondo suonesaiunwwos 3u1 34 3 g 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Using the Web Server Function Using the FTP Server Function on a Web Browser Before using this function check that the communication interface of the instrument is set to Network see page 13 23 Click the FTP icon on the Web server window A window for viewing the storage media of the instrument storage media view window appears If the window does not appear click the Refresh button on the Web browser A login dialog box opens Log in The storage media view window appears Web Server Window Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Q sax Q aA ps Search J Favorites Media 4 A eS E 3 Address http fdlt700e_1 v gt Go Links File Test and Measurement Window for Viewing the Storage Media Back Qsearch Gyrolders lt 4 MG GS Xx A Ea Address L Ftp 0LUSER i x c Links Customize Links Free Hotmail Windows Media Windows PC_Card Built in storage media Depending on the product specifications one of the following is displayed e FD Floppy disk e PC_Card PC card You can open folders on each storage medium and view the file list e You can select the files displayed in the window and transfer them to the PC Adee Address a ftp DLUSER PC_Card Go u F E My Documents 0001 BMP i A A w 0000 BMP 0000
210. In networks that support DHCP these settings can be configured automatically For details consult your network administrator DNS Server Up to two DNS server addresses can be specified primary and secondary If the primary DNS server is down the secondary DNS server is automatically looked up for the mapping of the host name domain name and IP address Domain Suffix When the IP address corresponding to the server name with the aforementioned domain name is not found the system may be set up to search using a different domain name Enter this alternate domain name as the domain suffix Up to two domain suffixes can be specified Domain Suffix1 primary and Domain Suffix2 Secondary Note If you changed settings related to the Ethernet network the instrument must be power cycled If the instrument is turned ON with the DHCP function enabled without an Ethernet cable connected communications and file functions may not operate properly In this case turn DHCP OFF and power cycle the instrument Configuring the TCP IP Settings of the PC Communication parameters such as the IP address must be specified also on the PC side Communication parameters are specified for each Ethernet NIC that is installed in the PC Here the settings of the NIC for connecting your PC and the instrument are explained If the IP address and other parameters are to be obtained dynamically using the DHCP server the following settings are not necessary I
211. Items ON Displays up to twelve parameters of all waveforms The order in which the waveforms are listed is the same as the order in which the waveforms appear in the menu used to select the waveforms to be measured The order in which the parameters are listed is the same as the order in which the parameters appear in the Item Setup dialog box Statistics Displays up to two statistical values of the measurement parameters of all waveforms The order in which the waveforms and parameters is listed is the same as the ON case Cycle Statistics Same as Statistics History Statistics Same as Statistics 10 42 IM 701730 01E 10 6 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Voltage Axis Parameters P P P P value Max Min V OShot Amount of undershoot Max Max Voltage V vr Low Min High Low x 100 Min Min Voltage V OShot Amount of overshoot Rms Rms value 1 47 X xi 2 1 2 jv Ovr Max High High Low x 100 Avg Average voltage 1 n xi V High High voltage V Sdev Standard deviation Low Low voltage V SDv 1 n 2xi2 Exi 2 n 1 2 The characters inside the parentheses are measurement parameter names used when displaying the measured values High Low Time Axis Parameters Rise Rise time s AvgPeriod Average period within Fall Fall time s PR A the measurement range Hz Freq Freque
212. KB file data size IM 701730 01E vii Flow of Operation The figure below is provided to familiarize the first time user with the general flow of the instrument operation For a description of each item see the relevant section or chapter Making Preparations for Measurements Instrument installation gt Section 3 2 Power connection ON OFF gt Section 3 3 Probe connection gt Section 3 4 3 5 Displaying Waveforms on the Screen Initialization gt Section 4 4 Auto setup gt Section 4 5 Waveform Display Conditions e Vertical axis gt Sections 5 1 to 5 9 e Horizontal time axis gt Sections 5 10 to 5 11 e Trigger gt Chapter 6 e Waveform acquisition gt Chapter 7 e Waveform and information display Chapter 8 Computing Analyzing and Searching Waveforms e Waveform computation gt Chapter 9 e Waveform analysis gt Sections 10 5 to 10 8 e Waveform search gt Sections 10 2 to 10 4 e GO NO GO determination gt Sections 10 9 to 10 11 Printing and Saving Waveforms e Screen image printing gt Chapter 11 e Saving of various types of data Chapter 12 viii IM 701730 01E Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 gt e ee Checking the Contents of the Package ecceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeseeeseaeeseaeeeeeseaeesieeenaeenaes ii Safety PrECAUTIONS sessar debe dete cn duet seid dees id codec E aa E E eas adete cade Meagan eed pearance v Conventions Used
213. L connector see page 4 6 Compatible USB Mouse A USB wheel mouse conforming to USB HID Class Version 1 1 can be used Note For USB mouse devices that have been tested for compatibility contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Some items cannot be specified when using a mouse without a wheel Connection Procedure When connecting a USB mouse directly connect the mouse to the USB PERIPHERIAL connector on the rear panel see page 4 6 You can connect disconnect the USB mouse connector regardless of the power ON OFF state of the instrument Supports hot plugging When the power switch is turned ON the mouse is detected approximately six seconds after it is connected and a pointer is displayed USB PERIPHERAL USB Mouse DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL Note There are two USB PERIPHERAL connectors on the instrument However do not connect mouse devices to both connectors at the same time Confirming the Type of USB Mouse That Is Connected The procedure for confirming the type of USB mouse that is connected to the instrument is the same as the procedure for confirming the type of USB keyboard See section 15 2 4 8 IM 701730 01E 4 3 Operating the instrument Using a USB Keyboard or a USB Mouse USB Mouse Operation e Operations Similar to the Front Panel Keys Top Menu Displaying the Top Menu Right click on the screen The front panel key names on the instrument are displayed as the top menu Selecting I
214. LE menu appears 10 Press the Utility soft key The File List window appears File Item Data Type a a a a Save Load Unload Utility Waveform Binary 11 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select NetWork File List Path NetWork Space 2147483647 byte File Name Size Date Attr FD NetWork lt Software 2004 03 31 10 37 lt Utilities 2004 03 02 06 00 M Lutility FILE Function fa a Filter Dir Name Property attr Make Dir thal 12 Perform the save or load operation according to the procedures given in sections 12 5 to 12 8 Saving Screen Images 9 Press SHIFT IMAGE SAVE MENU The IMAGE menu appears 10 Press the File List soft key The File List window appears IMAGE a Fornat Color a Fite Nam Thumbnail Comment File List BMP OFF 12 0051 11 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select NetWork File List Path NetWork Space 2147483647 byte File Name Size Date Attr ja FD NetWork lt Software 2004 03 31 10 37 lt Utilities 2004 03 02 00 00 M a Format Color fa a Thumbnail Comment File List BMP OFF 12 0056 MAEL jaFile Nane 12 Perform the save operation according to the procedures given in section 12 9 IM 701730 01E 13 9 Ieuondo suonesaiunwwos 3u1 4 3 g 13 3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data Setup Data and Image Data on a Network Drive FTP Client Function Explanation
215. Linear Scaling If linear scaling is performed on the channel to be computed computation is performed using linearly scaled values Maximum Record Length That Can Be Computed The maximum record lengths that can be computed on Math1 and Math2 are as follows e DL1720E All record lengths can be computed DL1740E All record lengths can be computed DL1740EL When interleave is ON 4 MWord When interleave mode is OFF 2 MWord Computed Waveform Labels Labels can be assigned to computed waveforms Math1 and Math2 using up to eight characters For details see section 9 1 9 5 uoneynduoy WAoJOAe e 9 3 Performing Binary Computation lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 21 gt Procedure To exit the menu during operation press ESC zgr SHOT HELP located above the soft keys 7 g O In the procedural explanation below the term jog ica srana shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of SHIFT selecting setting items and entering values using RI the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys i ae For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and aa acron a 4 2 oC O O em CS eA For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 ueasune cursoR FILE misc con XY setup pispLay Copy mace save o i Note Before carrying out the procedures in this section you must first car
216. Map o All ff End Rec OFF 127 3 Press the Zone soft key Select Display eStart Rega OFF Zone araneter Record Shou Map o ALL 6 End Rec _ ___ 12 Setting the Search Zone and Search Conditions 4 Press the Search Setup soft key The Search Setup menu appears HISTORY fj Select Display Start Rega earch Mod ja Record o Shou Map Search Search C7 All 6 End Rec zone Setup Exec 127 Selecting the Zone for Registering Search Conditions 5 Press the Select Zone soft key The Select Zone menu appears Belect Zong Condition Source fe Upper 6 Left Logic 50div 3 000di Search Zonet FF IN OUT CHL Lover fj Right OR Exec 0 SOdiv 2 500di 6 Press any of the Zone1 to Zone4 soft keys to select the parameter in which search conditions are to be registered T 5 Search i HISTORY Zonez Zone3 Zone4 Zone1 Left Logic 3 000d Search Right OR Exec fi fi ae 2 Seed Selecting Conditions of the Waveform to Search for in the Search Zone 7 Press the Condition soft key to select OFF IN or OUT If you select IN or OUT and select a displayed waveform in step 9 the search zone rectangular frame is displayed elect Zon 4 Condition J Source fs Upper 6 Left Logic 50div 3 000di Search Zonet IN OUT CHL Lover Right OR Exec 0 SOdiv 2 500di e To exit the menu during operation press ESC ae SNO
217. NO GO determination is aborted and the word Abort changes to Exec ae ern Mode ry s TRange Setup 5 000 Exec Paraneter ST Range 5 0800 Number of times the condition is met When all the conditions including the determination Determination count logic are met it is counted as NG NO GO Exe Count 10 NG Count 10 Result 000x Max C1 833 333MU _____ Min C1 229 167mU Rms C2 254 735mU 4 Avg C2 254 500ny Determination target waveform measurement parameter and measured value of determination parameter Param2 Determination target waveform measurement parameter and measured value of determination parameter Param4 Determination target waveform measurement parameter and measured value of determination parameter Param1 Determination target waveform measurement parameter and measured value of determination parameter Param3 Displays the determination results of each determination parameter in the order Param1 to Param4 Displays the determination results of determination parameters whose Mode is ON Param1 determination results Farame When the conditions of the determination parameter are not met O OOOX When the conditions of the Param4 determination parameter are met X Param3 When the mode is not turned ON IM 701730 01E 10 66 10 10 Performing GO NO GO Determination Using Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Explanation This section explains t
218. Network see page 13 23 Click the Log icon on the Web server window The Log window that can display the past log of errors that occurred on the instrument GO NO GO determination and action on trigger appears Up to the thirty newest incidents are logged Logs older than the most recent thirty are not displayed Web Server Window Smart Search SHIFT ZOOM Searches for an edge serial pattern parallel pattern or Sia See aN VCE eee SOC Log Window BS o Page Select Kind of Log Error Displaying the Log e Selecting the Log Type Select Kind of Log From the list box select the item for displaying the log e Error log of errors that occurred on the instrument Go Nogo log of GO NO GO determination For the setup procedure for the GO NO GO determination see sections 10 9 and 10 10 Action Trigger log of action on triggers For the setup procedure for the action on trigger see section 6 15 e Updating the Log Update Click Update The selected log is displayed If the selected type of log is the same as that of the log being displayed the log is updated IM 701730 01E 13 41 Ieuondo SuOHedUNWWOD JeUI9U A g 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Log Display Example The following figure shows an example displaying the log of GO NO GO determination Displays Executing while GO NO GO determination is in progress or when action on trigger is in execution 20
219. P HELP located above the soft keys l O O e For a description of the operation using a USB Qerar CAE use Jonoad mm keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Setup DIsPLaY oPY MAGE SAVE O SHIFT C mn a Ca C G IM 701730 01E swu1ojaneM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy 5 10 2 Searching the History Waveforms Using Zones History Search Selecting the Search Target Waveform 8 Press the Source soft key The Source menu appears Search HISTORY elect Zong Condition Source ij Upper 6 Left Logic 0 30div 2 B0Odi Search Zonet FF N OU CH1 Loer f6 Right OR Exec o 70div 2 300di 9 Press the CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 or Math2 soft key to select the search target waveform CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1720E e If you select a displayed waveform as a search target and select IN or OUT in step 7 the search zone rectangular frame is displayed for a elect Zone CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 D Zonei Setting the Range of the Search Zone 10 Press the Upper Lower soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Upper Lower or both Upper and Lower e If you select Upper you can move the top edge of the zone e If you select Lower you can move the bottom edge of the zone If you select both Upper and Lower you can move the position of the zone vertically without changing the spacing between the top and bottom edges of the zone The value of the digit being specified by Upper ch
220. PEG Jtility Image Press the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List window appear File Item Format a Utility Image BMP Press the Function soft key The Function menu appears Utility Function a Filter et Reset All Set Property Attr Delete Delete Pe BMP Exec Press the Delete Copy Rename or Make Dir soft key Set Function to an item other than Format If Function is set to Format the screen image data files are not displayed Utility FILE Delete Copy Renane Make Dir Format Attr Delete Exec ee IM 701730 01E 12 39 ejeg Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 12 10 Thumbnails of the Saved Screen Image Data can be Displayed Explanation 9 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the screen image data file file with TIF BMP PS PNG or JPG extensions on the File List window The thumbnail of the selected screen image data file is displayed at the upper right section of the File List window To clear the thumbnail turn the jog shuttle The thumbnail of the selected file is displayed File List Path NetWork Softuare Space 214748364 byte __File Name Size Date FD 1 NetWork 1 lt 96 bc 8f CC gt 2004705714 15 56 12 0006 BMP 38462 2004 05 14 15 55 12 0005 BMP 38462 2004 05 14 15 55 12 0004 BMP 38462 2004 05 14 15 22 12 0003 BMP 38462 2004 05 14 1
221. Pressing any other key will change the settings to 1 Mohm DC input 25 Aborted the search 10 2 to 10 4 26 Executed the search but no record was found 10 2 to 10 4 that matched the conditions 27 Executed the search but no pattern was found 10 2 to 10 4 that matched the conditions 28 Pattern contains points that are between Thr 10 4 Lower and Thr Upper 29 MATH will be performed on all records Abort the operation by setting the history Display Mode to One 30 Aborted the recalculation of the MATH 32 Aborted statistical measurement processing 10 7 36 Key invalid for this model 48 Abort process is running Wait until the process completes 16 2 IM 701730 01E 16 2 Messages and Corrective Actions Errors in Execution 600 to 799 Code Message Corrective Action Sections 601 Invalid file name Check the file name 12 4 to 12 8 602 603 No USB device or no storage media inserted Check the USB device connection and the presence of a storage medium 604 Storage media failure Check the storage medium 605 File not found Check the file name and storage medium Chapter 12 606 Storage media is protected Turn OFF the write protect switch on the storage medium 607 Storage media failure Check the storage medium 608 610 Invalid file name Check the file name 12 4 to 12 8 611 612 Storage m
222. Quad Hexa2 of display formats are available You cannot set different formats for Z1 and Z2 1 If you select Main the format is the same as that of the Main Format setting under the DISPLAY menu 2 Quad and Hexa are available only on the DL1740E DL1740EL Zoom Rate Z1 Mag Z2 Mag The upper limit of the zoom rate is determined from the display record length as follows Upper limit of zoom rate display record length 50 or 40 The display record length does not necessarily match the record length For details on the display record length see appendix 1 e You can set different zoom rates for Z1 and Z2 zoomed waveform of two locations Zoom Position Z1Pos Z2Pos The zoom position can be set by specifying the zoom center position center of the zoom box in the range of 5 to 5 divisions with the center of the waveform display frame set to 0 divisions The setting steps are as follows Setting steps of the zoom position T div x 10 display record length The zoom box enclosed by solid lines is Z1 and the one enclosed by dashed lines is Z2 Since each box is independent you can set the position separately Changing Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Fit Meas Rng to Z1 Fit Meas Rng to Z2 Sets the measurement range of the automated measurement of waveform parameters to the zoom range of Z1 or Z2 This setting is active even when the automated measurement of waveform parameters is turned OFF IM 701730 01E
223. R1 RL1 PPO DC1 DTO and CO Protocol Conforms to IEEE Std 488 2 1987 Code ISO ASCII code Mode Addressable mode Address Specify a talker listener address between 0 and 30 Clear remote mode Remote mode can be cleared using the SHIFT CLEAR TRACE key except during Local Lockout For details see the Communication Interface User s Manual IM701710 17E USB Item Description Connector type USB type B connector receptacle Electrical and mechanical USB Rev 1 1 Data rate 12 Mbps max Number of ports 1 PC system supported PC running Windows 98 SE Windows Me Windows 2000 or Windows XP with a standard USB port a separate driver is needed to connect to a PC Ethernet Optional Item Description Number of communication ports 1 Electrical and mechanical specifications Conforms to IEEE802 3 Transmission system Ethernet 100BASE TX 10BASE T Transmission rate 100 Mbps max Communication protocol TCP IP Supported services FTP server FTP client network drive LPR client network printer SMTP client mail transmission Web server DHCP DNS SNTP and WebDAV Connector type RJ 45 connector IM 701730 01E 17 9 ol a suoneaioads 17 11 General Specifications Item Description Standard operating conditions Ambient temperature 23 2 C Ambient humidity 55 1
224. Range2 0 00 Div Statistics Start Stop Note e This function retrieves the selected waveform parameter values at the selected retrieve interval from the instrument into the PC and displays the trend To display the retrieved measurement values and trend Microsoft Excel 97 or later must be installed on the PC Ifthe measured value of a waveform parameter is not a normal number Not A Number the cell displaying the measured value on Microsoft Excel is set to blank e This function cannot be used in roll mode IM 701730 01E 13 35 Ieuondo suonesaiunwwos 3u1 4 3 g 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Setting the Trend Display Conditions e Selecting the Waveform Parameter to Be Displayed Graph 1 and Graph 2 You can display two trend graphs For each graph you can specify the trend target waveform and the waveform parameter When the waveform parameter is Marker you can set the Marker Position Selecting the Target Waveform Trace You can select the waveforms to trend display in the Trend box Chan1 to Chan4 channels 1 to 4 Math1 to Math2 computed waveforms Chan1 to Chan2 channels 1 to 2 and Math1 on the DL1720E Selecting the Waveform Parameter From the Parameter box select the target waveform parameter of the trend display same expression as the communication command For the meanings of the waveform parameters and the marker cursor see the explanation in section 10 5 or 10 6
225. SB keyboard DELETE IM 701730 01E App 19 E x pu ddy Appendix 5 Key Assignments of the USB Keyboard 109 Keyboard Japanese 89 Keyboard Japanese When Pressed with the Control Key When the Soft Keyboard Is Displayed Other a ACQ menu Same as left a A b MATH menu Same as left b B c Execute COPY Same as left c c d DISPLAY menu Same as left d D e ENHANCED menu Same as left e E f FILE menu Same as left f F g GO NOGO menu Same as left g G h HISTORY menu Same as left h H i Execute IMAGE SAVE Same as left i l j PRESET menu Same as left j J k k K l l L m MEASURE menu Same as left m M n n N o o o p POSITION menu Same as left p P q Execute CLEAR TRACE Same as left q Q r Execute RESET Same as left r R s SHIFT condition Same as left s S t TRIGMODE menu Same as left t T u CURSOR menu Same as left u U v v v w SIMPLE menu Same as left w w x x x y y Y z ZOOM menu Same as left z Z 1 CH1 menu 1 2 CH2 menu 2 H 3 CH3 menu 3 4 CH4 menu 4 5 5 6 6 amp 7 7 i 8 8 9 9 0 0 Enter Return Enter Select Same as left Return Enter Same as left Return Enter Same as left Esc Escape Same as left Escape Same as left Escape Same as left Back Space Back Space Same as left Tab Space Bar Space Bar Same as left A A 5 r lt gt
226. SB mouse see section 4 3 Smee ENHANCED ACTION DELAY aS Se Explanation 1 Turn the TIME DIV knob to set the T div Note ___ If the TIME DIV knob is turned while the waveform acquisition is stopped the new T div value is displayed inside the parentheses at the upper right corner of the screen The new T div value becomes valid the next time waveform acquisition is started You can set the value in terms of time per div divisions of the screen grid Selectable T div Range 1 ns div to 50 s div in 1 2 5 steps when the record length is greater than or equal to 10 kW 1 ns div to 5 s div in 1 2 5 steps when the record length is equal to 1 kW T div and Sampling Mode The maximum sample rate when repetitive sampling is OFF see section 7 5 is 500 MS s or 1 GS s when interleave mode is ON In repetitive sampling mode you can set the sample rate to 1 GS s or more or 2 GS s or more when interleave mode is ON However the time axis range that allows repetitive sampling mode varies depending on the model and record length setting For details see appendix 1 Note When you change the T div setting repetitive sampling mode may be automatically enabled even when repetitive sampling is set to OFF see appendix 1 T div and Roll Mode Under the following three conditions roll mode display is enabled for the T div settings listed below When the acquisition mode see section 7 5 is something other than Ave
227. SHIFT Fora description of the operation using a USB c T D CONA Eee YY TA TRER keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 a vsDIV TIME sDIV oa oa Setting the Trigger Mode 1 Press MODE The MODE menu appears 2 Press the Single N soft key to set the trigger mode to Single N MODE Auto Normal Single Single n Level E 3 Use the jog shuttle to set Single N Count Auto Auto Normal Single ing le N Level aor feSingle Nn Count 1 7 8 IM 701730 01E 7 6 Performing Sequential Store SINGLE N Mode Explanation When the trigger mode is set to Single N the sequential store function becomes available Acquisition count Single N Count Set in the following range The acquisition count that can be specified varies depending on the specified record length as follows e For the DL17420E Record length Count When in Normal Mode Count When in Box Average Mode 1 kWord 1 256 512 1 128 256 10 kWord 1 32 64 1 16 32 50 kWord 1 8 16 1 4 8 100 kWord 1 4 8 1 2 4 250 kWord 1 2 4 1 2 1 MWord 1 2 1 2 MWord 1 The value inside the parentheses is selectable only when interleave mode is ON e For the DL1740E Record length Count When in Normal Mode Count When in Box Average Mode z 1 kWord 1 512 1024 1 256 512 2 10 kWord 1 64 128 1 32 64 D 50 kWord 1 16 32 1 8 16
228. Set which edge count is to be the reference point or measurement point The selectable range is an integer from 1 to 9 e The level at the detection point is the mesial point e The measurement parameter name when displaying the measured value is Dly 1 Cycle Mode This mode is used determine the waveform cycle and calculate measurement values related to the vertical axis or area within the cycle This mode is suited to measurement parameters such as Rms and Avg that produce errors depending on the measurement range This mode does not affect the measurement parameters related to the time axis or the area of the X Y waveforms 10 44 IM 701730 01E 10 6 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Measurement Range T Range1 T Range2 The selectable range is 5 divisions and the resolution is ten divisions display record length The right end of the measurement range T Range2 must be greater than or equal to the left end of the measurement range T Range1 Distal Mesial and Proximal Values You can select the method of assigning the three levels that are used as references in measurements such as the rise and fall times The distal value must be greater than or equal to the mesial value and the proximal value must be greater than or equal to the mesial value Taking the high and low levels to be 100 and 0 respectively you can set the distal mesial and proximal values of each waveform in the range of 0 to 100 T
229. Setting Distal Mesial and Proximal Unit and Values 25 Press the Dist Prox Mode soft key to select or Unit If you select you can set the distal mesial and proximal values in percentages by taking the high level and low level of the waveform to be set to be 100 and 0 respectively e If you select Unit you can set the distal mesial and proximal values in the range corresponding to V div_8 divisions within the screen Trace Dist Prox CH1 Unit 26 Press the Distal soft key Distal becomes the item under jog shuttle control 27 Turn the jog shuttle to set the distal value 28 Press the Mesial soft key Mesial becomes the item under jog shuttle control 29 Turn the jog shuttle to set the mesial value 5 Distal 90 IM 701730 01E 10 41 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy es 10 6 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters 30 Press the Proximal soft key Proximal becomes the item under jog shuttle control 31 Turn the jog shuttle to set the proximal value MEASURE 6Proximal High Low Back 10 to Maxi 272 Setting the High and Low Values 32 Press the High Low Mode soft key to select Auto or MAX MIN If you select Auto the higher amplitude level is set to high and lower level is set to low by taking into account the frequency of occurrence of the voltage level of the waveform being measured within the measurement range and the effects of ringing and spikes If you selec
230. TART STOP py mace SAVE O SHIFT O TRIG D ACTION _ DELAY RESET 4 shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of selecting setting items and entering values using the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and 4 2 For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 SELECT spe Setting the Display Format 1 Press DISPLAY The DISPLAY menu appears 2 Press the Format soft key The Format menu appears DISPLAY Graticule Scale Trace ccunu late Value Label Single Sine y ON on OFF Format Interpol Next 172 3 Press a soft key from Single to Hexa to select the display format Quad and Hexa are not available on the DL1720E Single Dual Triad Quad Hexa Waveform Mapping DISPLAY sumu late OFF 172 z amp d b 4 Press the Next 1 2 soft key The page 2 menu appears arena Format Interpol Graticule Scale Value Trace Label Single Sine y FF on fpe on ccumu iat Next OFF 172 5 Press the Mapping soft key DISPLAY Mapping Auto ans 1Ucey on 6 Press the Auto Fixed or User soft key to select the waveform mapping method e If you select Auto or Fixed you are done e lf you select User proceed to ste
231. TATE TARTTEE T 3 13 automated measurement of waveform parameter DOi 2 12 P AEE TA E ATEEN DC1 MQ wee 2 4 automated measurement values of waveform parameter DC50 Q eorne nea r re E E 2 4 EER E E E EEN default gateway E e S auxiliary I O section Cetault yaly anasinin a raaa App 17 averaging MOdE tvsiis seceticetessiesgeenctevass cam sadeedetnideaveste degree 2 27 10 37 tole FE T T E cattaarseraee eek ceaateay 6 19 delay between waveform sssesssssseessiissrissrriiesrressressrens 10 44 B delay tM C ieseecaeisiivedersccvecevessscaatevateteciedunecastusseesuecvecevedbess 4 20 backlight deleting file 42 42 bandwidth limit deskew s is 4 21 DIMALY S determination cseeceeceeeeeeesreeseesstecsneeestessecsseenseestaes 6 27 binary computation c ee cece ee eseses ess tseseseesteeeseees 2 21 9 6 determination logic ccccceceeeeectecteeteeseneeees 10 62 10 67 block diagram determination parameter cccccceccececsecsecseeeeseteeteetees 10 67 DOX AVETAGE a ssesiveenenatinsiunnannerans determination status briQhtN SS E E E ne determination zone built in printer DHO Piirit tessestssecccreiens tesanetacctecstasteainccassscemneeaiees oea rss E E ee E E EEE differential probe differentiating sissi Auceisiraiscrscatisscdaresticansieecsscnntivaneess CIPSrEMUALION virii dimensional drawing directory NAMO vscccscscecccvssctsssecscesecscobeestevesestescsasdeseres eoes DISPLAY 00 eceeeceecees
232. TP server and network print SSL PC Card Interface Typell or select floppy disk DL Series Selection Internet Note _ To use the link function the PC must be connected to the Internet If the message language of the instrument is set to English the English Web page is displayed if the message language is set to Japanese or Chinese the Japanese or Chinese Web page is displayed For the setup procedure for the message language see section 15 1 13 44 IM 701730 01E 13 8 Setting the Time Difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC SNOP HELP located above the soft keys y e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog a shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of sTaRT sTOP selecting setting items and entering values using aca XY_ MENENY Setup pIsPLay CoPy maGE SAVE O SHIFT VERTICAL vsDIv iD D aS Ge the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys ORS a oO For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and ACTION DELAY 4 2 Crm CS TIME sDIV For a description of the operation using a USB OF iA keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Setting the Time Difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time 1 Press the MISC The MISC menu appears 2 Press the Network soft key The Network menu appears Wisc MISC a r a y alibration Remote Netu
233. Trigger signal limited by hold off time t when the trigger slope is set to rising edge Action on Trigger lt For the setup procedure see section 6 15 gt A specified action can be executed each time a trigger is activated You can select from various actions including sounding of a buzzer saving of waveform data or screen image data printing of screen image data or transmission of e mail messages when the Ethernet interface option is installed IM 701730 01E 2 13 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 2 4 Waveform Acquisition and Display Conditions Record Length lt For the setup procedure see section 7 2 gt The term record length refers to the number of data points acquired per channel in the acquisition memory The record lengths that can be specified specified record length are 1 kW 1000 points 10 kW 50 kW 100 kW 250 kW 500 kW 1 MW 2 MW 4 MW and 8 MW The maximum record length that can be specified varies depending on the model and interleave mode setting Displayed record length refers to the number of these data points that are actually displayed on the screen When the time axis setting is changed the sample rate and display record length change see appendix 1 In most cases the displayed record length is identical to the acquisition record length For certain time axis settings however the lengths become different see appendix 1 Specified Record Length The length of the green frame indicates the in
234. Undo Auto Setup soft key sets the instrument back to the conditions that existed immediately before auto setup However when you turn OFF the power switch the settings that existed immediately before auto setup are cleared Therefore the Undo Auto Setup operation is not possible in this case Applicable Waveforms for Auto Setup Frequency Approximately 50 Hz or higher Absolute value of the input voltage Maximum value is greater than or equal to approximately 20 mV 1 1 Type Repetitive waveform not complex Input coupling DC Note The auto setup function may not work properly if the waveform includes DC components or high frequency components 4 16 IM 701730 01E 4 5 Executing Auto Setup Setup Data after Executing Auto Setup Waveform acquisition display conditions Acquisition mode Acquisition count Record length Interleave mode Time base Accumulate mode Zoom target Normal Infinite 10k OFF Int OFF Channels whose display is ON waveforms whose Allocation on the ZOOM menu is OFF are not displayed Vertical axis settings Vidiv Offset voltage Coupling Bandwidth limit Display ON OFF Position Value that causes the absolute value of the input waveform to be 1 6 to 4 divisions OV Other than DC50 Q DC 1 MQ DC 50 Q DC 50 Q FULL Turns ON channels whose absolute value of the input voltage is greater than or equal to 20 mV 1 1 0 divisions Horizontal axis settings T d
235. Waveforms Selecting the Save Destination Medium Directory 4 Press the Save soft key The Save menu appears FILE FILE File Item a a a Save Load Unload Utility Snap 5 The procedure is the same as steps 13 to 15 on page 12 14 Setting the File Name and Comment 6 The procedure is the same as steps 16 to 18 on page 12 14 12 26 IM 701730 01E 12 7 Saving Loading the Snapshot Waveforms Executing the Save 7 Press the Save Exec soft key The data is saved to the directory indicated by Pathe At the same time the Save Exec soft key changes to the Abort soft key While the data is being saved the icon is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen File List Path NetWork Software Space 2147483647 byte File Name Size Date Attr FD 1 NetWork 1 12 0001 38462 2004 05 14 10 16 12 0000 38462 2004 05 14 10 16 M Save ave Exec Snap a File Nang Filter Property 12 0002 SND Aborting the Save 8 Press the Abort soft key The save operation is aborted At the same time the Abort soft key changes to the Save Exec soft key Specifying the File and Properties to Be Displayed on the File List Window 9 The procedure is the same as steps 22 to 25 on page 12 15 Loading Snapshot Waveforms Select the snapshot waveform data according to steps 1 to 3 on page 12 26 4 Press the Load soft key The Load menu and the File List wind
236. Width OR Ty Hold Off uS 0 08 1 Set the status of condition A B for each channel to H L or X m Set the Condition of condition A B to Enter or Exit Condition TJPE F Count feHoid OFF et Patter Level cus A gt BIND Coupling 1 0 08 8 Press ESC The Set Pattern dialog box closes 6 14 IM 701730 01E 6 8 Setting the A gt B N Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Trigger Level 9 Press the Level Coupling soft key The Level Coupling dialog box opens The settings related to CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720E ENHANCED Type ra ry 5 count fetold OFF et Patte Levels cus A gt BIND En 1 0 08 ees 1 Setting the level of each channel Level Hys Coupling HF Rej 9 Set the hysteresis of each lic om tse xT channel to ZZ or 7 CH2 1 50 UI Lic oF 3 CH3 1 50 UI i S O o y a Set the trigger coupling of each channel to DC or AC 4 Set the HF rejection of each channel to OFF 20 MHz or 15 kHz CH4 1 00 UI Lic oF 10 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the level of each channel Setting the Hysteresis 11 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the hysteresis of each channel to A or DW Setting the Trigger Coupling 12 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the trigger coupling of each channel to DC or AC Setting the HF Rejection 13 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to
237. XT See the specifications of the external clock input see section 17 3 2 Under standard operating conditions see section 17 11 after the warm up 3 The input frequency range when using the terminal as a trigger gate input is DC to 50 MHz Trigger Output TRIG OUT Item Description Connector type BNC Output level TTL Output logic LI Negative Output delay time 50 ns max Output hold time 1 u s minimum for low level and 100 ns minimum for high level RGB Video Signal Output RGB VIDEO OUT Item Description Connector type 15 pin D Sub receptacle Output type VGA compatible GO NO GO Determination Output NO GO OUT GO OUT Item Description Connector type RJ 12 modular jack Output type TTL compatible Signal GO OUT NOGO OUT Compatible cable 4 wire modular cable Probe Power Supply Terminal Optional Item Description Number of output terminals DL1740E DL1740EL 4 Ato D DL1720E 2 A B Output voltage 12 V Up to 400 mA on pairs of terminals A and C and B and D 600 mA total on A thru D Probes that can be used FET probe 700939 current probe 700937 701930 701931 701932 and differential probe 701920 or 701922 17 8 IM 701730 01E 17 10 Computer Interface GP IB Item Description Electrical and mechanical Conforms to IEEE Std 488 1978 JIS C 1901 1987 Functional specifications SH1 AH1 T6 L4 S
238. Zz Pos ng to 21 x 100 4 DOOOAdi Display frame of Z2 it Meas ng to 22 2004 04 13 10 28 23 j ick Normal 5 Stopped 18 7 100kS s _ 10nsftiv CAT 40 0 V lt mi gt gt CH1 10 1 10 0 U div rn DC Full 7 CHZ 10 1 10 0 U div DC Full Main waveform cz aie T display frame LAJA ee 50 00ms 40 0 v z T 50 00ms Waveform assigned to the Y axis X Y waveform __ Y axis scale 5 Waveform value ao display frame assigned to the 2 30 X axis Hho v Display OFF Bh Node X AXIS t T Y amp X Y ingle Dual xY2 X axis scale value IM 701730 01E 1 9 Syed JO suonouny pue sowen E 1 3 Display Screens Display Example of the Setup Information List If you press the Setup Info soft key displayed on the second page of the menu that appears when pressing the MISC key a list of setup data is displayed as shown below This screen can be printed as additional information see section 11 2 when the waveforms displayed on the screen screen image are printed on the built in printer optional List of Setup Information Setup data related to the vertical axis trigger and horizontal axis of CH1 to CH4 2 is displayed 2004 04 06 15 55 532z7 ick Normal cal Setup Information CH1 10 1 0 500 Udiv CH2 CH3 CH4 DC Full 0 500 UV 0 500 V 0 500 U 0 500 U CH2 10 1 DCMR DCMR DC1N2 DC1N2 0 500 U div 10 1 10
239. a 4 Press the Format soft key A media list is displayed in the File List window Utility C FILE Delete Copy Rename Make Dir Format Attr Delete Exec i 12 8 IM 701730 01E 12 4 Formatting the Storage Medium 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select the storage medium to be formatted Network drives cannot be formatted If there are no external USB storage devices that are detected and only a floppy disk or PC card is inserted only FD or PC_CARD appears File List File Nane Size Space 1457664 585216 Selecting the Floppy Disk Format 6 Press the Format soft key The Format menu appears Proceed to step 8 Utility FILE Function a a edia Info Format Format Selecting the PC Card Format 6 Press the Format soft key The Format menu appears Utility FILE Function Ja a edia Info Format Format Selecting the Number of Partitions 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select 1 or 2 Storage media that are already partitioned can be selected and formatted as separate storage media PC_Card1 or PC_Card2 for example but the separate storage media cannot be partitioned further Format Partitio Exec 1 Selecting the USB Storage Format 6 Press the Format soft key The Format menu appears Function a ledia Info Fornat Utility FILE Function a a edia Info Format Format Selecting the Number of Partiti
240. a and various data 1 Select floppy disk drive or PC card interface for the built in media drive 2 When the Ethernet interface option is installed Other Item Description Initialization Resets settings to the factory default excluding date time setting communication interface settings settings stored to the internal memory using the store recall function and language setting Auto setup Automatically sets the optimum voltage axis time axis trigger and other settings for the input signal Store Recall Store and recall up to three sets of arbitrary setup data to and from the instrument s internal memory Preset Presets for CMOS 5 V CMOS 3 3 V ECL and user settings Action on trigger Outputs screen image data saves waveform data activates buzzer notification or sends email messages each time a trigger occurs Mail transmission Periodically sends the status of the instrument to a specified mail address via the Ethernet network Can also send information as an action for GO NO GO determination and action on trigger Calibration Auto calibration and manual calibration available Deskew Corrects the delay of the acquired waveforms on each channel Adjustment range is 100 ns 0 01 ns resolution Environment settings Set the screen color date time message language and click sound ON OFF Probe compensation signal output Outputs a signal rectangular signal of approx 1 Vp p and approx
241. a Eat N mar Qaca srarrsror setup pispLav Copy mace savE o SHIFT C we A o Coma A TA eo 2 Bos VzDIV TIME DIV a n ACTION _DELAY 4 2 oC e a CS eA e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Note Before carrying out the procedures in this section you must first carry out the procedures for displaying and labeling computed waveforms in section 9 1 The setup procedures for computed waveform Math1 are described below Perform similar steps for Math2 Press the M1 Setup soft key The M1 Setup dialog box opens C mm 2 Display aM Setup Mz Label ON 3 C4 Math2 C1 C2 Mathi OFF prj i Dispiav M ii Label Setting the Equation Scaling Unit and Smoothing 2 3 4 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the inversion operator Invert and the waveform on which to perform computation When the M1 Setup dialog box is closed by pressing ESC or another key the specified equation appears in the M1 Setup menu column Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the scaling unit and smoothing of computed waveform Math1 Press ESC The M1 Setup dialog box closes Hi Setup Select Invert Select the waveform on which to perform computation Operation 6 6000E 00 L 5 0000E 01 Source Set the scaling used to display computed waveform Math1 to Auto auto scalin
242. a Trace Horizontal sat XYZ Measuring Waveforms Using Vertical Cursors 1 Press CURSOR The CURSOR menu appears Selecting the Vertical Cursor 2 Press the Type soft key The Type menu appears CURSOR Type OFF 3 Press the Vertical soft key CURSOR OFF lor izonta ie Marker Degree L When X Y waveforms are displayed Degree is not available Selecting the Waveform to Measure e When X Y Waveforms Are Not Displayed 4 Press the Trace soft key The Trace menu appears CURSOR Type Trace 5 Cursorit ursor Jun 4 000dir ump Exec Vertical CH1 Cursor2 C1 to Z1 4 000di 5 Press the All CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 or Math2 soft key to select the waveform to measure On the DL1740E DL1740EL you can select from All CH1 to CH4 Math1 and Math2 e On the DL1720E you can select All CH1 CH2 and Math1 a CH4 Mathi Math2 TOO e When X Y Waveforms Are Displayed 4 Press the Trace soft key to select XY1 or XY2 Proceed to step 6 CURSOR Trace 5 Cursor 3 OOdiv Vertical KYI xY2 j osora 10 32 IM 701730 01E 10 5 Cursor Measurements Moving Cursors 6 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor1 Cursor2 or both Cursor1 and Cursor2 e Select Cursor1 to move Cursor1 e Select Cursor2 to move Cursor2 e If you select both Cursor1 and Cursor2 you can move Cursor1 and Cursor2 horizontally without changing the sp
243. about the thumbnail display see the next section Note The maximum number of files that can be saved when auto naming is enabled is 2500 If the total number of files and directories exceed 2500 in a single directory the file list is no longer displayed 12 36 IM 701730 01E 12 10 Thumbnails of the Saved Screen Image Data can be Displayed AN CAUTION Do not remove the storage medium disk or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the storage medium is blinking Doing so can damage the storage medium or destroy the data on the medium Procedure SNAP HELP I W00 E FILE misc_ cono co MATH RESET SELECT IY M ENU PHA CQ START STOP setup pisPLay Cor mace savefo sHrr ae SEARCH O TRIG D FERN oe vzDiv TIME DIV oS Te Ole GES DELAY Ef F Displaying Thumbnails from the IMAGE Menu To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the term jog shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of selecting setting items and entering values using the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and 4 2 For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press SHIFT IMAGE SAVE MENU The IMAGE menu appears 2 Press the Format soft key The Format menu appears
244. above the panel keys e The TRIGGER sub menu contains the following TRIGGER group panel key names MODE SIMPLE ENHANCED POSITION ACTION and DELAY To display the COPY menu or the IMAGE SAVE menu select COPY MENU or IMAGE MENU respectively To execute the COPY or IMAGE SAVE operation select COPY or IMAGE SAVE respectively suoljeiodg uowwog e 4 3 Operating the instrument Using a USB Keyboard or a USB Mouse e Setup Menu Operation Similar to the Soft Key Operation Selecting an Item on the Setup Menu Left click the item you wish to select on the setup menu If another menu appears when you select an item move the pointer to the new menu displaying the item you wish to select and left click the item If an item such as ON or OFF appears when you select an item move the pointer to the new frame and left click within the frame to switch the selected item For menus in which items are selected using jog shuttle amp SELECT see page 4 3 left click the desired item Left click again to confirm the new setting and close the selection dialog box You can turn the mouse wheel to select scrollable items Left click within the frame to show the selection menu Point to the item you wish to select and left click the item to confirm the selection Left click within this frame to switch the selected item for each click DISPLAY_ Gtaticule Scale Trace Accumulate Value Label Next Fal Fr p jor py OFF a Selection items
245. above the soft keys vV e In the procedural explanation below the term jog O shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of f ae vzDIV ales D eseje PA EI l aca sTaRT STOP setup Joisay Gory mace save o SHIFT selecting setting items and entering values using VERTICAL CCHORIZONTAT y TRIGGER A e v eo Gamer the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and ACTION DELAY 4 2 Ow e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Entering the TCP IP Setup Menu 1 Press the MISC key The MISC menu appears 2 Press the Network soft key The Network menu appears p msc a r a alibration Remote Netuork Systen vervieu Next Control Conf ig 172 3 Press the TCP IP Setup soft key The TCP IP Setup dialog box opens Netuork I a y TCP IP User Mail Net Drive f Net Print Others Comect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List EN Turning DHCP ON and OFF 4 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set DHCP to ON or OFF e If you select OFF proceed to step 5 If you set DHCP to ON you do not have to set the IP address subnet mask default gateway below If you select DNS proceed to step 8 If DNS is not set check the network cable connection and power cycle the instrument The IP address subnet mask and default gateway are autom
246. acing between the two The value of the digit being specified by Cursor1 changes When X Y waveforms are not displayed CURSOR E Ta ursor Jun 4 000dir jump 5 Cursor2 C1 to 21 4 900div When X Y waveforms are displayed CURSOR fj Cursori 3 00div Cursor2 3 06div 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor Type Trace Vertical CHL Type Trace Vertical XYZ Jumping the Cursor to the Zoom Waveform Display Frame When X Y Waveforms Are Not Displayed 8 Press the Cursor Jump soft key The Cursor Jump menu appears CURSOR Trace fj Cursori amp al Junp Exec Exec Vertical AE k a f to al 4 0004i 9 Press the C1 to Z1 C1 to Z2 C2 to Z1 or C2 to Z2 soft key to select the cursor and the jump destination Type Trace ff Cursori 1 to 21 Ci to 22 C2 to 21 C2 to 22 4 000di Vertical CH1 Cursor2 4 0004iy 7 10 Press the Jump Exec soft key The cursor jumps to the specified zoom waveform display frame Type Trace ia Cursori ursor Jujo 4 0004it Exec Vertical Cursor2 C1 to Z1 4 000di Measuring Waveforms Using Marker Cursors 1 Press CURSOR The CURSOR menu appears SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy 5 Selecting the Marker Cursor 2 Press the Type soft key The Type menu appears CURSOR Type OFF 3 Press the Marker soft key lorizontal f Vertical Marker Degree When X Y wave
247. aco ommrsron CO Setup pisPLay CoPY MAGE SAVE o SHIFT Cc ow D C HORZONTAL 4 TRIGGER D O TRIG D rss gt Smee ennanced vzDIv TIME DIV o a C C ACTION i G SS Ly V DIV TIME DIV Entering Values Using the Jog Shuitle After selecting the setup item using the soft key use the jog shuttle to change the value in the explanations in this manual this operation may be indicated as jog shuttle amp SELECT The outer shuttle ring can be used to step through the values in large increments On some items the arrow keys below the jog shuttle can be used to change the selected digit Resets the value to the initial value CLEAR SNAP HELP m O NV OO al MEASURE CURSOR FILE misc GoNo co MATH ee ed ne aco oramsa ED SETUP panee SAVE O SHIFT Jog shuttle Decreases the value c T EE R zoom o o TIMEZDIV Enpre Caco ACTION DELAY Increases the value POSITION OI OC ek Arrow keys Changes the current digit Shuttle ring l ii CHI Display q e sition Coupling Probe i Offset Bandwidth Next OFF pry O 00div DCiNa 10 1 000kY Full 172 Mark indicating that the jog shuttle can be used to set the value Note ___ The items that can be changed using the jog shuttle are reset to their default values when the RESET key is pressed suoljeiodg uowwog g IM 7017
248. ag you can set the zoom rate of Z2 If you select both Z1 Mag and Z2 Mag the zoom rate of Z2 is set equal to Z1 When you turn the jog shuttle both are set to the same zoom rate Setting the Zoom Position 11 Press the Z1 Pos Z2 Pos soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Z1 Pos If you select Z1 on the Mode menu Z1 Pos is displayed If you select Z2 Z2 Pos is displayed If you select Z1 and Z2 Z1 Pos Z2 Pos is displayed 12 Turn the jog shuttle to set the zoom position of zoom box Z1 00m Hode Format ja Zi Magy fs Z1 Pos llocation x 40 0 104diy Vit Meas it Meas jain amp Z1azz Main 22 Mag f 22 Pos ing to 21 Rng to z2 x 4o O 080di 13 Likewise set the zoom position of zoom box Z2 with Z2 Pos If you select Z1 Pos you can set the zoom position of Z1 If you select Z2 Pos you can set the zoom position of Z2 If you select both Z1 Pos and Z2 Pos the zoom position of Z2 is set equal to Z1 When you turn the jog shuttle both are set to the same zoom position Changing Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters 14 Press the Fit Meas Rng to Z1 or Fit Meas Rng to Z2 soft key The range of the automated measurement of waveform parameters is set to the zoom range of Z1 or Z2 Hode Format Zi Mag 6 Zi Pos ki location x 40 0 104d jain amp Z1azz Main z tes 22 Pos 8 00d san it Meas mg to 22 fis sa Meas fis sa to 21 8 8 IM 701730 01E 8 4 Zo
249. al All characters including spaces can be used Save Destination The available storage medium is displayed in the File List window e Floppy Disk FD Floppy disk PC Card PC card NetWork Network drive when the Ethernet interface option is installed USB USB storage Floppy Disk PC Card External USB Storage The handling of the floppy disk PC card and external USB storage device are described in sections 12 2 and 12 3 For the formatting procedure see section 12 4 File Name Number of Characters Characters That Can Be Used 1 to 14 characters 0to9 AtoZ _ Auto Naming When Auto Naming is turned ON files with a four digit number from 0000 to 2399 0000 to 1249 for binary format are automatically created when saving the data You can specify a common name up to ten characters specified through Filename that is placed before the number Reduced Image Thumbnail Data If a screen image data file a file with TIF BMP PS PNG or JPG extension is saved to the directory selected using File List on the IMAGE SAVE menu data separate from the screen image data used for thumbnail display is created along with the screen image data itself The extension of thumbnail data varies depending on the data format of the original screen image data as follows TIFF file TTD BMP file BTD PS file PTD PNG file NTD JPEG file JTD The data size is approximately 2 to 6 KB for all five file types For information
250. al explanation below the term jog Ce GE msc FT 7o cranra shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of SETUP rsm ord ace seks SHIFT selecting setting items and entering values using Taen a T the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys o ED Gn G For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and VzDIV TIME sDIV ACTION DELAY 4 2 a aa O O e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press SHIFT IMAGE SAVE MENU The IMAGE menu appears Selecting the Data Format 2 Press the Format soft key The Format menu appears IMAGE a Format Color fa a ja File Name Thumbna i Comment File List BMP OFF 12 0051 Press the TIFF BMP Post Script PNG or JPEG soft key to select the data format CO Setting the Color Mode Selectable only when the data format is set to TIFF BMP PNG or JPEG in step 3 4 Press the Color soft key The Color menu appears o a JPEG Thumbnai 1 12 0052 IMAGE a Format Color la ja File Nameg Thumbnail Comment File List BMP OFF 12 0051 5 Press ON ON Reverse white background ON Gray grayscale or OFF to select the color mode Format OFF ON Reverse l ON Gray BMP IMAGE File Nand 12 0053 IM 701730 01E 12 33 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 12 9 Saving Screen Image Data Setting the Compression Method
251. ale Display ON and OFF Procedure CLEAR TRACE od I III FILE msc conosco mata a PEST VENU MENU TPHASE ACQ START STOP CHORZONTAL TRIGGER D SEARCH O TRIG D i o Smee ENHANCED TIME 7DIV ACTION DELAY 4 SN Explanation P HELP SELECT lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 20 gt e To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press DISPLAY The DISPLAY menu appears 2 Press the Scale Value soft key to select ON or OFF When OFF 2004 04 13 16 03 08 j jiok Normal Stopped 1796 y SMS s ZOOHSAiv lt lt Maint 10k gt gt CH1 10 1 9 500 Urdiv DC Full J E Edge CH1 F Auto 9 290 V DISPLAY Fornat Interpol Graticule Scale Trace Accumulate Value Next Single Sine y E BFF on 2 When ON 2004 64 13 16 03 14 j iok Normal Stopped 4 5MS 5_200HS iv lt lt Maint 10k gt gt CH1 10 1 0 500 Urdiv DC Full Scale value of vertical axis E Edge CHL F Auto 9 290 V Scale Graticule g orr DN Trace alue Label JFF 1000 us amtat ON The upper and lower limits of the vertical and horizontal axis of each channel can be displayed
252. all necessary channels Explanation You can remove high frequency components 20 MHz or more or 100 MHz or more from the input signal The bandwidth limit is set for each channel Bandwidth Limit Bandwidth limits of 20 MHz and 100 MHz are available The frequency characteristics when bandwidth is limited are shown below If you select Full the frequency bandwidth is 500 MHz 50 Q input or 400 MHz 1 M Q input Attenuation 3 dB N gt 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 K 1 1 Approx 20 MHz Approx 100 MHz FULL Input frequency 500 MHz at 50 input 400 MHz at 1 MQ input 5 14 IM 701730 01E 5 9 Using the Linear Scaling Function Procedure JOC LLELLE D776 setup pisPLay Copy mace SAvVE O SHIFT CERZE C mean D SEARCH O TRIG D lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 5 gt P HELP ueasune curRsOR FILE misc cono co mara A X Y MENU _ MENU CPHASE To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys For a description of the operation using a USB i o Smee ENHANCED keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 ACTION DELAY Cre S SN 1 Press one of the CH1 to CH4 2 keys to select the channel The CH menu appears 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key Display Position f Coupling Probe ia Offset Banduid
253. ally abnormal waveforms in the past cannot be displayed However by using the history memory function the past waveform data history waveforms including the current displayed waveform stored in the acquisition memory can be displayed when waveform acquisition is stopped You can display a specified history waveform from the data up to 2048 waveforms or the number of triggers stored in the acquisition memory In addition a certain history waveform can be searched see section 2 6 The number of waveforms N that can be acquired and held as history waveforms varies from 1 to 2048 depending on the record length interleave mode setting and model If the number of waveforms N that can be acquired and held is exceeded the oldest history waveform is cleared The waveform currently displayed on the screen newest waveform is counted as the 1st waveform and up to N 1 waveforms in the past can be displayed The following figure indicates an example when N 1024 Holds waveform data of the last 1024 triggers l ANAN 1 Currently displayed waveform i Select Record 0 1 1 I 1 1 I 1 1 _ Select Record 0 Displays past waveforms when Select Record set in the range from 0 to 1023 ka Select Record 25 2 16 IM 701730 01E 2 4 Waveform Acquisition and Display Conditions Display Format lt For the setup procedure see section 8 1 gt Splitting the Screen The screen
254. als Explanation You can use the deskew function to minimize the effects skew of the delay time of the input signals due to the probe or other factors and observe the input signal You can correct the delay time of the signals on CH1 through CH4 2 You can select up to CH2 on the DL1720E and up to CH4 on the DL1740E DL1740EL respectively Selectable Range of Skew Correction The correction time can be set in the following range 100 ns to 100 ns resolution is 0 01 ns IM 701730 01E 4 21 suoljeiodg uowwog s 4 8 Using the Help Function Procedure HELP race 8 Or V O To exit the menu during operation press ESC MENU _ MENU setup pisPLay CoPY mace savE a ShiFT e For a description of the operation using a USB Esejas Ee mse Oe marn sco snrron a located above the soft keys TRIGGER C VERTICAL a c HORZONTAL 4 oa vsDIV aC ow oie keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 a Oo Grafer TIME DIV ACTION DELAY a5 So o y Explanation Displaying the Help Window 1 Press HELP The help window appears 2 Press the panel key or soft key that you wish to review Clearing the Help Window 3 Press HELP again The help window disappears Displaying the Help Window When you press the HELP key a help window containing information about the soft key menu or jog shuttle menu that was displayed immediately before HELP was pressed a
255. amplitude will be 1 10th the actual value 5 8 IM 701730 01E 5 6 Setting the Offset Voltage Procedure lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 5 gt P HELP JOC LLELLE D776 ueasune curRsOR FILE misc cono co mara XY_ MENU MENU PHASE setup pisPLay Copy mace SAvVE O SHIFT HORIZONTAL Ay SEARCH TIME 7DIV m RESET SELECT ACQ START STOP C mean D O TRIG D i o Smee ENHANCED ACTION DELAY Cre S SN Setting the Offset Voltage Value 1 Press one of the CH1 to CH4 2 keys to select the channel The CH menu appears 2 Press the Offset soft key e To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Display Position Coupling Probe OFF PN 00d Deine ia Offset 10 1 006kY CHL Banduidth Next Full 172 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the offset voltage Resetting the Offset Voltage Value 4 Press RESET The offset voltage is set to 0 V IM 701730 01E sexy JE UOZHOH pUe JeIIHA eo 5 6 Setting the Offset Voltage Explanation The offset voltage setting applies to all input couplings AC1 MQ DC1 M 9 DC 50 Q and GND Selectable Range of Offset Voltage Voltage Axis Sensitivity Probe 1 1 Offset Voltage Selectable Range 2 mV div to 50 mV div 1
256. an be set to high or low 1 Or CH1 and CH2 on the DL1720E 2 Under standard operating conditions see section 17 11 after the warm up and calibration have been performed 3 Under standard operating conditions see section 17 11 after the warm up 4 The setting for T1 lt Pulse lt T2 is the T2 value 5 Typical value represents a typical or average value It is not strictly warranted 17 3 Time Axis Item Description Time axis range 1 ns div to 50 s 1 ns div to 5 s d div when the record length is greater than or equal to 10 kW iv when the record length is equal to 1 kW Time base accuracy 0 005 Time axis precision 0 005 50ps 1 digit External clock input Connector type BNC Maximum input voltage 40 V DC ACpeak or 28 Vrms when the frequency is 10 kHz or Input frequency range 40 Hz to 20 MHz continuous clock only Sampling jitter 1 25 ns or less Minimum input amplitude 0 1 VP P DL1740E DL1740EL Threshold level 0 1 VP P when the 1 V range set on the DL1720E 1 VP P when the 10 V range set on the DL1720E 2 V setting resolution is 5 mV on the DL1740E DL1740EL 1 V setting resolution 5 mV when the 1 V range set on the DL1720E 10 V setting resolution 50 mV when the 10 V range set on the DL1720E Input impedance Approximately 1 MQ and approximately 20 pF Minimum pulse width 10 ns or more for High and Low 1 Under standard operating c
257. an the Abort key is pressed while saving or loading a file e This function cannot be used when using the FTP server function FTP client function the LPR client function or the Web server function IM 701730 01E 12 29 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 12 8 Saving Automated Measurement Values of Waveform Parameters AN CAUTION Do not remove the storage medium disk or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the storage medium is blinking Doing so can damage the storage medium or destroy the data on the medium Procedure To exit the menu during operation press ESC Race SNOP HELP located above the soft keys e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog apa MT sco sanrron shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of Copy IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT selecting setting items and entering values using x setup JpIsPLay cree D TRO R a the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys o2 smeue eniance For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and vsDIv TIME DIV a es ACTION DELAY 4 2 JCD C QO Ow e Fora description of the operation using a USB i keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press FILE The FILE menu appears 2 Press the File Item soft key The File Item setting menu appears FILE File Item a ja a Save Load Utility Setup 3 Press the Measure soft key to select data for automatic measurement J FILE Setup Waveform S
258. and labeling computed waveforms in section 9 1 The setup procedures for computed waveform Math1 are described below Perform similar steps for Math2 Press the M1 Setup soft key The M1 Setup dialog box opens mm 2 Display aM Setup Hz Label ON C3 C4 Math2 C1 C2 Mathi OFF prj i Dispiav M ii Label Setting the Equation Scaling Unit Smoothing and Integration Start Point 2 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the differentiation or integration operator Diff or Integ and the waveform on which to perform computation When the M1 Setup dialog box is closed by pressing ESC or another key the specified equation appears in the M1 Setup menu column Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the scaling unit and smoothing of computed waveform Math1 If the integration operator Integ is selected use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the start point of integration Press ESC The M1 Setup dialog box closes Mi Setup Operation Source Scale Center Unit Smoothing Sensitivity Start Point 6 0000E 00 L 5 0000E 04 pF ON Select Diff or Integ Select the waveform on which to perform computation Set the scaling used to display computed waveform Math1 to Auto auto scaling or Manual manual scaling If scaling is set to Manual set the vertical center line level on the screen voltage value if set to voltage and the sensitivity voltage per division if set to vol
259. and then passed from the multiplexer to the A D converters according to the time axis settings At the A D converter the received voltage level is converted into digital values The digital data is written to the primary memory by the primary data processing circuit at the sample rate that matches the time axis setting The data written to the primary memory is processed averaged for example by the secondary data processing circuit and written to the acquisition memory The data written to the acquisition memory is converted into waveform display data by the secondary data processing circuit transferred to the waveform processing circuit and stored in the display memory The waveforms are displayed on the LCD using the data stored in the display memory 2 2 IM 701730 01E 2 2 Vertical and Horizontal Axis Vertical Sensitivity V div lt For the setup procedure see section 5 2 gt The vertical sensitivity setting is used to adjust the displayed amplitude of the waveform for easy viewing The vertical sensitivity is set by assigning a voltage to one grid square one division on the screen By switching attenuators with different attenuation and changing the amplification of the pre amplifier the sensitivity changes in steps for example vertical axis sensitivity changes in steps as in 1 V div 2 V div and 5 V div In addition by computing the digital data of the waveforms acquired at the vertical sensitivity described above
260. anges 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set the top and bottom edges of the zone 12 Press the Left Right soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Left Right or both Left and Right If you select Left you can move the left edge of the zone If you select Right you can move the right edge of the zone If you select both Left and Right you can move the position of the zone horizontally without changing the spacing between the left and right edges of the zone The value of the digit being specified by Left changes ick Normal F 5MS S_200HSAiv lt lt Maint 10k gt gt CH1 10 1 0 500 Udiv DC Full 2004705707 16 03 51 jj Stopped 469 HY a Search zone Edge CH1 F Search HISTORY 5 Left Logic 2 800di an Search Right AND OR Exec 2 300dir 13 Turn the jog shuttle to set the left and right edges of the zone 14 Repeat steps 5 to 13 to set Zone1 to Zone4 elect Zong Condition Source fe Upper 0 30div Lower Zonet FF IN OUT 9 70diu Selecting the Search Logic 15 Press the Logic soft key to select AND or OR HISTORY elect Zong Condition Source fe Upper S Left Logic 9 30div 2 B00 Search Zonet FF N OUT CH1 E Lower fe Right OR Exec 0 70div 2 3004 10 6 IM 701730 01E 10 2 Searching the History Waveforms Using Zones History Search Explanation Executing Aborting the Search 16 Press the Search Exec soft key
261. applied it is recommended that the instrument be recalibrated without applying a signal IM 701730 01E 4 19 suoljeiodg uowwog S 4 7 Correcting the Delay Time of the Input Signals Procedure To exit the menu during operation press ESC ae ATH sco snrron a located above the soft keys X Y MENS Y Cserup _ PISPLAY CoPY mace save o SHiFT For a description of the operation using a USB ore D O TRG keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 a D a vzDiv TIME DIV o E ACTION DELAY POSITION G SS 1 Press the MISC key The MISC menu appears 2 Press the Calibration soft key The Calibration menu appears 4 MISC aa Renote Network systen verview Next Control Conf ig 172 3 Press the Deskew soft key to select ON or OFF e If you select ON proceed to step 4 If you select OFF the procedure is complete Auto Cal Deskew al Exec OFF pry ON 4 Press the Target CH soft key The Target CH menu appears HIS Auto Cal Deskeu Target CH 5 Deskew al Exec Time OFF pry OFF pN CH1 0 00ns 5 Press the CH1 to CH4 2 soft key to select the target channel Auto Cal CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 1 Exec OFF pn 6 Turn the jog shuttle to set the Deskew Time MISA Auto Cal Deskeu Target Ci ffo Deskew al Exec Time OFF PN OFF phy CH1 00ns 4 20 IM 701730 01E 4 7 Correcting the Delay Time of the Input Sign
262. ate and Record Length The maximum record length for box average is half the record length of each model indicated above 7 2 IM 701730 01E 7 3 Using interleave Mode Procedure lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 14 gt yA LI ESC g O To exit the menu during operation press ESC teasure cursOR FILE misc cono co mari EPH located above the soft keys x Y MENU _ MENU e For a description of the operation using a USB ia o2 VzDIV Bla oe keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 TIME sDIV Explanation g 1 Press ACQ The ACQ menu appears 2 Press the Interleave soft key to select ON or OFF ACQ Record Mode fj Count Inter leave petitive Time Base Length 10k Norna1 Inf inite ON FF ON Ext When interleave mode is turned ON the number of channels that can be used is limited but history memory sequential store count and record length can be set to twice the normal values Also a setting of 1 GS s becomes available in real time sampling mode The channels that become unavailable when interleave mode is ON are CH2 and CH4 or just CH2 on the DL1720E For a description of the limitations of the record length sample rate and other items when interleave mode is turned ON see appendix 1 IM 701730 01E uosinboy woane M a 7 4 Turning Repetitive Sampling Mode ON and OFF Procedure
263. atically configured TCP IP Setup DHCP DHCP IP Address Net Mask Gate Way IM 701730 01E 13 3 Ieuondo suonesaiunwwos 3u1 4 3 g 13 2 Setting Up the TCP IP Setting the IP Address If DHCP was set to OFF in step 4 set the IP address 5 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the IP Address Enter using values in the range of 0 to 255 Setting the Subnet Mask If DHCP was set to OFF in step 4 set the subnet mask 6 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the Net Mask Enter using values in the range of 0 to 255 Setting the Default Gateway If DHCP was set to OFF in step 4 set the default gateway 7 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set Gate Way Enter using values in the range of 0 to 255 TCP IP Setup DHCP DFF _ON_ iP address 903 0908 DHCP IP address when DHCP is OFF Net Mask 63 63 659 Subnet mask when DHCP is OFF Gate Waj aca Default gateway when DHCP is OFF Dns Setting DNS 8 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set DNS to ON OFF or AUTO AUTO can be selected only when DHCP is ON When DNS is set to AUTO the domain name and DNS server name are automatically configured by power cycling the instrument If DNS is set to ON set the domain name DNS server name and domain suffix e If DNS is set to OFF check the network cable connection and power cycle the instrument e Setting the Domain Name I
264. ation The selectable range is 5 divisions and the resolution is ten divisions display record length For a description of the display record length see appendix 1 Effects of Linear Scaling The operation is the same as for addition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 Maximum Record Length That Can Be Computed The operation is the same as for addition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 IM 701730 01E 9 11 uonendwog woz2neM e 9 6 Performing Power Spectrum Computation FFT Procedure lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 22 gt e To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the term jog X Y MENU _ MENU shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of setup _ PisPLaY Copy mace SAVE D selecting setting items and entering values using comes D IRO Gane the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys Qa D o 2 For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and veDIV TIME sDIV a es ACTION _DELAY 4 2 o s ZES rA e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Note Before carrying out the procedures in this section you must first carry out the procedures for displaying and labeling computed waveforms in section 9 1 The setup procedures for computed waveform Math1 are described below Perform similar
265. available Selecting the Waveform to Measure e When X Y Waveforms Are Not Displayed 4 Press the Trace soft key The Trace menu appears 4 CURSOR Type Trace 5 Cursori 3 00div orizontal CH1 5 Cursor 3 00div 5 Press the CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 or Math2 soft key to select the waveform to measure e On the DL1740E DL1740EL you can select from CH1 to CH4 Math1 and Math2 e On the DL1720E you can select CH1 CH2 and Math1 lor izontal e When X Y Waveforms Are Displayed Type CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 4 Press the Trace soft key to select XY1 or XY2 Proceed to step 6 CURSOR Trace Cursor 3 00div lor izonta Kg xY2 5 Cursor2 3 06div IM 701730 01E 10 31 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy z 10 5 Cursor Measurements Moving Cursors 6 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor1 Cursor2 or both Cursor1 and Cursor2 Select Cursor1 to move Cursor1 Select Cursor2 to move Cursor2 e If you select both Cursor1 and Cursor2 you can move Cursor1 and Cursor2 vertically without changing the spacing between the two The value of the digit being specified by Cursor1 changes When X Y waveforms are not displayed CURSOR fs Cursori 3 00div 5 Cursor2 3 00diu When X Y waveforms are displayed CURSOR i Cursori A 3 00div B DS 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor Type Trace Horizontal CHL ema
266. aveforms Accumulated waveforms however measurement is possible on the accumulated waveform acquired last Automated Measurement Mode The following modes are available in automated measurement of waveform parameters To perform automated measurement of waveform parameters on dual areas select ON Statistics or History Statistics mode OFF Automated measurement is not performed ON Measures the specified parameters Statistics Cycle Statistics and History Statistics Performs statistical processing on the measured results of the specified parameters See section 10 7 However measurement and statistical processing of Cycle Statistics cannot be performed using automated measurement of waveform parameters on dual areas IM 701730 01E 10 55 SWJOJaAe Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy es 10 8 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas Measurement Parameters Twenty six types of parameters and delay between waveforms can be selected as operands of computation parameters For details on the measurement parameters see section 10 6 Computation Parameters Four parameters User1 to User4 can be computed and displayed Computation can be performed by setting the measurement parameters of the two areas of the measurement target waveform as operands and using operators or The results are displayed as computation parameters User1 to User4 e Equation For example the equation of comp
267. aving Screen Image Dat cece ee ee cee cee eee reece cee eee ae eeeeseeeeeeeeesaeseeeseeeeaeees 12 33 12 10 Thumbnails of the Saved Screen Image Data can be Displayed ceeeeeee 12 37 12 11 Changing the File Attributes and Deleting Files 0 0 0 eecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 12 42 1231 2 Copying Files css iina see cee a e ttt hl eet tigi eight ce 12 46 12 13 Changing the Directory or File Name of the Storage Medium and Creating Directories t cashan scan ciel aie acini di nin dasa 12 50 Ethernet Communications Optional 13 1 Connecting the Instrument to the Network ecceecceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeteaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenetens 13 1 13 2 Setting Upsth TCP IP eesin cites aciein cates a eae a eae 13 3 13 3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data Setup Data and Image Data on a Network Drive FTP Client Function innii ei ei eel ete oan ei eee deci 13 8 13 4 Entering Settings for Printing Screen Images on the Network Printer LPR Client Function crtana ele ative el a tes 13 11 13 5 Sending Periodic or Action Mail SMTP Client Function 0 00 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeretees 13 13 13 6 Accessing the Instrument from a PC or Workstation FTP Server Function 13 18 13 7 Using the Web Server Function ecccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeseaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeeetaaee 13 20 13 8 Setting the Time Difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time cceeceeeeeeees 13 45 13 9 Checking the P
268. ay Format Is Dual 2 Divisions CH1 024 CH2 135 Fixed when CH3 is OFF Auto when CH3 is OFF User The number of points that can be displayed in the top and bottom eight divisions differs depending on the display format as shown below The vertical axis resolution does not change Single _ 384 points Dual H 192 points Triad H 128 points Quad H 96 points Hexa E3 64 points 8 2 IM 701730 01E 8 2 Setting the Display Interpolation Method Procedure lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 17 gt o TTI 765 P HELP k To exit the menu during operation press ESC oe located above the soft keys MEASURE cups FILE misc conosco mata RESET SELECT TBHASE ACQ START STOP Ceng apr mace save o Her For a description of the operation using a USB CHORIZONTAT lt 9 TRIGGER See Y Bee a keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 az ermee ACTION DELAY 4 SN Press DISPLAY The DISPLAY menu appears Press the Interpol soft key The Interpolation menu appears DISPLAY Format f Interpol praticule Scale Trace ccumu late Value Label Next Single Sine A Fd FF ON PFF ON 172 Press the OFF Sine Line or Pulse soft key to select the interpolation method a j Line a sf IM 701730 01E 8 3 Aejdsig uolewuoju pue Aej
269. c and End Rec of the HISTORY menu see section 10 1 Search Method Search is performed in order from the newest history waveform Post Search History Map Search Results The record numbers and time stamps of the waveforms that are found can be listed on the history map If you set the Search Mode to OFF in the HISTORY menu or turn OFF Param1 to Param4 and execute the search the search result is reset Note _____ If you wish to search for a computed waveform whose computation conditions were changed during or after waveform acquisition you must first change the display mode to All IM 701730 01E 10 13 SWJOJaAe Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy es 10 4 Searching Waveforms Using the Search and Zoom Function lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 24 gt Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC SNOP HELP located above the soft keys 6 V0 e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog FILE misc a Eser shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of selecting setting items and entering values using the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and 4 2 r e For a description of the operation using a USB i keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 When waveform acquisition is stopped you can search the displayed waveforms within the display record length see appendix 1 and display the waveforms that match the search conditions expa
270. cal axis sensitivity is displayed highlighted at the position where the input coupling and bandwidth limit are displayed Note _____ In some cases the LCD on the instrument may include a few defective pixels For details see section 17 5 1 8 IM 701730 01E 1 3 Display Screens Display Example When Displaying Zoom Waveforms Zoom position of zoom waveform Z1 with respect to the specified or display record length Zoom position of zoom waveform Z2 with respect to the specified or display record length Zoom box Z2 indicating the Zoom box Z1 zoom range of Z2 indicating the zoom T div of the normal waveform range of Z1 See section 5 11 2004704713 10 00 27 3pm 500k Noal 5 Stopped 352 q 2M ss ZONsAiv CAT Gi lt lt Maink400k gt gt l ia CH1 10 1 j Lorp Display record i DC Full PAP APRAAAR AAT ea length ofthe H 10 0 Urdiv normal waveform E ee i DC Full Main waveform ja t 0 H n display frame f Display record 4 i Z length of Z1 100000 0us d rai Display record TCT length of Z2 IW 7 T div for Z2 T div for Z1 Zoom waveform mz Edge CH1 F display frame Auto 10 0 V x ree ee Oar PPPN Z00H a llocation t Mode Format a in amp Z1 amp Z2 Main Display frame of Z1 Display Example When Displaying X Y Waveforms P Z1 Mag Tal l Pos x 10 3 0000diy Fit Meas 22 Mag 5
271. can be attached to the feet to prevent the instrument from sliding Four rubber feet are included in the package 3 4 IM 701730 01E 3 3 Connecting the Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF Before Connecting the Power Make sure that you observe the following points before connecting the power Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the instrument A Before connecting the power cord ensure that the source voltage matches the rated supply voltage of the instrument and that it is within the maximum rated voltage of the provided power cord Connect the power cord after checking that the power switch of the instrument is turned OFF To prevent the possibility of electric shock or fire be sure to use the power cord for the instrument that was supplied by YOKOGAWA Make sure to perform protective earth grounding to prevent electric shock Connect the power cord to a three prong power outlet with a protective earth terminal Do not use an extension cord without protective earth ground Otherwise the protection function will be compromised Use an AC outlet that complies with the power cord provided and securely connect the protective grounding If such an AC outlet is unavailable and protective grounding cannot be furnished do not use the instrument Connecting the Power Cord 1 Check that the main power switch and power switch are turned OFF see next page 2 Connect the
272. can be displayed simultaneously dual zoom Below are the combinations of the normal waveform and zoomed waveform displays when the normal waveform display frame is denoted as Main and the two zoom waveform display frames are denoted as Z1 and Z2 lt Z2 gt lt Z1 gt or lt Z2 gt or lt Z2 gt When displaying Main main waveform and Z1 zoomed waveform or Main and Z2 simultaneously a zoom box indicating the zoom position is displayed within the main waveform display frame The center of the zoom area corresponds to the center of the zoom box For a display example see Display Example When Displaying Zoom Waveforms in section 1 3 2 18 IM 701730 01E 2 4 Waveform Acquisition and Display Conditions X Y Waveform Display lt For the setup procedure see section 8 5 gt The relationship between the levels of two input signals can be observed by taking the level of the waveform assigned to the X axis horizontal axis and the level of another waveform whose display is turned ON assigned to the Y axis vertical axis Simultaneous observation of X Y waveforms and normal T Y waveforms waveform display using time axis and level is possible You can use the X Y waveform display function to measure the phase angle between two sine wave signals For example the waveform that appears when two sine waveforms are shown on the X Y display is called a Lissajous waveform From this waveform the phase angle can be obtained For a di
273. can be split evenly so that input waveforms and computed waveforms can be easily viewed The screen can be divided into the following Single no division Dual two divisions Triad three divisions Quad four divisions and Hexa six divisions Quad four divisions and Hexa six divisions are not available on the DL1720E Waveform Mapping You can select one of the following for the mapping of the input channels to the divided windows Auto Waveforms whose input channels are turned ON are assigned in order from the top Fixed Waveforms are assigned in order from the top regardless of whether the input channels are turned ON or OFF User Channels are assigned in order from the top to an arbitrary number of screen divisions regardless of whether the input channels are turned ON or OFF Display Interpolation lt For the setup procedure see section 8 2 gt In interpolation areas where less than 500 points of data exists in ten divisions along the time axis or less than 250 points in the zoom display section when waveforms are zoomed in Main amp Z1 amp Z2 a continuous waveform cannot be displayed because there are not enough sampled points In this case the waveform is displayed by interpolating between data points You can select one of the following interpolation methods Linear Interpolation Linearly interpolates between two points Sine Interpolation Generates interpolation data using the function then interpolates be
274. cated above the soft keys For a description of the operation using a USB Ca SEARCH 2 DG a keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 veDIV E HCD ACTION DELAY ey 4 f 1 Press the MISC The MISC menu appears 2 Press the Overview soft key The Overview window opens pee e m a System Conf ig a a Renote Network Control a alibratio Text 172 System Overview Mode1 701730 4CH Std Record Length Max2MWC41MW CH Option Printer Yes BS FDD PC CARD FIDJI Ether Yes C10 Serial Bus No MAC 900064 _861_002 Default Language Soft Version Linkage Date Product ID JPN 1 00 ROM Sum BD4AH GSE ROM 04 05 07 Fri 13 48 6RJEUSSU Pressing a panel key other than the Overview soft key clears the Overview window Explanation You can check the firmware version model and installed options on a screen similar to the one shown above IM 701730 01E 16 10 16 5 Replacing the Power Fuse AN Specified Rating To prevent electric shock or fires use a fuse of the specified rating in terms of current voltage and type e Always turn OFF the power switch and unplug the power cord before attempting to replace the fuse Do not short the fuse holder The specifications for power fuses that can be used by the instrument are as follows Item Description Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated cur
275. cated as C1 to C4 and Math1 as M1 Mathi and Math2 can be computed simultaneously e For the DL17420E Computation Name Source Source2 Math1 CH1 or CH2 CH1 or CH2 On the menu CH1 to CH2 may be indicated as C1 and C2 and Math1 as M1 Scaling Scaling used to display computed waveforms Math1 and Math2 can be selected separately Auto Set to auto scaling The vertical center line level voltage value if set to voltage of the display frame and the sensitivity voltage value per division if set to voltage are automatically determined to display the computed waveform Manual Setto manual scaling The following items can be specified as necessary to display the computed waveform The selectable range is 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 e Center The vertical center line level voltage value if set to voltage of the display frame can be specified e Sensitivity The sensitivity voltage value per division if set to voltage can be specified When the screen is d ivided Vertical center line TN t Sensitivity Sensitivity Note If the scaling method is switched from manual to auto the center and sensitivity values that you specified when in manual mode are set to auto scaled values IM 701730 01E 9 2 Adding Subtracting and Multiplying Waveforms Unit of Computed Waveforms Units can be assigned to computed waveforms Math1 and Math2 using up to four characters
276. cation interface eT ee DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL PC Saving and Loading Data from a Network Drive FTP Client lt For the setup procedure see section 13 3 gt As with the built in storage medium and external USB devices waveform and setup data can be saved and loaded and screen image data can be saved to an FTP server on the network PC or workstation on which the FTP server function is running Ethernet 4mm a yeeie sade 3U FTP server DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL Printing on a Network Printer LPR Client lt For the setup procedure see section 13 4 gt The screen image can be printed on a network printer in the same way as the built in printer optional or a printer connected via the USB PERIPHERAL interface Ethernet _ Printer DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL 2 30 IM 701730 01E 2 7 Communication Transmitting E Mails SMTP Client lt For the setup procedure see section 13 5 gt Information from the instrument can be transmitted periodically in an e mail message to a specified mail address You can also transmit information such as the trigger time in an e mail message as an action for the GO NO GO determination or action on trigger Ethernet DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL PC Accessing the instrument from a PC or Workstation FTP Server lt For the setup procedure see section 13 6 gt The instrument can be ac
277. ceed to step 11 File List Path NetWork Softuare Space 2147483647 byte File Name Size Date Attr a FD 1 NetWork 1 lt 88 ea 8e 9e gt 2004 05 10 14 42 12 0001 68126 2004 05 13 19 39 The files to be deleted 12 0000 68126 2004 05 13 19 38 lw t t Utility FILE Function ja Filter et Reset A11 Set Property attr Delete Delete Le Exec e Selecting Resetting the Files to Be Deleted at Once 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file directory or medium 9 Press the All Set soft key Asterisks are displayed to the left of every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory to indicate that they will be deleted At the same time the All Set soft key changes to the All Reset soft key i H File List Path NetWork Softuare Space 2147483647 byte File Name Size Date Attr ja FD 1 NetWork 1 lt 88 ea 8e 9e gt 2004 05 10 14 42 12 0001 WUF 68126 2004 05 13 19 39 12 0000 WUF 68126 2004 05 13 19 38 FILE Function Filter et Rese A11 Set Property attr Delete Delete om Exec 10 Press the All Reset soft key Asterisks are removed from the left of every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory to indicate that they will not be deleted At the same time the All Reset soft key chang
278. cessed from an FTP client on the network and the files on the built in storage medium of the instrument or external USB device can be retrieved PC or workstation on which the FTP client function is running Ethernet DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL PC Workstation Web Server lt For the setup procedure see section 13 7 gt The instrument can function as a Web server By displaying the Web page of the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL file transfer monitoring of displayed waveforms basic DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL setup operation and the retrieval operation of waveform data are possible Ethernet DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL PC Using the Instrument as a Network Drive lt For the setup procedure see section 13 11 gt The external storage medium of the instrument can be used as a network drive from a PC running Windows XP IM 701730 01E 2 31 suon uny jo uoneuejdxg s 2 8 Other Useful Functions Entering Values and Text Using the USB Keyboard lt For the setup procedure see section 4 3 gt You can connect a USB keyboard and enter file names and comments In addition the functions of each key on the front panel of the instrument are assigned to the keys on the keyboard Thus the keyboard can be used to carry out operations that are the same as the key operations on the instrument For the key assignments see appendix 5 USB PERIPHERAL
279. cord length Print Range The selectable range is 5 divisions and the resolution is ten divisions display record length Additional Information Setup data can be printed simultaneously with the waveform Comment A comment text of up to twenty characters can be printed at the bottom of the print page The entered comment is displayed at the lower right section of the screen Previewing the Print Image You can preview the print image of the specified print format on the screen Print Example of the Long Print Format LIVIVOKOZ 19 47 52 19k Nurnal Stopped 291 oars 10 ie TET ear nore o Pee saone 50 0 tts h oda eoo PATE 4 40 eRe RTT 7 aa e Long Copy is not possible while waveform acquisition is in progress e Only Main waveforms are applicable for long copy e If history waveforms are displayed only the waveform selected by Select Record are applicable for long copy Long copy is not possible on snapshot and accumulated waveforms IM 701730 01E sobew use10S Hunund Ey 11 3 Printing Using a USB Printer Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC SNOT HELP located above the soft keys V0 In the procedural explanation below the term jog e iE Jerse Teonosol yarn Ep Eser Eec shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of X MENI ENU ACQ START STOP setup Joia ory sa CD selecting setting items and entering values using ane th
280. crosoft Windows NT 4 0 Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional or Microsoft Windows XP Professional Internal Memory 64 MB or more recommended Communication Port Ethernet communication port that supports 10BASE T or 100BASE TX Use this communication port to connect the PC to the network Display Display supported by the OS indicated above with a resolution of 1024 _ 768 dots or higher Mouse or Pointing Device Mouse or pointing device supported by the OS indicated above Files Required for the Web Browser Of the Web server functions the following files are required when using the data capture measurement trend or command script function For the installation procedure on the PC see Installing Files Required for the Web Browser page 13 25 Msvbvm60 d11 cmdlgjp dll comdlg32 o0cx Combinations of OS and Application Software That Have Been Tested os Web Browser Spreadsheet Software Windows NT Internet Explorer 5 0 Microsoft Excel 97 Windows 98 Internet Explorer 5 0 Microsoft Excel 97 Windows 98 Second Edition Internet Explorer 5 0 Microsoft Excel 97 Windows 2000 Professional Internet Explorer 5 0 5 5 6 0 Microsoft Excel 97 Windows Millennium Edition Internet Explorer 5 5 6 0 Microsoft Excel 97 2000 2002 Windows XP Professional Internet Explorer 6 0 Microsoft Excel 2002 The spreadsheet software is required when displaying the trend of waveform parameters of the Web
281. ct OFF 200 MHz or 15 kHz for the HR rejection of each channel 5 Set the position of the Window for each channel 6 Set the width of the Window for each channel 10 Press ESC The Level Coupling dialog box closes Note The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to both simple and enhanced triggers Setting the Hold Off 11 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in section 6 4 IM 701730 01E 6 29 s n el 6 12 Setting the OR Trigger ENHANCED Explanation This setting is for activating a trigger on the OR logic of the edge trigger or the OR logic of the window trigger of each channel Setting the Edge Trigger of Each Channel F Rising t Falling Fi Don t Care Setting the Trigger Level Selectable range Eight divisions of the screen Resolution 0 01 divisions For example the resolution for 2 mV div is 0 02 mV Setting the Hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that triggers are not activated by small changes in the trigger signal J Approximately 0 3 divisions of hysteresis around the trigger level X Approximately one division of hysteresis around the trigger level The value above is an approximate value It is not strictly warranted Setting the Trigger Coupling You can select from the following AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as
282. cted parameters are performed on the history waveform Measurement and statistical processing are performed from the oldest data The range of the history waveform on which measurement and statistical processing are performed is the waveform displayed on the history map see section 10 1 Displaying a List of Measured Values When measurement per cycle and statistical processing within the measurement range as well as measurement and statistical processing of history waveforms are executed the measured values of the selected measurement parameters can be listed Numbers are assigned in order from the left end to the right end of the screen from the oldest waveform as 00001 00002 and so on and the corresponding measured values are displayed The maximum and minimum values of each measurement parameter are displayed using T maximum and J minimum If there are multiple points that are of the same value the maximum and minimum values are marked on the oldest of the measured values The maximum number of measured values that can be listed is 24000 e If this value is exceeded in the measurement and statistical processing of history waveforms the most recent 24000 measured values are displayed If the number of measured values exceed 24000 and the maximum or minimum value resides outside the list display T maximum and 4 minimum are not displayed e Inthe measurement and statistical processing per cycle measurement and statis
283. ction Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC SNOT HELP located above the soft keys v Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog D sco sanrsron shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of XY MENENY setup oispLay ory mace savE o SHIFT selecting setting items and entering values using SD Gan SES Coane the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys Qa D For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and o 2 s i is operati i a es ACTION DELAY 4 2 io R keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 r e For a description of the operation using a USB Network Drive Settings 1 2 Press the MISC The MISC menu appears Press the Network soft key The Network menu appears mak System pe Next Control Conf ig 172 Press the Net Drive Setup soft key The Net Drive Setup dialog box opens MISC a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive filet Print Others Connect Setup Account Setup Setup setup Log List Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to enter the FTP Server IP address If you are using DNS you can specify the server by name Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to enter the Login Name using up to fifteen characters Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to enter the Password corresponding to the Login Name using up to 15 characters If Login Name is set to anonymous in step 5 you do not have to enter the password Use jog shuttle a
284. ction activates a trigger on a single trigger source It is the simplest kind of trigger A trigger is activated when the trigger source rises above rising or falls below falling a specified trigger level You can select the trigger source from input signals CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 on the DL1720E the external trigger signal and the commercial power supplied to the instrument In the case of commercial power supply signals a trigger is activated only on the rising edge Enhanced Triggers Multiple conditions or a special purpose condition can be specified as a trigger condition e A gt B N Trigger lt For the setup procedure see section 6 8 gt A trigger is activated the nth time condition B becomes true after condition A has become true True B True N times Trigger A IM 701730 01E 2 3 Triggers Condition A CH1 L CH2 L Enter Condition B CH1 H CH2 H Enter N 3 L low level H high level cu T oe APPA Trigger CH1 H L H L H CH2 L H L H L H L H L H L H L B 1 B 2 B 3 Condition A true A Delay B Trigger lt For the setup procedure see section 6 9 gt The trigger activates the first time condition B becomes true after condition A has become true and the preset time has elapsed True Progress True A Delay Time B 4 Trigger Condition A CH1 L CH2 L Enter Condition B C
285. ctrical and mechanical specifications Conforms to IEEE802 3 Transmission system Ethernet 100BASE TX 10BASE T Transmission rate 100 Mbps max Communication protocol TCP IP Supported services FTP server FTP client network drive LPR client network printer SMTP client mail transmission Web server DHCP DNS SNTP and WebDAV Connector type RJ 45 connector ETHERNET 100BASE TX LINK LED ACT LED Illuminates when the link lluminates when packet between the port onthe transmission is normal instrument and the connected device is established and communication is mutually possible RJ 45 modular jack Items Necessary for Connection Cable Be sure to use one the following cables for connection UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair cable category 5 or better STP Shielded Twisted Pair cable category 5 or better IM 701730 01E 13 1 Ieuondo suonesaiunwwos 3u1 4 3 g 13 1 Connecting the Instrument to the Network Connection Procedure When Connecting to a Network PC or Workstation 1 Turn OFF the power switch and main power switch to the instrument see section 3 3 2 Connect one end of the UTP or STP cable to the ETHERNET 100BASE TX terminal on the rear panel 3 Connect the other end of the UTP or STP cable to a hub or router 4 Turn ON the power switch and main power switch to the instrument see section 3 3 Hub or router that s
286. d Setting the Trigger Coupling You can select from the following AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as is Turning the HF Rejection ON and OFF Specify 15 kHz or 20 MHz if you wish to use a signal that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger source signal as the trigger source Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Note ___ If you wish to activate a trigger on only a single pattern condition use the pattern trigger see section 6 10 If you specify all Xs for the status of condition A or condition B triggers will not be activated IM 701730 01E 6 19 s n el 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED Procedure lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 9 gt e To exit the menu during operation press ESC SNAP HELP o TTIT U1 zy shor located above the soft keys b O e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of aa fue msc UTE MATH Te SETUP eee eras oe 0 Ory rer VzDIV a GD o ARCH TIME7DIV selecting setting items and entering values using the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and 4 2 For a description of the operation using a
287. d Cursor Cursor Marker Maker Intensity You can set the intensity in the range of 1 to 15 levels for each item The selectable range is 0 to 15 levels and the resolution is 1 level Item Target Menu Menu screens Waveform Waveform Snap Snapshot waveforms Grid Grid Cursor Cursor 15 8 IM 701730 01E 15 5 Turning OFF the Backlight and Setting the Brightness of the Backlight Procedure z uZ SETUP Permer Tae SAVE O SHIFT CD Gm CHORIZONTAT K ane SEARCH O TRIG D Qa smece ENHANCED TIME DIV o O ACTION DELAY er 9 e To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 va 1 Press the MISC The MISC menu appears 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key The page 2 menu appears ca a a r alibration Remote Network a Systen Control Conf ig i verv ieu Next 172 3 Press the LCD soft key The LDC menu is displayed NISC ja i a r LCD Graphic Setup Self Test USB Color Info Setting the Hold Off Back 272 4 Press the Auto OFF soft key to select ON or OFF If you set Auto OFF to ON the Auto OFF Time menu appears Proceed to step 5 LCD MISC Auto OFF Ea OFF Ea pF oN 5 Press the Time soft key Bright ness 4 6 Turn the jog shuttle to se
288. d However by setting a trigger delay you can display the waveform that is acquired a specified time after the trigger point The selectable range of trigger delay is 0 to 4 s T Trigger position Delay Mak p 7 Fi Trigger point Trigger Coupling lt For the setup procedure see sections 6 5 6 8 to 6 13 gt As with the input signals the input coupling can be switched on trigger sources Select the input coupling that is suitable for the trigger source signal The following two types of input coupling are available for the trigger source signal DC Select this setting when using the source as is with no processing of the signal AC Select this setting when using the signal with the DC components removed for the trigger source When this setting is used a trigger can always be activated on signals whose amplitude is around one division or greater if the trigger level is set to 0 V HF Rejection lt For the setup procedure see sections 6 5 6 8 to 6 13 gt Turn HF rejection ON when eliminating high frequency components above 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger source This prevents triggers from being activated at unexpected points due to the effect of high frequency noise Trigger Gate lt For the setup procedure see section 6 16 gt You can control whether to enable a satisfied trigger condition using an external signal You can also select the status of the external signal that enables the satisfied trigger condition
289. d Print two or three pages of test images in advance 11 2 IM 701730 01E 11 2 Printing Using the Built in Printer Optional Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC RAGE SNO HELP located above the soft keys l 7 O O e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of Oo RESET SELECT START STOP selecting setting items and entering values using O TRIGD the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys a Oo For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and TIME DIV 5 ACTION DELAY 4 2 For a description of the operation using a USB e y i R keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press SHIFT COPY MENU The COPY menu appears Selecting the Built in Printer 2 Press the Copy to soft key The Copy to menu appears Copy to Format informaationa Comment Built in rmai Long ON 3 Press the Built in soft key Net Print appears only if the Ethernet interface option is installed COPY juilt in USB Net Print Comment LT Setting the Print Format 4 Press the Format soft key to select Normal or Long If you select Normal proceed to step 12 If you select Long proceed to step 5 Copy tof Format hformationa Comment Built in Normal Long IFF ON Entering Zoom Rate Settings 5 Press the Mag soft key The number of pages that will be printed at the specified Mag value magn
290. d Humidity Ambient temperature 5 40 C Ambient humidity 20 to 80 RH when the printer is not used However no condensation 35 to 80 RH when the printer is used may be present Note To ensure high measurement accuracy operate the instrument in the 23 2 C temperature range and 55 10 RH Condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where the ambient temperature is higher or if the temperature changes rapidly In such cases allow the instrument adjust to the new environment for at least an hour before using it IM 701730 01E s usWainseayy 10 suonesedoig Buje el 3 2 Installing the Instrument Do not install the instrument in the following places Installation Position Place the instrument in a horizontal position or inclined position using the stand see the figure below When using the stand pull it forward until it locks To retract it push on the inside and set the stand back to its original position When placing the instrument on its rear panel use the rear panel stand Rubber Feet In direct sunlight or near heat sources Where an excessive amount of soot steam dust or corrosive gas is present Near strong magnetic field sources Near high voltage equipment or power lines Where the level of mechanical vibration is high On an unstable surface If the instrument is installed in a tilted position as shown in the figure above rubber stoppers
291. d IP address of the twenty four recent accesses are displayed Note Explanation The fl a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive f Net Print Others Connect Setup Account Setup f Setup Setup Log List Connection Logging List FTP Server Date Tine User IP address Result FIP 04 04 16 12 19 54 d1174 10 6 228 142 logout Success FTP 04 04 16 12 19 49 d1174 10 6 228 142 login Success The instrument supports two clients but file operations cannot be performed simultaneously When the instrument is accessed from the PC or workstation login CE is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen This function cannot be used when using the FTP client function LPR client function or Web server function or when performing file operations The log list is cleared when the power is turned OFF To use this function you must configure TCP IP in advance according to the procedure given in section 13 2 To activate the settings you must power cycle the instrument oppy disk drive or PC card on the instrument can be accessed from a PC or workstation on the network via the Ethernet network To access these drives FTP client software is needed on the PC or workstation User Account e User Name You can enter the password using up to fifteen characters The default setting is anonymous The characters that can be used are all the ASCII characters on the keyboard e Password You can enter the password
292. d domain by name instead of the IP address e Mail Address You can set the address of the mail recipient on the network using up to forty characters e Comment The comment is written on the first line of the transmitted mail Enter it as necessary You can enter a comment using up to thirty characters Attaching Screen Image Data Attached Image File The screen image shown at the time of mail transmission can be attached to the mail The data format is fixed to PNG format Color is ON 256 colors For details on the data format see section 12 9 The file name is DL_image png The file name used when attaching screen image data as an action of GO NO GO determination or action on trigger is DL_nnnn png where nnnn is an automatically assigned number in the range of 0001 to 1000 e Transmission Time for Periodic Mail Only MailBaseTime The time when mail transmission is to start can be set in units of hours minutes and seconds Selectable range 0 0 0 23 59 59 e Transmission Interval Periodic Mail Only You can select the mail transmission interval e If you select OFF periodic mails cannot be transmitted e lf you are only using the action mail function set this to OFF Sending a Test Mail A test mail is sent to the address specified by Mail Address IM 701730 01E 13 15 Ieuondo suonesaiunwwos 3u1 4 3 g 13 5 Sending Periodic or Action Mail SMTP Client Function DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL Information That Is Trans
293. d measurement Turn the display of the parameter computed items ONO OFF Set the units as necessary Computation parameter User1 Mode Trace Item Ope Trace Item Unit Computation ser perg CoAT CPP Corn Pd od parameter User2 serz DFAT ON Cz Gaz jser3 CHS i C3 Computation ser4 DFF 0N Coa 7 oma parameter User3 Const1 _1 0000E 00 Const2 1 09000E 00 Computation Const3 _1 0000E 00 Const4 C 1 0000E 00 parameter User4 T Set constants Const1 to Const4 Press ESC The Item Setup dialog box closes Setting the Measurement Range Area1 of the First Measurement Parameter 11 12 Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to T Range1 T Range2 or both T Range1 and T Range 2 e If you select T Range1 you can move T Range1 e If you select T Range2 you can move T Range2 e If you select both T Range1 and T Range2 you can move T Range1 and T Range2 horizontally without changing the spacing between the two The value of the digit being specified by T Range1 changes Dual Area MEASURE f T Range1 5T Range3 Dual Area 5 006dit 5 060dit fST Rangez 5T Range4 OFF DN 5 000di 5 006di Turn the jog shuttle to set the Area1 measurement range Item Setup 10 54 IM 701730 01E 10 8 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform
294. d points of the X Y waveform display IM 701730 01E 8 11 Aejdsig uolewuoju pue Aejdsig woane M e 8 5 Displaying the X Y Waveform Explanation Display Mode You can select one of the following three display modes T Y amp X Y The top window displays T Y normal waveforms The bottom window displays X Y waveforms X Y Displays only X Y waveforms T Y Displays only T Y waveforms Selecting the X Axis Mode X Axis Applies to the DL1740 Single Sets the X axis trace of XY1 and XY2 common Dual Sets the X axis trace of XY1 and XY2 separately Number of X Y Waveforms That Can Be Displayed The number of X Y waveforms that can be displayed is 2 XY1 on the DL1720E The display of each X Y waveform can be turned ON OFF Assigning the X Axis Horizontal Axis and Y Axis Vertical Axis The channels that can be assigned to the X and Y axes depending on the X axis mode are as follows e For the DL1740E DL1740EL X Axis Mode X Y Waveform X Axis Y Axis Single XY1 CH1 CH4 Math1 Math2 CH1 CH2 Math1 XY2 CH1 CH4 Math1 Math2 CH3 CH4 Math2 Dual XY1 CH1 CH2 Math1 CH1 CH2 Math1 XY2 CH3 CH4 Math2 CH3 CH4 Math2 e For the DL17420E X Axis Mode X Y Waveform X Axis Y Axis XY1 CH1 CH2 Math1 CH1 CH2 Math1 Selecting the X Y Waveform Display Range T Range1 T Range2 The X Y waveform displays the range specified on the T Y waveform You can set the start fine dashed line and end coarse dashed l
295. d the resolution is ten divisions display record length The right end of the measurement range T Range2 must be greater than or equal to the left end of the measurement range T Range1 and the right end of the measurement range T Range4 must be greater than or equal to the left end of the measurement range T Ranges Separate measurement ranges Area1 and Area2 can be specified for measurement parameter 1 and 2 The measurement range of dual areas may overlap T Range1 T Range2 T Range3 T Range4 T Range1 T Range3 T Range2 T Range4 i i l Area2 EE i Areal Area2 Areal Setting the Distal Mesial and Proximal Values and High and Low Values The procedure is the same as with the normal automated measurement of waveform parameters on a single area See section 10 6 Note If measurement is not possible e If the measurement mode is Degree and the reference point is Trig measured value display area e For waveforms of small amplitude correct measurements may not be possible e lf there are two or more periods of waveform in the measurement range the measurement is performed on the first period kkk is displayed in the measured value display area is displayed in the IM 701730 01E 10 57 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy 5 10 9 Performing GO NO GO Determination Using Zones lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 29 gt Procedure e To exit the menu during operation pres
296. d to a USB hub or those that have mouse connectors is not guaranteed e For USB keyboards that have been tested for compatibility contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer USB PERIPHERAL Connector Connect the USB keyboard to the USB PERIPHERAL connector on the rear panel There are two USB PERIPHERAL connectors ports 1234 toto H Port 1 Oooo a Port 2 Pin No Signal Name 1 VBUS 5 V 2 D Data 3 D Data 4 GND Ground Connection Procedure When connecting a USB keyboard directly connect the keyboard to the instrument using a USB cable as shown below You can connect the USB cable regardless of whether the power to the instrument is ON or OFF supports hot plugging Connect the type A connector of the USB cable to the instrument connect the type B connector to the keyboard When the power switch is ON the keyboard is detected and enabled approximately six seconds after it is connected USB PERIPHERAL DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL IM 701730 01E 4 3 Operating the instrument Using a USB Keyboard or a USB Mouse Note Connect the keyboard directly without going through a USB hub Do not connect multiple keyboards Only one keyboard one mouse and one printer can be connected Holding down a key on the keyboard does not enter the character or value repeatedly Do not connect and disconnect multiple US
297. data 2 2 CH2 s measured data 2 2 CH3 s measured data 2 2 CR LF Record 2 CH1 s measured data 2 n CH2 s measured data 2 n CH3 s measured data 2 n CR LF _ CR LF Float format data saved together by channel Measured data of CH1 record 1 Measured data of CH1 record 2 Measured data of CH1 record N Measured data of CH2 record 1 Measured data of CH2 record 2 Measured data of CH2 record N IM 701730 01E 12 19 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Burnes 12 6 Saving Loading Settings AN CAUTION Do not remove the storage medium disk or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the storage medium is blinking Doing so can damage the storage medium or destroy the data on the medium Procedure To exit the menu during operation press ESC Trace w7 SNO HELP located above the soft keys m O O e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog CET uye Joona BaN fea sano ransa shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of setup pisPLav copy mace m selecting setting items and entering values using C wm A HORIZONTAL 4y i O e SEARCH ames the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys Freser sexe ennianceD For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and VsDIV TIME sDIV ACTION DELAY 4 2 aa C C Se CS _ e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3
298. dialog box opens Select the network drive to disconnect and click OK IM 701730 01E 13 51 Ieuondo suonesaiunwwos 3u1 34 3 g 13 11 Using the Instrument as a Network Drive Explanation The external storage medium of the instrument can be used as a network drive on a PC running Windows XP Network Drives You can map the instrument as a network drive on the PC by carrying out the procedure described above In doing so you will be able to access the various types of data stored on the instrument s storage medium floppy disk or PC card from a software application running on the PC Note Do not change the contents of the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL drive including the contents of the drives connected via the USB PERIPHERAL interface from the PC Reading the contents of the drive is allowed Never perform the following operations Deleting files on the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL drive from the PC Adding files on the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL drive from the PC Changing the directory structure of the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL drive from the PC If you attempt to move a large file from the PC to the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL the file may be lost due to the limitations of Windows e You cannot manipulate the files simultaneously from multiple PCs e You cannot view a directory containing 500 or more files You cannot use the WebDAV function simultaneously with the Web server function e When manipulating file
299. dium is copied to a local disk on the PC the date time of creation of the file or folder is changed to the date time when the file or folder is copied If a file or folder on a local disk on the PC is copied to the instrument storage medium the date time of creation and date time of modification of the file or folder are changed to the date time when the file or folder is copied 13 52 IM 701730 01E Chapter 14 Rear Panel Auxiliary I O Section 14 1 External Trigger Input External Clock Input and Trigger Gate Input AN CAUTION Only input signals that meet the specifications below Otherwise undesirable signals such as excessive voltage may damage the instrument External Trigger Input Terminal This terminal is used when an external signal is used as a trigger source see section 6 6 This terminal is also used as the external clock input terminal EXT CLOCK IN and the trigger gate input terminal TRIG GATE IN On the DL1740E DL1740EL the terminal is labeled EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN TRIG GATE IN rear panel and on the DL1720E it is labeled EXT front panel Item Description Connector type Maximum input voltage Input frequency bandwidth Input impedance Input range Trigger sensitivity Trigger level BNC 40 V DC ACpeak or 28 Vrms when the frequency is 10 kHz or DC to 100 MHz Approximately 1 MQ and approximately 20 pF 2 V for the DL1740E DL1740EL 1 V when the 1 V range is
300. div gt 2 V div gt 5 V div This value becomes the reference for the selectable range of settings using Variable see the next section and the setup step resolution e Selectable Range of V div The table below shows the selectable range according to the probe attenuation current to voltage conversion ratio setting see section 5 5 Probe attenuation Setting range when input coupling Setting range when input coupling AC1 MQ or DC1 MQ is selected DC50 Q is selected 1 1 2 mV div to 10 V div 2 mV div 1 V div 10 1 20 mV div 100 V div 20 mV div 10 V div 100 1 0 2 V div 1 kV div 0 2 V div 100 V div 1000 1 2 V div 10 kV div 2 V div 1 kV div Probe current to Setting range when input coupling Setting range when input coupling voltage conversion AC1 MQ or DC1 MQ is selected DC50 Q is selected ratio 10A 1 20 mA div 100 A div 20 mA div 10 A div 100A 1 0 2 A div 1 kA div 0 2 A div 100 A div Using the Variable Command in the CH Menu The variable command allows the V div A div values to be set in smaller steps than the setting entered using the V div knob It can also be used to expand reduce the displayed waveform vertically after waveform acquisition Waveform acquisition can be started using the modified V div A div setting e Setting Range and Steps The table below shows the values for the case when the probe attenuation is 10 1 Setting Using the V div Knob Selectable Range Using Variable Setting S
301. dsig woane M e 8 2 Setting the Display Interpolation Method Explanation Interpolation Method Any area along the time axis having less than 500 points in ten divisions less than 250 points in the Z1 and Z2 window when displaying Main amp Z1 amp 2Z2 is recognized as an interpolation area If you leave interpolation off these points will appear as discrete dots so that the display will show gaps between dots or vertical lines If you set one of the following interpolation methods the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL will connect the points Sine s Interpolates between two points using the sin x x function Line Linearly interpolates between two points Pulse Interpolates between the two points by drawing a horizontal line to the time axis position of the next date point then connects the end of the horizontal line to the next data point with a vertical line OFF Interpolation is not performed When the Area Is Not an Interpolation Area As shown in the figure below if the interpolation method is set to Sine Line or Pulse the instrument draws lines between points that are aligned on the voltage axis Interpol OFF Sine Line Pulse When the Area Is an Interpolation Area Interpol OFF Sine Line Pulse 8 4 IM 701730 01E 8 3 Accumulat ing Waveforms lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 18 gt P HELP To exit the menu du
302. dth level can be set above 4 divisions from the center of the screen However if either level exceeds the edge of the screen the operation becomes unstable so whenever possible the setting should not exceed 4 6 32 IM 701730 01E 6 13 Setting a Window Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Trigger Coupling You can select from the following AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as is Turning the HF Rejection ON and OFF Specify 15 kHz or 20 MHz if you wish to use a signal that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger source signal as the trigger source Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Relationship between the Width and OR Triggers The trigger types that the window trigger can use are Width and OR To set the window trigger on a single channel set the window condition of all channels except the channel to be used to or X IM 701730 01E 6 33 s n el 6 14 Setting the TV Trigger ENHANCED lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 11 gt Procedure FRAGE zgr SHOT HELP HISTORY OL NV O O To exit the menu during operation press ESC esrefcursos re use Teono edf mar located above the soft keys X Y MENU _ MENU Cserue pise orv mace sa
303. dth searches the search can be repeated using the same search conditions up to the right end of the screen or up to 1000 detections Redisplaying the Detected Waveforms For serial pattern parallel pattern and pulse width searches the waveforms detected in the past can be displayed Zoom Rate and Zoom Position of the Detected Waveforms The detected waveforms are displayed in the zoom waveform display frame The zoom rate and the zoom position of these waveforms can be changed For a description of the procedure see section 8 4 Note e Searching is not possible while waveform acquisition is in progress A search cannot be performed on the results of the power spectrum computation The search results become invalid when you perform the following operations When waveform acquisition is started e When Search Setup is changed When the phase of the search target waveform Source or synchronization clock signal Clock CH is shifted e When the computation settings are changed Searching is not possible in interleave mode when Clock CH is set to multiple channels e Searching is not possible if all the patterns are set to X Only the patterns of waveforms that are displayed are searched Inthe determination of serial pattern search the points between Thr Upper and Thr Lower are always determined as True match the specified status If such points are included at the time the status pattern is detected this fact is d
304. e Second t Confirm the entered date e When Selecting SNTP Use the NTP Server or SNTP Server to Set the Date Time 6 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the Time Hour of Time Difference from GMT in the range of 12 to 13 Likewise set the Minute of Time Difference From GMT in the range of 0 to 59 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Set and press SELECT If the instrument is connected to the network and the NTP server or SNTP server is already specified pressing SELECT will make the instrument retrieve the date time information from the NTP server or SNTP server and automatically set the current date time by calculating the specified time difference from GMT If the time information cannot be retrieved such as due to an incorrect assignment of the SNTP server an error message is displayed oN Date Tine Display OFF Type Manua r PNT Time Difference From GMT Time Hour C 32 Set the time difference from GMT Minute Greenwich Mean Time m Confirm the specified time difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time Date Year Month Date Set the year month and day The selectable range of years is 1999 to 2079 Time Hour Minute Second Set the time using a 24 hour clock Automatically Setting the Date Time Using the NTP Server or SNTP Server On models with the Ethernet interface installed the instrument can behave as an SNTP client to retrieve data t
305. e LCD SELECT key Confirms the item selected or value set using the jog shuttle RESET key Resets the value set using the jog shuttle to its default Arrow lt and gt keys Moves the selected digit when entering a value using the jog shuttle Used to change settings and move the cursor Functional ground terminal Connect the ground cable when performing phase correction of the probe Probe compensation signal output terminal A Outputs the probe compensation signal Measurement Input Terminal A Terminals where probes are connected The DL1740E DL1740EL comes with four terminals gt Section 3 4 Power switch gt Section 3 3 Panel keys and knobs Keys Knobs that are pressed first when entering a setting or executing an operation Display various setup menus For execution keys the operation of the pressed key is executed For a description of the names and functions of the panel keys and knobs see section 1 2 DL1720E External trigger external clock trigger gate input terminal Used when inputting external trigger clock or trigger gate signals gt Sections 6 6 6 16 and 14 1 With the DL1740 DL1740EL it is located on the rear panel see next page Signal Input Terminal Terminals where probes are connected Or two terminals with the DL1720E gt Section 3 4 IM 701730 01E 1 1 sed JO suoljouny pue s weyN
306. e Cursor Reference Cursor and Reference Angle 6 8 Moving Cursors Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor1 Cursor2 or both Cursor1 and Cursor2 e Select Cursor1 to move Cursor1 e Select Cursor2 to move Cursor2 e If you select both Cursor1 and Cursor2 you can move Cursor1 and Cursor2 horizontally without changing the spacing between the two The value of the digit being specified by Cursor1 changes CURSOR Type Trace fe Cursori j Refi eRef Valuecursor Jun 4 000dir 2 000dit Degree CH1 Cursor2 5 Ref2 360 C1 to Z1 4 O0Odi 2 000di Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor Moving Reference Cursors Press the Ref1 Ref2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Ref1 Ref2 or both Ref1 and Ref2 Select Refi to move Refi Select Ref2 to move Ref2 Ifyou select both Ref1 and Ref2 you can move Ref1 and Ref2 horizontally without changing the spacing between the two The value of the digit being specified by Ref1 changes CURSOR Type Trace fe Cursor fe Refi jRef ValueCursor Jun 4 000 2 000dir i Degree CH1 Cursors je Ref2 360 C1 to Z1 4 0000 2 990di Turn the jog shuttle to move the reference cursor IM 701730 01E 10 35 SWJOJaAeM Buiyoseas pue HulzAjeuy z 10 5 Cursor Measurements Explanation e Setting the Reference Angle 10 Press the Ref Value soft key CURSOR eRef Value irsor Jum lump Exec
307. e DL is turned ON Time Difference From GMT Time Hour Minute Exec at Power On server Enter the IP address of the SNTP server Time Out sec Set the timeout time from 1 to 60 s Set the time difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time Make sure to set this value if you are using the Web server function Setting the Time Difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time Time Hour Minute Set the time difference in the range of 12 hours 00 minutes to 13 hours 00 minutes For example Japan standard time is ahead of GMT by 9 hours In this case set Hour to 9 and Minute to 00 Checking the Standard Time Check the standard time for the region where the instrument is to be used using one of the following methods Check the date and time settings on your PC e Check the site at the following URL http www worldtimeserver com Note The instrument does not support daylight savings time To set the daylight savings time adjust the time difference from GMT Setting SNTP If Exec at Power On is ON the instrument retrieves date time information from an NTP server or SNTP server connected to the network when the power to the instrument is turned ON Note e If the time difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time is specified the time is set to a value derived by calculating the difference between the time retrieved from the SNTP server and the time difference e The date time information can also b
308. e Displayed on the File List Window Specify the type of files to be displayed e x WVF CSV FLD Displays only the files that have the same file format as the file being saved Displays all the files in the directory 12 18 IM 701730 01E 12 5 Saving Loading the Waveform Data Properties Displays information about the selected file including the name extension the file size the date the file was saved the attribute and the comment Unload When waveform data is loaded and displayed newly acquired data are not displayed even when waveform acquisition is started To display the newly acquired waveforms you must unload the data that has been loaded into the respective channel Note An error occurs if a key other than the Abort key is pressed while saving or loading a file e Saving and loading is not possible while waveform acquisition is in progress e If you change the extension of the data saved on a PC for example the file can no longer be loaded e Files that do not have an archive attribute are not displayed in the File List window Do not remove the archive attribute of the files saved by the instrument using your PC Up to forty two characters can be displayed in the path e File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AAUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COM9 and LPT1 to LPT9 The waveform data loaded
309. e Down Increment T Div Same as left Increment T Div Same as left gt Cursor to the right Same as left Cursor to the right Same as left Cursor to the right Same as left lt Cursor to the left Same as left Cursor to the left Same as left Cursor to the left Same as left 4 Jog shuttle down Same as left Select soft key6 Same as left Jog shuttle down Same as left 4 Jog shuttle up Same as left Select soft key6 Same as left Jog shuttle up Same as left SETUP menu Same as left 5 Numeric Num Lock Same as left START STOP Same as left ba Same as left START STOP Same as left Same as left Same as left Enter Return Enter Same as left Return Enter Select Same as left 1 CH1 menu Increment V Div 1 Increment V Div CH2 menu Jog shuttle down 2 Jog shuttle down 3 CH3 menu Increment T Div 3 Increment T Div 4 CH4 menu Cursor to the left 4 Cursor to the left 5 5 6 Cursor to the right 6 Cursor to the right 7 Decrement V Div 7 Decrement V Div 8 Jog shuttle up 8 Jog shuttle up 9 Decrement T Div 9 Decrement T Div 0 0 Insert condition The operation of the key when holding down the Shift key on the USB keyboard DELETE IM 701730 01E App 21 E x pu ddy Index Symbols C T eyele MOJE siansa anean iaeaea ERr 10 44 calculate the area of a waveform sesser App 11 calibrati sis cic cssteasoccsedeesseesiscisevesencaestvecwesoatentoetenctess 1 7 4 18
310. e Hold Off 13 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in section 6 4 Note The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to both simple and enhanced triggers IM 701730 01E 6 21 s n e 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED Explanation A trigger activates when all the conditions specified on multiple trigger sources are met or not met Setting the Trigger Source and Status Select a trigger status of the trigger source from the following three choices H When the trigger source level is above the specified trigger level L When the trigger source level is below the specified trigger level X Don t use a trigger source Selecting a Clock Channel e Select None if the trigger is not to be activated in synchronization with the signal To activate the trigger in synchronization with the signal select a clock channel from CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 on the DL1720E You can select a trigger slope from the following f Rising Falling Selecting the Trigger Condition e Activating a Trigger Only on the Status Pattern You can select conditions for activating triggers from the following Enter Activates a trigger when the specified combination pattern is met Exit Activates a trigger when the specified pattern is no longer met CH1 input __ CH1 H CH2 L CH3 X CH4 X CH2 input Condition Enter Pattern Pattern not met A met
311. e List the reduced image of the screen image is displayed at the upper right section of the File List Reduced images are displayed only for screen image data Reduced images for waveform data and setup data are not displayed In addition reduced images do not display the file name and color information 12 52 IM 701730 01E 12 13 Changing the Directory or File Name of the Storage Medium and Creating Directories Note ____ You cannot rename a directory file or create a new directory while the waveform acquisition is in progress START STOP indicator is ON e You cannot change a directory attribute e Ifa file with the same name already exists in the same directory the file cannot be renamed If a directory with the same name already exists in the same directory the directory cannot be created e This function cannot be used when using the FTP server function FTP client function the LPR client function or the Web server function e Files that do not have an archive attribute are not displayed in the File List window Do not remove the archive attribute of the files saved by the instrument using your PC IM 701730 01E 12 53 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Bunes Chapter 13 Ethernet Communications Optional 13 1 Connecting the Instrument to the Network Ethernet Interface Specifications A 100BASE TX port is provided on the rear panel of the instrument Item Description Number of communication ports 1 Ele
312. e been retained can be recalled and displayed using the history memory function when waveform acquisition is stopped For the procedure of recalling waveforms using the history memory function see section 10 1 uonsinboy woane M a Operation When the Acquisition Mode Is Set to Averaging Mode e Averaging is stopped when waveform acquisition is stopped Averaging starts again when waveform acquisition is restarted START STOP Operation during Accumulation Accumulation is aborted when acquisition is stopped When waveform acquisition is started the accumulated waveforms up to that point are cleared and new accumulation is started Events that Disable the START STOP Key When remote mode is engaged using the communication interface When printing during auto setup and while the storage medium is being accessed Note e Pressing the FILE key or HISTORY key while acquiring waveforms stops waveform acquisition e Ifyou start waveform acquisition after changing the waveform acquisition conditions the data that had been stored in the acquisition memory up to that point is cleared Asnapshot function that keeps the current displayed waveform on the screen is also available You can update the display without stopping waveform acquisition see section 8 6 IM 701730 01E 7 1 7 2 Setting the Record Length lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 14 gt Procedure b TTI ueasune cursOR FILE misc
313. e difference between the Y axis values of M1 and M2 DY3 The difference between the Y axis values of M1 and M3 DY4 The difference between the Y axis values of M1 and M4 Angle cursors Degree Measurements can be made by converting the time axis values into angles The zero point position of reference cursor Ref1 and the end point position of the reference cursor Ref2 are set on the X axis and an angle reference angle is assigned to the width of Ref1 and Ref2 The positions of the two angle cursors Cursor1 and Cursor2 are converted into angles from the specified reference angle and measured X1 Angle of Cursor1 from Ref1 X2 Angle of Cursor2 from Ref1 DX The angle difference between Cursor1 and Cursor2 Y1 Y axis value at the cross point of Cursor1 and the waveform Y2 Y axis value at the cross point of Cursor1 and the waveform DY The difference between the Y axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 Setting Range of the Reference Angle 1 720 e When X Y Waveforms Are Displayed Horizontal cursor Measures the Y axis value at the cursor position Y1 Y axis value of Cursor Y2 Y axis value of Cursor2 DY The difference between the Y axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 Vertical cursor Measures the X axis value at the cursor position x1 X axis value of Cursor X2 X axis value of Cursor2 DX The difference between the X axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 Marker cursor Measures the X axis value and Y axis value of the waveform
314. e edge Hysteresis box Setting the Edge Detection Count and the Search Start Point 9 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the edge detection count Count box 10 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the search start point Start Point box 11 Press ESC The Setup dialog box closes Select the search target waveform Source est the level for detecting the edge ee which slope edge rising or falling is to be detected Level Polarity Hysteresis E Set the hysteresis width of the level for detecting the edge Count Set the edge detection count Stant Point Set the search start point Selecting the Window for Displaying the Searched Waveform Zoom Waveform Display Frame This menu appears only when the zoom waveform display mode is set to Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 For all other modes the menu does not appear because the selection is not necessary 12 Press the Result Window soft key to select Z1 or Z2 SEARCH Type fe Result W 21 Mag 6 21 Pos Searchea Setup Window x 10 1 8006diy Pattern Exec Edge 22 WW 22 Mag 6 22 Pos No Match LX 10 8 000di Executing Aborting the Search 13 Press the Exec soft key The search is executed and the word Exec changes to Abort Each time a waveform that matches the search condition is detected the search is aborted and the word Abort changes to Exec To abort the search press the Abort soft key The search is aborted and the word Abort chang
315. e end instrument end of a USB cable USB interface connector Attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT1325 0530A YOKOGAWA A1181MN on one end instrument end of a USB cable GO NO GO output terminal Use a GO NO GO cable sold separately YOKOGAWA part no 366973 and attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT1325 0530A YOKOGAWA A1181MN on one end instrument end of the cable Ethernet connector Use an Ethernet cable and attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT1325 0530A YOKOGAWA A1181MN on one end instrument end of the cable Probe power terminal Attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT1325 0530A YOKOGAWA A1181MN on one end instrument end of the cable Immunity Standards Compliance EN61326 commercial environment applies to 701715 701730 701740 700988 and 70939 Influence in the immunity environment Noise increase lt 80 mV when using 700988 lt 400 mV when using 700939 Test conditions When using the 700988 500 MS s envelope mode 20 MHz BWL 1 MQ input coupling 20 mV div 10 1 probe attenuation setting and 50 Q termination at the probe tip When using the 700939 500 MS s envelope mode 20 MHz BWL 50 Q input coupling 100 mV div 10 1 probe attenuation setting and 50 Q termination at the probe tip Cable condition Same as the cable condition for emission above 1 The Overvoltage Category Installation Category is a value used to define the transient overvoltage condition and includes the impulse wit
316. e files the files after the error occurrence are not copied e You cannot change a directory attribute You cannot copy files if files with the same file name exist at the copy destination e You cannot copy the same files to another directory after copying the files Select the files to be copied again and copy them e This function cannot be used when using the FTP server function FTP client function the LPR client function or the Web server function IM 701730 01E 12 49 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Burnes 12 13 Changing the Directory or File Name of the Storage Medium and Creating Directories AN Caution Do not remove the storage medium disk or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the storage medium is blinking Doing so can damage the storage medium or destroy the data on the medium Procedure To exit the menu during operation press ESC Race SNOP HELP located above the soft keys e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog apa a sco sanrron shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of Copy IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT selecting setting items and entering values using x setup JpIsPLay cree D TRO R a the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys o2 smeue eniance For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and vsDIv TIME DIV E Cem roan a JCD C QO i Ow For a description of the operation using a USB i keyboard or a USB mouse
317. e jog shuttle amp SELECT to select None detect the patterns at a certain interval or a channel from CH1 to CH4 2 synchronize to the selected channel signal Clock CH box If you select None ene to step 6 If you select CH1 to CH4 2 proceed to step 7 Setup Clock GH None or CH1 through CHA4 2 for the timing at 6 05us which the status pattern is detected Setting the Interval for Detecting Patterns When None Is Selected Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the interval for detecting the pattern Interval box Proceed to step 10 When Clock CH is set to None Setup Clock cH None Interval Set the interval for detecting the pattern when None is selected as the Clock CH Setting the Detection Slope Level and Hysteresis of the Selected Synchronization Clock Signal When CH1 to CH4 2 Is Selected Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the level for detecting the synchronization clock Level box Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the slope rising or falling for detecting the synchronization clock Polarity box Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the hysteresis width of the level for detecting the synchronization clock Hysteresis box When Clock CH is set to CH1 to CH4 2 Setup Clock CH level 0 0000 Polarity C m Set the level for detecting the synchronization clock Select which slope edge rising or falling of the synchronizat
318. e jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys oS ons nce deals on this operat ons 4 1 TED For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and vzDIv TIME sDIV o Es ACTION DELAY 4 2 o a O O Crow osmon C For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Connect the instrument and a USB printer using a USB cable For details see the explanation in this section page 11 8 Selecting the USB Printer 1 Press SHIFT COPY MENU The COPY menu appears 3 Press the Copy to soft key The Copy to menu appears COPY Comment Copy to Format informationa Built in jrnai Long ON 4 Press the USB soft key Built in and Net Print appear if the built in printer option and the Ethernet interface option are installed respectively pos Checking the Connected Printer 5 Press the Select soft key The USB Device List window appears Check the printer that is connected COPY Comment USB det Print USB Device List ev ice Address Product Name Keyboard 2 Mitsumi USB Keyboard Printer 3 USB Printer j COPY Copy to Format Color fa Comment Select USB ESC P ON 5 Press the ESC soft key The USB Device List window closes Note You can also check the printer that is connected from the MISC key gt Next 1 2 gt USB gt Device List menu 11 6 IM 701730 01E 11 3 Printing Using a USB Printer Selec
319. e jog shuttle to select a file Press the Set Reset soft key An asterisk is displayed to the left of the selected file to indicate that it will be copied Pressing the Set Reset soft key again removes the asterisk from the left of the selected file The file will not be copied Proceed to step 11 File List Path NetWork Softuare Space 2147483647 byte File Name Size Date Attr FD 1 NetWork 1 lt 88 ea 8e 9e i gt 12 0001 WUF 12 9000 WUF 2004 05 10 14 42 68126 2004 05 13 19 39 68126 2004 05 13 19 38 Copy source file t FILE Function a Filter a et Reset All Set Property attr Dest Dir Copy om Selecting Resetting the Copy Source Files at Once Turn the jog shuttle to select a file directory or medium Press the All Set soft key Asterisks are displayed to the left of every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory to indicate that they will be copied At the same time the All Set soft key changes to the All Reset soft key Press the All Reset soft key Asterisks are cleared from the left of every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory to indicate that they will not be copied At the same time the All Reset soft key changes to the All Set soft key File List Path NetWork Softuare Space 2147483647 byte File Name Size Date Attr a FD 1 N
320. e loaded into the instrument e Main The range of the normal Main waveform It is the range defined by the display record length range displayed on the screen e Zi The range of zoom waveform Z1 Z2 The range of zoom waveform Z2 Z1 amp Z2 The range of zoom waveforms Z1 and Z2 Data Compression e You can select whether to P P compress the waveform data before saving e Power spectrum computation data cannot use P P compression Storage Medium and Directory Storage media which saving and loading are possible are displayed on the File List window Display Examples of Storage Media e Floppy Disk FD Floppy disk PC Card PC card NetWork Network drive when the Ethernet interface option is installed USB USB storage Auto Naming When Auto Naming is turned ON files with a four digit number from 0000 to 2399 0000 to 1199 for binary format are automatically created when saving the data You can specify a common name up to ten characters specified through Filename that is placed before the number File Name and Comment A file name must be assigned Comments are optional e You cannot save to a file name that already exists in the same directory overwriting not allowed Number and types of characters that can be used Item Number of Characters Characters That Can Be Used File name 1 to 14 characters 0to9 AtoZ _ Comment 0 to 25 characters All characters including spaces Specifying the File to B
321. e retrieved from an NTP server or SNTP server when you are setting the date time on the instrument For details see section 3 6 Setting the Date and Time e If you do not wish to retrieve date time information from the NTP server or SNTP server leave the IP address blank 13 46 IM 701730 01E 13 9 Checking the Presence of the Ethernet Interface Optional and the MAC Address Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys XY MENENY Setup DISPLay CoPY mAGE SAVE O SHIFT Coma A Conor t SEARCH L O TRIG D o D G vzDiv Qa smece ENHANCED TIME D1V ACTION DELAY e Fora description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press the MISC The MISC menu appears 2 Press the Overview soft key The Overview window opens MISC werview Next 172 Pressing a panel key other than the Overview soft key clears the Overview window r System Conf ig a a r alibration Remote Network Control System Overview Mode1 701730 4CH Std Record Length Option Printer FDD PC CARD Ether Serial Bus Default Language Soft Version Linkage Date Product ID MaxZMWU 1MW CH Yes BS FDD J1 Yes C10 MAC No 000064_861_002 JPN 1 00 ROM Sum BD4AH GSE ROM 04 05 07 Fri 13 48 6RJEUSSU When Ether Yes C10 appears for t
322. e soft key to select ENG or CHN ystem Chfi NISC Menu Message lick Somda Offset Trigger Language Language Date Time Cancel Gate ENG JPN OFF BR ON OFF System Chf MISC ENG CHN ick Sounda Offset Trigger Date Time Cancel Gate FF ON ON OFF Setting the Message Language 3 Press the Message Language soft key to select JPN ENG or CHN ystem nf MISC Menu Message lick Sounda Offset Trigger Languag Language Date Time Cancel Gate ENG JPN OFF BR ON OFF system Cnf MISC Menu JPN ENG CHN ffset Trigger Language ancel Gate ENG F ON OFF Turning the Click Sound ON and OFF 3 Press the Click Sound soft key to select ON or OFF ystem Chfi MISC Menu Message lick Soun Offset Trigger Language Languagt jate Time Cancel Gate ENG JPN OFF oN ON OFF IM 701730 01E 15 1 suoijei9d 19410 al 15 1 Changing the Message and Menu Language and Turning the Click Sound ON and OFF Explanation Setting the Menu Language You can set the menus to display in English ENG or Chinese CHN Setting the Message Language When errors occur and at other times messages appear You can specify to have these messages displayed in Japanese JPN English ENG or Chinese CHN The messages codes are common to each of these languages For details on messages see section 16 2 Turning the Click Sound ON and OFF You can turn the click sound that is heard
323. e to File Hard Copy 0 290 V Image Save 6 Send Mail Mail Count GO NO GO_ Hode a fST Rangei To Edit Setup 5 000di Exec Zone Menu fST Rangez 5 000di When ON ej 3 Trace hote D H a EE on poy in Ce 0 Zone3 a lt a J prey on pony gram oy Zones C CFF T Logic E Sequence Bingle Continue Cin imite Action Buzzer Condition Pdi i 10 0 500 Uzdiv DC Full Zones Ta Zones Rathi ACQ Count Edge CH1 F futo 5 Save to File 0 29 U Send Nail Mail Count Cio giro a far Setup 5 000d E BT manz Hard Copy Inage Save 8 18 IM 701730 01E Chapter 9 9 1 Procedure Waveform Computation Displaying and Labeling Computed Waveforms To exit the menu during operation press ESC Camjar Crue so Gace savor located above the soft keys setup pisPLay Copy mace save o e Fora description of the operation using a USB a keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Ol Se OF f Note Steps 2 to 4 describe the setup procedures for computed waveform Math1 Perform similar steps for Math2 Turning the Computed Waveform Display ON and OFF i Press MATH The MATH menu appears 2 Press the M1 Display soft key to select ON or OFF e If ON is selected the Math1 waveform is displayed If OFF is selected the Mathi waveform is not displayed C mm Z Display a MZ Setup 2 Label ON
324. e value The setting is automatically configured in environments using DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DCHP is a protocol that allocates setup information that is needed temporarily by PCs connecting to the network When DHCP is turned ON the following settings are automatically assigned IP address Subnet mask Default gateway DNS To use DHCP the network must have a DHCP server Consult your network administrator to see if DHCP can be used When DHCP is turned ON different settings may be assigned each time the power is turned ON When using the FTP server function see section 13 6 be sure to check the IP address and other settings of the instrument using a PC or workstation each time you turn ON the instrument IM 701730 01E 13 5 Ieuondo SuOHedUNWWOD JeUI9U A g 13 2 Setting Up the TCP IP DNS Domain Name System DNS is a system used to associate names used on the Internet called host names and domain names with IP addresses Given AAA BBBBB com AAA is the host name and BBBBB com is the domain name Instead of using the IP address which is a sequence of numbers the host name and domain name can be used to access the network On the instrument you can specify the host by name instead of by IP address when using the FTP client function see section 13 3 or the LPR client function see sections 13 4 You set the domain name the DNS server address 0 0 0 0 by default and the domain suffix
325. ea S So Start Point Area S S0 2xS1 S2 Stop Point X Axis Y 0 X Axis Y 0 App 12 IM 701730 01E Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format NOKOGAWA ASCII FILE FORMAT Publicinfo FormatVersion Model Endian DataFormat GroupNumber TraceTotalNumber DataOffset Group1 TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize VResolution VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VillegalData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit Date Time 1 11 DL1700E Big Trace 2 6 0 4 CH1 1002 1 5625000E 00 0 0000000E 00 IS2 V 32768 32769 32769 32767 32768 5 0000000E 09 2 5000000E 06 s 2004 06 25 01 45 00 CH2 1002 1 5625000E 00 0 0000000E 00 IS2 V 32768 32769 32769 32767 32768 5 0000000E 09 2 5000000E 06 S 2004 06 25 01 45 00 CH3 1002 1 5625000E 00 0 0000000E 00 IS2 A 32768 32769 32769 32767 32768 5 0000000E 09 2 5000000E 06 S 2004 06 25 01 45 00 CH4 1002 1 5625000E 00 0 0000000E 00 IS2 V 32768 32769 32769 32767 32768 5 0000000E 09 2 5000000E 06 S 2004 06 25 01 45 00 IM 701730 01E App 13 z x pu ddy Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format Group2 TraceNumber 2 BlockNumber 1 TraceName MATH1 MATH2 BlockSize 1002 1002 VResolution 6 1035156E 03 1 2207031E 00 VOffset 7 7000000E 01 2 0000000E 04 VDataType IS2 IS2 VUnit DB V VPlusOverData 32768 32768 VMinusOverData
326. earch is performed on whether the parallel status pattern of the waveform each status pattern at the same point in time is the same as the status pattern set in advance You can also set whether the waveform status is detected in sync with the selected clock signal and whether statuses of all waveforms are detected Conditions Clock channel None CH1 L CH2 L CH3 H CH4 L Math1 X Math2 X w a L e FAO FA FA I I cHilt H L JHL H L H High level L CH2 L H L H L H L H L Low level CH3 L H L H X Don t care CH4 L H L Detects this position and displays the waveform expanded in the zoom waveform display frame CH3 and CH4 not available on the DL1720E Conditions Clock channel CH1 falling slope CH2 L CH3 H CH4 L i WH P oe PAOA AA cH2 L L H L W L HLL H Hightevel CH3 L H L H L Low level CH4 L H L E Detects this position and displays the waveform expanded in the zoom waveform display frame CH3 and CH4 not available on the DL1720E 2 25 suon uny jo uoneuejdxg 2 6 Analyzing and Searching Waveforms Pulse Width Search Search is performed on whether the pulse width of the waveform above or below a specified level is shorter or longer than the specified determination time Pulse lt Time Pulse gt Time T1 lt Pulse lt T2 T2 Time Out T
327. ected file is displayed Property Path NetWork Sof Space 214748364 bj File Name File Name 12 0001 WUF File Size 68126 byte Date Time 2004 05 13 19 39 Attribute R W Trace E C1 FD 1 NetWork 1 Range Main lt 88 ea 8e 9e gt History One 12 0001 W PP Comp OFF 12 0000 W Record Len 10000 ACQ Mode Normal Save FILE a File Nam a Filter Property ave Exec 12 0002 WUF Binary 25 Press ESC The window showing the information closes Loading the Waveform Data Set the data type to Binary For the setup procedure see steps 4 and 5 on page 12 12 6 Press the Load soft key The Load menu and the File List window appear FILE q Unload Utility File Item Data Type a ja Save Load Waveform Binary IM 701730 01E 12 15 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 12 5 Saving Loading the Waveform Data Selecting the Load Source Medium Directory 7 The procedure is the same as steps 14 to 15 on page 12 14 Selecting the File to Be Loaded 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file Executing the Load Operation 9 Press the Load Exec soft key The selected file is read from the directory indicated in Path At the same time the Load Exec soft key changes to the Abort soft key File List Path NetWork Softuare Space 2147483647 byte File Nare Size Date Attr
328. ection count the edge I cours to which delay is measured Select the reference eference race Tig tate which slope edge rising or point Trace falling is to be used as a reference Select the reference Polarity Set the edge detection count which waveform Edge Count 1 edge is used as the reference point MEASURE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 12 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select which slope edge rising or falling of the waveform being measured is to be detected Polarity box under Measure 13 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the edge detection count the edge count to which delay is measured Edge Count box under Measure Setting the Reference Point 14 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the reference point Reference box If you select Trig for the reference point the succeeding steps are not necessary 15 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the reference waveform Trace box under Reference 16 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select which slope edge rising or falling of the reference waveform to be the reference Polarity box under Reference 17 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the edge detection count the edge count to be the reference point Edge Count box under Reference 18 Press ESC The Delay Setup dialog box closes 10 40 IM 701730 01E 10 6 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Turning 1 Cycle Mode ON and OFF 19 Press
329. ed on the selected measurement parameters that are not displayed Therefore if you disable the measurement and statistical processing of a displayed measurement parameter while waveform acquisition is in progress the statistics of the next selected measurement parameter in line to be displayed are displayed The number of measured values used in the measurement and statistical processing Cnt is the number of measured values measured up to that point If you add measurement and statistical processing on a new measurement parameter while waveform acquisition is in progress or when it is stopped the number of measured values used in the measurement and statistical processing Cnt is the number of measured values measured since the parameter was added Measurement per Cycle and Statistical Processing within the Measurement Range The cycle of the displayed waveform is determined in order from the oldest data the selected parameters for automated measurement are measured on the data within the cycle and statistical processing is performed The cycle is determined in the same fashion as the Period for the waveform parameter You can select whether to apply the cycle of the specified waveform to all waveforms or determine the cycle for each waveform Measurement and statistical processing can be performed on a single history waveform selected by Select Record For the procedure of selecting history waveforms see section 10 1 IM 701730 01E 10
330. ed points Select the time window Turning the Computed Waveform Display and Computed Waveform Label ON and OFF See section 9 1 9 12 IM 701730 01E 9 6 Performing Power Spectrum Computation FFT Operator Select the power spectrum computation operator PS as the operator of Math1 and Math2 The power spectrum of the waveform to be computed can be determined by taking the FFT Fast Fourier Transform Waveform to Be Computed The waveforms on which computation can be performed are as follows e For the DL1740E DL1740EL Computation Name Source Math1 One channel from CH1 to CH4 Math2 One channel from CH1 to CH4 or Math1 On the menu CH1 to CH4 may be indicated as C1 to C4 and Math1 as M1 e Mathi and Math2 can be computed simultaneously e For the DL17420E Computation Name Source Math1 CH1 or CH2 On the menu CH1 to CH2 may be indicated as C1 and C2 Scaling The operation is the same as for addition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 Unit of Computed Waveforms The operation is the same as for addition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 Computation Start Point You can set the point where power spectrum computation is to start The selectable range is 5 divisions and the resolution is ten divisions display record length For a description of the display record length see appendix 1 Number of Computed Points You can select a range for power spectrum comp
331. edia full Delete unneeded files or use another storage 12 11 medium 613 Cannot delete a directory if there are files in Delete all the files in the directory to be deleted 12 11 the directory 614 File is protected Change the attribute to R W 12 11 615 Physical format error Reformat the storage medium 12 4 If the same error occurs the storage medium cannot be formatted using the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL 616 620 File system failure Check using a different storage medium If it still fails servicing required 621 File is damaged Check the file 622 641 File system failure Check using a different storage medium 656 663 If it still fails servicing required 642 No storage media exists in USB device Check the presence of the storage medium of the USB device 646 653 Storage media failure Check the storage medium 654 Storage media failure Check the format type of the floppy disk 12 4 665 Cannot load this file format Files saved on other models such as YOKOGAWA DL AG Series cannot be loaded 666 File is now being accessed Wait a moment Execute after the access is finished 667 Cannot be executed while data acquisition is Press the START STOP key to stop the waveform 7 1 in progress acquisition first 668 Cannot find HDR file Check the file 12 5 669 Cannot load the specified file on this ROM Upgrade the firmware version or this model 671 Save data not found Check the existence of the data to be saved
332. ee eee cease eeeaeceeeeee sees eaeseaeeaesaeeaeseaeeeeaes 5 1 5 2 Setting V A isere Aoeaks dp ieerdeeesietetea cadet ive ae ards neste nats bees eee eee 5 2 5 3 Setting the Vertical Position of the Waveform ccj ccc eee ceetee sees tee eeeeeeeeteeeeeenaes 5 4 5 4 Setting the Input Coupling 2 00 eee eeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeseeeesaeeseaeeseeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeaees 5 6 5 5 Selecting the Probe Attenuation Current to Voltage Conversion Ratio cceceeee 5 8 5 6 Setting the Offset Voltage ee eee eee cece ecee nese rece eee eeeeae seen eeeeeeeseaesae senses seeesaeeeesaes 5 9 57 Using the Preset FUNCION tissee eteteres reece cade op decrees titer a a latent 5 11 5 8 Setting the Bandwidth Limit 0 eee eee eee teen cee ceee testes sees tae seetaeeeee eee 5 14 5 9 Using the Linear Scaling FUNCTION eecceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeteneeeaeeseaeeeneetaas 5 15 5 10 Selecting the Time Base 0 cee eeeececseeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeteaeessaeeeaeeseaeenaeeseaeeseeeeeaeene 5 17 SAT Setting TAV ae a ai ane eat a dae ate eat ae 5 19 Triggers 6 1 Selecting the Trigger Mode c cesceeseeceneeceeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeaeesaeeeeaeeeaeeseaeeeeeseaeeseaeeeaeetias 6 1 6 2 Setting the Trigger Position eee cecseeseeceneeeeceneseeteeeneaeeeaeeeaeeseceeneeeeeeeeeeteaeeeneeneaaee 6 3 6 3 Setting the Trigger Delay 0 0 ee eecececeeeneeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeteneeseaeeeaeeseaeesaeeseaeesee
333. eeeaeensaee 6 5 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time oe eee eececeeeeeseecneeeeaeeeneeeeaeeeseeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeesaeeseaeeseeeeeaeessaee 6 6 6 5 Setting the Edge Trigger SIMPLE ecceeseeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeaeeseeeeaeeseeeeeeeseeeeeaees 6 8 6 6 Setting the External Trigger SIMPLE cceeceesceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeraas 6 11 6 7 Activating Triggers on the Commercial Power Supply SIMPLE ceceeeeeeeee 6 13 6 8 Setting the A gt B N Trigger ENHANCED ecceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeenenaas 6 14 6 9 Setting the A Delay B Trigger ENHANCED eeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeteeeeeas 6 17 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED eecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeraas 6 20 6 11 Activating a Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 and Time Out Trigger ENHANCE Daarnaas a aaaea a aAa eia aar Ea are aSa 6 24 6 12 Setting the OR Trigger ENHANCED e cc eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeaas 6 28 6 13 Setting a Window Trigger ENHANCED eecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeaeeeneteeas 6 31 6 14 Setting the TV Trigger ENHANCED 0 cecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeseeseaeeseeeeeaeeeea 6 34 6 15 Setting the Action on Trigger eceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeeeteaeeseeeenaeenea 6 38 6 16 Setting the Trigger Gate 2 cc ccsceeedinidee eciees ee
334. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeaeeaeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeee CISPIAY csszcszs A A T IM 701730 01E Index 1 E a Index display Color cic cvscveccvsenresscusceveusesceentndeeconsasereavtintebedey 15 8 display computation oo cece tee eeeee eee eteeteaeenaeee 1 5 display format eee eee eee eenee tees sees eeeeeeeees 2 17 8 1 display SOON kesre eaaa aeaa Aaina 1 8 distal v 00 we 10 45 DNS ss ccetteedestaee dive davaniia tendinitis 13 6 DNS S r n iaia int Asati ace vise vi milan anette 13 6 domain SUPIX stni enendeni inini arint 13 6 E lt e mails SMTP client seese 2 31 edge Search oo eeeeseceeseeeeseeeseesesnessaeeesnesssnseseeseaes edgetrigg i iurosrsiieirenii ididiin emission ENHANCED 1 2 1 0 ners ecb esa vawn adie Neea uaia enhanced trigger entering string entering value co cvcscsesesarecsencestesvasneasipenedeatonacenedvererrdvecersests envelope MOE sceeeseseeseseeeseessseseseeseseerseeteaeeesees error in system operation QMMOMMOSSAQS nienie A AER aS 16 2 errors IN EXECUHON ssssssessssssesenerrusensereerrreneennrrasensrrnsensrenne 16 3 errors in setting 2 ethernet COMMUNICATION eee eee eee eeneeeeeeeteeeteaeeneaee 1 7 external clock input terminal ce eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 14 2 external clock signal external tigger icccccresecsrcesccsceveeeteusceecerensenecedsescneserevecerset external trigger input terminal sssseeseeseereerrerrr
335. eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeceseeesesaeeeeeaneeseseneeesaeeeseeeeeseeaeeeeeneeenes 3 2 Installing the Instrument 3 3 Connecting the Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF 3 4 Connecting the Probe eeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeseesnaeesaeeeeaeessaeesieeseeeeeaas 3 5 Compensating the Probe Phase Correction ccccceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeensas 3 6 Setting the Date and Time 0 eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeceeeeeneeteaeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeaeesaeeeaeesneeeeieeeeeeeeae IM 701730 01E _ A b Contents Chapter 4 Chapter 5 A Chapter 6 A Chapter 7 Common Operations 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 Operations and Functions of Keys and the Jog Shuttle cccscceceseeeeseeeeeseeeeeneeees 4 1 Entering Values and Strings cccecceesceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaeesaeeeaeessaeseaeeseeeeseeseaeensees 4 3 Operating the instrument Using a USB Keyboard or a USB Mouse eeeeeeeereees 4 6 Initializing Setting Syta isnin eevee tes Be elaine ti ee eddie de isin eens a E 4 13 Executing Auto Se tup cssc eea R levies a EE E nein 4 15 Performing Calibration Acco Avice hod Man A Ag eh 4 18 Correcting the Delay Time of the Input Signals c eecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeteetens 4 20 Using the Help FUNCton sinini aaaea ra ead eiae 4 22 Vertical and Horizontal Axes 5 1 Turning Channels ON and OFF ee eee eee e
336. eeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeesieeeeaeeeneeeaas 8 13 8 7 Changing the Graticule Scale eee eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeteaeeeaeeseaeeeeeeseeeeseeseaeetieeseaeeeneeeaas 8 14 8 8 Turning the Scale Display ON and OFF c ceeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeenae 8 15 8 9 Setting Waveform Labels cecceeeccseeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeaeeeaeenaeesaeeeeaeeseeesaeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeneeteas 8 16 8 10 Turning the Translucent Display ON and OFF cccceeseeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeseaeeteaeeeeetaas 8 18 Chapter 9 Waveform Computation 9 1 Displaying and Labeling Computed Waveforms eseesee cess tees ee teee trees teeteaee 9 1 9 2 Adding Subtracting and Multiplying Waveforms cesceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteneeeeeereaees 9 3 9 3 Performing Binary Computation ccceesceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeaeeseaeseaeessaeeeeetaaes 9 6 9 4 Inventing Wavetonmns ccciinn cine nana bai a 9 8 9 5 Differentiating and Integrating Waveforms ccecceecseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeteas 9 10 9 6 Performing Power Spectrum Computation FFT ccceccessceeeeeeseeteneeseeeeeneeseeeeeeesaas 9 12 9 7 Smoothing Waveforms cccceesceeseccecceeeeeceseeeeeeeeaeeceeeeeaeeceaeeeaeeesaeeeaaeeseeeeneeseeaeeneeeeas 9 14 9 8 Shifting the PHASE so cescs scecdacadsbsehtapnaccecectpasceduss iutenndedeadsheslebdececanseaeee aE Eae e aia aii 9 16 Chapter 10 Analyzing and Searching Waveforms 10 1 Displayi
337. eeneaeeeeeneeesenaeeeneneeseneaeeeeea 17 12 Appendix Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length EEEE E T EE AA E EEA ETAN ans A E ETE App 1 Appendix 2 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform ssseeseeesessessiesreeresiesrrsresereen App 11 Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format ccccecseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeteaeseeeseaeeseeeseeeenieeeeaeeta App 13 Appendix 4 List of Default Values seesseessseessreseresssrnsrnnnnrrnnnernntrnnnrnnnnennnnernnnennnennnnnnnn App 17 Appendix 5 Key Assignments of the USB Keyboard ssesssessesssesessresresirsinsinstnsrrnerneene App 18 Index IM 701730 01E xiii es bas Chapter 1 Names and Functions of Parts 1 1 Front Panel Rear Panel and Top Panel Front Panel Soft key Used to select items on the soft key menu that appear on the screen SHIFT key The keys enter the shifted state when you press the SHIFT key thereby illuminating the green indicator located above the SHIFT key The setup menu marked in purple above the panel keys can be selected ESC key Used to clear the soft key menu and dialog box Built in storage media drive Used when saving data to a PC card or floppy disk gt Section 12 2 DL1740E DL1740EL m Jog shuttle DL1740E Kitioioscore YOKOGAWA ig EN Used to set values move the cursor and select items in setup operations Turn the shuttle ring to vary the rate of change according to its angl
338. eform exceeds the specified determination time The displayed position in the zoom display differs from the Pulse gt Time case Pulse lt Time Pulse gt Time yi T1 lt Pulse lt T2 T2 Time Out KIJ T 7 EA i T T1 T2 Specified determination time V Center position when zooming v Search start point for the next search Search Target Waveform You can select the search target waveform e For the DL1740E DL1740EL You can select the target waveform from CH1 to CH4 Math1 and Math2 e For the DL1720E You can select from CH1 to CH2 and Math1 Level You can set the level used to determine whether the polarity of the search target waveform is high or low The selectable range is eight divisions within the screen The resolution is 0 01 divisions Polarity You can select the polarity high or low used to perform determination High Uses the pulse width of the waveform that is greater than or equal to the specified level including the hysteresis condition in the determination Low Uses the pulse width of the waveform that is less than or equal to the specified level including the hysteresis condition in the determination 10 28 IM 701730 01E 10 4 Searching Waveforms Using the Search and Zoom Function Hysteresis You can set the hysteresis The selectable range is 0 3 divisions to 4 0 divisions
339. elect from 0 01 V A Vidiv 2 Vidiv 1 V div 200 mV div Arbitrary Offset voltage OV OV 1 3V Arbitrary Trigger level 2 5V 1 65 V 1 3V Arbitrary 1 2 Vidiv 2 A div for 1000 1 2 For the selectable ranges see section 5 2 Setting V div 5 6 Setting the Offset Voltage and 6 5 Setting the Edge Trigger SIMPLE IM 701730 01E sexy JE UOZHOH pue JeIIHA a 5 8 Setting the Bandwidth Limit lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 5 gt Procedure Trace zgr SHOT HELP HISTORY SA ba O O e To exit the menu during operation press ESC ais od Ed im located above the soft keys setup oispLay ory mace save o SHIFT e Fora description of the operation using a USB SARH O TRIG D oo a p keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 owe owes ACTION DELAY Cre S TIME sDIV 1 Press one of the CH1 to CH4 2 keys to select the channel The CH menu appears 2 Press the Bandwidth soft key The Bandwidth menu appears Display Position J Coupling Probe te Offset Next CH1 Banduidth 172 OFF pr 8 OOdiv DCMR 10 1 000kY Full 3 Press the 20MHz 100 MHz or Full soft key av Display sPosition Coupling 20MHzZ Full OFF px 8 OBdiv DCiNe Dz 1 4 As necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 l Note The bandwidth limit is set for each channel Set the bandwidth limit for
340. elp Q ex Q x a A Search She Favorites Media O 2 a 3 Address http www yokogawa comftm di dl1 700e tm dl1700e_01 htm x Go Category Sitemap Home f Our Businesses Test amp Measurement Products Digital Oscilloscopes Digital Osilloscopes DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL Products Home gt Specifications gt Features gt Softy 4 About Us Worldwide Locations Products Home Category Search E A Lineup of Three Updated Models The Long Awaited 8 MWord Models Have Arrived gt Test amp Measurement Instruments gt Products gt Digital Oscilloscopes Features and Benefits DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL gt Download amp Supports Maximum Sampling Rate gt Contact Us 1 GS s Real time sampling 100 GS s Repetitive sampling gt h 500MHz Analog Bandwidth gt Product Registration Maximum Record Length gt General Catalog DL1740EL 8 Mwords 8 times longer1 gt T amp M Worldwide DL1740E 2 Mwords 2 times longer Network DL1720E 1 Mwords Events iWhen compared with the previous model of the gt T amp M Site Index DLi740 HDTY Trigger 12 and SPI Bus Trigger and Analysis Optional USB Storage and USB Peripherals Supports a USB flash memory device hard disk DL Series Download DLi740EL drive or MO drive Library Supports a USB mouse keyboard or printer User s manuals and YOKOGAWA Members Only Page Ethernet Function Optional software download Web Server E
341. en Offset Cancel is ON Bandwidth Limit lt For the setup procedure see section 5 8 gt You can set a bandwidth limit at 20 MHz or 100 MHz against the input signal for each channel You can observe waveforms with the noise components above the specified frequency eliminated Linear Scaling lt For the setup procedure see section 5 9 gt You can set the scaling coefficient A offset value B and units UNIT for the measured values X obtained through cursor measurement or automatic measurement of waveform parameters For example this is useful for converting voltage values to current values by multiplying the values measured on the instrument by the voltage ratio of an external voltage divider Y UNIT AX B X Value before linear scaling Y Value after linear scaling IM 701730 01E 2 5 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 2 2 Vertical and Horizontal Axes Horizontal Axis Time Axis Selecting the Time Base lt For the setup procedure see section 5 10 gt By default the sampling timing of waveform data is controlled by the internal clock signal generated from the time base circuit within the instrument see the block diagram in section 2 1 The timing can also be controlled by a clock signal applied externally External clock signals are input th
342. ent for purposes other than supplying power to the FET probe 700939 current probes 700937 701930 701931 or 701932 or differential probes 701920 or 701922 Doing so may damage the instrument or the device connected to them IM 701730 01E 3 9 s usWaINseayy 10 suonesedeig Huyel el 3 4 Connecting the Probe When Using the FET Probe Current Probe or Differential Probe When connecting FET probes 700939 current probes 700937 701930 701931 or 701932 or differential probes 701920 or 701922 to the probe power supply terminal on the rear panel make sure that the current does not exceed the range shown below Otherwise the instrument operation may become unstable due to the activation of the excessive current protection circuit of the power supply DL1740E DL1740EL DL1720E EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN TRIG GATE IN lt 40Vpk 1MQ Given terminals A through D Consumption current of A consumption current of B lt 400 mA Consumption current of C consumption current of D lt 400 mA Total consumption current of A through D lt 600 mA When using the current probe 700937 701930 701931 or 701932 the number of probes that can be used is limited by the current generated by the device under measurement current measured by the current probe The characteristics of the measured current versus the current consumption of an active probe that can be connected to the inst
343. enuates the measured signal to 1 10 When using a probe the attenuation setting on the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL must be set equal to the probe s attenuation so that the measured voltage can be read directly When using the 400 MHz Passive Probe voltage probe that comes with the instrument enter a setting of 10 1 The other voltage probe settings that are available on the instrument are 1 1 100 1 and 1000 1 and for the current probe 10 A 1 V 0 1 V A and 100 A 1 V 0 01 V A When using a probe other than one supplied with the instrument set the attenuation ratio on the instrument to match that of the probe used Offset Voltage lt For the setup procedure see section 5 6 gt When observing a voltage riding on top of a predetermined voltage an offset voltage can be applied to eliminate the predetermined voltage so that only the changes in the signal can be observed with higher voltage axis sensitivity Usually the offset voltage does not affect the cursor measurement values the result of the automated measurement of waveform parameters or the computed values However you can apply the offset voltage to cursor measurement values the result of the automated measurement of waveform parameters and the computed values by setting Offset Cancel to ON see section 15 3 When Offset Cancel is OFF 1 Vidiv Offset 0 V 1 Vidiv Offset 2 V 500 mV div Offset 2 V Position 0 div RRR Wh
344. er position and the level difference and time difference between markers can be measured Angle Cursors Degree Measurements can be made by converting the time axis values into angles The zero point position of reference cursor Ref1 and the end point position of the reference cursor Ref2 are set on the X axis and an angle reference angle is assigned to the width of Refi and Ref2 The positions of the two angle cursors Cursor1 and Cursor2 can be converted into angles from the specified reference angle and measured When using vertical cursors When using marker cursors 2004 04 15 16 47 37 j jick Normal 2004 04 15 16 45 34 j ick Normal Stopped 359 El SMS S 200HSMliv Stopped 359 El SMS s 200HS iv lt lt Maing 10k gt gt T lt lt Maing 10k gt gt i A l Cursor 1 Marker 1 Marker 3 i I H l x gt 4 arker 2 H 3 i Cursor 2 Marker 4 X1 600 uS Yi 833 333mV x2 200 uS 2 125 600mU H i x3 200 us 3 833 333mU x1 496 4us 1 145 B33mY x4 500 0us Y4 166 667mU x2 H 8090 0us Y2 125 000mU AXZ 400 us aye 958 333mU ax 1 2964ns ay 20 8333nN 4x3 800 Ous 4Y3 090000 1 4X_ 271 3669HZ I 4x4 1 1000ms AY4 1 00000 Value measured with the cursor Values measured with the cursor IM 701730 01E 2 27 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 2 6 Analyzing and Searching Waveforms
345. erence waveform Selectable range in the left and right direction 5 divisions to the left and right from the screen center You can select the reference waveform for creating determination zones from CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 and Math2 On the DL1740E DL1740EL you can select from CH1 to CH4 Math1 and Math2 On the DL1720E you can select CH1 CH2 and Math1 The zone can be edited entirely or partially with respect to the reference waveform e Registered zones can be modified Determination Condition and Instrument Action When the Condition Is Met For each determination zone you can select the following items e Determination target waveform see Determination Target Waveform described above Enable or disable determination ON OFF Select which condition when the waveform exits the determination zone OUT or when the waveform enters the determination zone IN is considered true Determination Logic You can select the AND logic or OR logic of the determination conditions of the six determination zones in performing the search AND Condition is considered to be true when all the determination conditions of Zone1 to Zone6 are met OR Condition is considered to be true when any of the determination conditions of Zone to Zone 6 is met Determination Operation Sequence You can select whether to repeat the determination operation Single Performs the determination operation once Continue Repeats the de
346. erform computation Source1 Operation Ls Source Scale Center Select the operator from and Set the scaling used to display computed waveform Math1 to Auto auto scaling or Manual manual scaling Sensitivity CLORE aa imt com If scaling is set to Manual set the vertical center line level on the screen voltage value if set to voltage and the sensitivity voltage per division if set to voltage Smoothing Set the unit of computed waveform Math1 Turn ON OFF zooming IM 701730 01E 9 3 uoneyndwoy WAojoAe e 9 2 Adding Subtracting and Multiplying Waveforms Explanation Turning the Computed Waveform Display ON and OFF The display of the computed waveforms Math1 and Math2 can be turned ON OFF individually For details see section 9 1 Operator Select the addition subtraction or multiplication operator or as the operator of Math1 and Math2 Addition subtraction and multiplication can be performed between the waveforms to be computed Addition Multiplication Waveform to be computed J lt Computed waveform Waveform to Be Computed The waveforms on which computation can be performed are as follows e For the DL1740E DL1740EL Computation Name Source1 Source2 Math1 CH1 or CH2 One channel from CH1 to CH4 Math2 CH3 or CH4 One channel from CH1 to CH4 or Math1 On the menu CH1 to CH4 may be indi
347. erval Set the display update interval to 10 s 30 s or 60 s Update indicator image Cantal onitor and Capture Play Stop Update Interval Selecting the Display Color of the Screen Image Color Select the display color from ON OFF Reverse and Gray For a description of the displayed information for each setting see the explanation in section 12 9 image Contras Monitor and Capture Play Stop Update Interval 10s X Color X ON OFF ns Reverse if Adea Note The time it takes to display the screen image on the PC varies depending on the color setting In decreasing order the color settings are ON Reverse Gray and OFF 13 30 IM 701730 01E 13 7 Using the Web Server Function e Saving Screen Images to a PC Right click on the displayed screen image The following shortcut menu appears Choose Save Picture As to save the current screen image Open Link Open Linkin New w Show Picture E mail Picture N Print Picture Go to My Pictures Set as Background Set as Desktop Item Gut Copy Paste Add to Favorites Properties Saving Data in the PC and Loading Setup Data from the PC into the instrument Data Control e Saving Data in the PC Capture Data Type Select the type of data to be saved from Waveform Binary Waveform ASCII Waveform Float Setup and Measure For details on the settings see the explanations in sections 12 5 12 6 and 12 8 Hata
348. es More Info _Horetnto_ IM 701730 01E 13 25 jeuondo suonesiuNnWWOD JeUIEYIy g 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Using the Instrument without Connecting to the Internet If the three files Msvbvm60 dll cmdlgjp dll and comdlg32 0cx are not installed in the PC when using the Web server function for the first time install the files beforehand according to the following procedure 7 Download the following file from the YOKOGAWA Web site http Awww yokogawa com tm tm softdownload htm DL1700E series Web server function library installer YOKOGAWA T amp M Web Runtime ytmwrun exe Size Approximately 1 5 MB 8 Double click ytmwrun exe after you have downloaded it The installation of the aforementioned three files starts Follow the on screen instructions to complete installation of the files Checking the Web Browser Internet Explorer Security Settings Check the security settings on Internet Explorer The settings indicated in the table on the next page are defaults If the settings on your browser do not match set them back to the settings in the table on the next page Otherwise the Web server function cannot be used The following explanation is for Internet Explorer 5 5 For other versions carry out equivalent steps accordingly 9 Choose Internet Options from the Tools menu The Internet Options dialog box opens 10 Click the Security tab 11 Select a Web content zone The Web service zone varies depending on
349. es to Exec When a waveform that matches the search condition is detected the zoom box moves to that position and the zoom waveform display frame the zoom waveform display frame selected in step 12 if the zoom waveform display mode is Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 shows the detected waveform zoomed SFaRCH 1 Type a Zi Mag 6 Zi Pos Searched Setup Pattern Exec Edge x 10 4 000diy No Match 14 To search the next waveform using the same search condition repeat step 13 The search can be repeated to the right edge of the screen or up to 1000 detections IM 701730 01E 10 15 SWJOJaAe Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy es 10 4 Searching Waveforms Using the Search and Zoom Function Redisplaying the Detected Waveforms 15 Press the Searched Pattern soft key 16 Turn the jog shuttle to select the number same as the detection count of the detected waveform to be displayed The zoom box moves to the position of the detected waveform of the selected number and the zoom waveform display frame the zoom waveform display frame selected in step 12 if the zoom waveform display mode is Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 shows the detected waveform zoomed The numbers get larger as the detected waveforms become newer detected waveforms to the right have larger numbers than those to the left Zoom box 2004 05 10 13 51 12 iok Normal Stopped
350. es to the All Set soft key i H IM 701730 01E 12 43 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 12 11 Changing the File Attributes and Deleting Files Explanation Executing the Deletion 11 Press the Delete Exec soft key All files with asterisks are deleted Loring Function Filter a Set Property Attr Delete reso Specifying the File and Properties to Be Displayed on the File List Window 9 The procedure is the same as steps 22 to 25 on page 12 15 Selecting the Storage Medium and Directory Media to and from which saving and loading are possible are displayed on the File List window e Display Examples of Storage Media FD Floppy disk PC Card PC card NetWork Network drive when the Ethernet interface option is installed USB USB storage Selecting the File Attribute Excluding Net Drive Select the file attribute of each file from the following e R W Read and write possible e R Read only Cannot write to the file or delete the file Selecting the Files to Be Deleted You can delete all files that have an asterisk to the left of the file name There are two methods in selecting the files to be deleted e Selecting the files one at a time Press the Set Reset soft key to place asterisks to the left of the files one at a time e Selecting all files at once Places an asterisk to the left of all the file names using the All Set soft key Selecting a file or directory and pressi
351. eseeeteteeeetetseeteeseteeeestees 10 56 additional information c cecsecseessesteeeeeeseeseesseseeeeseesee 11 5 computation start point UO CAION 2 ceecceedeiseceedetscerhovasiens deceeateeenapies deer scercreneest tee computed WAVEFOIM secesseecsteesseeeesecsseeeseesteesseseeteeeneeens 9 1 ambient humidity a computer interface ce eeeeeseseeeeseeeeseteesetetetseeeesseseeseeeesens 17 9 ambient temperature cseccsseessecsssesssecssecsseessecsseesseeesseeese 3 3 control script ANALYSIS ccsscasvscceccsscatsasanaanssestiscescccsssaceaseeasaasiacaseaaseasredeeecdec COPY E angle cursor COPYING Milesnak eiaa daear an a Aaaa ASO iee r aT E coupling ASCII header file format cscscsseccsstescsstecsssesesssecessees App 13 oculare Kolce coi nese eeeseeeeseeeeceteeeeeeeecneeeeneecneeeeneettees attenuation CUNPFONE Probe oss cecstccseccsstsenadeatabesscsdeiadenasestesscscsisaateaacaadessiades ea EEATT AE E current to voltage conversion ratio Be auto level mode CURSOR E E E a ii ivbessctaniientvaavneies auto mode 2 11 6 1 cursor Measurement ssssssssssersrsssrinsrnennnsnnnennnns auto NAMING mieis 12 18 12 24 12 36 AUTO SCHON aes vcsciscvessncvesessvedsecsaseas secusssvesaectitensansmesteerer seven D auto scroll search AULOSOTUP EEEE TEET 2 32 4 15 data captUre ss iicsscesesthsaschssaiessscscandesccassndtvbsiscidessesnecedinieaita 13 29 automated measurement mode cc cceeeeees 10 42 10 55 ANG E PE
352. esis it is determined to be low e The status when the search target waveform is within the specified hysteresis including the upper and lower limits of hysteresis A and B in the figure below is determined to be the same status true as the determination status Pattern described two sections earlier and is handled as a level where the search condition is met Search Start Point You can set the search start point The selectable range is 5 divisions The resolution is ten division display record length For a description of the display record length see appendix 1 IM 701730 01E 10 27 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy es 10 4 Searching Waveforms Using the Search and Zoom Function Pulse Width Search Conditions The following conditions can be specified Determination Type You can select the type used to determine the relationship between the pulse width of the search target waveform and the specified determination time Pulse lt Time Searches the section where the pulse width of the search target waveform is shorter than the specified determination time Pulse gt Time Searches the section where the pulse width of the search target waveform is longer than the specified determination time T1 lt Pulse lt T2 Searches the section where the pulse width of the search target waveform is within the range of the specified determination time Time Out Searches the section where the pulse width of the search target wav
353. ess the Level soft key SIMPLE Source fe Level Slope Coupling HF Reject Hysteresis fold Off us CH1 1 50 U Ft AC OFF A z 0 08 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger level Pressing RESET resets the trigger level to the current offset voltage Note The trigger level setting applies to both simple and enhanced triggers Setting the Trigger Slope 6 Press the Slope soft key to select f or ft Setting the Trigger Coupling 7 Press the Coupling soft key to select DC or AC SIMPLE Source fe Level Slope Coupling HF Reject Hysteresis fsHold Off us CH1 1 50 U Eai AC or M 0 08 The trigger coupling setting applies to both simple and enhanced triggers 6 8 IM 701730 01E 6 5 Setting the Edge Trigger SIMPLE Explanation Setting the HF Rejection 8 Press the HF Reject soft key The HF Reject menu is displayed SIMPLE Source fe Level Slope Coupling f HF Re ject f ysteresis Hold Off S CH1 1 50 V Ft Ag OFF a x 9 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired frequency Source 6 Level Slope Coupling OFF 20MHZz ASkHz CH1 1 50 V af ac Ea Note The HF rejection setting applies to both simple and enhanced triggers Setting the Hysteresis 10 Press the Hysteresis soft key to select A or 7 SIMPLE Source Level Slope Coupling HF Reject Hysteresis jHoid Off us CH1 1 50 V AC OFF x 0 0 Note The Hysteresis setting applies t
354. ess the instrument from the PC For the setup procedure see section 13 6 Note The User Account in the menu that appears after step 4 is the user account that is used to control the instrument through communication commands via the Ethernet network It is not the user account for using the Web server function IM 701730 01E 13 23 Ieuondo suonesaiunwwos JeUI9U A g 13 7 Using the Web Server Function e Setting the Time Difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time 7 Set the time difference between the location where the instrument is installed and GMT For the setup procedure see section 13 8 e Rebooting 8 To activate the TCP IP user account and time difference settings turn OFF the power switch After a few seconds turn ON the power switch to boot the instrument Preparations on the PC 1 Power up the PC and log on If the PC is running Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP log on as an administrator If you do not log on as an administrator you may not be able to install files that are required for using the Web server function see the next page e Logging into the Web Server Instrument 2 Start Internet Explorer 3 Enter the IP address of the instrument for example 192 168 0 101 or the host name of the instrument for example dI700E_1 if a DNS server is available on the network Enter the IP address hitp 192 168 0 101 Enter the host name hitp dl1700e_1 File Edit View Favorites Tool
355. et the level of computed waveform Math1 used to switch from 1 to 0 Explanation The waveform specified as CH1 to CH4 or Math1 or waveform CH1 CH2 on the DL1720E can be converted to a digital waveform of Os and 1s with respect to the specified threshold level 9 6 IM 701730 01E 9 3 Performing Binary Computation Turning the Computed Waveform Display and Computed Waveform Label ON and OFF See section 9 1 Operator Select the binary computation operator Bin as the operator of Math1 and Math2 The waveform to be computed can be converted to a digital waveform of Os and 1s with respect to the specified threshold level Waveform to Be Computed The waveforms on which computation can be performed are as follows e For the DL1740E DL1740EL Computation Name Source Math1 One channel from CH1 to CH4 Math2 One channel from CH1 to CH4 or Math1 On the menu CH1 to CH4 may be indicated as C1 to C4 and Math1 as M1 Mathi and Math2 can be computed simultaneously e For the DL17420E Computation Name Source Math1 CH1 or CH2 On the menu CH1 to CH2 may be indicated as C1 and C2 Scaling Scaling is not available in binary computation You can select Auto or Manual on the menu but the computed result is not affected The scaling level is fixed Unit of Computed Waveforms The operation is the same as for addition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 Smoothing The operation is the same as for add
356. et the trigger position SHIFT POSITION DELAY Key Section 6 3 Displays a menu used to set the trigger delay TRIG D Indicator llluminates when a trigger is activated Note The setup menu for the trigger gate is located in the menu that appears when the MISC key see page 1 7 is pressed Common Operations and Waveform Acquisition Display Computation Analysis and Search m MEASURE CURSOR ILE MISC GONO GO TH C I Mam ACQ stanrisro XY Ml setup pispLay GoPy AVE O SHIFT SETUP Key Sections 4 4 4 5 and 12 1 Displays the auto setup menu in which settings can be automatically configured according to the input signal the initialize menu in which settings can be initialized to their factory defaults and the setup data can be stored recalled DISPLAY Key Sections 8 1 to 8 3 and 8 7 8 8 and 8 10 Displays a menu used to set the waveform display and information display SHIFT DISPLAY X Y Key Section 8 5 Displays a menu used to set the X Y display MEASURE Key Sections 10 6 to 10 8 Displays a menu used to set the automated measurement of waveform parameters and statistical processing CURSOR Key Section 10 5 Displays a menu used to set cursor measurements IM 701730 01E 1 5 syed JO suoljouny pue sowenN E 1 2 Panel Keys and Knobs GO NO GO Key Sections 10 9 and 10 10 Displays a menu used to set GO NO GO determination M
357. etWork 1 lt 88 ea 8e 9e i gt 12 0001 WUF 12 0000 WUF 2004 05 10 14 42 68126 2004 05 13 19 39 68126 2004 05 13 19 38 M Function et Reset Copy Utility FILE i Filter n troperty attr Dest Dir A11 Set IM 701730 01E 12 47 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 12 12 Copying Files Selecting the Copy Destination 11 Press the Dest Dir soft key The Copy menu and the copy destination File List window appears Function a Filter et Reset A11 Set f Property Attr Copy ited File List Path NetWork Path NetWo _Space 2147483647 byte Space 214748 File Nane Size Date Attr File Name Utility a Dest Dir FD 1 NetWork 1 lt Sof tuare gt FD NetWork lt 88 ea Be 12 0001 12 0000 il FILE eas ame et Resetj A11 Set Property attr opy Exec Copy be WUE e Selecting the Medium and Directory of the Copy Destination 12 The procedure is the same as steps 13 to 15 on page 12 14 e Executing the Copy 13 Press the Copy Exec soft key All the copy source files with asterisks are copied mtr Function Filter ia ka Set Property Attr Ea Exec Copy be WUF e Specifying the File to Be Displayed in the File List Window and Viewing File Properties 14 The procedure is the same as steps 22 to 25 on page 12 15 12 48 IM 701730 01E 12 12 Copying Files E
358. etting 315 to 2 Line numbers inside the parentheses cannot be set Field 1 AONAN UU a Y i i ay 2 M ge Line number or e 624 625 626 on R82 1246 gt 1250 1251 ae far n 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 Line number gt 9433 gt 945 e For 1080 60i 1080 50i or 1080 24sF 2 to 2251 The following line numbers are those when the field number is set to 1 if the field number is set to 2 the numbers are assigned sequentially by setting 565 to 2 Line numbers inside the parentheses cannot be set 45H 517H 5H 5H 35H i 2245 2250 2251 Line number 1120 1125 115e Mee ys 1129 130 1191 Toe 1166 madas A ae hulahti o 9 1682 1687 1688 116 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1728 Line number 557 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 603 ried Yeh fh fafa lta a 34H 1 2H Wont 518H e For 1080 60p 1080 25p or 1080 24p 2 to 2251 Line numbers inside the parentheses cannot be set 45H ji T SH ai a i oe oil 1 un mh h h 6 7 8 Line number 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 2250 2251 e For 720 60p 2 to 2251 Line numbers inside the parentheses cannot be set 30H 5H 5H 20H AAEREN Ae 4 5 1 750 751 2250 2251 6 3 5 7 8 5 4 755 756 757 758 N an N 753 7 Line number 6 36 IM 701730 01E 6 14 Setting
359. ettings cannot be changed while action on trigger is in progress IM 701730 01E 6 39 s n el 6 16 Setting the Trigger Gate Procedure O O To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys e Fora description of the operation using a USB RESET MENU J PHASE ACQ START STOP E Enact INGE SAVE O SHIFT VERTICAL CORONAT Ko C mn 2 O Ge Ss None keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 vepIv TIME DIV ACTION DELAY Sa oe y m 1 Press the MISC key The MISC menu appears 2 Press the System Config soft key The System Cnfg menu appears MISC a a Calibration Remote Network System verview Next Control Conf ig 172 3 Press the Trigger Gate soft key to select OFF Active H or Active L Henu Message lick Sounda Offset Trigger Language Language Date Time cance 1 Gate ENG JPN ON oN OFF Boston oie Menu Message Click Sounda Active H Active L Language Language Date Time ENG JPN DEF ON 6 40 IM 701730 01E 6 15 Setting the Action on Trigger Explanation Trigger Gate Set the timing when the specified trigger condition is activated OFF When the trigger condition is met the waveform is acquired Active High When the external signal is low the waveform is not acquired even when the trigger condition is met When the trigger condition is met when the external
360. etweced Aescaeesredseraeibeetis power cord fi 3 5 SIMA aa ae E ee 1 5 power fuse wo 16 11 simple trigger cssesseesssesesecsessesteseeseaseseeseaseateseeseaseseeseeseas 2 8 pOWEF SPECHIUM eseseeceeeeeetee tes teeteeeeteteetentententetenteneeees 9 12 sine interpolation sccceeceeeseeseceeeeeseeeeseeeeeeteteneteeeeees 2 17 IM 701730 01E Index 3 E a Index Single MOE sssini iia ae 2 11 6 2 Single N Co nt siasi een eaa eae 7 9 SINGLE N Mode 1 0 0 eeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeseeeaeeeneeaeeaees 7 8 single N mode 2 11 6 2 SKEW sea anra tA mesae Taena castes nA EAE E RTO Kae U sas oa sore 4 21 SlOPO sisihin i ia aeie edariek 10 44 smoothing 9 5 9 7 9 9 9 11 9 14 9 15 SMTP client near hran ed a ariari 13 13 SMTP time out 13 49 13 50 SNAPSHOT aiamaa e a A EI a RASE 1 7 snapshot seses 2 19 8 13 snapshot waveform 12 26 SNTP Sorot ene eaaa ea aaa ea a A E 3 14 Soft KOy toSt cise cecesscdestvecececcecess cdarseveapeseevestterscusettnetsndeteens 16 9 Splitting the screen ssssssssseesrssresrsrreernsressrnsensenrreneenernns 2 17 START STOP starting waveform acquisition eeeeeseeseeerierrerserrernrrnere 7 1 statistical processing esseseesseeeereerreerrerrerrrereens 2 28 10 46 statistical processing by cycle 00 eect eeeeeeee 2 28 statistical processing of history waveform 2 28 10 50 statistical processi
361. evel temporarily changes from low L to high H Circuit Diagram of the Signal Output Section 5V e GO OUT z gt 4 7k2 NOGO OUT 120 o o NVV O A 100 pF _ VW Signal Output Connector The configuration and pin assignments of the signal output connector are as follows Configuration The connector uses an RJ 12 modular jack It is recommended to use the accessory GO NO GO cable part no 366973 sold separately If another commercially available cable is used a modular 4 wire telephone cable make sure the cable is wired as follows Pin Assignments GO NO GO Pin no Signal Logic NC not connected NC not connected GO OUT Negative NO GO OUT Negative GND m OORUN NC not connected Connector on the unit side Output Timing Output Timing EXEC y 10 ms or more Waveform load lt a Waveform load lt T T lt I i Determination i Determination Results Results NO GO OUT GO OUT When setting the operation for when the conditions are true the time until the operation is complete is extended 10 68 IM 701730 01E 10 11 Using the GO NO GO Determination Signal Output Function Connections to Other Devices CAUTION Do not apply external voltage to the NO GO OUT or GO OUT output pins Doing so can cause damage to the instrument e When connecting the GO NO
362. ey Turn the jog shuttle to set the delay time Pressing RESET resets the value being selected to 0 s Ps 0 fe ms o us 9 ns e 0 0n ay Delay l e For a description of the operation using a USB Although the display usually shows the waveform before and after the trigger point it is possible to display the acquired waveform after a fixed time period elapses using the trigger delay Selectable Range of Trigger Delay 0 to 4 s resolution is 1 sample rate 10 Trigger point Trigger position T Delay gt 1 i Notes on Seiting the Trigger Delay e e When T div is changed the trigger delay remains unchanged If the time base is set to external clock the trigger delay cannot be specified it is fixed at 0 s IM 701730 01E 6 5 s n el 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 13 gt Procedure For Simple Triggers Joc T TT LL I No To exit the menu during operation press ESC ee located above the soft keys Cserur ossriay Corr mace save a sirr For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 a 1 Press SIMPLE The SIMPLE menu appears 2 Press the Hold Off soft key ST a Hold OFF us 0 0 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the hold off time Pressing RESET re
363. ey to set Position as the item under jog shuttle control CH1 Display fi Position j Coupling Probe fe Offset f Bandwidth Next OFF pry 8 O0div DCMR 10 1 0 00OkU Full 172 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the vertical position 5 4 IM 701730 01E 5 3 Setting the Vertical Position of the Waveform Explanation Range of Movement The vertical position can be moved within a range of 4 divisions from the center of the waveform display frame Resolution 0 01 divisions Confirming the Vertical Position For input waveforms and computed waveforms the ground level and vertical position are marked to the left of the waveform display frame 500 mV div Offset 1 V Offset Cancel OFF Position 0 div Ground level mark E Vertical position mark gt Note e The waveform data that goes off the waveform display frame when moving the vertical position is handled as overflow data e Ifthe display waveform goes out of the waveform display frame from moving the vertical position during waveform acquisition a chopped waveform is displayed as shown in the following figure even if the vertical position is returned to its original position after stopping the acquisition Changing the vertical position also changes the valid data range For details see section 2 2 IM 701730 01E 5 5 sexy JE UOZHOH pUe JeIIHA eo 5 4 Setting the Inp
364. f DNS was set to ON in step 8 set the domain name 9 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to enter the domain name e Setting the DNS Server Address If DNS was set to ON in step 8 set the DNS server address 10 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set DNS Server primary DNS server Enter using values in the range of 0 to 255 11 Likewise set the secondary DNS server in DNS Server2 e Setting the Domain Suffix If DNS was set to ON in step 8 set the domain suffix 12 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to enter Domain Suffix1 primary domain suffix 13 Likewise set the secondary domain suffix in Domain Suffix2 DNS DNS Donain Nane Domain name when DNS is ON Dns Servert 9 4 9 Primary domain suffix when DNS is ON DNS Server2 9 9 9 a Secondary domain suffix when DNS is ON Primary DNS server when DNS is ON Secondary DNS server when DNS is ON Domain Suff ix4 Domain Suff ix2 Turning the Power Supply ON and OFF 14 To apply the new settings the instrument must be power cycled After all the settings are complete turn the power switch to the instrument OFF then back ON again 13 4 IM 701730 01E 13 2 Setting Up the TCP IP Explanation The following TCP IP settings must be entered to use the Ethernet communications functions on the instrument IP address Subnet mask Default gateway IP Address Internet Protocol Address You can assign an IP address to t
365. f c3 c4 Math2 Assigning Labels to Computed Waveforms 3 Press M1 Label A keyboard used to enter values and strings appears 4 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the label C mm Z Display a MZ Setup Mz Label ON C3 C4 Mathz 1 Display Mi Setup M1 Label C1 C2 Mathi PFF oN 1 Display Jani Setu M1 Label ON C1 C2 Mathi p E m INSERT FIFA IM 701730 01E 9 1 uoneyndwoy WAdJOAe e 9 1 Displaying and Labeling Computed Waveforms Explanation This section describes the setup procedures that are common to the computations described in section 9 2 to 9 8 Turning the Computed Waveform Display ON and OFF The display of the computed waveforms Math1 and Math2 can be turned ON OFF separately ON Computed waveforms are displayed OFF Computed waveforms are not displayed Computed Waveform Labels Labels can be assigned to computed waveforms Math1 and Math2 using up to eight characters The type of characters that can be used are those displayed on the keyboard For the procedure of turning ON OFF the display of the assigned labels see section 8 9 9 2 IM 701730 01E 9 2 Adding Subtracting and Multiplying Waveforms Procedure lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 21 gt To exit the menu during operation press ESC SNAP HELP located above the soft keys v e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog MEASURE CURSOR
366. for at least thirty minutes after turning ON the power switch After warm up is complete perform calibration see section 4 6 Power Down Operation Current settings are stored immediately before the power is turned OFF or when the power cord is unplugged Therefore the next time the power is turned ON the waveforms are displayed using the previous settings Not _ _ NO A lithium battery is used to retain the setup parameters When the lithium battery voltage falls below a certain level a message is displayed on the screen see section 16 2 when the power switch is turned ON If this happens you must quickly have the lithium battery replaced The user cannot replace the battery Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer For information regarding battery life see section 16 6 IM 701730 01E 3 7 s usWaINseayy 10 suoNesedeig Huyel el 3 4 Connecting the Probe Signal Input Terminal Connect the probe or other input cable such as the BNC cable to any of the input terminals four terminals marked as CH1 to CH4 on the DL1740E or two terminals marked CH1 and CH2 on the DL1720E at the bottom section of the front panel The input impedance is 1 MQ 1 0 and approximately 20 pF or 50 Q 1 0 AN CAUTION e The maximum input voltage for 1 MQ input is 400 V DC ACpeak or 282 Vrms when the frequency is 1 kHz or less Applying a voltage exceeding either of the two values can damage the input section If the frequency is above
367. form according to the procedures given in section 8 4 Parallel Pattern Parallel Status Pattern Search 1 Press SHIFT ZOOM SEARCH The SEARCH menu appears Selecting the Parallel Pattern Search Method 2 Press the Type soft key The Type menu appears SEARCH Type Z1 Mag 6 21 Pos Searched Setup Pattern Exec Edge x 10 4 000di No Match 3 Press the Parallel Pattern soft key Edge Serial Width Parallel Auto OSearched Pattern Pattern Scroll Pattern Exec No Match Fl Setting the Search Condition 4 Press the Setup soft key The Setup dialog box opens SEARCH Type fa Zi Mag 6 Zi Pos Searched Setup Pattern Exec Parallel x 10 1 800diy No Match Pattern 10 18 IM 701730 01E 10 4 Searching Waveforms Using the Search and Zoom Function Setting the Timing for Detecting the Status Pattern 5 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select None detect the patterns of all waveforms or a channel from CH1 to CH4 2 synchronize to the selected channel signal and detect the patterns of all other waveforms Clock CH box e If you select None proceed to step 9 If you select CH1 to CH4 2 proceed to step 6 Setup Clock Lone A 7 Set None or CH1 through CH4 2 for the timing Pattern Lever Hysteresis at which the status pattern is detected Setting the Detection Slope Level and Hysteresis of the Selected Synchronization Clock Signal When CH1 to CH4 2 Is Selected
368. forms are displayed Degree is not available IM 701730 01E 10 33 10 5 Cursor Measurements Selecting the Waveform to Measure e When X Y Waveforms Are Not Displayed 4 Press the Select soft key to select the marker from M1 to M4 CURSOR Type Select Trace f Pos x ursor Juni ump Exec Marker m2 M3 CH1 3 0004i to Z1 5 Press the Trace soft key The Trace menu appears CURSOR Type Select Trace j Pos X ursor Jun ump Exec Marker m2 M3 CH1 3 000ait to Z1 6 Press the CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 or Math2 soft key to select the waveform to measure On the DL1740E DL1740EL you can select from CH1 to CH4 Math1 and Math2 On the DL1720E you can select CH1 CH2 and Math1 Type CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 Marker e When X Y Waveforms Are Displayed 4 Press the Trace soft key to select XY1 or XY2 Proceed to step 7 CURSOR Type Trace Position Marker XYZ 3 000di Moving Cursors 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor The Position value changes When X Y waveforms are not displayed CURSOR ursor Jun lump Exec to 21 When X Y waveforms are displayed Type Trace CURSOR jSPosition 3 0004 Type Select Trace ff Pos x Marker M2 M3 M CH1 3 000di Marker x2 Jumping the Cursor to the Zoom Waveform Display Frame When X Y Waveforms Are Not Displayed 8 Press the Cursor Jump soft key The Cursor Jump menu appears CURSOR Ty
369. from a file overwrites the waveform data in the acquisition memory Once the memory is overwritten the old data cannot be recovered It is recommended that the current waveform data be saved before loading data from a file e Loaded waveforms are cleared only when Unload Initialize or Auto Setup is executed or when the waveform acquisition condition is changed Ifthe total number of files and directories exceeds 2500 in a single directory the file list is no longer displayed e This function cannot be used when using the FTP server function FTP client function the LPR client function or the Web server function e Files with the extension WVF and HDR are saved as file pairs If you specify for the files to be displayed Filter on the File List and manipulate individual files Delete Rename or Copy the files can no longer be loaded Data Format When Storing Multiple Records When multiple records are stored in history memory for example the following data format is used ASCII format CR LF between records lt Header gt CH1 s measured data 1 1 CH2 s measured data 1 1 CH3 s measured data 1 1 CR LF 7 CH1 s measured data 1 2 CH2 s measured data 1 2 CH3 s measured data 1 2 CR LF i ti ecor CH1 s measured data 1 m CH2 s measured data 1 m CH3 s measured data 1 m CR LF CR LF S CH1 s measured data 2 1 CH2 s measured data 2 1 CH3 s measured data 2 1 CR LF CH1 s measured
370. ft Print Screen Execute COPY Same as left ScrollLock Execute IMAGE SAVE Same as left Pause Execute SNAPSHOT Same as left Insert Insert condition Same as left Home Decrement V Div Same as left Decrement V Div Same as left Page Up Decrement T Div Same as left Decrement T Div Same as left Delete Delete Same as left End Increment V Div Same as left Increment V Div Same as left Page Down Increment T Div Same as left Increment T Div Same as left gt Cursor to the right Same as left Cursor to the right Same as left Cursor to the right Same as left 4 Cursor to the left Same as left Cursor to the left Same as left Cursor to the left Same as left 4 Jog shuttle down Same as left Select soft key6 Same as left Jog shuttle down Same as left t Jog shuttle up Same as left Select soft key6 Same as left Jog shuttle up Same as left Numeric Num Lock I Same as left START STOP Same as left i Same as left START STOP Same as left a Same as left Same as left Enter Return Enter Same as left Return Enter Select Same as left 1 CH1 menu Increment V Div 1 Increment V Div 2 CH2 menu Jog shuttle down 2 Jog shuttle down 3 CH3 menu Increment T Div 3 Increment T Div 4 CH4 menu Cursor to the left 4 Cursor to the left 5 5 6 Cursor to the right 6 Cursor to the right T Decrement V Div 7 Decrement V Div 8 Jog shuttle up 8 Jog shuttle up 9 Decrement T Div 9 Decrement T Div 0 0 Insert condition The operation of the key when holding down the Shift key on the U
371. g or Manual manual scaling Scale Center Sensitivity If scaling is set to Manual set the vertical center line level on the screen voltage value if set to voltage and the sensitivity voltage per division if set to voltage Unit Smoothing m Set the unit of computed waveform Math1 Turn ON OFF zooming 9 8 IM 701730 01E 9 4 Inverting Waveforms Explanation Turning the Computed Waveform Display and Computed Waveform Label ON and OFF See section 9 1 Operator Select the inversion operator Invert as the operator for Mathi and Math2 The waveform to be computed is inverted vertically around the 0 level of the waveform by multiplying the waveform data by 1 i Waveform to Be Computed lt Computed Waveform Waveform to Be Computed The waveforms on which computation can be performed are as follows e For the DL1740E DL1740EL Computation Name Source Math1 One channel from CH1 to CH4 Math2 One channel from CH1 to CH4 or Math1 On the menu CH1 to CH4 may be indicated as C1 to C4 and Math1 as M1 e Mathi and Math2 can be computed simultaneously e For the DL17420E Computation Name Source Math1 CH1 or CH2 On the menu CH1 to CH2 may be indicated as C1 and C2 Scaling The operation is the same as for addition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 Unit of Computed Waveforms The operation is the same as for addition
372. g a Floppy Disk When using a new floppy disk you must format it You can format the disk to 2HD 1 44M Formatting a PC Card Initializing USB Storage PC cards and USB storage are initialized in FAT format Number of Partitions You can set partitions on external USB storage devices and PC cards However partitions cannot be specified on external USB storage devices and PC cards handled as removable disks In addition a storage medium that is already partitioned can be selected and formatted as a separate storage medium but the separate storage medium cannot be partitioned further On external USB storage devices you can select 1 to 3 partitions on PC cards you can select 1 or two partitions Media Information Lists the information about the selected medium Media Name Name of the medium Media Size Media size Used Space Used space Vacant Space Total size Partition Size Number of partitions Vendor Name Manufacturer name only on external USB storage devices Product Name Product name only on external USB storage devices Note e If you format a storage medium that has data stored on it all of the stored data are cleared Use caution when formatting a storage medium e Ittakes approximately a minute and a half to format a floppy disk e ttakes a few seconds to format a PC card e You cannot format a floppy disk if the write protect is ON e Floppy disks that are formatted to formats other than those listed in this section ca
373. g in the input box of the keyboard When the eight strings that are temporarily stored are displayed the newest string is displayed again 2 You can also edit the recalled string by performing steps 1 to 4 of Entering Strings described above When the string is confirmed it is temporarily stored as a new string Keys Other Than the Character Keys DEL Deletes the character at the cursor INS Switches the insert overwrite mode When in insert mode the INSERT indicator on the keyboard illuminates in red SPACE Enters a space ENT Confirms the displayed characters CAPS Switches between uppercase and lowercase Also switches a portion of the characters assigned to the keyboard Number of Characters and Types That Can Be Used in the Settings Number of Characters Characters That Can Be Used Date Time Specified number 0 to 9 File name 1 to 14 characters 0t09 AtoZ _ Comments for screen images 0 to 20 characters All characters including spaces Comments for files 0 to 25 characters All characters including spaces Comments for e mails 0 to 30 characters All ASCII characters on the keyboard including spaces E mail address 0 to forty characters All ASCII characters on the keyboard including spaces User name and login name 0 to 15 characters All ASCII characters on the keyboard including spaces Password 0 to 15 characters All ASCII characters on the keyboard including spaces
374. g the Acquisition Mode Explanation You can select the acquisition mode from the following The default setting is normal mode Normal Mode Normal Sampled data is stored in the acquisition memory without special processing When Set to Envelope Mode Envelope The maximum and minimum values are determined every acquisition interval from the data sampled at 400 MS s or 800 MS s or 1 GS s when interleave mode is ON The maximum and minimum values are stored to the acquisition memory and an envelope waveform is displayed Note _____ This mode can be specified when the time axis would be 200 MS s or less in normal mode or 500 MS s or less when in interleave mode For all other cases the mode is set to normal mode even when envelope mode is specified Averaging Mode Average Sampled data is averaged and stored to the acquisition memory The averaging method varies depending on the acquisition count setting If set to Infinite exponential averaging is performed and you must set the attenuation constant Weight If the acquisition count is set to a value in the range of 2 to 65536 simple averaging is performed The specified value is the average count Exponential averaging when set to infinite Simple average when set to 2 to 65536 N x Xn An 4 N 1 An 1 Xn Me N N An nt averaged value Xn nt measured value Xn n measured value N Average count N Attenuation constant 2 to 256 2 steps acquisition
375. g the Hold Off 13 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in section 6 4 Note The status settings of conditions A and B apply to the A gt B N trigger and A Delay B trigger The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to both simple and enhanced triggers 6 18 IM 701730 01E 6 9 Setting the A Delay B Trigger ENHANCED Explanation The trigger activates the first time condition B becomes true after condition A has become true and the preset time has elapsed Setting Conditions A and B e Status of Each Channel You can select from the following three choices H Above the preset trigger level L Below the preset trigger level X Don t Care e Condition Enter Trigger is activated when all channels match the specified condition Exit Trigger is activated when any of the channels no longer match the specified condition Setting the Delay 3 ns to 5 s resolution is 1 ns Setting the Trigger Level Selectable range Eight divisions of the screen Resolution 0 01 divisions For example the resolution for 2 mV div is 0 02 mV Setting the Hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that triggers are not activated by small changes in the trigger signal A Approximately 0 3 divisions of hysteresis around the trigger level Z Approximately one division of hysteresis around the trigger level The value above is an approximate value It is not strictly warrante
376. ge Data lt For the setup procedure see sections 12 9 and 12 10 gt The screen image data can be stored to a selected storage medium The data can be stored in TIFF BMP PostScript PNG and JPEG formats allowing the data to be pasted onto a document created with a DTP application In addition the thumbnails reduced and simplified images of the screen image data saved to the storage medium can be displayed on the instrument screen This feature is useful for checking the contents of the stored screen image data IM 701730 01E 2 33 suon uny jo uoneuejdxg 2 8 Other Useful Functions Saving Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameter Values lt For the setup procedure see section 12 8 gt You can save the automatically measured waveform parameter values to a storage medium Operating the instrument Using a Free Software Program The instrument can be controlled from a PC using Wirepuller a free software program when connected via the GP IB USB or Ethernet interface The software program can be downloaded from the following Web pages e English version http www yokogawa com tm tm softdownload htm Japanese version http www yokogawa co jp Measurement F SOFT 2 34 IM 701730 01E Chapter 3 Making Preparations for Measurements 3 1 Handli Safety Precautions ing Precautions If you are using this instrument for the first time make sure to thoroughly read the safety precautions given on page vi
377. gers When Pulse gt T CH1 H and Time 400 ns When Time Out CH1 H and Time 400 ns Example Pulse lt Time Conditions CH1 H CH2 H Other CHs X When Condition True and Time 400 ns 300 ns I CH1 i i i CH2 Triggers cH L H L H cH2 L H L H L 300 ns 500 ns soea 6 26 IM 701730 01E 6 11 Activating a Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 and Time Out Trigger ENHANCED Status of Each Channel The status H L and X is the same as A gt B N trigger when Window is OFF See section 6 8 The status IN OUT and X is the same as the window trigger when Window is ON For a description of window triggers see section 6 13 Setting the Trigger Level Selectable range Eight divisions of the screen Resolution 0 01 divisions For example the resolution for 2 mV div is 0 02 mV Setting the Hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that triggers are not activated by small changes in the trigger signal J7 Approximately 0 3 divisions of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approximately one division of hysteresis around the trigger level The value above is an approximate value It is not strictly warranted Setting the Trigger Coupling You can select from the following AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as is Turning the HF Rejection ON and OFF Specify 15 kHz
378. gnal DC1 MQ Acquires and displays all the components DC and AC of the input signal 1 MQ input DC50 Q Acquires and displays all the components DC and AC of the input signal 50 Q input GND Checks the ground level Input Coupling and Frequency Characteristics The frequency characteristics when AC1MQ DC50Q and DC1MQ is selected are shown below Note that when AC1MQ is selected low frequency signals or signal components are not acquired as shown in the figure below When AC1 MQ is selected When DC50 Q or DC1 MQ is selected Attenuation 0 dB 3 dB gt gt Input frequency 400 MHz Input frequency 500 MHz lt When DC50 Q is selected 10 Hz or less when using the 1 1 probe 400 MH2 lt When DC1 MQ is selected 1 Hz or less when using the 10 1 probe CAUTION The maximum input voltage for 1 MQ input when the frequency is 1 kHz or less is 400 V DC ACpeak or 5 Vrms or 10 peak for 50 Q input Applying a voltage exceeding either of the two values can damage the input section If the frequency is above 1 kHz damage may occur even when the voltage is below this value IM 701730 01E 5 7 sexy JE UOZHOH pUe JeIIHA eo 5 5 Selecting the Probe Attenuation Current to Voltage Conversion Ratio lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 5 gt Procedure a SNAP HELP Or N O O e To exit the menu during operation press ESC Cs aa Cee mse De marn sco saerr
379. gs ccceseeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeaeseseaeeeseaeeeeseeeeaeeaeee 2 20 2 5 Waveform Computation ecceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeseaeseeeseaeeeeeeseaeesieeeeaeeee 2 21 Addition Subtraction and Multiplication Binary Computation Inversion Differentiation Diff and Integration Integ Phase Shift Scaling the Computed Waveform Power Spectrum Display 2 6 Analyzing and Searching Waveforms cccceeceeeseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeaeeeaeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeneeeaas 2 23 Displaying History Waveforms History Search Search and Zoom Cursor Measurements Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters GO NO GO Determination 2 7 COMMUMIGATION eironi sneseno dees eneeier a ia haces ete ies 2 30 Communication Using Commands GP IB USB or Ethernet Saving and Loading Data from a Network Drive FTP Client Printing on a Network Printer LPR Client Transmitting E Mails SMTP Client Accessing the instrument from a PC or Workstation FTP Server Web Server Using the Instrument as a Network Drive 2 8 Other Useful FUNCHONS ea vie ccs disceeatiesns As ees nineties A ee 2 32 Entering Values and Text Using the USB Keyboard Operating the Instrument Using a USB Mouse Initialization Auto Setup Preset Printing Screen Images Saving and Loading Data from the Storage Medium Operating the instrument Using a Free Software Program Making Preparations for Measurements 3 1 Handling Precautions cceeccecese
380. hanges to Abort To abort auto scroll press the Abort soft key Auto scroll is aborted and the word Abort changes to Exec When auto scroll is executed the zoom box moves in the direction selected in step 4 and the zoom waveform display frame the zoom waveform display frame selected in step 12 if the zoom waveform display mode is Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 shows the waveform zoomed SFORCH 1 Type Direction W Zi Mag 6 Zi Pos J Speed Exec Auto x 10 1 800di 4 Scroll Changing the Zoom Rate and Zoom Position of the Detected Waveforms 9 Change the zoom rate and zoom position of the waveform according to the procedures given in section 8 4 This section explains the setup procedures for searching the displayed waveforms within the display record length see appendix 1 and displaying the waveforms that match the search conditions expanded on the screen when waveform acquisition is stopped Search Method Type You can select from the following six search types e Edge Search is performed on the number of times the waveform goes above or below rising or falling a specified level 10 22 IM 701730 01E 10 4 Searching Waveforms Using the Search and Zoom Function e Serial Pattern Search is performed on whether the serial status pattern of the waveform status pattern of the waveform that changes over time is the same as the pattern set using High H Low L and Don t Care X e Parallel Patter
381. he EXT TRIG IN terminal on the rear panel of the DL1740E DL1740EL or the EXT terminal on the front panel of the DL1720E Note For detailed specifications of the EXT TRIG IN terminal or the EXT terminal on the DL1720E see section 14 1 Selecting the Trigger Source Select Ext Setting the Trigger Level Selectable range 2 V for the DL1740E DL1740EL 1 V when set to the 1 V range on the DL1720E 10 V when set to the 10 V range on the DL1720E Resolution 5 mV for the DL1740E DL1740EL 5 mV when set to the 1 V range on the DL1720E 50 mV when set to the 10 V range on the DL1720E Setting the Trigger Slope You can select how the trigger source is to cross a specified level for activating the trigger from the following three choices f Activated when the trigger source changes from below the trigger level to above the trigger level rising Activated when the trigger source changes from above the trigger level to below the trigger level falling f Activated on either a rising edge or falling edge Setting the Probe Attenuation Select a probe for the EXT TRIG IN terminal or the EXT terminal on the DL1720E input a trigger signal then select one of the following according to the attenuation of the connected probe 1 1 10 1 Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time 6 12 IM 701730 01E 6 7 Activating Triggers on the Commercial Power Supply SIMPLE Procedure
382. he Option item in the Overview window this indicates that the Ethernet interface is installed The information displayed on the right MAC 000064_841_002 in the example is the MAC address Note e Ether Yes C10 is displayed only if the Ethernet interface option is installed If XXXXXX_XXX_XXxX is displayed for the MAC address contact the dealer from which you purchased the instrument IM 701730 01E 13 47 Ieuondo SuOHedUNWIWOD 3u1 4 3 g 13 9 Checking the Presence of the Ethernet Interface Optional and the MAC Address Explanation You can check the presence of the Ethernet interface optional and the MAC address MAC address is a unique address that is pre assigned to the instrument The Presence of the Ethernet Interface Optional Displayed in the Ether section of the Overview window Yes The Ethernet interface is installed No The Ethernet interface is not installed MAC Address MAC address is a unique address that is pre assigned to the instrument It is required in identifying the instruments on the network 13 48 IM 701730 01E 13 10 Setting the FTP Passive Mode and LPR SMTP Timeout Procedure a START S ToP aca Y ae PLA Gory ane SAVE O SHIFT ee a C HORZONTAL 4 C mn 2 BR vzDiv O TRIG D o o GES DELAY TIME DIV RESET d Cen To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft
383. he Test Item menu appears Seif Test MISC Test Item Test FDD Exec 5 Press the Key Board soft key The Key Board menu appears Self Test C MISC ey Boardj Memory FDD Printer Accuracy Test Exec 6 Press the Test Exec soft key The Key Board Test window appears 7 When you press a panel key the character of the same key name is highlighted in the Key Board Test window MISC 8 Press all panel keys or press ESC twice The key test is terminated Test Iten Soft Key Key Board e Testing the Soft Keys 9 Press the Soft Key soft key A keyboard used to enter values and strings appears 10 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT or soft keys to check that all the characters on the keyboard can be entered correctly Seif Test MISC Test Item Soft Key Test Key Board Exec IZ 6718S NEES Pe elalblelale L ath li Lik Li ol PL In Tol alr s fu lo fw b y 2T I CKECELLUDE T BAN A EA EA EA EA 11 Press ESC The keyboard used to enter values and strings clears Note When performing a self test on the floppy disk drive or PC card insert a floppy disk or PC card into the drive before executing the test e Perform the PC card self test in a condition in which partitions are not used 16 8 IM 701730 01E 16 3 Performing a Self Test Explanation Memory Test Tests whether the internal ROM and the built in backup lithium battery is
384. he instrument The default setting is 0 0 0 0 The IP address is an ID that is assigned to each device on an IP network such as the internet or an intranet The address is a 32 bit value expressed using four octets each 0 to 255 each separated by a period as in 192 168 111 24 Obtain an IP address from your network administrator The setting is automatically configured in environments using DHCP Subnet Mask You can set the mask value used when determining the subnet network address from the IP address The default setting is 255 255 255 0 Huge TCP IP networks such as the Internet are often divided up into smaller networks called sub networks The subnet mask is a 32 bit value that specifies the number of bits of the IP address used to identify the network address The portion other than the network address is the host address that identifies individual computers on the network Consult your network administrator for the subnet mask value You may not need to set the value The setting is automatically configured in environments using DHCP Default Gateway You can set the IP address of the gateway default gateway used to communicate with other networks The default setting is 0 0 0 0 The default gateway has control functions that handle protocol exchanges when communicating with multiple networks so that data transmission is carried out smoothly Consult your network administrator for the default gateway value You may not need to set th
385. he number of waveform zone Zone5 ACQ Count C mE mite acquisitions Determination Action Buzzer Save to File Hard Copy 7 zone Zone6 Image Save Send Mail Mail Count 100 Set the action taken by the instrument when the condition is met 10 60 IM 701730 01E 10 9 Performing GO NO GO Determination Using Zones 28 Press ESC The Setup dialog box closes Setting the Determination Range 29 Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to T Range1 T Range2 or both T Range1 and T Range 2 If you select T Range1 you can move T Range1 If you select T Range2 you can move T Range2 If you select both T Range1 and T Range2 you can move T Range1 and T Range2 horizontally without changing the spacing between the two The value of the digit being specified by T Range1 changes Mode ca Edit setup Zone ca Executing Aborting the Determination 30 Press the Exec soft key GO NO GO determination is executed The Exec soft key changes to the Abort soft key To abort GO NO GO determination press the Abort soft key or press START STOP GO NO GO determination is aborted and the word Abort changes to Exec TALEE GO BT n 5 000dit Exec BT S 5 O0Odiu Coane Mode BT zi Ea Edit setup Zone Ea BT Z 5 000 Number of times the condition is met When all the conditions including the determination Determination count logic are met it is counted as NG NO GO
386. he power to the instrument OFF while the card is being accessed Doing so can destroy the data on the medium e While the PC card is being accessed an accessing icon appears in the upper left part of the screen 12 4 IM 701730 01E 12 2 Floppy Disks and PC Cards General Handling Precautions of PC Cards For the general handling precautions of the PC card read the instruction manual that came with the PC card IM 701730 01E 12 5 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 12 3 Connecting USB Storage MO Disk Drive Hard Disk Flash Memory to the USB PERIPHERAL Interface Specifications of the USB PERIPHERAL Interface Item Description Connector type USB type A connector receptacle Electrical and mechanical USB Rev 1 1 Data rate 12 Mbps max Power supply 5 V 500 mA per port Number of ports 2 Devices with maximum consumption currents exceeding 100 mA cannot be connected to two ports at the same time 1234 tatty H Port 1 UuUUU H Port 2 Pin No Signal Name 1 VBUS 5V 2 D Data 3 D Data 4 GND Ground Connecting USB Storage When connecting USB storage directly connect the storage device to the instrument using a USB hub as shown below You can connect the USB cable regardless of whether the power to the instrument is ON or OFF supports hot plugging When the power switch is ON the USB storage device is de
387. he resolution is 1 Unit You can set the distal mesial and proximal values of each waveform in the range corresponding to V div x 8 divisions within the screen The resolution is 0 01 divisions Method of Setting High and Low High indicates the 100 level in measurements such as the rise or fall time and Low indicates the 0 level You can select the method for setting High and Low Auto The higher amplitude level is set to high and lower level is set to low by taking into account the frequency of occurrence of the voltage level of the waveform being measured within the measurement range and the effects of ringing and spikes This method is best suited when measuring rectangular waveforms and pulse waveforms MAX MIN The maximum value MAX and the minimum value MIN in the measurement range are set to high and low values respectively Applies to such waves as sine waves and saw tooth waves It does not apply to waveforms with ringing or spikes Note If measurement is not possible e If the measurement mode is Degree and the reference point is Trig measured value display area e For waveforms of small amplitude correct measurements may not be possible e If there are two or more periods of waveform in the measurement range the automatic measurement of Fall Freq Period Width Width and Duty is performed on the first waveform kkk is displayed in the measured value display area is displayed in the IM 70
388. he setup procedure see section 5 3 gt Since the instrument is capable of displaying four channels two channels on the DL1720E of input waveforms the waveforms may overlap making them difficult to be observed In this case you can change the display position of waveforms along the vertical axis vertical position for easier viewing The vertical position can be set in the range of 4 divisions The vertical sensitivity V div switches around the vertical position mark Position 2 00 div Position 0 00 div gt Vertical position mark Position 3 00 div IM 701730 01E suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 2 2 Vertical and Horizontal Axes Input Coupling lt For the setup procedure see section 5 4 gt If you wish to observe just the amplitude of an AC signal it is best to remove the DC component from the input signal On the other hand there are times when you wish to check the ground level or observe the entire input signal both the DC and AC components In these cases you can change the input coupling setting By changing the input coupling the method used to input the signal to the vertical control circuit voltage axis is switched The input coupling can be set to one of the following AC1 MQ The input signal is coupled to the attenuator of the vertical control circuit through a capacitor This setting is
389. he setup procedures for performing GO NO GO determination based on whether the measured value of the waveform parameter measurement parameter exits or enters the range specified by the upper and lower limits Determination Target Waveform The waveform on which GO NO GO parameter determination is performed is CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 or Math2 On the DL1740E DL1740EL the waveform is CH1 to CH4 Math1 or Math2 On the DL1720E you can select CH1 CH2 and Math1 Determination Parameter Up to four determination parameters Param1 to Param4 can be specified You can select the determination parameter from the measurement parameters of automated measurement of waveform parameters including delay between channels You can set the upper and lower limits used to determine the true false condition of the measured value of the determination parameter in the range of 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Determination Condition and instrument Action When the Condition Is Met For each determination parameter you can select the following items Determination target waveform see Determination Target Waveform described above Enable or disable determination ON OFF Select whether the measured value exiting the range defined by the upper and lower limits of the determination parameters OUT or entering the range IN Condition box makes the condition true Determination Logic You can select the AND logic or OR logic of the dete
390. hed This function operates when the trigger mode is set to Single N The maximum number of waveform acquisitions of sequential store varies from 1 to 2048 depending on the specified record length interleave mode and model A record length of one waveform the amount of one acquisition on one channel is the same as the maximum display record length Once the specified number of waveforms have been stored you can display any of the waveforms individually or all of them together This function is useful when capturing the changes in the waveform over time Waveforms are not displayed while waveform acquisition is in progress The figure below shows an example when data is sequentially stored one hundred times Display example when the acquisition count is 100 e Display all waveforms e Display the newest e Display the oldest when selecting ALL waveform when Select Record No 0 waveform when Select Record No 99 on f is 7 SA History Memory lt For the setup procedure see section 10 1 gt When waveforms are being measured the waveform data stored in the acquisition memory as a result of a trigger being activated is displayed as waveforms on the instrument screen When triggers are continuously activated and waveforms are acquired it is impossible to stop the measurement in time when an abnormal waveform appears newer waveforms appear on the screen Norm
391. hstand voltage regulation Il applies to electrical equipment that is powered by a fixed installation such as a distribution board 2 Pollution Degree applies to the degree of adhesion of a solid liquid or gas which deteriorates withstand voltage or surface resistivity Pollution Degree 2 applies to normal indoor atmospheres with only non conductive pollution 3 Use cables of length 3m or less IM 701730 01E 17 11 ol a suoeaioads 17 12 Dimensional Drawings Unit mm Rear Panel eI Tolerance is 3 however in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm 17 12 IM 701730 01E Appendix Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Specified Record Length 1 kW Rep Repetitive sampling mode When set to a mode other than envelope mode When set to envelope mode When interleave mode is OFF When interleave mode is ON When interleave When interleave Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON mode is OFF mode is ON Display Display Display Display Display Display record record record record
392. ht characters The label is applied to Trace Label Scale Value and Measure results IM 701730 01E 8 17 Aejdsig uoiewuojuy pue Aejdsig woane M e 8 10 Turning the Translucent Display ON and OFF lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 20 gt Procedure OL LLELL Ly766 5 FILE msc conosco mara RESET SELECT JENU MENU CPHA E Aca START STOP ACTION DELAY To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys e Fora description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press DISPLAY The DISPLAY menu appears 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key The page 2 menu appears mmaa Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace Accunulat Value Single Sine y z ON OFF Le a 3 Press the Translucent soft key to select ON or OFF DISPLAY Oiar futo m a si When this is turned to ON dialog boxes become translucent The contents underneath the dialog boxes can be seen When OFF 2j Setup s Trace Condition CHI 10 1 0 500 Udi CHT pn a DC Full CRZ mmn p CHS i pim zone4 CHA DFA __on__ pur _ _w_ ZoneS Mathi__ Pon puty __1N_ Zone6 Math DFF N por _IN_ Logic Sequence Single Continue ACQ Count Edge CH1 Auto Action Buzzer Sav
393. ical axis sensitivity after setting the offset voltage value is indicated below If you change the vertical axis sensitivity back to the original setting without changing the offset voltage value the original offset voltage value returns e When the vertical axis sensitivity is increased the value is decreased and the specified offset value exceeds the selectable range of the offset voltage at the new vertical axis sensitivity the offset voltage is set to the maximum value of the selectable range of the offset value at the new vertical axis sensitivity e When the vertical axis sensitivity is decreased the value is increased and the specified resolution of the offset value falls below the resolution of the offset value at the new vertical axis sensitivity the resolution is set to the resolution of the offset voltage at the new vertical axis sensitivity IM 701730 01E 5 7 Using the Preset Function Procedure Ce ma z O JO e To exit the menu during operation press ESC Cruz se Jeono col marn SESE CURSOR CELE WSC OONO crn 400 sranrisror feser tect located above the soft keys x Y MENU _ MENU CeETuP peneem as C For a description of the operation using a USB AD CERA i TEDA ER keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 CNED 0 ep o Es ACTION DELAY Gels f Selecting Channels 1 Press PRESET The PRESET menu appears 2 Press the Select soft key The Select menu appears
394. iecisit Sos hoeeeai eaaa harea SEa ser aAa 2 21 MD VOTUING eti ease sce eaei E tates soca dit Keesha Sae PEES eaaa EER Eat 9 8 a e o E E E E T 13 5 J Jog SIUC irii iaai iiie 4 1 jumping the CUFSOTF ec ceeeeeeeseceseseesseeeeseesenerseeseaeeoes 10 38 K KOY ees deb E T key assignments of the USB keyboard Fe k y TEST isisisi iiis aneii ii ia KNOD i eiriaa a a as L line NUMDer sssssessessessrsrresersrusensrrusenstrusrnstreennsrnnennrnusenerenses 6 36 linear interpolation essessessessnesreserenneenenrnsenerrusrnsernsensenees 2 17 linear scaling 2 5 5 15 lin Kpuc eaa sata ibavaeandbanal ay 13 44 NOG E E E T E E E T 13 41 login NAME onsssssssssssrsseesrnssessrnsensentnensenernnsenstnnsensrenernsenneen 13 10 EPR Clients eisni a a ES 13 11 EPR NAMO anaia eie ia 13 12 LPR SGIVE piroriiiasntana niaaa 13 12 EPReUIMG OUE ies secceseseiieececeieecsssenest dence ceecessetescteesbex 13 49 13 50 Index 2 IM 701730 01E M power spectrum display eee cece eee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 22 OW F SWITCH cccsccccssceccscesccesccesssiecscensseceaterstivesesasanesvisssstasss 3 6 MAC address r E A A TAT ei T 4 7 magnitication PRESET arna a E an ot 1 4 mal SOOT s preset 2 32 5 11 mail SaNaT monien print format wccsccssceseccesstevecsesesesctvsctseveceedccuedseesaabeceeenesmecene 11 5 main power e P E T 3 6 pr
395. ied by T Range1 changes Turn the jog shuttle to set the search range ick Normal 2004 05 07 17 32 45 j 7 SMS s 20OHSAiv Stopped CAT lt lt Maint 10k gt gt CH1 10 1 0 500 Udiv DC Full stab 3 T Range2 Edge CH1 F Auto 0 290 V HISTORY 6T Range1 3 000diy Search feT Rangez Exec 1 800div i T Range1 i l Select Conditionja Item Upper Logic Paran Setup 5 0000E 0 Parami FF N OUT CH1 P P fO Louer OR XXX Executing Aborting the Search 19 Press the Search Exec soft key The search is executed and the words Search Exec change to Search Abort To abort the search press the Search Abort soft key The search is aborted and the words Search Abort change to Search Exec Select ConditionJa Item Upper Logic fT Rangei Paran Setup 5 0000E 0 S 000d Parami FF N OUT CH1 P P Louer OR ST Rangez XXX 5 000d Displaying the Searched Waveform 20 21 Press ESC The screen returns to the HISTORY menu Display the waveform according to the procedure given in section 10 1 The history map lists the record numbers and time stamps of the searched waveforms Resetting the Search Results 22 Set the Search Mode to OFF in the HISTORY menu or turn OFF Param1 to Param4 and execute the search The search result is reset IM 701730 01E 10 11 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy es 10 3 Searching the
396. ification is displayed Copy to Format nformationa je Mag 5T Rangei Comment x2 5 5 000diy Preview Built in formal Long OFF DN 5T Rangez 3Page 5 000di 6 Turn the jog shuttle to set the zoom rate IM 701730 01E sobew use19s Hunund Ey 11 2 Printing Using the Built in Printer Optional Setting the Print Range 7 Press the T Range1 T Rangez2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to T Range1 T Range2 or both T Range1 and T Range 2 If you select T Range1 you can move T Range1 If you select T Range2 you can move T Range2 If you select both T Range1 and T Range2 you can move T Range1 and T Range2 horizontally without changing the spacing between the two The value of the digit being specified by T Range1 changes _Ccopy__ Copy to Format infornation a Comment Preview Built in Normal ong OFF PN 3Page_ Turn the jog shuttle to set the print range 5 000di 6T Range2 5 O00di feT Rangei iF Previewing the Print Image 9 10 11 Press the Preview soft key The Preview menu and the print image per page are displayed The word Preview changes to Quit Copy to Format informaationa fe Mag jem Tage Comment x 2 5 5 000 Eal Built in formal ong OFF PN 5T Range 3Page 5 000 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select the page within the range of the total number of pages that vary depending on the magnification specified in step 5
397. ime information from a specified NTP server or SNTP server on the Internet and automatically set the date time After retrieving the current date time information the date time information is retrieved every time the power to the instrument is turned ON For the procedure of specifying the SNTP server see section 13 8 Setting the Time Difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time The time difference from GMT that you specify here is synchronized to the Time difference From GMT setting in section 13 8 Setting the Time Difference from GMT Note The date time setting is backed up with the lithium battery when the power is turned OFF Leap years are supported 3 14 IM 701730 01E Chapter 4 Common Operations 4 1 Basic Key Operations Displaying the Setup Menu of the Panel Keys 1 Press the desired panel operation key The setup menu appears 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired setup menu item Setup menu Mode Norma1 Inf inite C 6 orf When controlled by the jog shuttle S changes to A or When controlled by the jog shuttle changes to A Press the corresponding soft key to set the item under jog shuttle control Operations and Functions of Keys and the Jog Shuttle Turn the jog shuttle to change the setting Press RESET to set the item back to the initial setting B Press the corresponding soft key to display the selection
398. in progress While printing is in progress E is indicated at the upper left corner of the screen IM 701730 01E 11 3 Printing Using a USB Printer Explanation You can print the screen image to a USB printer via the USB PERIPHERAL interface Connecting the Instrument and the USB Printer USB PERIPHERAL Connector To connect a USB printer to the instrument connect a USB cable to the USB PERIPHERAL connector There are two USB PERIPHERAL connectors ports 1234 tot H Port 1 0000 H Port 2 Pin No Signal Name 1 VBUS 5 V 2 D Data 3 D Data 4 GND Ground Printers That Can Be Used USB printers conforming to USB Printer Class Version 1 0 that support the following print formats can be used Note Connect only the printers that are allowed e For details on USB printers that have been tested for compatibility contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Connection Procedure When connecting a USB printer directly connect the printer to the instrument using a USB cable as shown below You can connect the USB cable regardless of the power ON OFF state of the instrument supports hot plugging Connect the type A connector of the USB cable to the instrument connect the type B connector to the printer When the power switch is ON the printer is detected and enabled approximately six seconds after it is connected USB PERIPHERAL u
399. in this group Name of each waveform Number of data points in a single block of each waveform Value of coefficient VResolution of the Y axis conversion equation of each waveform Value of coefficient VOffset of the Y axis conversion equation of each waveform Type of binary file waveform data for each waveform Unit used on the Y axis of each waveform no effect on the data Error data when the binary data of each waveform is greater than or equal to this value Error data when the binary data of each waveform is less than or equal to this value Maximum value of binary data for each waveform Minimum value of binary data for each waveform Value of coefficient HResolution of the X axis conversion equation of each waveform Value of coefficient HOffset of the X axis conversion equation of each waveform Unit used on the X axis of each waveform no effect on the data Date when waveform acquisition was completed Time when waveform acquisition was completed For details on 1 to 7 see the next page Privatelnfo Model Specific Information Block number of the item to be computed MathBlockNo DisplayBlockSize DisplayPointNo ModelVersion PhaseShift PTraceName Length of the data displayed on the screen display record length Value indicating the memory position nth point in the memory corresponding the left end of the display record length display offset 1 when the specified record
400. indow Press the Thumbnail soft key The thumbnails of the screen image data having the format specified in step 3 are displayed 4 thumbnails 2 x 2 in the waveform display area Thumbnail s e Fa i z 5 pa m File and color information are displayed 12 0002 BMP Mono 12 0000 BMP Mono MAEL ja Fornat Color ja ja 2 File Nane Thumbna 1 Comment File List BMP OFF 12 0004 12 38 IM 701730 01E 12 10 Thumbnails of the Saved Screen Image Data can be Displayed If there are more than five thumbnails you can scroll the screen by turning the jog shuttle To scroll the files upward turn the jog shuttle counter clockwise To scroll the files downward turn the jog shuttle clockwise The files scroll two files at a time To clear the list of thumbnails press ESC Displaying Thumbnails from the FILE Menu Press FILE The FILE menu appears Press the File Item soft key The File Item menu appears FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Setup Press the Image soft key Image Setup Waveform Snap Measure a Utility Press the Format soft key The Format menu appears File Ite Format a Utility Image BMP Press the TIFF BMP Post Script PNG or JPEG soft key to select the thumbnail format FIE File Item TIFF BMP PS PNG J
401. ine positions in the range of 5 to 5 divisions from the center of the waveform display frame The start and end positions are not displayed if only X Y waveforms are displayed The setting resolution is 10 div display record length Notes on Displaying X Y Waveforms The divided windows of the T Y waveform display when using the T Y amp X Y mode are displayed according to Format in the DISPLAY menu The zoom function applies only to T Y waveforms In addition Main Z1 or Z2 can be selected for the T Y waveform display To expand the X Y waveform change the Variable setting of each channel The displayed waveform can be enlarged reduced in a simulated fashion 8 12 IM 701730 01E 8 6 Taking Snapshots and Clearing Traces Procedure lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 19 gt TTI iis e To exit the menu during operation press ESC MeasuRE CURSOR misc _ GONo GO MATH X Y RESET MENU _ MENU PHASE START STOP located above the soft keys setup oispLay Cory mace save o SHIFT e For a description of the operation using a USB C VERTICAL CHORZONTAL TRIGGER t SEARCH O TRIG D as a ED 7 3 keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Smee ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV Explanation g Snapshot Press SNAP SHOT to take a snapshot of the screen Clearing Traces Press CLEAR TRACE to clea
402. ing the PC and the instrument to the Network Connect the PC and the instrument to the network For the Connection Procedure see section 13 1 Preparations on the Instrument Setting the Communication Interface to Network 76 e To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys CPHASE ACQ START STOP E Sela Gorr nme SAVE O SHIFT e For a description of the operation using a USB ae D COA o io reser vsDIV TRIG D uz ENHANCED ACTION DELAY keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 TIME sD1V D p J Turn ON the power to the instrument After the instrument boots up normally carry out the following procedure 1 Press the MISC The MISC menu appears 2 Press the Remote Control soft key The Remote Cntl menu appears MISC Netuork susten verview al conf ig al 12 3 Press the Device soft key The Device menu appears Remote Cnt MISC Device jip Address GP IB 1 4 Press the Network soft key The Ethernet interface is selected for the communication interface Renote Cnt MISC GP IB USB Netuork I 1 3 Setting Up the TCP IP 5 Set the TCP IP on the PC and the instrument For the procedure on the instrument see section 13 2 Control a a i Remote Creating a User Account for Accessing the instrument 6 Set the user account used to acc
403. inter name 13 12 oo situa dus ddacesudiaasates tisk SECETA L AE a STANTE Er EKAA SiS 16 1 printer test 1 11 16 9 inti i cbs E T 1 mapping vssssvnsvninnnnnnnnnnnnnnannen ee a markar CUISOMssiisinrirnthasheaiehaie 2 27 10 33 10 37 probe attenuation cccccccccccsssssssssssssssesseesssssssseeesseeeee 2 5 5 8 properties 12 19 12 24 12 49 PVOXIMAL cencvecivs crccsudseesccvecvettecssitecescsansaesevs initia riasain 10 45 measurement Per cycle 0 seeeseseseeseessseeeseeeeneeseeees 10 47 pulse interpolation cccccccsssssccssssssssecessssssssesesseseessssssseee 2 17 measurement trend pulse width Search scccccccssssssscssssssssvessssssseeeeeeee 2 26 10 20 MEMO ES rinasan a aaan Menu language siscvcsecvsscvsavecastsnesecavcsesctesisiversssandvestvestecoass mesial R message language also eee eee MISC ja realtime sampling MOE ee ee eee eeee eee eeeeeteeeeeeeeenees 2 7 MODE 7 rear panel pasueeda Ye suegigeleseveveates T 1 2 DOUG E ii recalling gt moving average point cccecesssesesesseesssssesesteceseseseseseseesees 7 7 recommended replacement part ssseeesseeseneeseeny 16 12 multiplication POCO ION GUN access ecadieesnccadecsderesscendasecnseesaenas ulti lyin e gse2 2 ee sce creer eet a ose ieee rectangular reference point ee eeeceececseeneeeeeseeeeneerseeseeeessseeeneteseesees rolase MIM seve seie csctececsscetincevs cena stavecevsanevseeye cena eacseitecyesepased N repeti
404. ion clock is to be detected Set the hysteresis width of the level for detecting the synchronization clock Hysteresis Setting the Search Target Waveform and Level for Determining Statuses 10 11 12 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the search target waveform Source box Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the level used to determine whether the status is high Thr Upper box Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the level used to determine whether the status is low Thr Lower box e When the search target waveform exceeds the specified level Thr Upper it is determined to be high e When the search target waveform is below the specified level Thr Lower it is determined to be low For a description of the determination of the status when the search target waveform is between the levels specified by Thr Upper and Thr Lower including the Thr Upper and Thr Lower values see the explanation given below Source Select the search target waveform Set the level used to determine whether the status is high 7 Set the level used to determine whether the status is low Thr Upper Thr Lover Pattern QAJ B Cc D o 8 16 24 HLHHLHHL XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX 32 40 48 56 63 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Clear Pattern Start Point 5 000 IM 701730 01E 10 17 SWJOJaAe Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy es 10 4 Searching Waveforms Using the Search and Zoom Fu
405. ion in this case is set by taking eight divisions as 100 3 Box average averaging simple average and computation cannot be performed 4 The values inside the thick frame are for repetitive sampling mode App 10 IM 701730 01E Appendix 2 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform Integ1TY Total Area for Positive Side Only Si S2 i 77 S2 l 1 YIN Integ2TY Total Area for both Positive and Negative Sides S1 S3 S2 S3 si Ulla S2 j Integ1XY 1 Multiple Loops 2 Non Closed Curve U Area S nxSo Area S So Z W n Number of Loops Area Enclosed by a Curve Connecting the Start and Stop A Start Point Points Start Point ee Stop Point Stop Point Waveform 3 Loop Tracing a Figure Eight 4 Spiral Loop Y Area S So S1 Area S Sox2 S1 E Number of Overlaps AA Varies According to the Number of Loops Start Point a Stop Point Stop Point z x pu ddy IM 701730 01E App 11 Appendix 2 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform Integ2XY n When Only One Y Data Corresponds to X Data 3 X Axis Y 0 Start Point Stop Point g Area S So Area S So z Start Point Stop Point X Axis Y 0 2 4 X Axis Y 0 Stop Point Start Point So Area S So TORS Stop Point Start Point X axis Y 0 2 When the Waveform Extends into the Negative Side Start Point So Si X Axis Y 0 Area S So S1 Stop Point When Two or more Y Data Correspond to X Data Start Point Ar
406. is Turning the HF Rejection ON and OFF Specify 15 kHz or 20 MHZ if you wish to use a signal that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger source signal as the trigger source Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Relationship with Window When Window is turned ON a trigger is activated on a Window of OR trigger For details on window triggers see section 6 13 6 30 IM 701730 01E 6 13 Setting a Window Trigger ENHANCED Procedure lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 10 gt SNAP HELP OC LLELLE Dyess SELECT RESET MEASURE CURSOR FILE MISC GO NO GO MATH 08 D C al o a ca START STOP xX setup JpisPLay CoPy mace save o 0 SHIFT vepIv ae nae oy TIME DIV Setting the Trigger Type To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the term jog shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of selecting setting items and entering values using the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and 4 2 For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press ENHANCED The ENHANCED menu appears 2 Press the Type soft key The Type menu appears
407. is setting the sample rate changes allowing sampling of data at up to 1 GS s or 500 MS s when interleave mode is OFF for a description of interleave mode see section 7 5 The input signal is sampled sequentially and the data is stored in the acquisition memory In this mode the instrument can only display waveforms correctly up to one half the frequency of the sample rate the number of samples per second in units of S s as defined by the sampling theorem Therefore this mode is best suited for observing waveforms that undergo slow changes relative to the sample rate If the sample rate is comparatively low with respect to the input signal frequency the harmonics contained in the signal are lost In this case some of the harmonics will appear at low frequencies due to the effects described by the Nyquist sampling theorem This phenomenon is called aliasing You can prevent aliasing by acquiring waveforms with the acquisition mode set to envelope Aliased signal Input signal Sampling point e Repetitive Sampling Mode In repetitive sampling mode you can set the time axis to a setting that will cause the sample rate to exceed 1 GS s 2 GS s when interleave mode is ON In this mode one waveform is created from several cycles of a repetitive signal This is equivalent to sampling the signal at a higher sample rate than the actual sample rate The maximum apparent sample rate is 100 GS s on the instrument In addition even in realtime
408. isplayed as a message e Points within the hysteresis including the upper and lower limits of the hysteresis in the determination when using the parallel pattern for the search are always determined as True match the specified determination status If such points are included this fact is displayed as a message 10 30 IM 701730 01E 10 5 Cursor Measurements lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 27 gt Procedure CLEAR TRACE 6 weasune our fue se eonosco mara RESET SELECT X Y MENU _ MENU CPHASE ACQ START STOP SETUP Se soo SHIFT TIME DIV 3 A e amp gi Measuring Waveforms Using Horizontal Cursors fol K To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the term jog shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of selecting setting items and entering values using the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and 4 2 For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press CURSOR The CURSOR menu appears Selecting the Horizontal Cursor 2 Press the Type soft key The Type menu appears 3 Press the Horizontal soft key OFF izontal Vertical Degree CURSOR Type or f When X Y waveforms are displayed Degree is not
409. item you wish to select The item is selected Click the selected item again to deselect it To close the dialog box point to an area outside the dialog box and left click Tten Setup P P Freq AvgFreq Max Period AvgPeriod hin Rise Left click the item you wish to select Aug Fall Imt TY Rns width Intixy Sdev Width IntzxY High Duty Low Bursti 0Shot Burst2 OShot Pulse LAI Ciear_ Copy To Ail Trace_ Note To close an error dialog box left or right click or turn the mouse wheel without moving the mouse Selecting a File Directory or Disk Drive on the File List Window Left click a file directory or disk drive name to select it Turn the mouse wheel to scroll through the file list To cancel the selection point to an area outside the file list window and left click The selection is cancelled and the file list window closes File List Path FD Space 0 byte File Name Size Date Attr CFD 1 Scroll bar N Move the pointer to the file directory or storage medium you wish to select and left click IM 701730 01E 4 11 suonesado uowwog S 4 3 Operating the instrument Using a USB Keyboard or a USB Mouse e Setting the V div and T div Setting the V div When the waveform of a channel measuring a voltage is displayed point near the V div value displayed at the bottom of
410. ition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 Threshold Level for Binary Computation You can set the level voltage value if set to voltage for setting the data values to 1 or 0 in binary computation for computed waveforms Math1 and Math2 separately see the figure above The selectable range is eight divisions within the screen The resolution is 0 01 divisions Thr Upper Set the level used to switch from 0 to 1 Thr Lower Set the level used to switch from 1 to 0 Waveform to Be Computed Thr Lower level used to switch from 1 to 0 Thr Upper level used to switch from 0 to 1 Computed Waveform Effects of Linear Scaling Even when linear scaling is performed on the channel to be computed it does not affect the binary computation Maximum Record Length That Can Be Computed The operation is the same as for addition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 IM 701730 01E 9 7 uonendwog woane M e 9 4 Inverting Waveforms lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 21 gt Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the term jog shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of selecting setting items and entering values using the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and SNAP SHOT HELP Sve MEASURE CURSOR FILE misc ai MATH c I c
411. iv Value that the displays 1 6 to 4 periods of the waveform with the shortest period of the auto setup target waveforms Trigger settings Trigger mode Trigger type Trigger source Trigger level slope Trigger coupling Auto Simple Channel whose waveform amplitude is greater than or equal to one division with the longest period Center level between the maximum and minimum values rising DC HF rejection OFF Hysteresis A Hold off time 80 ns Trigger position 50 Trigger delay Os Trigger gate OFF Computation settings Scaling auto Items other than those listed above are not applicable for auto setup IM 701730 01E suoljeiodg uowwog e 4 6 Performing Calibration Procedure To exit the menu during operation press ESC NU PHASE ACQ starsror located above the soft keys X Y MENS U serur pispLay ory mace save o SHIFT For a description of the operation using a USB VERTICAL a c HORZONTAL 4 P P 9 C oer oe keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 o vzDIV TIME DIV o E ACTION DELAY POSITION G SE 1 Press the MISC key The MISC menu appears 2 Press the Calibration soft key The Calibration menu appears 4 MISC a y alibration Remote Network System verview Next Control Conf ig 172 3 Press the Auto Cal soft key to select ON or OFF Auto Cal Deskew al Exec oF pN ON 4 Press the Cal Exec soft key Calibration is executed
412. ive characters 19 Press ESC The File Name amp Comment dialog box closes 12 14 12 5 Saving Loading the Waveform Data Executing the Save 20 Press the Save Exec soft key The data is saved to the directory indicated by Path At the same time the Save Exec soft key changes to the Abort soft key While the data is being saved the icon is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen File List Path NetWork Software Space 2147483647 byte File Name Size Date Attr FD 1 NetWork 1 12 0001 68126 2004 05 13 19 39 12 0000 68126 2004 05 13 19 38 lv Save ave Exec Binary a File Nang Filter Property 12 0002 F UUF x Aborting the Save 21 Press the Abort soft key The save operation is aborted At the same time the Abort soft key changes to the Save Exec soft key Specifying the File and Properties to Be Displayed on the File List Window 22 On the screen showing the File List window press the Filter soft key to select the extension or e If you select the extension WVF CSV or FLD only the files that have the same file format as the file being saved are displayed e If you select all the files in the directory are displayed Save FILE aFile Nam a Filter Property ave Exec 12 0002 w Binary 23 Turn the jog shuttle to select the files in the File List window 24 Press the Property soft key Information about the sel
413. l terminal on the front panel 4MQ 20pF lt 40Vpk EXT CLOCK IN ____ c Ml The determination level for the trigger gate input and the trigger level for the external trigger input are common AN CAUTION Applying a voltage exceeding the maximum allowable input voltage above can damage the input section IM 701730 01E 6 41 s n el Chapter 7 Waveform Acquisition 7 1 Starting Stopping Waveform Acquisition Procedure SNAP HELP y O O To exit the menu during operation press ESC x Y as me een mam located above the soft keys MENU _ MENU SETUP Pse Gory IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT e For a description of the operation using a USB Gay uom keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 o smece ENHANCED ACTION DELAY Explanation 1 Press START STOP Waveform acquisition starts or stops Waveform acquisition is in progress when the indicator above and to the right of the key is illuminated When waveform acquisition is stopped the indicator is OFF and Stopped is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen When waveform acquisition is started waveform data is stored to the acquisition memory each time a trigger is activated and the displayed waveform is updated The acquisition memory is divided by the specified record length and the maximum number of waveforms that can be acquired is retained The past waveforms that hav
414. l on the DL1720E can damage the input section Notes on Sampling with an External Clock The clock signal must be a continuous clock signal Burst signals cannot be applied Only realtime sampling mode can be used You cannot set the acquisition mode to Envelope or Box Average You cannot display waveforms in roll mode No function is provided for frequency dividing the clock signal Since the time axis setting cannot be changed zoom in out of the time axis when you wish to change the display range of the time axis For the zoom Procedure see section 8 4 You cannot set a trigger delay You cannot use the deskew function The time measured by the cursor measurement or automated measurement of waveform parameters is expressed in the number of pulses of the clock signal No unit is displayed The threshold level for the external clock input and the trigger level for the external trigger input are common 5 18 IM 701730 01E 5 11 Setting T div Procedure lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 6 gt P HELP CLEAR SNA TRACE ESC SHOT O l g O To exit the menu during operation press ESC ueasune cursOR FILE misc cono co mara X Y ae se lance eer located above the soft keys setup oispLay Cory mace save o sHiFT e For a description of the operation using a USB o VERTICAL HORIZONTAL Ay t SEARCH O TRIG D 7 3 keyboard or a U
415. le List Window 11 The procedure is the same as steps 22 to 25 on page 12 15 Clearing Waveforms Select the snapshot waveform data according to steps 1 to 3 on page 12 26 4 Press the Unload soft key The Unload menu is displayed FILE File Item ja a ja y Save Load Unload Utility Snap 5 Press the Trace soft key The Trace menu appears Trace ee Inioad Exe All Snap 6 Press the All or Snap1 to Snap4 soft key to select the load destination to be unloaded mioaa All Snapi Snap2 Snap3 Snap4 7 Press the Unload Exec soft key The selected waveform is cleared Trace mioad zj all Snap 12 28 IM 701730 01E 12 7 Saving Loading the Snapshot Waveforms Explanation You can take snapshots of the waveform and save the image to a file You can also load the snapshot waveform Data Size Approximately 40 KB Extension The extension is SNP The selection of the medium directory file name comments auto naming function specification of the files to be displayed in the File List window and properties are the same as those for saving loading normal waveform data For the explanation and procedure see section 12 5 Loading Snapshot Waveforms Snapshot waveforms are loaded to the selected load destination from Snap1 to Snap4 Clearing Waveforms The loaded snapshot waveforms are cleared when Unload Initialize or Auto Setup is executed Note An error occurs if a key other th
416. lected H Mi Setup Source Operation Source2 Scale Center Sensitivity Unit Smoothing Value entry box G Press SELECT to display the selection menu Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the item you wish to set Press SELECT to confirm the selection H Press the SELECT key to display the value entry box Turn the jog shuttle to set the value Press the arrow keys to change the selected digit You can directly enter the value from a USB keyboard Press RESET to set the item back to the initial setting I Press the SELECT key to switch the selected item Clearing the Setup Menu and Setup Dialog Box Displays Press ESC The setup menu or the dialog box shown on top is cleared from the screen Note In the procedural explanations in this manual the operation of clearing the setup menu or setup dialog box may not be given If the setup menu is cleared when the automated measurement values of waveform parameters or cursor measurement values are displayed in the waveform display area these measured values are displayed at the display position of the setup menu 4 2 IM 701730 01E 4 2 Entering Values and Strings Entering Values Entering Values Directly Using the Dedicated Knobs The dedicated knobs indicated below can be turned to directly enter values V DIV knob TIME DIV knob CLEAR HELP 9 OV Eao E MEASURE CURSOR FILE misc conoco MATH See ad mee
417. liquids come in contact with the paper the paper may change color or the printing may fade IM 701730 01E 11 1 sobew use10S Hunund Ey 11 1 Displaying and Labeling Computed Waveforms To open the printer cover push the PUSH OPEN button and lift the handle on the right side of the PUSH OPEN button printer cover Printer cover Move the release arm located on the right near the front to the MAN FEED position Hold the roll paper so that the inner side of the roll paper the side that is not glossy is facing up then place the roll in the holder Insert the edge of the roll paper evenly in the space between the roller and the black guide then rotate the paper feed knob towards you until about 10 cm of the paper extends beyond the top of the roller Turn the paper MAN FEED feed knob Roller Guide Move the release arm to the FREE position and straighten out the paper Then move the release arm to the HOLD position The printing will fail with an error message if the release arm is in the FREE or MAN FEED position during operation Pull the printer cover back to its original position and close the cover Make sure that the edge of the roll paper feeds through the opening of the printer cover Push the printer cover down firmly until it clicks into place Note The paper feeding may not be stable immediately after the roll paper is installe
418. ltage 40 V DC ACpeak or 28 Vrms when the frequency is 10 kHz or Frequency range DC to 50 MHz Input impedance Approximately 1 MQ and approximately 20 pF Input range 2 V for the DL1740E DL1740EL 1 V when set to the 1 V range on the DL1720E 10 V when set to the 10 V range on the DL1720E Minimum input amplitude 0 1 Vp p for the DL1740E DL1740EL 0 1 Vp p when set to the 1 V range on the DL1720E 1 Vp p when set to the 10 V range on the DL1720E Minimum pulse width 10 ns or more for High and Low Input terminal For the DL1740E DL1740EL For the DL17420E terminal on the rear panel terminal on the front panel EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN TRIG GATE IN Q Note The determination level for the trigger gate input and the trigger level for the external trigger input are common IM 701730 01E 14 3 u01 9aS O I Aseixny joueg 1e H4 z 14 2 Trigger Output TRIG OUT AN CAUTION Never apply external voltage to the TRIG OUT terminal Doing so can cause damage to the instrument Trigger Output Terminal A TTL level signal is output when a trigger is activated The signal level is normally high and goes low when a trigger is activated Item Description Connector type BNC Output level TTL Output logic LI Negative Output delay time 50 ns or less Output hold time 1 u s minimum for low level and 100 ns minimum for high level Input terminal For the DL1740E DL1740EL For the DL17
419. lue using the USB keyboard Press the Enter key to enter the value and display it on screen Entering Values with Prefix Units If a prefix unit is shown as in Offset in the above example k of kV you can enter not only the value but also the prefix unit from the USB keyboard The items for which you can enter prefix units are voltage V time seconds s and current A e Entry Example e Entering 1 for the Offset in the example above is equivalent to entering 1 V and the screen displays 1000 mV or 1 0 V Entering 1 0 m for the Offset is equivalent to entering 10 mV The screen displays 10 mV 0 01 V and so on In this case the setting takes effect from the point at which the prefix units are entered so you do not have to press the Enter key Input Key Prefix Unit Kork 103 kilo m 10 mili Uoru 10 micro Norn 10 nano Porp 1071 pico IM 701730 01E suoljeiodg uowwog e 4 3 Operating the instrument Using a USB Keyboard or a USB Mouse Operations Using a USB Mouse You can use a USB mouse to operate the instrument as you would using the front panel keys In addition you can point to a desired item on a menu and click the item This is analogous to pressing a soft key corresponding to a menu and pressing the SELECT key USB PERIPHERAL Connector The USB mouse is connected to the USB PERIPHERAL connector on the rear panel of the instrument For details on the USB PERIPHERA
420. m Others RGB Graphic Color Coe Naveforn Others R G B R G B kea fra snp 5 snap az oe fiz Snap2 75 4 Ci snaps ma z CoJ Co Snap4 az Grid 8 CEJ C8 cursor C 43 Marker Setting the Intensity 5 Press the Intensity soft key The Intensity menu appears ea 6 Press the Menu soft key Turn the jog shuttle to set the intensity of the menu screen Graphic Color RGB Waveform jO Snap O Grid cursor 10 10 10 10 N 8 Likewise set the intensity of Waveform Snap Grid and Cursor _Color Mode ja Menu Waveform jO Snap J Grid Cursor Intensit 10 10 10 10 10 IM 701730 01E 15 7 suoijei9d 19410 al 15 4 Setting the Screen Color and Intensity Explanation Display Color You can set the screen color using a ratio of red R green G and blue B for each item The selectable range is 0 to 15 levels and the resolution is 1 level Item Target Menu Fore Menu Back Background color Focus Selection cursor Select Selected menu Dialog Dialog box Shadow Background color of the selected menu Line Menu screen lines Waveform CH1 CH4 Waveform color CH1 to CH2 and Math1 on the DL1720E Math1 Math2 Back Background color of the waveform display area Other Snap Snapshot waveforms Snap1 4 Loaded snapshot waveforms Grid Gri
421. m data is loaded from a file stored on the specified storage medium the history waveforms up to that point are cleared The loaded waveform data is always recalled to the record number 0 position of the history memory If a file containing multiple waveforms is loaded the newest waveform is recalled in the record number 0 position the next newest waveform in 1 and so on Computation and automated measurement of waveform parameters are performed on the waveform of the record number specified by Select Record Computation and analysis of old waveforms is possible until the history waveforms are changed by restarting acquisition Past waveforms are held in roll mode Only one waveform when acquisition is stopped is stored in the record number 0 position It may take some time to display all the history waveforms if the number of waveforms to be displayed is large To abort set the display mode to One Turning OFF the power clears the history waveforms 10 4 IM 701730 01E 10 2 Searching the History Waveforms Using Zones History Search lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 23 gt Procedure N j D 5 7 eD Smee ENHANCED o E ACTION DELAY SEARCH O TRIG D vspIv TIME sD1V ee i 1 Press HISTORY The HISTORY menu appears 2 Press the Search Mode soft key The Search Mode menu appears HISTORY fe Select Display estart Rega earch Modi Record i Shou
422. mage the storage medium or destroy the data on the medium e Ifthe instrument cannot recognize a formatted medium format the disk again on the instrument Note that all the data on the storage medium are cleared when the storage medium is formatted Be sure to back up important data beforehand Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC race SNAP HELP located above the soft keys e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog ara a sco sanrron shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of ca SPa Copy maGE SAvE o SHiFT selecting setting items and entering values using T DG D ae ane D the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys Frese sme enrance For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and vsDIv TIME sDIV ACTION DELAY 4 2 JCD QO C QOw e For a description of the operation using a USB o keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press FILE The FILE menu appears 2 Press the Utility soft key to display the Utility menu and the File List window i File Item a a Save Load Tuti ility Setup Selecting the Storage Medium to Be Formatted 3 Press the Function soft key The Function menu appears File List Path FD Space 0 byte File Name Size Date Attr FD 1 NetWork 1 Utility C FILE__ Function Filter set Reset ee 1 Set property attr Ea lete Delete pe SET E
423. me Size Date 12 0055 a 2004 05 14 12 0053 BMP 38462 2004 05 14 12 0051 BMP 38462 2004 05 14 14 11 R 12 0052 BMP 38462 2004 05 14 14 11 RW 12 0050 BMP 38462 2004 05 14 naa Rw z zone mo eae 7oogo5714 13 42 Ra jH Turn the jog shuttle to select the file 12 0048 BMP 38462 2004 05 14 13 42 R then press the SELECT key 12 0045 BMP 38462 2004 05 14 11 16 R 12 0046 BMP 38462 2004 05 14 11 16 R 12 0043 BMP 38462 2004 05 14 10 17 R W 12 0044 BMP 38462 2004 05 14 10 17 R W 2004705714 10 17 a 5 Format a 5 J Thumbnail Comment File List BMP 12 0058 Note If the selected screen image data file does not have data file for thumbnail display an error message appears You can press the ESC key to clear the thumbnail but in this case the File List window is also cleared To clear only the thumbnail display turn the jog shuttle Listing the Thumbnails of Specified Data Format 4 5 Press the File List soft key The File List window appears Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the directory containing the thumbnails you wish to display File List Path NetWork Software Space 2147483647 byte File Name Size Date Attr tNetork i ee i TE Turn the jog shuttle to select the directory containing the file whose thumbnail you wish to display then press the SELECT key t IMAGE a ile Nam File List a r Thunbnail Comment Press ESC to close the File List w
424. me Base You can select from the following Int Internal clock signal Ext Clock signal applied to the external clock input terminal When Setting the External Clock Signal as the Time Base Apply a clock signal of the following specifications to the EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN TRIG GATE IN terminal on the rear panel shared with the external trigger input or the EXT terminal on the front panel of the DL1720E Item Description Connector type BNC Maximum allowable input voltage 40 V DC ACpeak or 28 Vrms when the frequency is 10 kHz or Frequency range 40 Hz to 20 MHz continuous clock only Minimum input amplitude 0 1 Vp p Input impedance Approximately 1 MQ and approximately 20 pF Threshold level 2 V setting resolution is 5 mV on the DL1740E DL1740EL 1 V setting resolution is 5 mV when the 1 V range set on the DL1720E 10 V setting resolution is 50 mV when the 10 V range set on the DL1720E Sampling jitter 1 25 ns or less Minimum pulse width 10 ns or more for high and low IM 701730 01E 5 17 sexy JE UOZHOH pUe JeIIHA eo 5 10 Selecting the Time Base Input terminal For the DL1740E DL1740EL For the DL17420E terminal on the rear panel terminal on the front panel 4MQ 20pF lt 40Vpk CAUTION Applying a voltage that exceeds the maximum allowable input voltage indicated on the previous page to the EXT TRIG IN EXT CLOCK IN TRIG GATE IN terminal or the EXT termina
425. medium or destroy the data on the medium General Handling Precautions of Floppy Disks Floppy disks with bad sectors cannot be used on the instrument Format the floppy disk using your PC or other device before use For the general handling precautions of the floppy disk read the instruction manual that came with the floppy disk IM 701730 01E 12 3 eyeg Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 12 2 Floppy Disks and PC Cards PC Cards PC Cards That Can Be Used The instrument supports flash ATA cards PC card TYPE Il and compact flash using the PC card TYPE II adapter In addition some of the Flash ATA hard disk drive cards can be used For details contact the dealer from which you purchased the instrument Note To use the PC card on the PC use a PC that supports the PC card Depending on the PC that you are using the PC cards indicated above may not operate properly Confirm this beforehand Inserting the PC Card With the face of the PC card facing left insert the card into the PC card drive Note Insert the PC card securely all the way into the slot If it is not inserted completely the instrument may not be able to recognize it Ejecting the PC Card Check that the PC card is not being accessed and press the eject button above the PC card slot Eject button CAUTION e The instrument may malfunction if the PC card is inserted and ejected within a one second time period Do not remove the PC card or turn t
426. menu Press the soft key corresponding to a selection to make the selection C Press the corresponding soft key to set the item under jog shuttle control Turn the jog shuttle to set the value Press the arrow keys to change the selected digit You can directly enter the value from a USB keyboard D Press the corresponding soft key to switch the selected item MISC a rk System verview Next Pattern Conf ig 172 E Appears when there are two pages of the setup menu Press the corresponding soft key to display page 2 2 2 of 2 of the setup menu The name changes to Back 2 2 To return to page 1 2 1 of 2 press the corresponding soft key again F Appears when the soft key selections span over multiple pages Press the corresponding soft key or the right arrow key to display the next page of the menu For example if there are two pages the pages advance in the following order page 1 page 2 page 1 page 2 and so on Displaying the Setup Menu Marked in Purple above or below the Panel Keys In the explanations in this manual SHIFT panel key name purple text refers to the following operation 1 Press the SHIFT key The green indicator above SHIFT illuminates to indicate the shifted state The setup menu marked in purple above or below the panel keys can be selected 2 Press the panel key corresponding to the setup menu you wish to display IM 701730 01E 4 1 su
427. mination zone OUT or entering the determination zone IN Condition box makes the condition true On the DL1740E DL1740EL you can select from CH1 to CH4 Math1 and Math2 On the DL1720E you can select CH1 CH2 and Math1 23 Repeat step 22 to set determination zones Zone2 to Zone6 24 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the determination logic to AND or OR Logic box 25 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the determination operation to Single or Continue Sequence box 26 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the waveform acquisition count ACQ Count box 27 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT set the instrument action when the condition is met Action box Select the determination target waveform from CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 or Math2 m Select whether to perform determination at the corresponding determination zone ON OFF Select which condition when the waveform exits the determination Determination zone Zone1 There nee Sond tion zone OUT or when the waveform Determinati Zoned Pm enters the determination zone IN is Sornina ia wz I p E considered true zone Zone2 a zone3 EC BFF ON__ pm Determination I ee ee Set the determination logic to AND or Zonet CHA PAN pN E OR zone Zone3 zones Math1 DFF __ON U 3 Determination zones FF poy 1 Set the determination operation to zone Zone4 toric Single or Continue Determination Sequence Set t
428. mitted The following information is transmitted e Periodic Mail Acquisition condition Start Stop trigger condition and the acquisition counter Error log information Error number and corrective action in English up to sixteen errors Success Fail information of GO NO GO Only when GO NO GO determination is executed see section 10 9 or 10 10 Results of waveform parameter measurement Results of automated measurement of waveform parameters see section 10 6 or 10 8 or results of automated measurement parameters of when GO NO GO determination is executed using waveform parameters see section 10 10 e Action Mail Acquisition condition Start Stop acquisition counter Trigger time Success Fail information of GO NO GO Only when GO NO GO determination is executed see section 10 9 or 10 10 Fail cause Only when GO NO GO determination is executed see section 10 9 or 10 10 Results of waveform parameter measurement Results of automated measurement of waveform parameters see section 10 6 or 10 8 or results of automated measurement parameters of when GO NO GO determination is executed using waveform parameters see section 10 10 13 16 IM 701730 01E 13 5 Sending Periodic or Action Mail SMTP Client Function Example of Transmitted Content e Periodic Mail Comment aaaaaa ACQ Status Stopped 162 GO NOGO Status Success 140 Fail 21 Max C1 4 16667 V SDv C2 697 941 mV Freq C3 500 0000kHz Wd C4
429. mp SELECT to set Time Out The selectable range is 1 to 3600 s Net Drive Setup Enter the IP address of the FTP server Enter the login name using up to fifteen characters You can enter the password corresponding to the login name using up to fifteen characters Set the timeout time from 1 to 3600 s FTP Server ANONYMOUS Login Name Password Time Out sec _ Connect__ Discomect_ 13 8 IM 701730 01E 13 3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data Setup Data and Image Data on a Network Drive FTP Client Function Connecting to and disconnecting from the Network 8 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Connect and press SELECT to establish a connection When the connection is established 7 is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to disconnect then press SELECT to close the connection The E icon displayed at the upper right corner of the screen disappears Net Drive Setup FTP Server Login Nane ANONYMOUS Password Time Out sec Commet 4 Select using the jog shuttle the press SELECT to connect to the network drive Select using the jog shuttle the press SELECT to close the connection with the network drive Disconnect Saving and Loading Waveform and Setup Data 9 Press FILE The FI
430. mp Comment dialog box opens File List Path FD Space 0 byte File Name amp Comment File Name CFD 1 auto naning NetWork 1 File Nane coment C Save FILE aFile Nam a Filter Property ave Exec 12 0000 w Setup 9 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the auto naming function e If you select ON the auto naming function is enabled e If you select OFF the auto naming function is disabled 10 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to call up the keyboard and set the file name or comment e Enter the file name using up to fourteen characters e Enter comment using up to twenty five characters 11 Press ESC The File Name amp Comment dialog box closes IM 701730 01E 12 21 ejeg Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 12 6 Saving Loading Settings Executing the Save 12 Press the Save Exec soft key The data is saved to the directory indicated by Pathe At the same time the Save Exec soft key changes to the Abort soft key While the data is being saved the icon is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen File List _Path NetWork Sof tware Space 2147483647 byte File Name Size Date Attr FD 1 NetWork 1 12 0001 63222 2004 05 14 69 24 12 0000 63222 2004 05 14 09 24 v a File Nang Save a Filter Property ave Exec 12 0002 xe Setup Aborting the Save 13 Press the Abort soft key The save operatio
431. ms against a standard signal checking the signal logic or comparing the phase Multiplication _ is a useful function when applying a voltage signal and a current signal and checking the power waveform Addition Subtraction Multiplication x Binary Computation lt For the setup procedure see section 9 3 gt The selected waveform can be converted to a digital waveform of Os and 1s with respect to the specified threshold level This computation can be performed on the waveforms of CH1 to CH4 and Math1 or CH1 to CH2 on the DL1720E Inversion lt For the setup procedure see section 9 4 gt The voltage axis can be inverted on the display by multiplying the measured data by 1 This computation can be performed on the waveforms of CH1 to CH4 and Math1 or CH1 to CH2 on the DL1720E Differentiation Diff and Integration Integ lt For the setup procedure see section 9 5 gt Differentiates or integrates the waveform of the selected channel This computation can be performed on the waveforms of CH1 to CH4 and Math1 or CH1 to CH2 on the DL1720E Phase Shift lt For the setup procedure see section 9 8 gt You can shift the phase of the displayed waveforms on CH1 to CH4 or CH1 and CH2 on the DL1720E and use the phase shifted data in calculations Scaling the Computed Waveform lt For the setup procedure
432. ms do not change if you change the V div value while the waveform acquisition is stopped The new V div value takes effect the next time the waveform acquisition is started e Turning the V DIV knob while acquisition is stopped has no affect on cursor measurement values and automated measurement values of waveform parameters The displayed values are for the original V div setting Using the Variable Soft Key 1 Press one of the CH1 to CH4 2 keys to select the channel The CH menu appears 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key rar Display sPosition J Coupling Probe fe Offset Bandwidt Next OFF pry O 00div Decio 10 1 0 00OkU Full 172 3 Press the Variable soft key CHL Variable inear Sci Label X B Back 0 500 U ON CH1 272 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the V div value Note e If you change the V div value by turning the V DIV knob the Variable setting is cancelled e If you press the RESET key the V div value set using the Variable soft key is reset and the value returns to the initial V div value set using the V DIV knob IM 701730 01E 5 2 Setting V div Explanation The V div A div when current probes are used setting is used to adjust the displayed amplitude of the waveform for easy viewing You can set the value in terms of the voltage current per division of the screen grid There are two methods for setting this value Setting Using the V div Knob V div is set in steps of 1 2 5 1 V
433. ms that have been acquired completely can be displayed The history memory function cannot be used in roll mode The display format is automatically set to roll mode depending on the time axis and record length settings see appendix 1 If you stop the waveform acquisition and restart without changing the waveform acquisition conditions the waveform acquisition count of the history waveforms is not reset and the remaining number of acquisitions are stored and held as history waveforms The history waveforms that have been held up to the point when the acquisition was stopped are retained If you change the waveform acquisition conditions history waveforms up to that point are cleared when you restart acquisition using the new settings If you press the CLEAR TRACE key while waveform acquisition is in progress or if you stop waveform acquisition press the CLEAR TRACE key and restart acquisition the history waveforms are cleared Notes on Displaying History Waveforms When the history memory menu is displayed waveform acquisition stops History waveforms cannot be displayed while waveform acquisition is in progress You can start waveform acquisition even when the history memory menu is displayed However while acquisition is in progress you cannot change the settings of the history memory function such as Select Record Settings are restricted by the following condition End Record lt Select Record lt Start Record If wavefor
434. n This section describes the procedures for displaying history waveforms The waveforms that have been sequentially stored can also be displayed in the same fashion Number of History Waveforms The table below shows the number of history waveforms that can be stored and held in the acquisition memory according to the maximum record length and specified record length of each model If a waveform is acquired when a trigger is activated causing this number to be exceeded the oldest waveform is cleared Specified Record Length DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL 1 kWord 1 1024 2048 1 1024 2048 1 1024 2048 10 kWord 1 128 256 1 128 256 1 128 256 50 kWord 1 32 64 1 32 64 1 32 64 100 kWord 1 16 32 1 16 32 1 16 32 250 kWord 1 8 16 1 8 16 1 8 16 1 MWord 4 1 2 4 1 2 4 2 MWord 2 1 2 4 MWord z 1 1 8 MWord 1 Ifthe trigger count is 1 only the displayed waveform is held in the acquisition memory past waveforms are not held Values inside the parentheses are the number of waveforms when interleave mode is ON When performing box averaging acquisition is possible up to 250 MW on the DL1720E or up to 500 MW when interleave mode is ON up to 500 MW on the DL1740E up to 1 MW when interleave mode is ON and up to 2 MW on the DL1740EL or up to 4 MW when interleave mode is ON Selectable Range of History Waveforms e History waveforms have record numbers attached to them The
435. n C1 Avg C1 1 02083 812 S00mU 1 208 333mV 294 880mU 1 02683 812 S00mU 208 333mU T 297 471mU 1 62083 812 500mnU 208 333mV 294 672mV 1 04167U 812 500mnU 4 229 16 my 295 398mU 1 041670 812 500mU 229 167mV 294 465mU 1 02083 812 500mU 208 333MY 293 636mU 1 641670 812 500mU 229 167mV 295 398mU 1 641670 812 500mnU 229 167mV 293 843mU 1 020830 812 500mV 208 333mV 294 983mU 1 02083V 812 500mU 208 333mV 295 087mU 1 02083 812 S00mU 208 333mU 293 947mU 1 641670 812 S60mU 229 167mU 294 776mU 1 041670 t 833 333my 208 333nU 294 672nU 1 020830 812 500nU 208 333nV 296 124mU 1 02083 812 500mU 208 333mV 295 916mU 1 02683 812 500mU 208 333mV 293 947mV 1 02083U 812 500mU 208 333mV 294 983mV 1 04167U 812 500nU 229 167mV 294 983mV 1 641670 812 500mU 229 167mU 294 362mV MaxMin MaxMin MaxMin MaxMin Item1 Item2 Item3 Item4 Utility_ MEASURE lt Measured values gt g Scroll up and down using the jog shuttle 10 48 IM 701730 01E 10 7 Statistical Processing of the Automated Measurement Values of Waveform Parameters e Searching the Maximum or Minimum Values of the Four Measurement Parameters Being Displayed 12 Press the Max Min Item1 soft key The measured values of the 1st measurement parameter from the left of the list are searched and the cursor highlight moves to the measured value with the maximum or minimum mark 7 or J 13 Press
436. n Search is performed on whether the parallel status pattern of the waveforms status pattern of the waveforms at the same point is the same as the pattern set using High H Low L and Don t Care X e Pulse Width Search is performed on whether the pulse width of the waveform above or below a specified level is shorter or longer than the specified determination time e Auto Scroll The zoom position automatically moves auto scroll in the specified direction You can confirm the zoomed waveform and stop the scroll operation at an arbitrary position Edge Search Conditions The following conditions can be specified Waveform to Search Source You can select the search target waveform e For the DL1740E DL1740EL You can select the target waveform from CH1 to CH4 Math1 and Math2 e For the DL1720E You can select from CH1 to CH2 and Math1 Level You can set the level for detecting the rising or falling edge The selectable range is eight divisions within the screen The resolution is 0 01 divisions Slope Polarity You can select which slope edge rising or falling is to be detected 4 Rising slope 4 Falling slope Hysteresis You can set the hysteresis The selectable range is 0 3 divisions to 4 0 divisions The resolution is 0 one divisions When the level of the search target waveform changes from below the specified lower limit of hysteresis to above and including the upper limit of hysteresis it is detected as
437. n 13 2 and settings for printing screen images to a network printer see section 13 4 Selecting a Network Printer 2 Press SHIFT COPY MENU The COPY menu appears 3 Press the Copy to soft key The Copy to menu appears COPY Copy to Format Infornation Comment Built in irma i Long ON 4 Press the Net Print soft key Built in and Net Print appear if the built in printer option and the Ethernet interface option are installed respectively COPY juilt in USB Net Print Comment Selecting the Page Description Language or Printer Type 5 Press the Format soft key The Format menu appears Copy tof f Fornat Color Ja Comment Net Prin ESC P OFF ON 6 Press Post Script LIPS3 PCL5 ESC P ESC P2 or BJ to select the page description language or the printer type Copy to PS LIPS3 PCLS ESC P ESC P2 BJ Net Print COPY 11 10 IM 701730 01E 11 4 Printing Using a Network Printer Optional Turning Color Printing ON and OFF Selectable only if the page description language or printer type is set to PCL5 ESC P ESC P2 or BJ in step 6 7 Press the Color soft key to select ON or OFF COPY Copy to Format Color Comment Net Print ESC P ON Entering Comments 8 Press the Comment soft key A keyboard used to enter values and strings appears 9 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the comment Copy to Fornat Color fa Comment Net Print ESC P PFF on L
438. n envelope mode Rep Repetitive sampling mode When set to envelope mode When interleave mode is OFF When interleave mode is ON Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON When interleave mode is OFF When interleave mode is ON Sample rate S s Display record length Word Display record rate length S s Word Sample Sample rate Display record length Word Display record rate length S s Word Sample Display record length Word Sample rate S s Display record length Word Sample rate S s 1k 500 k 1k 500 k 500 k 1k 500 k 400 M 500 k 800 M 500 k 2k 400 k 2k 400 k 400 k 2k 400 k 400 M 400 k 800 M 400 k 5k 500 k 5k 500 k 500 k 5k 500 k 400 M 500 k 800 M 500 k Roll mode display 1 Box averaging is not available on the DL1720E 2 The values inside the thick frame are for repetitive sampling mode Set to normal mode even if envelope mode is specified App 6 IM 701730 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Specified Record Length 1 MW Rep Repetitive sampling mode When set to a mode other than envelope mode When set to envelope mode When interleave mode is OFF When interleave mode is
439. n is aborted At the same time the Abort soft key changes to the Save Exec soft key Specifying the File and Properties to Be Displayed on the File List Window 14 15 16 17 On the screen showing the File List window press the Filter soft key to select the or extension e If you select SET only setup data files are displayed If you select all the files in the directory are displayed Save FILE ja File Nam a Filter Property ave Exec 12 0002 x Setup Turn the jog shuttle to select the files in the File List window Press the Property soft key Information about the selected file is displayed Property Path NetWork Sof Space 2147483647 bj File Name File Name 12 0001 SET File Size 63222 byte Date Time 2004 05 14 09 24 Attribute RW a FD NetWork 1 lt 88 ea B8e 9e gt 12 0001 5 12 0000 SJ 1 M FILE a File Nam a Filter Property ave Exec 12 0002 LSE T ciel Setup Press ESC The window showing the information closes 12 22 IM 701730 01E 12 6 Saving Loading Settings Loading the Setup Data Select the setup data according to steps 1 to 3 on page 12 20 4 Press the Load soft key The Load menu and the File List window appear FILE a ja Save Load Utility File Item Setup Selecting the Load Source Medium Directory 5 The procedure is the same as steps 6 to 7 on
440. n the File List window Display Examples of Storage Media Floppy Disk FD Floppy disk PC Card PC card NetWork Network drive when the Ethernet interface option is installed USB USB storage Auto Naming When Auto Naming is turned ON files with a four digit number from 0000 to 2399 are automatically created when saving the data You can specify a common name up to ten characters specified through Filename that is placed before the number File Name and Comment A file name must be assigned Comments are optional e You cannot save to a file name that already exists in the same directory overwriting not allowed Number and Types of Characters That Can Be Used Item Number of Characters Characters That Can Be Used File name 1 to 14 characters 0to9 AtoZ _ Comment 0 to 25 characters All characters including spaces Extension The SET extension is automatically added to the file name Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Window Specify the type of files to be displayed SET Displays only setup data files OKT Displays all the files in the directory Properties Displays information about the selected file including the name extension the file size the date the file was saved the attribute and the comment 12 24 IM 701730 01E 12 6 Saving Loading Settings Note An error occurs if a key other than the Abort key is pressed while saving or loading a file Saving and Loadi
441. n the procedural explanation below the term jog co sanrron shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of selecting setting items and entering values using setup DISPLaY COPY IMAGE SAVE o SHIFT Tr D O R the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys i oez Smee ENHANCED For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and vzDiv TIME DIV o s ACTION DELAY 4 2 o s O O r e For a description of the operation using a USB o keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press GO NO GO The GO NO GO menu appears 2 Press the Mode soft key The Mode menu appears GO NO GO Mode OFF Entering the GO NO GO Determination Setup Menu 3 Press the Parameter soft key The Parameter menu appears J GOANO GO OFF Zone Parameter p Setting the Determination Conditions 4 Press the Setup soft key The Setup dialog box opens GO NO GO_ Hode r faT Rangei Setup 5 000dit Exec Paraneter 6T Range2 5 000d 5 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the following items of determination parameter Param1 Select whether to perform determination at the corresponding determination parameter ON OFF Mode box Select the determination target waveform from CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 or Math2 Trace box Select the measurement parameter Item box Set the upper and lower limits used to determine the measured value Upper and Lower box Select whether the measured value exiting the
442. n this case select Obtain an IP address automatically under the IP Address tab of the TCP IP Properties dialog box For example if you are connecting a PC and the instrument to an independent Ethernet network you can specify parameters as indicated in the next table For details on the parameters consult your system or network administrator Parameter Value Notes IP address Example 192 168 21 128 IP address for the PC Subnet mask Example 255 255 255 0 Set the same value as the subnet mask that was specified for the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL Gateway None DNS Disable WINS Disable 13 6 IM 701730 01E 13 2 Setting Up the TCP IP The following explains the settings under Windows 95 98 Me For the NT 2000 Pro and XP versions of Windows carry out equivalent steps accordingly 1 Choose Settings gt Control Panel from the Start menu to open the Control Panel folder 2 Double click the Network icon to display the network setup dialog box below 3 Select the TCP IP corresponding to the Ethernet NIC that is connected to the PC and click Properties to display the TCP IP properties setup dialog box Client for Microsoft Networks 3Com Fast EtherLink XL 10 100Mb TX Ethernet NIC 3C905 TCP IP Properties TCP IP Properties ol Ileuondo suonesiunwwos 3u194 3 g IM 701730 01E 13 7 13 3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data Setup Data and Image Data on a Network Drive FTP Client Fun
443. nap Measure Image a Utility Selecting the Save Destination Medium Directory 4 Press the Save soft key The Save menu appears File Item ja a Save Utility Measure 5 The procedure is the same as steps 13 to 15 on page 12 14 Setting the File Name and Comment 6 The procedure is the same as steps 16 to 18 on page 12 14 12 30 IM 701730 01E 12 8 Saving Automated Measurement Values of Waveform Parameters Explanation Executing the Save 7 Press the Save Exec soft key The data is saved to the directory indicated by Pathe At the same time the Save Exec soft key changes to the Abort soft key While the data is being saved the icon is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen File List Path NetWork Software Space 2147483647 byte File Nane Size Date Attr FD 1 NetWork 1 12 0000 766 2004 05 14 13 48 AVE e Exec asure a File Nang ry Property aye 12 0001 x Me Aborting the Save 8 Press the Abort soft key The save operation is aborted At the same time the Abort soft key changes to the Save Exec soft key Specifying the File and Properties to Be Displayed on the File List Window 9 The procedure is the same as steps 22 to 25 on page 12 15 The results of the automated measurement of waveform parameters can be saved to a file in CSV format csv extension to a floppy disk PC card or an external USB storage
444. nation given later 10 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the pulse width determination time used as the determination reference Time box 11 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the search start point Start Point box When the determination type is set to Pulse lt Time Pulse gt Time or Time out Setup Type Source e Select the search target waveform a Set the level used to determine whether the polarity is high or low Polarity Select the polarity high or low used to perform determination Hysteresis 03N Set the hysteresis width of the level for detecting the edge Tine Set the pulse width used as a determination reference Set the search start point When the determination type is T1 lt Pulse lt T2 Setup Type pouree ci Select the search target waveform a Set the level used to determine whether the polarity is high or low Polarity Select the polarity high or low used to perform determination hysteresis 0 34 Set the hysteresis width of the level for detecting the edge Tinel Set the pulse width used as a determination reference Timez Set both the upper and lower limits of the time width Start fotne Set the search start point 12 Press ESC The Setup dialog box closes Selecting the Window for Displaying the Searched Waveform Zoom Waveform Display Frame 13 The procedure is the same as step 12 on page 10 15 Executing Aborting the Search
445. nction Setting the Status Determination Pattern and Search Start Point 13 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the preset status determination pattern of sixty four points from A to D Pattern box 14 As necessary use jog shuttle amp SELECT to change the status determination pattern A to D by selecting the status of points 0 to 63 from H L and X If Clear Pattern is executed using jog shuttle amp SELECT all points are set to X 15 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the search start point Start Point box Pattern Select the preset status determination pattern of sixty four points from A to D L As necessary change the status determination pattern A to D by selecting the status of points 0 to 63 from H L and X All points are set to X Set the search start point 0 HLHHLHHL XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX 32 40 48 56 63 KXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Clear Pattern Start Point 16 Press ESC The Setup dialog box closes Selecting the Window for Displaying the Searched Waveform Zoom Waveform Display Frame 17 The procedure is the same as step 12 on page 10 15 Executing Aborting the Search 18 The procedure is the same as step 13 and 14 on page 10 15 Redisplaying the Detected Waveforms 19 The procedure is the same as step 15 and 16 on page 10 16 Changing the Zoom Rate and Zoom Position of the Detected Waveforms 20 Change the zoom rate and zoom position of the wave
446. ncy Hz 1 Period Width Time width above the mesial value s Period Period s Wd Prod Width Time width below the mesial value s AvgFreq Average frequency within Wd FR A the measurement range Hz Duty Duty cycle Width Period x 100 The characters inside the parentheses are measurement parameter names used when displaying the measured values I lt Period 1 Width Width l 1 High 100 li B Low 0 Rise Fall Pulse Pulse count Set the measurement range Time Range PISN according to the pulse you wish to measure When Pulse 3 l l e porpoc odcpepeopo oi Distal line 90 tenes poed fetei Mesial line 50 1 a eee eee ba Seed a aa Proximal line 10 Measurement j range 1 Time Range1 Time Range2 Burst1 Burst2 Burst width s Set the measurement range Time Range Bst1 Bst2 according to the burst width you wish to measure EEE A A A A A A Distal line Mesial line re re el A V Proximal line l 4 lj I r I F ji l Measurement i range Time Range1 Time Range2 IM 701730 01E 10 43 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy z 10 6 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Reference waveform Measured waveform Area Parameters Int1 TY The area under the positive amplitude Int2TY The area under the positive amplitude the area under the negative amplitude Int XY
447. nded on the screen The following five search modes are available For the setup procedures of each type see the pages indicated below Edge gt Page 10 14 Serial pattern gt Page 10 16 e Parallel pattern gt Page 10 18 e Pulse width gt Page 10 20 Auto scroll gt Page 10 22 Edge Search 1 Press SHIFT ZOOM SEARCH The SEARCH menu appears Selecting the Search Method 2 Press the Type soft key The Type menu appears SEARCH Type Zi Mag fs Zi Pos Searched Setup Pattern Exec Edge x 10 4 000diy No Match 3 Press the Edge soft key SEARCH Edge Serial Width Parallel Auto Searched Pattern Pattern Scroll Pattern Exec No Match Setting the Search Condition 4 Press the Setup soft key The Setup dialog box opens SEARCH Type a W Zi Mag 6 Z1 Pos OSearched Setup Pattern Exec Edge x 10 4 000diy No Match 10 14 IM 701730 01E 10 4 Searching Waveforms Using the Search and Zoom Function Setting the Search Target Waveform Level Slope and Hysteresis for Detecting Edges 5 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the search target waveform Source box 6 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the level for detecting the edge Level box 7 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select which slope edge rising or falling is to be detected Polarity box 8 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the hysteresis width of the level for detecting th
448. ne BMP OFF 12 0056 Selecting the Save Destination Directory Perform this operation when directories are present on the medium 12 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the save destination directory indicated by lt gt The selected medium directory is displayed in Path located in the upper left of the File List window Select lt gt to move to the parent directory 13 Press ESC 12 34 IM 701730 01E 12 9 Saving Screen Image Data Explanation Setting the File Name 14 Press the File Name soft key The file name setup menu appears auto Naning OFF W Fite Nane a Format Color fa a a File Name Thumbnail Comment File Lis BMP OFF 12 0057 15 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the auto naming function e If you select ON the auto naming function is enabled e If you select OFF the auto naming function is disabled 16 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to call up the keyboard and set the file name Enter the file name using up to fourteen characters Executing Aborting the Save 17 Press IMAGE SAVE The screen image data is saved to the storage medium Pressing IMAGE SAVE again aborts the save operation While the data is being saved the icon is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen Note Thumbnails of the saved screen image data can be displayed For details see the next section The screen image data can be stored to a specified storage medium You can select a
449. ne OFF No search is performed IN Searches waveforms that pass through the specified search zone Also searches cases when the waveforms pass through the boundary lines OUT Searches waveforms that do not pass through the specified search zone Waveform to Search Source You can select the search target waveform If a waveform that meets the search condition is found other history waveforms at the same time as the found waveform are also displayed e For the DL1740E DL1740EL You can select the target waveform from CH1 to CH4 Math1 and Math2 e For the DL1720E You can select from CH1 to CH2 and Math1 IM 701730 01E 10 7 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy es 10 2 Searching the History Waveforms Using Zones History Search Range of the Search Zone Rectangular Frame You can set the top bottom left and right edges of the search zone Top and Bottom Edges The selectable range is 4 divisions and the resolution is 0 01 divisions The top edge Upper must be greater than or equal to the bottom edge Lower Left and Right Edges The selectable range is 5 divisions and the resolution is ten divisions display record length The right edge must be greater than or equal to the left edge For a description of the display record length see appendix 1 Search Logic You can select the AND logic or OR logic of the search conditions of the four search parameters in performing the search AND Searches for waveforms
450. near average mode is loaded 732 Cannot be executed while computation is Turn OFF Display of the MATH menu and abort 9 1 in progress the computation 733 Failed to measure statistics Check to see that waveform data to be measured 10 7 The target waveform data exists or the exists and that there is at least one cycle of measured waveform data may not exist If Cycle waveform within the measurement range Statistics is specified the instrument may be configured in a way that fails to detect the cycle 735 Cannot store because the data is locked Release the lock through Store Detail 12 1 Release the lock through Store Detail 736 The File item is inappropriate Select Waveform Snap or Measure Select Waveform Snap or Measure 737 Executing file Load Save or Format Abort or wait until it is complete 738 Hard copying or saving image Abort or wait until it is complete 750 Cannot connect to the server Check network configuration and connection Chapter 13 751 Not yet connected to the ftp server Check network configuration and connection Chapter 13 752 This ftp function in not supported Chapter 13 753 FTP Error Pwd Check network configuration and connection Chapter 13 754 FTP Error Cwd Check network configuration and connection Chapter 13 16 4 IM 701730 01E 16 2 Messages and Corrective Actions Code
451. newest current waveform is 0 the waveform previous to that is 1 and so on To select the waveform to be displayed select the record number in the range of 0 to the number of history waveforms 1 The number of history waveforms varies depending on the specified record length as indicated in the table above The default value is 0 Display Mode You can select the display mode One Displays only the waveform of the record number selected by Select Record from the range specified by Start Record and End Record All Displays accumulated all the waveforms in the range specified by Start Record and End Record The waveform selected by Select Record is highlighted displayed brightly History Map Show Map The record numbers and time stamps time when acquisition was completed displayed in hour minute second 1 100 second format of the history waveforms are listed The information of seventy five waveforms is displayed on 1 screen You can scroll and select the data to be displayed using the jog shuttle and display the selected waveform IM 701730 01E 10 3 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy 5 10 1 Displaying History Waveforms Note Notes on Using the History Memory Function The history memory function cannot be used if the acquisition mode is Average The history memory function cannot be used when in repetitive sampling mode If waveform acquisition is aborted only the wavefor
452. ng History Waveforms ccceeeceeseeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeseaeesaeeeaeesaeeeaeeseeeesieeeeaeenaees 10 1 10 2 Searching the History Waveforms Using Zones History Search esseeseeseeeseeeee 10 5 10 3 Searching the History Waveforms Using Automatic Measurement of Parameters History Search 0 ceeeeeeeseeeeceeseeceseeeeeeneseeseaeeeaeeceaeeeaeeesaeesaaeseaaeeaeseaeeeneeeeeesseaeeeess 10 9 10 4 Searching Waveforms Using the Search and Zoom Function ccecceeseseeeeeees 10 14 10 5 Cursor Measurements ceeceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseaeeeeeeeaeeseeeeaeeteaeeseeeeaeetieeenaeenea 10 31 10 6 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters ccscceeeseeeesneeeeeneeeeentereenes 10 39 10 7 Statistical Processing of the Automated Measurement Values of Waveform Parameters ccccsccceceeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeseneneeeneeeseaeeesneneeseseeeseeaenens 10 46 10 8 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas 10 53 10 9 Performing GO NO GO Determination Using Zones cesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeerens 10 58 10 10 Performing GO NO GO Determination Using Automated Measurement of Waveform PArAMOterS oisein repak aeee a ia a nE a EE a a aieea aa Eei EEEE SIRES 10 64 10 11 Using the GO NO GO Determination Signal Output Function sssesseeseeeeeeeeereeeeen 10 68 Chapter 11 Printing Screen Images 11 1 Installing the Roll Paper into the Built in Printer Optional
453. ng is not possible while waveform acquisition is in progress Press the START STOP key to stop the acquisition first The total number of files and directories that can be displayed in the File List is 2500 The number of files and directories that can be displayed in as single directory is 2500 If the number of items to be displayed exceeds this number the file list randomly displays 2500 of the directories and files If you change the extension of the file using a PC for example the file can no longer be loaded Files that do not have an archive attribute are not displayed in the File List window Do not remove the archive attribute of the files saved by the instrument using your PC Up to forty two characters can be displayed in the path If forty two characters are exceeded is displayed at the end of the characters File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AAUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COM9 and LPT1 to LPT9 If the setup data that is saved to a file are loaded the settings of the menus and dialog boxes are changed to the loaded information and cannot be undone It is recommended that you first save the current setup data and then load the setup data from a file Setup data such as the date time and communications settings are not saved Therefore loading setup data from a file will not change these settings This f
454. ng on the same measurement parameters as the automated measurement of waveform parameters The following five statistics can be displayed on the measured values of two measurement parameters Max Min Avg Sdv Cnt Maximum value Minimum value Average value Standard deviation Number of measured values used in the statistical processing For example if you selected P P of CH1 as a measurement parameter the maximum minimum average standard deviation and the number of measured values used in the statistical processing of the P P of CH1 are displayed 10 50 IM 701730 01E 10 7 Statistical Processing of the Automated Measurement Values of Waveform Parameters Target Waveform The waveform on which measurement and statistical processing are performed is CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 or Math2 Statistical processing is performed on the measurement target waveform that was selected in section 10 6 On the DL1740E DL1740EL the waveform is CH1 to CH4 Math1 or Math2 On the DL1720E you can select CH1 CH2 and Math1 Measurement Parameters on Which Statistical Processing Is Performed Measurement and statistical processing can be performed on the same measurement parameters as those of the automated measurement of waveform parameters Inthe normal measurement and statistical processing and the measurement and statistical processing of history waveforms statistical processing can be performed on the computed paramete
455. ng the All Set soft key places an asterisk on every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Window Specify the type of files to be displayed e x Extension Displays only the data file that was selected in the File Item setup menu and the data type menu e k Displays all the files in the medium Properties Displays information about the selected file including the name extension the file size the date the file was saved the attribute and the comment 12 44 IM 701730 01E 12 11 Changing the File Attributes and Deleting Files Note Files cannot be deleted while the waveform acquisition is in progress e Data that are deleted cannot be recovered Be sure you erase the correct files e You can not delete directories if there are files in them e If an error occurs while deleting multiple files the files after the error occurrence are not deleted e You cannot change a directory attribute e This function cannot be used when using the FTP server function FTP client function the LPR client function or the Web server function IM 701730 01E 12 45 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 12 12 Copying Files AN CAUTION Do not remove the storage medium disk or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the storage medium is blinking Doing so can damage the storage medium or destroy the data on the medium
456. ng within the measurement range 10 47 status MCSSAQE ee eee e eee eeeeeceeeeceeeeneneeeenaeae 16 2 stopping waveform acquisition eect e cee teeeeneeeeeee 7 1 StOraGe lt i ess thetiy Mita eer ave ae Ree ei aes storage medium SONG ias aeaii i ariii diaaa deat dvenrbed subnet MASK sssessessesiesrerresrneirerinerrerirernernnrrnsrnsrresinerennt subtracting subtraction SUffi Kassarin o a e Naden iian d ii SYM oliarni ea A sede deandeinavetod ees v system condition 16 10 system configuration ssseseeseeseesesrresrierierrnerierrnrinerrnrinere 2 1 T AE NEEE EA OTTAA T E AT 5 19 TOP IP parga hyuna innti nA 13 3 temporary storage of character String s es 4 4 test mailh zsruri seit 13 15 threshold level for binary computation 0 cee 9 7 thumbnail tree foe Gas ASE senna ds ae 12 36 12 37 time AXIS SOUING v ccceccseeevesscasccececccaececeenestcoteassntsseenseersese time DASC iis eelkeecisseceeesebleccgendastidvecesttsceeeegestiveestee time difference from GMT tme GUte via eaii A Me WINGOW ssssssessieessiisesiitesittsinnteirnnsirtnenntennnnnnnnnnn ne TIME DIV knob TOP PANE DEE E E A TT trace label sniiiyroisiatiraens Acute ardt translucent display re transmission interval ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaee 13 15 transmission tiMe cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteaeeeeeeaeeeeeeee TRIG D indicator WJJ sanea kari a Aea trigger coupling AET 2 12 6 10 6 16
457. nited States and or other countries For purposes of this manual the TM and symbols do not accompany their respective trademark names or registered trademark names Other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 1st Edition July 2004 All Rights Reserved Copyright 2004 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 701730 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument If some of the contents are not correct or if any items are missing or damaged contact the dealer from which you purchased them DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL Main Unit Check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate on the rear panel of the instrument matches the ones you ordered Also note the instrument number NO and be prepared to give this number to your Yokogawa representative when contacting them for repairs and other issues MODEL SUFFIX NO YOKOGAWA Made in Japan Model Suffix Specifications 701715 DL1720E 701730 DL1740E 701740 DL1740EL 2 channel 1 MW memory model 4 channel 2 MW memory model 4 channel 8 MW memory model Power cord D UL CSA Standard power cord Part No A1006WD Maximum rated voltage 125 V Maximum rated current 7 A VDE Standard Power Cord Part No A1009WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A BS S
458. nnel Sn a ee a FLAO A CH1 H L H L H L H L CH2 H L H L H L H L _ 500 ns 800 ng 400 ns 450 ns j HA A A DA B c When the condition is set to CH1 H CH2 L CH3 X CH4 X Condition True and Time 350 ns Determination Type Results Pulse lt T Trigger is activated at point B Pulse gt T Trigger is activated at points A and C T1 lt PLS lt T2 When set to Time1 350 and Time2 450 ns the trigger activates at point C Time Out When set to Time1 450 the trigger activates at point D CH3 and CH4 not available on the DL1720E OR Trigger lt For the setup procedure see section 6 12 gt A trigger is activated when any of the edge or window conditions specified on channels 1 through 4 are met For example a trigger can be activated on the rising edge of CH1 or CH2 CH1 CH2 Triggers Triggers Triggers Condition CH1 CH2 Window Trigger lt For the setup procedure see section 6 13 gt A certain voltage range window is set and a trigger is activated when the trigger source level enters this voltage range IN or exits from this voltage range OUT This trigger is used in combination with the OR or Width trigger The window trigger setting is located in the OR or Width trigger menu IN OUT Trigger is activated Trigger is activated ale Window wie 5 Window iy Py Center Center iL Trigger is activated
459. nnot be used If an error message is displayed after the format operation the floppy disk may be damaged e You can use floppy disks that are formatted on a PC under MS DOS e This function cannot be used when using the FTP server function FTP client function the LPR client function or the Web server function IM 701730 01E 12 11 ejeqg Bulpeo7 pue Burnes 12 5 Saving Loading the Waveform Data AN CAUTION Do not remove the storage medium disk or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the storage medium is blinking Doing so can damage the storage medium or destroy the data on the medium Procedure To exit the menu during operation press ESC TRACE zgr SHO HELP located above the soft keys r O Bye In the procedural explanation below the term jog Q ueasure ca l nhe eanocd Sd Gea rarer sco srnrsror sanrsro E shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of setup pispLay Copy mace ame el selecting setting items and entering values using ED G D ERO ne the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys Freser sexe ennianceD For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and vv TIMED PTA 4 2 aa C C as A e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press FILE The FILE menu appears 2 _ Press the File Item soft key The File Item setting menu appears
460. nsufficient warm up Warm up the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL for 30 minutesafter turning on the power Not calibrated Execute calibration The probe s phase has not been corrected Perform phase correction correctly The probe attenuation is not correct Set an appropriate value An offset voltage is added Set the offset voltage to 0 V Other causes Execute calibration If the measured value is still odd servicing is required Cannot output to the built in printer The printer head is damaged or worn out Servicing required Cannot save to the specified medium The medium is not formatted Format the medium The medium is write protected Release the medium s write protect No more free space on the medium Delete unneeded files or use another storage medium Cannot change settings or control the operation of the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL via the communication interface The address of the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL used bythe program is different from the specified address Match the address used in the program to the address of the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL The interface is not used in a way that conforms to the electrical or mechanical specifications Use it in a way that conforms to the specifications Communication Interface User s Manual IM 701730 17E CD ROM IM 701730 01E 16 1 z uondedsu pue svue
461. nt Notations Used on Pages Describing Operating Procedure On pages that describe the operating procedures in Chapter 3 through 16 the following notations are used to distinguish the procedures from their explanations Carry out steps in the order shown The operating procedures are Procedure ciate given with the assumption that you are not familiar with the operation Thus it may not be necessary to carry out all the steps when changing settings Explanation Describes settings and restrictions relating to the operation A detailed description of the function is not provided For a detailed description of the function refer to Chapter 2 Notations Used in the Procedure Panel Keys and Soft keys Bold characters used in the procedural explanations indicate characters that are marked on the panel keys or the characters of the soft keys displayed on the screen menu SHIFT Panel Key SHIFT key means you will press the SHIFT key causing the green indicator to the left of the SHIFT key to illuminate and then press a panel key The setup menu marked in purple above or below the panel key that you pressed appears on the screen Jog Shuttle amp SELECT Jog shuttle amp SELECT indicates selecting or setting parameters and entering values using the jog shuttle the SELECT key and other keys For details on the procedure see section 4 1 or 4 2 Unit k Denotes 1000 Example 100 kS s K Denotes 1024 Example 459
462. nu appears 8 Select the waveform to be assigned to the X axis The CH3 CH4 and Math2 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720E Mode X AXIS Select Display BR X Trace Y Trace gT Rangei 5 606di CH1 CH2 feT Range2 5 060di Mode CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Math1 Math2 T Y amp X OTN 9 Press the Y Trace soft key The Y Trace menu appears 10 Select the waveform to be assigned to the Y axis KY Mode X Axis Select Display X Trace Y Trace T Range1 5 606di T Y amp X Pingle Dual Kyi x 2 OFF PN CH1 CH2 T Range2 5 060di Mode X Axis Select Display CH1 CH2 T Y amp X Y Bingie Dual xyz OFF phy Setting the Display Range 11 Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to T Range1 T Range2 or both T Range1 and T Range 2 e If you select T Range1 you can set the start point of the X Y waveform display e If you select T Range2 you can set the end point of the X Y waveform display lf you select both T Range1 and T Range2 you can move the start and end points of the X Y waveform display without changing the spacing between the two The value of the digit being specified by T Range1 changes T Y amp X Y Pingle Dual KYI xyz Mathi N 2 Mode X Axis Select Display X Trace Y Trace gT Rangei 5 000di T Y amp X Pingle Dual RYi xyz OFF pN CH1 CH2 EE li 12 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start and en
463. o both simple and enhanced triggers Setting the Hold Off 11 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in section 6 4 Selecting the Trigger Source You can select from CH1 to CH4 2 For the procedure of setting the external signal applied to the EXT TRIG IN terminal on the rear panel as the trigger source setting the trigger source to EXT see section 6 6 For the procedure of activating the trigger in sync with the power supplied to the instrument setting the trigger source to line see section 6 7 The terminal located on the rear panel of the DL1740 DL1740EL and on the front panel of the DL1720E Setting the Trigger Level The selectable range is eight divisions within the screen The resolution is 0 01 divisions For example the resolution for 2 mV div is 0 02 mV You can also press the RESET key to reset the trigger level to the current offset voltage Setting the Trigger Slope You can select how the trigger source is to cross a specified level for activating the trigger from the following three choices f Activated when the trigger source changes from below the trigger level to above the trigger level rising Activated when the trigger source changes from above the trigger level to below the trigger level falling ft Activated on either a rising edge or falling edge IM 701730 01E 6 9 s n el 6 5 Setting the Edge Trigger SIMPLE Setting the Trigger C
464. o the FTP client LPR and SMTP Normally these parameters do not need to be specified Turning the FTP Passive Mode ON and OFF FTP Passive Turn this function ON when using the instrument behind a firewall that requires the passive mode The default setting is OFF A firewall is furnished on a system that has security features It prevents intrusion from the outside into the network system Setting the LPR Timeout Time LPR Time Out The instrument closes the connection to the printer if there is no response for a certain period of time timeout time while it attempts to access the printer The selectable range is 0 to 3600 s The default setting is 15 s Setting the SMTP Timeout Time SMTP Time Out When a mail server is accessed from the instrument and connection cannot be established after a certain period of time timeout time the instrument decides that the connection to the mail server is not possible and closes the connection The selectable range is 0 to 3600 s The default setting is 15 s 13 50 IM 701730 01E 13 11 Using the Instrument as a Network Drive Procedure L1720E DL1740E DL1740EL Settings Setup TCP IP and user account and connect to the network according to the procedures given in section 13 2 Setting Up TCP IP and 13 6 Accessing the instrument from a PC or Workstation FTP Server Function Registering the Network Drive on the PC iL 2 Open My Network Places From the T
465. ocedure see section 8 7 gt You can change the type of graticule that is displayed to suit your needs For example you can show a grid on the screen or show only the frame Displaying Scale Values lt For the setup procedure see section 8 8 gt The upper and lower limits scale values of the vertical and horizontal axis of each channel can be displayed For a display example see Normal Display Screen in section 1 3 Displaying Waveform Labels lt For the setup procedure see section 8 9 gt You can arbitrarily set a waveform label for the waveforms input on each channel using up to eight characters For a display example see Normal Display Screen in section 1 3 Translucent Display lt For the setup procedure see section 8 10 gt The dialog boxes that appear during setup operation become translucent allowing the contents underneath the dialog boxes to be seen 2 20 IM 701730 01E 2 5 Waveform Computation Addition Subtraction and Multiplication lt For the setup procedure see section 9 2 gt Addition subtraction and multiplication can be performed between waveforms of CH1 and CH1 to CH4 CH2 and CH1 to CH4 CH3 and CH1 to CH4 or Math1 and CH4 and CH1 to CH4 or Math1 or between CH1 and CH1 to CH2 or CH2 and CH1 to CH2 on the DL1720E The computed result becomes the Math1 or Math2 waveform or the Math1 waveform for the DL1720E Addition and subtraction are useful functions when comparing wavefor
466. oljeiodg uowwog g 4 1 Operations and Functions of Keys and the Jog Shuttle Operations on the Setup Dialog Box In the explanations in this manual jog shuttle amp SELECT refers to the following operation 1 Open the setup dialog box using basic key operations or other means 2 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the item you wish to set 3 Press SELECT The behavior that results when you press SELECT varies depending on the item as described below When selecting a medium directory or file name on the File List window you operate the jog shuttle to move the cursor and select using the SELECT key This operation is also referred to as jog shuttle amp SELECT Setup Dialog Box Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the item you wish to set I M1 Setup 5 T T CHI 10 1 20 0 Usdiv Source1 G DC Full CHz 10 1 Operation 1 0 500 Udiv DC Full Source2 H l Scale Puto Manual Center 0 0000E 00 H Sensitivity j l Unit Pa l CT i TWU CH Auto i I Y 43 333E 0 Y2 44 167E 0 TEST a 87 500E 00 so ons HATH 1 Display ja M1 Setup Mi Label Z Display ja MZ Setup M2 Label DFF oN C1 C2 Math1 DFF oN C3 C4 Mathz When Source is selected G Mi Setup Source Operation Source2 Scale Center Sensitivity Unit Smoothing h Se lect CHI CH2 0 0000E 00 C 5 0000E 0i_ E r oN When Center is se
467. oming the Waveform Explanation Zoomed waveforms of two locations can be displayed simultaneously dual zoom You can also specify which channels to zoom Zoom is possible until the number of displayed points is 50 or less or 40 or less depending on the time axis setting Selecting the Display Method for Zoomed Waveforms Mode Main Displays only the main unzoomed waveform Z1 Only Displays only the zoomed waveform of zoom box Z1 Z2 Only Displays only the zoomed waveform of zoom box Z2 Main amp Z1 Displays the main waveform in the top window and zoomed waveform of zoom box Z1 in the bottom window Main amp Z2 Displays the main waveform in the top window and zoomed waveform of zoom box Z2 in the bottom window Z18 amp 22 Displays the zoomed waveform of zoom box Z1 in the top window and the zoomed waveform of zoom box Z2 in the bottom window Main amp Z1 amp Z2 Displays the main waveform in the top window the zoomed waveform of zoom box Z1 in the lower left window and the zoomed waveform of zoom box Z2 in the lower right window Selecting the Waveform to Be Zoomed Allocation Waveforms whose Allocation had been turned ON CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 or CH1 and CH2 Math1 on the DL1720E are zoomed Waveforms whose Allocation had been turned OFF are not zoomed You cannot zoom waveforms whose display is turned OFF Display Format of Zoomed Waveforms Format Like the main waveform six types Main1 Single Dual Triad
468. on t Care trigger occurs on the Enter or Exit condition of the True False condition of the parallel pattern Parallel pattern is the AND of the state of each channel 17 2 IM 701730 01E 17 2 Trigger Section Item Description Pulse Width Trigger occurs on the True False width of the parallel pattern of multiple trigger sources Parallel pattern is the AND of the status of the channels or the AND of the window conditions of the channels Pulse gt Time Trigger occurs when the width described above is greater than Time Pulse lt Time Trigger occurs when the width described above is smaller than Time T1 lt Pulse lt T2 Trigger occurs when the width described above is greater than T1 and smaller than T2 Time Out Trigger occurs when the width described exceeds Time Specified time 1nsto1s Time accuracy 0 5 of the setting 1 ns Minimum time detection width 2 ns typical value TV Activates a trigger on the video signal of various formats NTSC PAL SECAM 1080 60i 1080 50i 720 60p 480 60p 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 24sF and 1080 60p CH1 is the only input channel Field number and line number selectable Condition A and Condition B are parallel patterns set using High Low and Don t Care on each channel CH1 to CH4 Trigger gate Trigger can be activated only when the trigger condition is met when the input from the trigger gate input terminal TRIG GATE IN is active Active level c
469. on ame located above the soft keys Setup pisPLay CoPY MAGE SAVE o SHIFT e Fora description of the operation using a USB oa mO e al keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 ACTION DELAY AA OEE Ge re 1 Press one of the CH1 to CH4 2 keys to select the channel The CH menu appears 2 Press the Probe soft key The Probe menu appears CH1 Probe 5 Offset Banduidth Next 10 1 0 00OkU Full 172 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired attenuation current to voltage conversion ratio then set the attenuation ratio Display Position f Coupling OFF pN 0 00a f ncmo 10A 1U 100A 1U 1 1 10 1 0 1U7A 0 01U7A WM 100 1 1000 1 Next 172 Explanation You can select the attenuation or the current to voltage conversion ratio of the probe of each channel according to the probe being used from the following Probe attenuation 1 1 10 1 100 1 1000 1 Probe current to voltage conversion ratio 10A 1 V 0 1 V A 100A 1 V 0 01 V A The output voltage of the supported current probe is indicated inside the parentheses Note If the attenuation or the current to voltage conversion ratio is not set correctly the voltage and scale values of the input signals will not be displayed correctly For example if you set the attenuation to 1 1 when you are actually using a 10 1 probe the displayed value for the waveform
470. on screen image a SU SUNT ese sees han ge cai heat kad nese eke Geen screen image data ceeseseesesesseceeseesseessseeesseteneeeseese 12 33 erae E E TET E 1 5 P search and zoom 2 24 10 14 e search IOQIC skies cress ccc aks tec caecsacesssshsadenscteccettecests 10 8 10 12 page description language sseeeeeeeeee 11 9 11 12 Search parameter oo cceccsssecscsseessssesessessesceseesesseseeseeseaneaee 10 12 panel key EEE ETITI TITATEA TETTI TITI ET TITTET ETAIT TITTI TTIE 1 4 search zone parallel pattern search 2 25 10 18 select zone PASSWOL nssnsssssttssesitssennttennntiennntrnnnnnntnnnnnneeen N E e EE E A E ET pattem tiggor sx cicacccsccrvai sere sacapess detecresasecteasterdcasestn send mail PC card s s s SONSIIVILY aE PC Card Test sequential StOre oo eeesess ees essessesestssessessesessessesesees performing automated measurements of waveform parameter serial pattern search 7 a e a susie sterstiess teas Peeve trnees 10 53 SOUING nhera Titans Annee Anenaied periodic mail 13 13 SETUP o cccccccscsssssesseseesssnssssseesessescessesssnsseeseenesceseeseeseseeseenens PhAaSe COPECTION 0 eee eee eee 3 11 setup dialog box phase SHift sessseeeseecssesesstecssneeessteessseeeesieessseeeeseensneesees 2 21 setup information list polarity 6 35 S tUP MENU ccsesseeees POSITION 1 5 shifting the phase POWET ooo et cence ener 3 5 Signal INDULTORMINA svc vcsceeedcctoe
471. onditions see section 17 11 after the warm up 2 1 digit is the amount that cannot be determined due to sampling error 3 On the DL1740E DL1740EL the terminals are EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN TRIG GATE IN and on the DL1720E it is labeled EXT IM 701730 01E 17 3 s a suoneaioads 17 4 Display Item Description Display 6 4 color TFT LCD monitor Display screen size 130 6 mm width x 97 0 mm height Total number of pixels 640 x 480 Display resolution of the 500 x 384 waveform display RGB Liquid crystal display may include a few defective pixels within 40 ppm with respect to the total number of pixels including There may be few pixels on the liquid crystal display that do not turn ON all the time or that remain ON all the time This is not an indication of a defective product 17 5 Functions Acquisition and Display Item Description Acquisition mode Select from four acquisition modes normal envelope averaging and box average Sampling mode Switch between realtime sampling and repetitive sampling at some of the time axis settings Record length DL1740E Select from 1 kWord 10 kWord 50 kWord 100 kWord 250 kWord 500 kWord 1 MWord 2 MWord DL1740EL Select from 1 kWord 10 kWord 50 kWord 100 kWord 250 kWord 500 kWord 1 MWord 2 MWord 4 MWord 8 MWord DL1720E Select from 1 kWord 10 kWord 50 kWord 100 kWord 250 kWord 500 kWord 1 MWord
472. ons 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select a value in the range of 1 to 3 Storage media that are already partitioned can be selected and formatted as separate storage media but the separate storage media cannot be partitioned further Format Utility FILE Function a Partition ledia Info Exec Format 1 IM 701730 01E 12 9 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 12 4 Formatting the Storage Medium Executing OK Aborting Cancel the Format Operation 8 9 Press the Exec soft key The Alert dialog box opens Function a a edia Info Format Exec Format Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select OK execute or Cancel File List File Nane Size Space 1457664 585216 Please Conf irm Once FORMAT is executed all the saved data will be erased for good Do you really want to do it Cancel Utility Function fa a edia Info Format Exec Format Displaying Media Information Select the storage medium according to steps 1 to 5 on page 12 8 6 Press the Media Info soft key The information about the storage medium that was selected in step 5 is displayed Media Info File Name Media Name FDO Media Size 1457664 byte mja FD Used Space 872448 byte Vacant Space 585216 byte Partition Size 1 ja Format Functionf fa ledia Info Format 12 10 IM 701730 01E 12 4 Formatting the Storage Medium Explanation Formattin
473. onse l Response display area Clear Response Area Interval 2s M sTART STOP Indicator IM 701730 01E 13 39 Ieuondo suonesaiunwwos 3u1 4 3 g 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Sending Commands Command IEEE 488 2 e Entering Transmission Commands Enter the commands in the transmission command entry area The maximum number of input characters is 50 000 50 KB e Transmission Command Send Click Send The commands in the transmission command entry area are sent collectively in the order displayed in the area e Clearing the Entered Commands Clear Command Area Click Clear Command Area All the commands in the transmission command entry area are cleared Displaying the Responses from the Instrument Response Receives and displays the responses from the instrument against the commands queries sent to the instrument using the control script function e Clearing the Responses Clear Response Area Click Clear Response Area All the responses received from the instrument that are displayed in the response display area are cleared Periodic Sending of Commands and Displaying of Responses Periodically sends the commands in the transmission command entry area If commands queries that request responses from the instrument are sent the responses from the instrument are displayed in the response display area e Setting the Transmission Interval Select the command transmission interval 2s 5s 1
474. ools menu choose Map Network Drive The Map Network Drive dialog box opens Select the drive to be mapped from the Drive list box In the Folder text box type the IP address of the instrument in the following format http instrument IP address dav Map Network Drive Windows can help you connect to a shared network folder and assign a drive letter to the connection so that you can access the Folder using My Computer Specify the drive letter for the connection and the folder that you want to connect to Drive Z v Folder b Browse Example server share M Reconnect at logon Connect using a different user name Sign up for online storage or connect to a network server Cancel Click Finish If a user account is set up with the FTP server function a dialog box for entering the user name and password opens see section 13 6 Accessing the instrument from a PC or Workstation FTP Server Function If a user account is not set up the instrument is registered as a network drive If the dialog box for entering the user name and password opens enter the user name and password that were created using the User Account function of the instrument and then click OK Connecting to 10 0 228 206 User name g Password Remember my password Disconnecting the Instrument Mapped as a Network Drive 1 2 From the Tools menu choose Disconnect Network Drive The Disconnect Network Drives
475. or 20 MHz if you wish to use a signal that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger source signal as the trigger source Setting the Determination Time The selectable range is 1 ns to 1 s and the resolution is 1 ns Relationship with Window When Window is turned ON a trigger is also activated on the time over which the parallel pattern of the window condition IN OUT or X of each channel is met or not met For details on the window trigger see section 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Notes on Setting the Width Trigger The trigger may not operate correctly if the interval between pulses or the pulse width of the signal is less than 2 ns The time accuracy of the pulse width under standard operating conditions after calibration is 0 5 of setting 1 ns However the setting for T1 lt PLS lt T2 is the T2 value IM 701730 01E 6 27 s n el 6 12 Setting the OR Trigger ENHANCED lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 10 gt Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC Trace zgr SHOT HELP located above the soft keys m O b O e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog Erea Cue use a shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of seTup eee eras 3A72 o SHFr selecting setting items and entering values u
476. or arbitrary settings You can also automatically set to the optimum values for the current probe 700937 701930 701931 and 701932 sold separately 2 32 IM 701730 01E 2 8 Other Useful Functions Printing Screen Images lt For the setup procedure see chapter 11 gt Screen images can be printed on the built in printer option USB printer or network printer when the Ethernet interface option is installed Ethernet pe NIE USB PERIPHERAL Printer eee of Printer w T5 DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL Saving and Loading Data from the Storage Medium lt For the setup procedure see chapter 12 gt The DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL allows various data to be stored to and loaded from the following storage media e Floppy disk or PC card External USB storage MO disk drive hard disk drive flash memory e Network drive when the Ethernet interface option is installed 0 USB PERIPHERAL USB device 2313 ERA Flo disk or PC card PEY DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL Network drives Ethernet Saving and Loading Setup Data Waveform Data and Snapshot Waveforms lt For the setup procedure see sections 12 5 to 12 7 gt The setup data waveform data and snapshot waveforms can be saved to or loaded from a selected storage medium Saving Screen Image Data and Displaying the Thumbnails of the Stored Screen Ima
477. ord length is set to 100 kW waveform data of CH1 to CH4 are saved MATH1 and MATH2 are turned OFF and using history waveform 1 condition Data Type Extension Data Size Bytes Binary WVF Approx 850 K 100 kW 32 x four channels x the number of history waveforms x 2 46 K HDR Approx 2 K approx 3 K when Math1 and Math2 are ON ASCII CSV 4 to 5M byte Float FLD Approx 1 6 M 100 kW 32 x four channels x the number of history waveforms x 4 IM 701730 01E 12 17 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Burnes 12 5 Saving Loading the Waveform Data Waveforms to Be Saved e You can save all the waveforms or the selected waveform from CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 and Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 on the DL1720E e The setup data including vertical axis horizontal axis and trigger of the waveform to be saved is also saved For waveforms that are loaded using the history memory function you can select whether to save all of the history waveforms or save just the current displayed waveform on the screen You can also save only the results obtained by searching the history waveforms For a description of searching the history waveforms see section 10 2 or 10 3 For a description of snapshot waveforms see section 12 7 Range of Waveform to Be Saved You can select the range area of a waveform to be saved Only the data that has been saved by selecting Binary in the aforementioned section Data Type and Extension can b
478. ording to the table below repetitive sampling is performed The T div settings for performing repetitive sampling vary depending on the specified record length Record Length T div 1 kWord ns div to 100 ns div 1 ns div to 50 ns div 1 10 kWord 1 ns div to 1 us div 1 ns div to 500 ns div 50 kWord 1 ns div to 5 us div 1 ns div to 2 us div 100 kWord 1 ns div to 10 us div 1 ns div to 5 us div 250 kWord 1 ns div to 20 us div 1 ns div to 10 us div 500 kWord 1 ns div to 50 us div 1 ns div to 20 us div 1 MWord 1 ns div to 100 us div 1 ns div to 50 us div 2 MWord 1 ns div to 200 us div 1 ns div to 100 ps div 4 MWord 1 ns div to 500 ps div 1 ns div to 200 us div 8 MWord 1 ns div to 500 us div e The selectable record length varies depending on the model For details see section 7 2 The values inside the parentheses are the selectable ranges when interleave mode is ON Notes on Repetitive Sampling When repetitive sampling is in progress waveform acquisition using the Single N trigger mode is not possible IM 701730 01E 7 5 Setting the Acquisition Mode lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 14 gt Procedure ya LI ueasune cursOR FILE misc conosco marr X Y_ MENU _ MENU PHAI ESC A O To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3
479. ork Systen wervieu Next Control Conf ig 172 3 Press the Others soft key The Others dialog box opens _ MISC fa a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive f Net Prin Others Comect Setup Account Setup f Setup Setup Log List 4 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the Time Hour of Time Difference From GMT in the range of 12 to 13 5 Likewise set the Minutes of the Time Difference From GMT in the range of 0 to 59 Others FTP Passive LPR Time Out sec SMTP Time Out sec Time Difference From GMT Tine Hour Set the hours Hinute Set the minutes Exec at Power On Server Time Out sec Note The minutes can be set only when the Time Hour is set to 11 to 12 The minutes can not be set if the Time Hour is set to 12 or 13 IM 701730 01E 13 45 Ieuondo suonesaiunwwos 3u1 34 3 g 13 8 Setting the Time Difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time Explanation Setting SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol 6 Use the jog shuttle to set Exec at Power On to ON or OFF 7 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to enter Server IP address of the SNTP server 8 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to enter Time out in the range of 1 to 60 s Others FTP Passive LPR Tine Out sec SMTP Time Out sec Select whether to retrieve ON or not retrieve OFF time information from an NTP server or SNTP server connected to the network when the power to th
480. orm 7 1 acquisition first 703 There is no data to be undone Undo is not possible because the data immediately 4 4 4 5 before the initialization or auto setup does not exist 704 Cannot be executed while data acquisition is Press the START STOP key to stop the waveform 7 1 acquisition first 705 Cannot be executed while data store recall is in 12 1 progress 706 There is no data to be recalled 12 1 707 Cannot start during data output Wait until the output is complete Chapter 11 711 Cannot access file while hard copying Wait until the output is complete 11 2 712 Cannot compress this screen image Turn OFF the compression setting 12 9 Turn off the compression switch 713 Calibration failure Servicing required Disconnect the input and execute again If it fails again servicing is required 726 Cannot start when loading waveform data that Execute unload 12 5 has been saved in history All mode 727 Insufficient output data Increase Mag or widen the Time Range interval 11 2 Increase Mag or widen the Time Range interval 728 Hard copying Press COPY again to abort 11 2 Abort or wait until it is complete 729 Cannot perform calibration while waveform data Unload the loaded waveform using the FILE menu 12 5 is loaded 730 Pattern is not specified Set at least one of the search pattern to a value 10 4 other than x 731 Cannot start when waveform data that has been Unload the loaded waveform using the FILE menu 12 5 acquired in the li
481. other parameters to the optimum values for CMOS or ECL signals or to arbitrary values e Presets can also be applied to all channels at once TIME DIV Knob Section 5 11 Sets the horizontal axis time axis scale If you change the setting when waveform acquisition is stopped the new setting takes effect when you restart waveform acquisition ZOOM Key Section 8 4 Displays a menu used to set the zoom display of waveforms SHIFT ZOOM SEARCH Key Section 10 4 Displays a menu used to set waveform searches Search and Zoom function IM 701730 01E 1 2 Panel Keys and Knobs Triggers Qa O TRIG D o emee ENHANCED MODE ACTION DELAY MODE Key Sections 6 1 and 7 6 Displays a menu used to set the trigger mode and sequential store SHIFT MODE ACTION Key Section 6 15 Displays a menu used to set the action on trigger SIMPLE Key Sections 6 5 to 6 7 Displays a menu used to set the simple trigger normal edge trigger The simple trigger setting is activated when the indicator located above and to the left of the SIMPLE key is illuminated ENHANCED Key Sections 6 8 to 6 14 Displays a menu used to set the enhanced trigger activates complex triggers such as pattern triggers The enhanced trigger setting is activated when the indicator located above and to the left of the ENHANCED key is illuminated POSITION Key Section 6 2 Displays a menu used to s
482. ou press the START STOP key The default setting is Infinite You cannot change the acquisition count while measurement is in progress Stop the measurement first Normal Envelope and Box Average 2 to 65536 1 step Infinite Averaging 2 to 65536 2 steps Infinite Notes on Averaging e Averaging is effective only for repetitive waveforms Correct averaging is not possible if the waveform has imperfect triggering incomplete synchronization and the displayed waveform will be distorted When working with this type of signal set the trigger mode to Normal so that the waveform display is updated only when the trigger is activated see section 6 1 Roll mode display is disabled when averaging is used If you stop waveform acquisition by pressing the START STOP key the averaging process also stops Averaging restarts from the beginning when acquisition resumes If you are using simple averaging the instrument terminates acquisition automatically when it completes the specified number of acquisitions acquisition count When in repetitive sampling mode only exponential averaging is executed uosinboy woane M a 7 6 Performing Sequential Store SINGLE N Mode lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 16 gt Procedure FRAGE zgr SHOT HELP HISTORY SA ba O O To exit the menu during operation press ESC i ed Ed iim located above the soft keys setup oispLay ory mace save o
483. ount of shift at the new T div setting IM 701730 01E 9 17 uoneyndwoy WAdJOAe e Chapter 10 Analyzing and Searching Waveforms 10 1 Displaying History Waveforms Procedure LLLUELIN setup JpisPLay Copy mace SAvE O SHIFT SEARCH OTAG D o CD Smee ENHANCED VzDIV TIME sDIV iad i ACTION DELAY Crem S lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 23 gt P HELP WeASURE CURSOR 2 FILE msc conosco maTH A emo X Y MENU MENU CPHASE To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press HISTORY The HISTORY menu appears Displaying History Waveforms One by One 2 Press the Select Record soft key HISTORY fe Select j Display start Rega Bearch Mode Record o Shou Map o mg ai ff End Rec OFF 12 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select the number of the record to be displayed You can select the record number in the range of Start Rec to End Rec shown on the menu 4 Press the Display soft key to select One Only the waveform of the record number indicated in Select Record on the menu is displayed HISTORY fj Select Display Start Rega Bearch Mode Record o Shou Map All f End Rec OFF 12 Accumulating Collectively Displaying the History Waveforms e Setting the Range to be Accumulated
484. oupling You can select from the following AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as is Setting the HF Rejection Specify 15 kHz or 20 MHz if you wish to use a signal that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger source signal as the trigger source Setting the Hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that triggers are not activated by small changes in the trigger signal J Approximately 0 3 divisions of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approximately one division of hysteresis around the trigger level The value above is an approximate value It is not strictly warranted Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 6 10 IM 701730 01E 6 6 Setting the External Trigger SIMPLE Procedure 8 LIS Genee ue msc cono co marn feser tect MENO MENU Pane Aca aca srannsror SETUP paneja IMAGE SOn GD C cow SEARCH ee TIME DIV GD Setting the Trigger Source OF f To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press SIMPLE The SIMPLE menu appears 2 Press the Source soft key The Source menu appears SIMPLE Source 5 Level Slope CHL 1
485. output color in this format Turn OFF the color 11 3 862 Zones cannot be edited in the following cases Display the main window and the target waveform 10 9 When the main window is not displayed When the target waveform is not displayed 863 The zone waveform does not exist Create the zone waveform 10 9 864 The zone is being edited To perform other Select Quit to exit zone editing 10 9 operations select Quit to exit zone editing 865 Zones determination is not possible in the Display the main window and the target window 10 9 following cases and create the zone waveform When the main window is not displayed When the target waveform is not displayed When the zone waveform does not exist 868 Processing statistics To perform other Abort statistical processing 10 7 operations abort the statistical processing Error in System Operation 900 to 908 912 to 914 Code Message Corrective Action Sections 901 Failed to backup setup data Will initialize Servicing required The backup battery may be flat 906 Fan stopped Turn OFF the power immediately Turn off the power immediately Servicing required 907 Backup battery is flat Servicing is required for battery replacement 912 Fatal error in the communication driver Servicing required Note If servicing is required initialize the instrument once for confirmation 16 6 IM 701730 01E 16 3 Performing a Self Test Procedure SELECT g
486. ow appear FILE File Item ja a a Save Load Unload Utility Snap Selecting the Load Source Medium Directory 5 The procedure is the same as steps 14 to 15 on page 12 14 Selecting the File to Be Loaded 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file Selecting the Snapshot Waveform to Be Loaded 7 Press the Destination soft key Displays a menu used to select snapshot waveforms FILE jest ination Filter Property oad Exec Snap1 ee Snap 8 Press one of the soft keys Snap1 to Snap4 to select the load destination of the snapshot waveform i Load FILE Snap2 Snap3 Snap4 jad Exec Snap IM 701730 01E 12 27 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 12 7 Saving Loading the Snapshot Waveforms Executing the Load Operation 9 Press the Load Exec soft key The selected file is read from the directory indicated in Path At the same time the Load Exec soft key changes to the Abort soft key File List Path NetWork Software Space 2147483647 byte File Name Size Date Attr FD 1 NetWork 1 12 0001 38462 2004 05 14 10 16 RW 12 8000 38462 2004 05 14 10 16 RW E fest ination Filter Property oad Exec Snap1 pe SNP Snap Aborting the Load Operation 10 Press the Abort soft key The load operation is aborted At the same time the Abort soft key changes to the Load Exec soft key Specifying the File and Properties to Be Displayed on the Fi
487. p SELECT to select the determination type Type box 6 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the search target waveform Source box 7 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the level for determining whether the polarity is high or low Level box 10 20 IM 701730 01E 10 4 Searching Waveforms Using the Search and Zoom Function 8 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the polarity high or low used to perform determination Polarity box 9 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the hysteresis width of the level for detecting the edge Hysteresis box The interval from the point where the level of the search target waveform passes from below the specified lower limit of hysteresis to above and including the upper limit of hysteresis to the point where the level changes from above the specified upper limit of hysteresis to below and including the lower limit of hysteresis is determined to be the high pulse width The interval from the point where the level of the search target waveform passes from above the specified upper limit of hysteresis to below and including the lower limit of hysteresis to the point where the level changes from below the specified lower limit of hysteresis to above and including the upper limit of hysteresis is determined to be the low pulse width For the determination of the polarity when the change in the search target level does not apply to high or low conditions described above see the expla
488. p 7 ans 1ucen pE oN Auto Fixed User DISPLAY Back 272 IM 701730 01E 8 1 Aejdsig uonewnozuj pue Aejdsig woane M e 8 1 Changing the Display Format Explanation 7 Press the Set Mapping soft key The Set Mapping dialog box appears The settings related to CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1720E Set Mapping ansiucent Mapping fa et Mapping Back DEF oN User 272 8 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the position number of each channel You can choose the number of divisions for the analog waveform display window The position of the waveform displayed on each channel varies depending on the display format Display Format Format Single 3 windows Dual 2 windows Triad 3 windows Quad 4 windows DL1740E DL1740EL only Hexa 6 windows DL1740E DL1740EL only Waveform Mapping e Auto The channels CH1 CH2 Mathi Math2 are assigned in order to the split windows starting from the top with the exception of channels on which display is turned OFF e Fixed Channels set not to display are also assigned to channels Math1 is assigned to the second display frame from the bottom and Math2 is displayed in the bottom display frame e User Numbers 0 to 5 are assigned to CH1 CH2 Mathi and Math2 The display position varies depending on the assigned number CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not available on the DL1720E Assignment Example When Displ
489. page 12 21 Selecting the File to Be Loaded 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file Executing the Load Operation 7 Press the Load Exec soft key The selected file is read from the directory indicated in Path At the same time the Load Exec soft key changes to the Abort soft key File List Path NetWork Software Space 2147483647 byte File Nane Size Date Attr FD 1 NetWork 1 12 0001 63222 2004 05 14 09 24 12 0000 63222 2004 05 14 69 24 lv oad oad Exec Setup a Filter Property Aborting the Load Operation 8 Press the Abort soft key The load operation is aborted At the same time the Abort soft key changes to the Load Exec soft key Specifying the File and Properties to Be Displayed on the File List Window 9 The procedure is the same as steps 14 to 16 on page 12 22 IM 701730 01E 12 23 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 12 6 Saving Loading Settings Explanation Setup Data That Are Saved The setup data existing at the time the store operation is executed can be saved However setup data such as the date time and communications settings are not saved Data Size The size of the setup data is approximately 47 KB However if GO NO GO determination is performed using zones see section 10 9 4 KB of data is added for each registered zone Storage Medium and Directory Storage media with which saving and loading are possible are displayed o
490. pe Select Trace a Pos x ursor Jun Jump Exec Marker M2 M3 M CH1 3 000di to 21 9 Press the to Z1 or to Z2 soft key to select the jump destination of the cursor Tope Select Trace je Pos to 21 to z2 Marker finz ma md chi 3 0004 10 Press the Jump Exec soft key The cursor jumps to the specified zoom waveform display frame oh Type Select Trace f Pos x ursor Juj ump Exec Marker M2 M3 M CH1 3 000di to 21 10 34 IM 701730 01E 10 5 Cursor Measurements Measuring Waveforms Using Angle Cursors When X Y Waveforms Are Not Displayed 1 Press CURSOR The CURSOR menu appears Selecting the Degree Angle Cursor 2 3 Press the Type soft key The Type menu appears CURSOR Type OFF Press the Degree soft key CURSOR OFF lor izontal f Vertical Marker Degree Selecting the Waveform to Measure 4 5 Press the Trace soft key The Trace menu appears CURSOR 3 cursori je Refi eRef Vaiuetursor Jum 4 000dit 2 000dit lump Exec 5 Cursor2 j6 Ref2 360 C1 to 21 4 000di 2 000di Press the All CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 or Math2 soft key to select the waveform to measure e On the DL1740E DL1740EL you can select from All CH1 to CH4 Math1 and Math2 e On the DL1720E you can select All CH1 CH2 and Math1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 yy Type Trace Degree CH1 PON OOO Setting th
491. ped you can search the displayed waveforms within the display record length see appendix 1 and display the waveforms that match the search conditions expanded on the screen Edge Search Search is performed on the number of times the waveform goes above or below rising or falling a specified level Search condition Edge rising edge and detection count 2 Search start point Detection position r Hysteresis Specified level Displays the detected section expanded N in the zoom waveform display frame Serial Pattern Search Search is performed on whether the serial status pattern of the waveform status pattern of the waveform that changes over time is the same as the status pattern set in advance You can also set whether the timing used to detect the waveform status up to sixty four statuses is synchronized to a selected clock signal or is performed at certain time intervals Condition Clock channel CH1 slope on which to check the status rising and searched waveform CH2 AARAA e ay ae ee cee CH2 status L H L L H L 8245s H L L Previously specified pattern L L H L case H X L L H High level i T L Low level Detects the section that is the same as the specified pattern X Don t care Displays the waveform expanded in the zoom waveform display frame 2 24 IM 701730 01E 2 6 Analyzing and Searching Waveforms Parallel Pattern Search S
492. possible to perform processing on data and display waveforms based on the processed data The following four types of data processing are available Normal Mode In this mode sampled data is stored in the acquisition memory without processing 2 14 IM 701730 01E 2 4 Waveform Acquisition and Display Conditions Averaging Mode Averaging is a process in which waveforms are acquired repeatedly to obtain the average of waveform data at the same time point the same time in relation to the trigger point The instrument takes the exponential or simple average of the waveform data and writes the results to the acquisition memory The averaged data is then used to generate the display You can set an average count of Infinite for exponential averaging or in the range from 2 to 65536 in 2 steps where n is a natural number for simple averaging Set the attenuation constant for exponential averaging in the range from 2 to 256 2 steps where n is a natural number Exponential averaging when set to infinite Simple average when set to 2 to 65536 N Xn An N 1 An 1 Xn ie N N An nt averaged value Xn n measured value Xn nt measured value N Average count N Attenuation constant 2 to 256 2 steps acquisition count 2 steps Envelope Mode In normal mode and averaging mode the sample rate the number of times data is acquired per second in the acquisition memory drops if T div is increased See appendix 1
493. ppear pO File Item Data Type ja a a ja Save Load Unload Utility Waveform f Binary Selecting the Medium and Directory 3 The procedure is the same as steps 14 to 15 on page 12 14 Changing the File Attribute 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file 5 Press the Attr soft key The attribute of the selected file changes To delete a file change the file attribute to R W read write File List Path NetWork Software Space 2147483647 byte File Name Size Date Attr FD NetWork lt 88 ea Be 9e 2 2004 05 10 14 42 12 0001 A 68126 2004 05 13 19 39 12 0000 al 68126 2004 05 13 19 38 lv ji c JE TLE Fi Le et Reset A11 Set property attr ferete lete Delete Exec 12 42 IM 701730 01E 12 11 Changing the File Attributes and Deleting Files Deleting Files 6 Press the Function soft key The Function menu appears Utility FILE Function jea fa Filter set Reset A11 Set Property Attr Delete Delete Stil Exec 7 Press the Delete soft key Utility C FILE Delete Copy Rename Make Dir Format Attr Delete Exec e Selecting Resetting the File to Be Deleted One at a Time 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file 9 Press the Set Reset soft key An asterisk is displayed to the left of the selected file to indicate that it will be deleted Pressing the Set Reset soft key again removes the asterisk to the left of the selected file Pro
494. ppears If you press a key while the help window is displayed the help window shrinks If you press a key while the small help window is displayed a help window containing information about the key appears Clearing the Help Window If you press the HELP key again while a help window is displayed the help window closes 4 22 IM 701730 01E Chapter5 Vertical and Horizontal Axes 5 1 Turning Channels ON and OFF Procedure wom FS ma z O JO e To exit the menu during operation press ESC ED Cruz msc Joonoad marn SEAS CUSOR ERE WSC GON e crn 400 sranrisror feser tect located above the soft keys MENU _ MENU Caoa ee For a description of the operation using a USB ER keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 CAE ACTION DELAY a gt So JOIO ly 1 Press one of the CH1 to CH4 2 keys to select the channel The CH menu appears 2 Press the Display soft key to select ON or OFF You can also turn ON OFF the channel by pressing CH1 to CH4 2 twice 2004 04 15 18 r fi ick Normal Stopped El 5MS S_200HS iv lt lt Mainkiok gt gt CHI 10 1 0 500 U div DC Full nl Edge CH1 F Auto 0 290 V Position Coupling Probe fe Offset Bandwidt Next O OOdiv DCMR 10 1 6 000 V Full 172 Visplay OFF pN Explanation For channels that are turned ON the LED to the left of the channel key illumina
495. pprox 31 3 kHz TTL negative logic H 14 Vertical sync signal Approx 60 Hz TTL negative logic L 15 5 1 000 0 OOO CO00 VIDEO OUT VGA 15 11 D Sub 15 pin receptacle Connecting to the Monitor 1 Turn OFF the instrument and monitor 2 Connect the instrument and the monitor using an analog RGB cable 3 The screen of the instrument appears on the monitor when both the instrument and the monitor are turned ON Note e The RGB video signal is constantly output from the VIDEO OUT VGA terminal e The monitor screen may flicker if the instrument or another instrument is brought close to the monitor The edge of the screen may drop out depending on the monitor type 14 6 IM 701730 01E Chapter 15 Other Operations 15 1 Changing the Message and Menu Language and Turning the Click Sound ON and OFF Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 X Y_ MEN JENU Setup _ DisPLAY COPY mAGE SAVE O SHIFT C mn A COR SEARCH O TRIGD xCD n Q z 2 smece ENHANCED VeDIV TIME sDIV ACTION DELAY 1 Press the MISC The MISC menu appears 2 Press the System Config soft key to display a configuration menu a a a ja alibration Remote Netuorki System Ivervieu Next Control Conf ig 172 Setting the Menu Language 3 Press the Menu Languag
496. probe attenuation set to 1 1 4 Typical value represents a typical or average value It is not strictly warranted 5 Automatically set to the optimum values for the current probe 700937 701930 701931 or 701932 sold separately IM 701730 01E 17 1 s a suoneaoads 17 2 Trigger Section Item Description Trigger mode Auto auto level normal single and single N Trigger source CH1 to CH4 signal input from each input terminal LINE commercial power supply signal that is connected EXT signal input from the EXT TRIG IN terminal or the EXT terminal on the DL1720E Trigger coupling CH1 CH4 DC AC EXT DC HF rejection Select the bandwidth limit with respect to the trigger source OFF DC to approx 15 kHz or DC to approx 20 MHz for each channel CH1 to CH4 Trigger hysteresis Select high or low for the trigger level hysteresis width for each channel CH1 to CH4 Trigger level range CH1 CH4 4 divisions from the screen center EXT 2 V DL1740E DL1740EL 1 V when the 1 V range set on the DL1720E 10 V when the 10 V range set on the DL1720E Trigger level setting resolution CH1 CH4 0 01div EXT 5 mV DL1740E DL1740EL 5 mV when the 1 V range set on the DL1720E 50 mV when the 10 V range set on the DL1720E Trigger level accuracy CH1 CH4 one division 10 of the trigger level EXT 50 mV 10 of the trigger level DL1740E DL174
497. provided power cord e Use the Correct Power Cord and Plug To prevent the possibility of electric shock or fire be sure to use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA The main power plug must be plugged into an outlet with a protective earth terminal Do not disable this protection by using an extension cord without protective earth grounding e Connect the Protective Grounding Terminal Make sure to connect the protective earth to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power The power cord that comes with the instrument is a three prong type power cord Connect the power cord to a properly grounded three prong outlet Do Not Impair the Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective earth wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective earth terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard e Do Not Operate with Defective Protective Grounding or Fuse Do not operate the instrument if the protective earth or fuse might be defective Make sure to check them before operation e Fuse To prevent a fire make sure to use fuses with the specified standard voltage current type Before replacing the fuses turn off the power and disconnect the power source Do not use a different fuse or short circuit the fuse holder e Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation in such environments constitutes a safety hazard e Do Not Remove Covers
498. put resistance of 10 MQ and overall length of 1 5 m Front panel protection cover B9989FA 1 transparent IM 701730 01E Safety Precautions This is an IEC safety class instrument with protective grounding The following general safety precautions must be taken during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument If this instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual the protective features provided by the instrument may be impaired Also Yokogawa Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements The following symbols are used on this instrument A Danger Refer to the user s manual This symbol appears on dangerous locations on the instrument which require special instructions for proper handling or use The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the manual to identify those instructions Functional ground terminal not to be used as a protective ground terminal Alternating current Direct current ON power OFF power ON power bBbpO id ew OFF power IM 701730 01E v Symbols Used on This Instrument Make sure to comply with the precautions below Not complying might result in injury or death e Use the Correct Power Supply Before connecting the power cord ensure that the source voltage matches the rated supply voltage of the instrument and that it is within the maximum rated voltage of the
499. py disk PC card Net Drive or USB storage specified in the FILE menu Hard Copy Outputs the screen image data to the printer Built in USB or Net Print specified under Copy to in the Copy menu Image Save Saves screen image data to the storage medium floppy disk PC card Net Drive or USB storage specified in the Image Save menu Send Mail Sends Mail Set the mail send count in the range from 1 to 1000 For details see section 13 5 When the Ethernet interface option is installed Note When the action on trigger is started the specified action is performed when the trigger is activated in the normal mode regardless of the trigger mode setting Action Count ACQ Count 1 65536 Repeats the action the specified number of counts Infinite Repeats the action until waveform acquisition is stopped Operation When Action Set to Save to File Hard Copy or Image Save The operation follows the settings specified in the FILE COPY or Image Save menu File Name When Action Set to Save to File or Image Save The file name is automatically assigned by the auto naming function For details see section 12 5 or 12 9 Operation When Action is Set to Send Mail Sends mail to the address specified when choosing MISC key gt Network gt Mail Setup gt Mail Address Trigger Mode The trigger mode is set to Single Notes on Setting the Action On Trigger Action on trigger cannot be used if the acquisition mode is Average S
500. r Image Save menu e File Name When Save to File or Image Save Is Specified The file is saved using Auto Name under the File menu or the Image Save menu For details see section 12 5 or 12 9 Determination Range T Range1 T Range2 The selectable range is 5 divisions and the resolution is ten divisions display record length The right end of the determination range T Range2 must be greater than or equal to the left end of the determination range T Range1 Executing Aborting GO NO GO Determination e When executed the determination count Exe Count the number of times the condition is met NG Count and the determination result of each determination zone are displayed on the screen All keys other than the START STOP key and the Abort soft key are disabled while determination is in progress Note ___ e When GO NO GO determination is executed the trigger mode is automatically set to Single e Determination is not possible when the acquisition mode is set to Average The determination zones that you create are stored as setup data to the storage medium or built in memory IM 701730 01E 10 63 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy eS 10 10 Performing GO NO GO Determination Using Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 29 gt Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC Race SNAP HELP located above the soft keys O l i a O O e I
501. r the waveform Note Pressing the SHIFT key followed by the SNAP SHOT key clears only the snapshot waveforms Snapshot The snapshot function leaves the currently displayed waveform on the screen You can update the display without stopping the waveform acquisition This function is useful in situations such as when you wish to compare waveforms You cannot perform the following operations on snapshot waveforms e Cursor measurements e Automated measurement of waveform parameters Zoom e Computation Snapshot waveforms can be saved and loaded For details see section 12 7 Clearing Traces e You can clear all the waveforms that are currently displayed on the screen e If you execute CLEAR TRACE when waveforms are being acquired waveform acquisition is restarted from the first acquisition Loaded waveforms are not cleared To clear loaded waveforms perform an unload operation Events That Disable the SNAP SHOT and CLEAR TRACE Keys When remote mode is engaged using the communication function e When printing during auto setup and while the storage medium is being accessed When GO NO GO determination action on trigger or waveform search is in progress IM 701730 01E 8 13 Aejdsig uonewno uj pue Aejdsig woane M e 8 7 Changing the Graticule Scale lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 20 gt Procedure HISTORY a 700 e To exit the menu during operation press ESC
502. rage When the number of waveform acquisitions see section 7 5 is set to Infinite e When the trigger mode see section 6 1 is set to Auto Auto Level or Single Record length T div 1 kWord 50 ms div to 5 s div 10 k to 1 MWord 50 ms div 50 s div 2 MWord 100 ms div 50 s div 4 MWord 200 ms div 50 s div 8 MWord 500 ms div 50 s div IM 701730 01E sexy JE UOZHOH pUe JeIIHA eo Chapter6 Triggers 6 1 Selecting the Trigger Mode lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 11 gt Procedure P HELP HISTORY L l l Wo O e To exit the menu during operation press ESC are se Ce ead mar located above the soft keys Cserur oisp ay corr mace save o sirr For a description of the operation using a USB coma p n ZONAL S O TRIG D H keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 ar n i H VzDIV TIME sDIV as oa 1 Press MODE The MODE menu appears 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired mode For the Procedure of selecting Single N see section 7 6 fa MODE Level Auto Nornal Single ae Explanation Auto Mode If the trigger condition is met within the 100 ms timeout period the waveform is updated on each trigger occurrence If the trigger condition is not met after the timeout period elapses the waveform is automatically updated If the time axis setting is in the range in which the display mode i
503. rameters select the interval to match the longest parameter cycle measured on the instrument 2s 5s 10s 30s 60s Measurement Range You can set the range on the time axis for measuring the waveform parameter Range1 and Range2 are the start and end points respectively The selectable range is 5 divisions and the resolution varies depending on the specified record length However the measurement start point cannot be set to the same point as the measurement end point or to a value to the right of the measurement end point Turning the Statistics Display ON and OFF e Displays the statistics Max Min and Average of the waveform parameters retrieved into the PC e To display the statistics select the Statistics check box Clear the check box to not display the statistics The number of measurement values displayed in the cell of Excel is up to the number specified in Number of Displayed Measured Values Data Number on the previous page The statistics are determined on all the measured data since the trend display was started not on only the displayed measured values Updating the Setup Condition Click Update The Marker Position and Range that are set on the control Panel of the measurement trend window are updated to match the newest setup conditions of the instrument IM 701730 01E 13 37 Ieuondo suonesaiunwwos 3u1 4 3 g 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Starting Stopping the Trend Display of
504. range defined by the upper and lower limits OUT or entering the range IN Condition box makes the condition true On the DL1740E DL1740EL you can select from CH1 to CH4 Math1 and Math2 On the DL1720E you can select CH1 CH2 and Math1 6 Repeat step 5 to set determination parameters Param2 to Param4 7 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the determination logic to AND or OR Logic box 8 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the determination operation to Single or Continue Sequence box 10 64 IM 701730 01E 10 10 Performing GO NO GO Determination Using Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters 9 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the waveform acquisition count ACQ Count box 10 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the instrument action when the condition is met Action box Determination parameter Param4 Select whether to perform determination Determination using the corresponding determination parameter Param3 parameter ON OFF Determination Select the determination target parameter Param2 waveform from CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 Determination or Math2 parameter Param1 Select the measurement parameter Set the upper and lower limits used to determine the true false condition of the measure values Select which condition when the measured value exits the range defined Condition PON IN PUT N N N N N by the upper and lower limits
505. ration see sections 4 1 and vzDIV TIME DIV 4 2 CD ACTION DELAY POSITION Oo a c4 C CS eA e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press SHIFT MATH Phase The PHASE menu appears Turning the Phase Shifted Waveforms ON and OFF 2 Press the Mode soft key to select ON or OFF e When ON is selected the phase of the displayed waveform is shifted The amount of shift is specified in step 3 and subsequent steps e When OFF is selected the phase of the displayed waveform is not shifted You can set the amount of shift 3 Press the CH1 to CH4 2 soft key to select the channel for setting the amount of shift CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720E 4 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the amount of shift r PHASE Hode B CHi je CHe je CH3 je CHa ON 0 0 0 04 0 0 0 04 9 16 IM 701730 01E 9 8 Shifting the Phase Explanation This section explains the setup procedures for displaying the waveforms of CH1 to CH4 2 with the phase shifted Turning the Phase Shifted Waveforms ON and OFF You can turn ON OFF the display of the phase shifted waveforms of CH1 to CH4 2 ON The phase shifted waveform is displayed OFF The phase shifted waveform is not displayed Target Channels for Phase Shifting The target channels for phase shifting are CH1 to CH4 on the DL1740E DL1740EL and CH1 to CH2 on the DL1720E
506. rd or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Displaying the Date Time Setup Dialog Box 1 Press the MISC key 2 Press the System Config soft key The System Cnfg menu appears 5 MIST a r a a alibration Remote Network System verview Next Control Conf ig 172 3 Press the Date Time soft key The Date Time setup dialog box appears Bysten Cnfg MISC Menu Message lick Souy ja Offset Trigger Language Language Date Time Cancel Gate ENG JPN OFF pr FF ON OFF Turning the Date Time Display ON and OFF 4 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set Display to ON or OFF Selecting the Date Time Setting Method 5 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the Type to Manual or SNTP Date Time Display o Turning the Date Time display ON and OFF mpe Selecting the Manual or SNTP method for the Bate Year Date Time display settings Month Day Hour Minute Second IM 701730 01E 3 13 s usWainseayy 10 suonesedoig BUNLEN el 3 6 Setting the Date and Time Explanation e When Selecting Manual Manually Enter the Date and Time Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the Year Likewise set the Month Day Hour Minute and Second Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Set and press SELECT Press SELECT to confirm the Date Time setting ON Date Tine Display Type Date Year Set the year month date Month 4 hours minutes and seconds Day Hour Minut
507. record record length length length length length length Word Word Word Word Word These time axis settings are not possible when the record length is 1 kW 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 800 M 1k 1G 1k Roll mode display gt n aT aS a OS SO OO OO OO OO DO eaa Ea Eaa k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k Set to normal mode even if envelope mode is specified a Eaa kaa Eaa Eaa Eaa Raa Eau Eam Eaa Eau Eaa koau Ean Ean Ea koan Ea Eam Ean koam Ean koau Eou kag nN e E E Od E E e a e E E a a a e a a a E a e a E a Pe e e e ro oD a e a a e e a a a a a a a a a a e e a aa The values inside the thick frame are for repetitive sampling mode IM 701730 01E App 1 E x pu ddy Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Specified Record Length 10 kW When set to a mode other than envelope mode Rep Repetitive sampling mode When set to envelope mode When interleave mode is OFF When interleave mode is ON Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON When interleave mode is OFF When interleave mode is ON Displa
508. rent 4A Type Time lag Standard VDE SEMKO UL CSA certified Part No A1352EF Exchanging the Fuse Replace the power fuse according to the following steps 1 Turn OFF the main power switch on the rear panel 2 Unplug the power cord from the power connector 3 Insert the tip of a flathead screwdriver into the indentation on the fuse holder located on the rear panel Turn the fuse holder and remove it Remove the blown fuse from the tip of the fuse holder Insert a new fuse into the fuse holder then return the fuse holder to its original location on the instrument a e IM 701730 01E 16 11 a uondsedsuy pue edueusjuley buljooysejqnos 16 6 Recommended Replacement Parts The three year warranty applies only to the main unit of the instrument starting from the day of delivery and does not cover any other items nor expendable items items which wear out Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for replacement parts Parts Name Replacement Period Built in printer Under normal usage 120 rolls of paper part no B9850NX LCD backlight Approx 25000 hours under normal use The following items are expendable items It is recommended that the parts be replaced according to the period indicated below Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for replacement parts Parts Name Recommended Replacement Period Cooling fan 3 years Backup battery lithium battery 5 years 16 12 IM 701730 01E
509. resence of the Ethernet Interface Optional and the MAC Address 13 47 13 10 Setting the FTP Passive Mode and LPR SMTP Timeout 0 eee eee 13 49 13 11 Using the Instrument as a Network Drive ec eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeaeeeseeeeeneneeeenaees 13 51 Rear Panel Auxiliary I O Section 14 1 External Trigger Input External Clock Input and Trigger Gate Input eee 14 1 14 2 Trigger Output TRIG OUT ooo eee eee ceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesaeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseaeesaeeseaeeseeeeeaeees 14 4 14 3 Video Signal Output VIDEO OUT VGA cee ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeseaeeseeeenaeeteaeenaeeeeetens 14 6 Other Operations 15 1 Changing the Message and Menu Language and Turning the Click Souind ONand OFF 2 355 cic nied Ho Bn a a ehh Mba eet 15 1 15 2 Changing the USB Keyboard Language and Checking the Connected USB Keyboard ission ea ei aa a EA a E N EE ariaa Saa 15 3 15 3 Measuring the Offset Voltage and Applying the Offset Voltage to the Computed Results ioiai aa a ee wi ade A a 15 5 15 4 Setting the Screen Color and Intensity cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeessaeeeeeeeeaten 15 6 15 5 Turning OFF the Backlight and Setting the Brightness of the Backlight 15 9 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection 16 1 Malfunction First Investigate ccccccescceessceeeeeseeeeeneeeesseeeeseeeeeseaeeesseneeeseneeeseneeeees 16 1 16 2 Messages and Corrective Actions
510. ring operation press ESC Procedure ea L L L I a O PHASE m RESET SELECT ACQ START STOP located above the soft keys e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 O TRIG D i o Smee ENHANCED ACTION DELAY VsDIV TIME sDIV a i2 pd S Settings for Accumulate Mode 1 Press DISPLAY The DISPLAY menu appears 2 Press the Accumulate soft key The Accumulate menu appears aTSPLAY Fornat Interpol Graticule Scale Trace Accumulate m Value Label Next Single Sine y DF on p oN OFF 2 3 Press the OFF Persist or Color soft key If you select Persist or Color skip to step 4 or 5 respectively Format Graticule Scale OFF Persist Color Value J F oN Interpol Single Sine y Setting the Accumulation Time When Persist Mode Is Selected 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the accumulation time DISPLAY_ Fornat Interpol Graticule Scale Trace Accumulate im Value Label Persist Next Single Sine AH O EA BFF o for Nia Time 172 100ms Setting the Grade Width When Color Mode Is Selected 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the grade width L DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace Accumulate im Value Label Color Next Single Sine
511. rleave mode is ON Display record length Word Sample rate S s Display record length Word Display record length Word Sample rate S s Display record length Word Display record length Word Sample rate S s Display record length Word Sample rate S s 50 k 100 50 k 100 50 k 50 k 400 M 50 k 800 M 50 k 40k 200 40k 200 40k 40k 400 M 40k 800 M 40k 50 k 50 k 50 k 50 k 400 M 50 k 800 M 50 k 50 k 50 k 50 k 50 k 400 M 50 k 800 M 50 k 40k 40k 40k 40k 400 M 40 k 800 M 40 k 50k 50k 50k 50k 400 M 50k 800 M 50 k Roll mode display 50 k 200 ms 20k 40k 100 ms 50k 50 k 50 ms 100 k 50 k 10ms 500k 50k 5ms jim 50k 500 us 10M 50k 200 us 20M 40k 50 k 40 k 50 k 50 k 50 k 50 k 40 k 50 k 40 k 50 k 20 k 50 k 100 k 500 k 1M 2M 10 M 20 M 20 k 50 k 100 k 500 k 1M 2M 10 M 20 M 50 k 40k 50 k 50 k 400 M 400 M 400 M 400 M 50 k 40 k 50 k 50 k 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M 50 k 40k 50 k 50 k 40k 400 M 40k 800 M 40k 50 k 50 k 40k 50 k 50 k 40k 400 M 400 M 400 M 800 M 800 M 800 M 50 k 50 k 40k 50 k 400 M 50 k 800 M 50 k 50 k 40k 50 k 40k 400 M 400 M 800 M 800 M 50 k 40k
512. rmat to BMP the following two types of files are saved 0000 BMP screen image data 0000 BTD thumbnail data If you specify for the files to be displayed Filter on the File List and manipulate individual files Delete Rename or Copy the thumbnail display function can no longer be used IM 701730 01E 12 41 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 12 11 Changing the File Attributes and Deleting Files AN CAUTION Do not remove the storage medium disk or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the storage medium is blinking Doing so can damage the storage medium or destroy the data on the medium Procedure To exit the menu during operation press ESC TRACE Nar located above the soft keys Cale I 7oc In the procedural explanation below the term jog MEASURE FILE MBC i CETE z Per aco ean fea sanraro svar shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of setup pispLay Copy mace ame el selecting setting items and entering values using ea D O e the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys sexe ennianceD For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and VzDIV TIME sDIV 5 C acron _peLay 4 2 b Se e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press FILE The FILE menu appears 2 Press the Utility soft key The Utility menu and the File List window a
513. rmination Using Zones e Exiting the Zone Editing 18 Press the Quit amp To TopMenu soft key The screen returns to the menu shown in step 3 If you press the Quit amp To TopMenu soft key without registering the edited zone in steps 15 to 17 the editing up to that point is discarded and the screen returns to the menu of step 3 feo Edit i Upper fe Whole Lover fE e Modifying the Registered Zone Turn on the display of the reference waveform that was selected when the zone was created and then correct the zone 19 At step 5 press the Redraw soft key A menu for selecting the registered zone appears T Rangei Store as 1 5 00div Store Zone1 Exec 5 00div T Range2 Quit amp TopMenu 20 Repeat steps 7 and 18 to modify the registered zone The corrected zone can be registered to a different destination G0 N0 G0 a New Redraw Setting the Determination Conditions To Top Menu 21 At step 4 press the Setup soft key The Setup dialog box opens Mode ja To Edit Zone Menu setup faT Rangei GO NO GO_ Exec 5 080di f5T Range2 22 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the following items of determination zone Zone1 Select the determination target waveform from CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 or Math2 Trace box Select whether to perform determination at the corresponding determination zone ON OFF Mode box Select whether the waveform exiting the deter
514. rmination conditions of the four determination parameters in performing the search AND Condition is considered to be true when all the determination conditions of Param1 to Param4 are met OR Condition is considered to be true when any of the determination conditions of Param1 to Param4 is met Determination Operation Waveform Acquisition Count Instrument Action When the Condition Is Met and Determination Range They are the same as the GO NO GO determination using zones See section 10 9 Executing Aborting GO NO GO Determination When executed the determination count the number of times the condition is met and the determination result determination target waveform measurement parameter and measured value of each determination parameter are displayed on the screen All keys other than the START STOP key and the Abort soft key are disabled while determination is in progress Note e When GO NO GO determination is executed the trigger mode is automatically set to Single e Determination is not possible when the acquisition mode is set to Average IM 701730 01E 10 67 SWJOJaAeM Bulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy es 10 11 Using the GO NO GO Determination Signal Output Function Output Signal NO GO OUT Signal When the determination result is NO GO the output signal level TTL level temporarily changes from high H to low L GO OUT Signal When the determination result is GO the output signal level TTL l
515. rms using the sequential store function For the procedure of selecting this mode see section 7 6 Note The trigger mode setting applies to both simple and enhanced triggers 6 2 IM 701730 01E 6 2 Setting the Trigger Position Procedure lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 12 gt P HELP JOC LLELLE Ds weasune curRsOR FILE misc cono co mara X Y as a C VERTICAL CHORZONTAL C mean D t SEARCH O TRIG D ED TIME 7DIV Explanation 1 Press POSITION The POSITION menu appears 2 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger position lf you wish to select 10 50 or 90 you can Press the corresponding soft key e Pressing RESET resets the value to 50 7 POSITION ePosition Ir Set to Set to Set to 50 0 10 50 90 Trigger position Trigger position Trigger point trigger delay delay time You can select the location of the trigger position on the screen T Trigger position Trigger point Selectable Range of Trigger Position e To exit the menu during operation press ESC N we CPHA E located above the soft keys Carrer per orme so Gu e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 The trigger position can be set in the range of 0 to 100 resolution is 0 1 taking the display record length to be 100 Display the Trigger Position
516. rn m Select IN OUT or X for the window condition of each channel m You can select the slope of the edge for each channel 7 Press ESC The Set Pattern dialog box closes 6 28 IM 701730 01E 6 12 Setting the OR Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Level Hysteresis Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection 8 Press the Level Coupling soft key The Level Coupling dialog box opens The settings related to CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720E 9 Like in the case of the A gt B N trigger see section 6 8 set the level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection If Window is ON set the window position and width trigger coupling and HF rejection The setting is the same as the window trigger See section 6 13 ENHANCED Window Hold OFF Type ja et Patter Levely OR Coupling OFF pN 6 08 When Window is 4 When Window is ON Level Coupl ing Level Coupling Level Hys Coupling HF Rej Center Width Coupling HF Rej CH1 1 50 UI Lic oF CH2 L 1 50 VI DC OFF CH3 1 50 UI I DC OFF CH4 1 00 VI DC I OFF CH1 1 50 UL 2 00 V mc oF CH2 1 56 UL 2 00 V DC OFF CH3 1 50 VI 2 00 UJ DC I OFF__ CH4 1 00 VI 2 00 UT DC I OFF A a a a 5 6 1 Set the level of each channel 2 Select ZZ or 7 for the hysteresis of each channel 3 Select DC or AC for the trigger coupling of each channel 4 Sele
517. rocessing is not possible GO NO GO Determination lt For the setup procedure see sections 10 9 to 10 11 gt The GO NO GO function is useful when you want to inspect signals and track down abnormal symptoms on a production line making electronic equipment The NO NO GO condition is set whether the waveform enters the previously specified range and a certain operation is performed when the condition is met There are two methods in making the determination a method in which a waveform zone is set on the screen and a method in which a waveform parameter range is specified You can select from various actions for the NO GO operation including sounding of a buzzer saving of waveform data or screen image data printing of screen image data or transmission of e mail messages when the Ethernet interface option is installed Also you can output determination results signals externally on the GO NO GO determination output terminal IM 701730 01E 2 29 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg 2 Communication Communication Using Commands GP IB USB or Ethernet lt For the setup procedure see the Communication Interface User s Manual CD ROM gt The instrument comes standard with a GP IB and a USB interface An Ethernet interface is available as an option Using communication commands you can output waveform data to a PC for data analysis or control the instrument using an external controller to carry out waveform measurements Communi
518. rom the following five types Edge Counts the rising and falling edges and automatically searches an arbitrary edge Serial pattern Automatically searches serial patterns of up to 64 bits synchronized or not synchronized to the clock Parallel pattern Automatic parallel pattern search on CH1 to CH4 Math1 and Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 on the DL1720E Pulse width Automatically searches the locations where the pulse width meets the specified condition Auto scroll The zoom position can be automatically scrolled Cursor measurements The following cursors are selectable Horizontal Vertical Marker and Degree Automated measurement of waveform parameters Capable of performing automated measurement of waveform parameters Automated measurement of waveform parameters within one cycle P P through Int2XY statistical processing of waveform parameters and statistical processing on the waveform parameters of historical data P P Max Min Ave Rms Sdev High Low OShot OShot Inti TY Int2TY Inti XY Int2XY Freq Period Rise Fall Width Width Duty Burst1 Burst2 Pulse AvgFreq AvgPeriod and Delay between channels Statistical processing results Statistical items Min Max Avg Cnt and Sdv Measurement of waveform parameters in dual areas is also possible Computation can be performed between waveform parameters measured in dual areas and constants Operator or GO NO GO determination
519. rough the external clock input terminal on the rear panel The external clock input is useful for observing a signal whose period varies or for observing waveforms by synchronizing to the clock signal of the signal being measured Time Axis Setting lt For the setup procedure see section 5 11 gt When using the internal clock the time axis scale is set in terms of the time per one grid square one division The setting range is 1 ns div to 50 s div or 1ns div to 5s div when the record length is equal to 1 kWord Since the horizontal axis display range is 10 div the waveform display time is T div x 10 1 div 500 us 1 div 1 ms lt lt lt 10 div Note Display along the Time Axis Sampled data is acquired to the acquisition memory and waveforms are displayed based on the stored data The number of display lines in ten divisions of the screen along the time axis is 500 250 lines in the zoom waveform display section of Main amp Z1 amp Z2 Therefore the waveforms are processed according to the display record length as described below For more details about the relationship between the time axis acquisition mode record length of the acquisition memory display record length and other parameters see appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Sample Rate and Record Length When the display record length
520. rrnerrnree 14 1 E E o ____i2e FET probara aA 3 9 FET ia n 9 12 FFT fUNCtON iii dscsccsstcevesssevedscsscctacevccoeaveisszedevesbecedersdtossess 2 22 field UMD CD vroe iiaia aaae saat iara EA aa Ed 6 35 FILE siin aia e eS REE 1 6 file attribute wee 12 42 file name ossee 12 50 FitMeas Rng 10 21 nssinicsriiireririsisinii iniii iaeei 8 9 flatop WINKOW s sisien et aa 9 13 float n a we 12 17 floppy ISK o oo eee eee eee eect eee e eee eeaeeseaeeeeeteaeeneeees 12 3 floppy disk drive test cee cece cee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeee 16 9 flow Of OPCTALION ceccessereeceseseceeessieonteccaresteeeccesesstserteorses viii format POLMAMING ses naa a i aieia frame SKIP ceeeeeeeseseeesceessneeeeessseeeseeseaeeeseeseneesseeseaneess front panel FUR CHOM AEE E T T cestipatsdins FTP passive FTP passive mode FTP Server miniai iraia rtd FTP server on a Web browser ssessseserrerrerrereern 13 28 function general Specification eeseeseeesierieseerrerrrerrerrnereereereee 17 10 EIN ID AEE E EE AA AAA A E EST 2 4 GO NO GO ii Dace ea nate a 1 6 GO NO GO determination ccc 2 29 10 58 10 64 GO NO GO determination signal output 10 68 Qraticule 2 chr Aas aieecte Bisnis 2 20 8 14 Greenwich mean time ee eeeeceeeeeeceeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeneeeaees 13 45 ground OVE icc v iao aeeie aa aa 5 5 Colello CAPE EEA AEA E TA T 11 2 H handling precaution sssessese
521. rs of the automated measurement of waveform parameters on dual areas The statistics that can be displayed are two parameters of the selected measurement parameters see page 10 39 in either type of measurement and statistical processing If you selected three or more measurement parameters the first two parameters in the order of parameters that are specified to be measured P P Max Min Init1XY and Init2XY in the Item Setup dialog box see page 10 39 from the smallest channel are displayed For example if you selected P P of CH1 Min of CH2 and Max of CH3 P P of CH1 and Min of CH2 are displayed The statistics that are not displayed can be loaded into a PC using the communication function For details see the Communication Interface User s Manual IM701730 17E Measurement Range The measurement range is the same as the measurement range specified in the automated measurement of waveform parameters See section 10 6 or 10 8 Methods of Measurement and Statistical Processing The following three types of measurement and statistical processing are available Normal Measurement and Statistical Processing Measurement and statistical processing of the selected measurement parameters are performed on all acquired waveforms while acquiring waveforms If you stop waveform acquisition and start it again measurement and statistical processing continues from where it left off Measurement and statistical processing are perform
522. rument are shown below Current probe 700937 Current probe 701930 250 400 T 200 T 300 E 150 E F 5 100 z Positive 5 ae Positive 50 2477 current 100 current E t E t 3 0 3 0 Tal p 2 6 lt Negative 100 Negative 2 100 current 2 current gj c 200 150 f o 5 200 5 300 oO oO 250 a s 400 Ce aaam aaa aaa aaa 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 Measured current A DC Measured current A DC AC f 50 Hz AC f 50 Hz Current probe 701931 Current probe 701932 500 400 300 600 500 400 200 300 100 0 100 200 Positive 200 lt gt Positive current 100 e current 0 Sa l i 100 BLAA 4 i Negative Tso Negative current 200 current 300 300 Current consumption mA 400 400 Current consumption mA 500 600 500 500 400 300 200 100 0 100 200 300 400 500 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 Measured current A DC Measured current A DC AC f 50 Hz AC f 50 Hz Calculate the consumption current of the FET probe 700939 and the differential probe 701920 or 701921 at 125 mA maximum for both positive and negative polarities 3 10 IM 701730 01E 3
523. ry out the procedures for displaying and labeling computed waveforms in section 9 1 e The setup procedures for computed waveform Math1 are described below Perform similar steps for Math2 1 Press the M1 Setup soft key The M1 Setup dialog box opens C mam fo Displat faM1 Setup 11 Label i2 Display Jan2 Setup M2 Label OFF prj C1 C2 Mathi ON C3 C4 Setting the Equation Unit Smoothing and Threshold Level for Binary Computation 2 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the operator for binary computation Bin and the waveform on which to perform computation When the M1 Setup dialog box is closed by pressing ESC or another key the specified equation appears in the M1 Setup menu column 3 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the unit smoothing and level when performing binary computation convert into Os and 1s of computed waveform Math1 4 Press ESC The M1 Setup dialog box closes HL Setup Select Bin Select the waveform on which to perform computation Operation Source _ Scaling used to display computed waveform Math1 cannot Scale Auto be selected Center 0000E 00 Sensitivity L 5 0000E 01 Unit The scaling level is fixed It cannot be changed Set the unit of computed waveform Math1 Turn ON OFF zooming Smoothing CFF Thr Upper C 0 000 V ii Thr Lover 0 000 V Set the level of computed waveform Math1 used to switch from 0 to 1 S
524. s For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and ACTION DELAY 4 2 TA e For a description of the operation using a USB 4 keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Press the MISC The MISC menu appears Press the Next 1 2 soft key The page 2 menu appears as vervieu Next 172 Press the Graphic Color soft key The Graphic Color menu appears a a a alibration Remote Network System Control Conf ig z x MISC ja a mmea ja LCD Graphic Setup Self Test USB Back Color Info 272 Press the Mode soft key The Mode menu appears Graphic Color Mode i Menu Waveform Snap Grid JO Cursor Intensity 10 10 10 10 10 Setting the Display Color 5 Press the RGB soft key The RGB menu appears Graphic f Color Rep uaveForn J Snap JO Grid J cursor J 10 10 10 10 Press the Menu soft key The Menu dialog box opens Menu R Fore 15 m 3 Co A select aJ Back Focus Dialog oJ Co io 10 Shadow Line RGB Mode a p a Menu aveform Others Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the menu screen color Press ESC The Menu dialog box closes 15 6 IM 701730 01E 15 4 Setting the Screen Color and Intensity 9 Likewise set the colors for Waveform and Others CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1720E Mode pa a a j Menu Wavefor
525. s ESC located above the soft keys e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog eo n sco sranreror shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of SETUP DISPLAY Copy mace save o SHIFT selecting setting items and entering values using comes D TERO ete the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys a For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and 7 3 vsDIV TIME sDIV AGON DELAY 4 2 a n r e For a description of the operation using a USB o keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press GO NOGO The GO NO GO menu appears 2 Press the Mode soft key The Mode menu appears GOANO GO Mode OFF Entering the GO NO GO Determination Setup Menu 3 Press the Zone soft key The Zone menu appears G0 N0 G0 OFF Zone Paraneter Creating Determination Zones Stop waveform acquisition after displaying the reference waveform and then create the zone 4 Press the To EditMenu soft key The To Edit menu appears GO NO GO Mode 5 feT Rangei To Edit Setup 5 000dit Exec Zone Menu 6T Range2 5 000di e Creating a New Zone 5 Press the New soft key The Trace menu appears GO NO GO a New Redraw To Top Menu 6 Press the CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 or Math2 soft key to select the waveform to be the reference for creating the zone The Edit menu appears e On the DL1740E DL1740EL select CH1 to CH4 Math1 or Math2 On the DL1720
526. s Help aw Q xe a A J Search 5 Favorites uai O Q 3 dress E hetp l7000_1f E eee 4 Press the ENTER key on the PC keyboard A network password entry dialog box opens 5 Enter the user name and password Enter the user account see section 13 6 used to access the instrument In the example below DLUSER and the password is not displayed are entered for the user name and password respectively e Ifthe user name of the user account is set to anonymous default setting the password is not required 6 Click OK If the login to the instrument Web server is successful the Web server window appears Connect to ooo Connecting to ks proxy jp ykgw net User name G DLUSER Password scoooe CI Remember my password 13 24 IM 701730 01E 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Web Server Window Address ht fi 7006_1 c jine YOKOGAWA 2 Test and Measurement Weasurement Instruments Feb Service Coritents uu DL 1740 E umf f DL 1740F m ema ie n e Installing Files Required for the Web Browser Using the instrument and the PC While Connected to the Internet When you use the Web server function for the first time the files required for the Web browser are installed automatically from the Microsoft Web site If the three files Msvbvm60 dll cmdlgjp dll and comdlg32 0cx are already installed in the PC when using the Web server function for the first time step 7 is not
527. s set to roll mode the display is set to roll mode see page 2 7 Auto Level Mode If a trigger occurs within the timeout period the waveform is displayed in the same fashion as in auto mode If a trigger is not activated within the timeout period then the center value of the amplitude of the trigger source is detected and the trigger level is changed to that value A trigger is activated using the new value and the displayed waveforms are updated Auto level mode is valid only if the trigger is a simple trigger and the trigger source is between CH1 and CH4 or CH1 and CH2 for the DL1720E For all other cases the operation is the same as for auto mode If the time axis setting is in the range in which the display mode is set to roll mode the display is set to roll mode Normal Mode The display is updated only when the trigger conditions are met The display is not updated if the trigger does not occur Therefore to check the waveform or ground level when no trigger is detected use auto mode IM 701730 01E 6 1 s n el 6 1 Selecting the Trigger Mode Single Mode The display is updated once when the trigger conditions are met and the waveform acquisition stops In the time axis setting range in which the display is set to roll mode the display is set to roll mode When a trigger occurs the specified record length of data is acquired and the displayed waveform stops Single N Mode Select this mode when acquiring wavefo
528. s using the network drive function do not perform other network functions such as the FTP client server function or Web server function If you do the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL or the PC may become unstable e The DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL can be mapped as a network drive only on Windows XP Characters That Can Be Used This function uses the WebDAV client function on Windows and the WebDAV server function on the instrument The characters that can be used on the WebDAV server function of the instrument are as follows Uppercase and lower case alphabet characters and space e Numbers The following symbols amp _ Therefore note the following points e You cannot save folders or files that use characters other than those listed above for the names on the instrument storage medium In addition these types of files and folders cannot be copied or moved On Japanese versions of Windows XP the default file name for a newly created folder is in Japanese so a new folder is not created on the instrument s drive e Files and folders that use characters other than those listed above on the instrument storage medium do not appear in the file list using WebDAV e Files and folders that use characters other than those listed above are excluded from the data capacity calculation Therefore the actual used space and the calculated space may differ File Information If a file or folder on the instrument storage me
529. sampling mode if the relationship of the time axis and the display record length would cause the sample rate to exceed 1 GS s or 2 GS s when interleave mode is ON the mode automatically switches to repetitive sampling There are two types of repetitive sampling One is sequential sampling in which the data is sampled by intentionally offsetting the sampling points by a certain time with respect to the trigger point The other is random sampling in which the data that is offset randomly from the trigger point is sampled and resorted with respect to the trigger point The instrument employs random sampling which enables the waveform before the trigger point trigger position see section 2 3 to be observed Time Axis Setting and Roll Mode Display If T div is set to a certain range See appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Sample Rate and Record Length the waveforms are displayed in roll mode In roll mode the displayed waveform is not updated using triggers update mode Rather the oldest data is deleted as new data is acquired and the waveform is shifted from right to left on the screen Roll mode display allows waveforms to be observed in the same way as on a pen recorder It is useful in observing slowly repeating signals or signals that change slowly It is also useful in detecting glitches spikes in the waveform that occur intermittently Roll mode display is also used when the trigger mode is set to Single However
530. screen However the background is omitted and grids and other outlines are printed in black OFF Prints the image using the same colors as the image printed using the built in printer Note ___ The instrument does not detect out of paper and printer errors on the USB printer If an error occurs press the COPY key again to stop the printing e Images may not print properly on some printers Use USB printers that have been tested for compatibility e You can also print to a USB printer that is connected to your PC In this case save the screen image data to a floppy disk PC card or other storage medium see section 12 9 load the data into your PC and print the data IM 701730 01E sobew use10s Hunund Ey 11 4 Printing Using a Network Printer Optional Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC OO located above the soft keys or voe e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog pE fuse oe a ee Eser Eec shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of E e De E sao CD selecting setting items and entering values using O Gen Ga ae the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and co gt 4DIV aaa DeL 4 2 o a O O e C For a description of the operation using a USB R keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Network Settings 1 After making a network connection see section 13 1 enter TCP IP settings see sectio
531. screen Resolution 0 01 divisions For example the resolution for 2 mV div is 0 02 mV Setting the Hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that triggers are not activated by small changes in the trigger signal WV Approximately 0 3 divisions of hysteresis around the trigger level X Approximately one division of hysteresis around the trigger level The value above is an approximate value It is not strictly warranted Setting the Trigger Coupling You can select from the following AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as is Turning the HF Rejection ON and OFF Specify 15 kHz or 20 MHz if you wish to use a signal that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger source signal as the trigger source Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Note If you wish to activate a trigger on a single pattern condition use the pattern trigger If you specify all Xs for the status of condition A or condition B triggers will not be activated 6 16 IM 701730 01E 6 9 Setting the A Delay B Trigger ENHANCED Procedure lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 9 gt SNAP HELP A TTI soo tueasune CURSOR FILE MENU _ MENU CPHA E START STOP x setup pisPLay ory msc conosco mara ea
532. server function IM 701730 01E 13 21 Ieuondo SuOHedUNWWOD JeUI9U A g 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Instrument Environment Connection to the Network Connect the instrument to the network using the Ethernet For the Connection Procedure see section 13 1 TCP IP Configure the network environment and IP address for communication using the Ethernet interface For the setup procedure see section 13 2 Communication Interface Set the communication interface to Network For the procedure see Setting the Communication Interface to the Network page 13 23 User Account Set the user account used to access the instrument from the PC For the setup procedure see section 13 6 Time Difference from GMT Greenwich Mean Time When using the Web Server function set the time difference from the GMT Normally the time difference is also set on the PC Setting the time difference correctly allows the instrument and the PC to detect the local time correctly Consequently the PC will be able to detect whether a file is new when transferring or saving the file For the setup procedure see section 13 8 Note e Use Internet Explorer version 5 0 or later for the Web browser The Web server function contains software programs that have not been authenticated Therefore the following dialog box may appear If it does click Yes and install the software Security Warning E x Warming The authenticity of this conten
533. sesseriesrrerrerinerrerrrrrnerrerinernsrens 3 1 hanning WINdOW ss sssessseessesresirerrerisrinerrnrrnsrnnrresrnsrrenrnernert 9 13 hard copy 6 39 10 63 HEL Pixs sini sas sented Roatan aia es 1 7 FIG Dake etiast E E T A A ET 4 22 NAID WINDOW sisisi iieii nissenana annasa a 4 22 HF rejection AEAEE 2 12 6 10 6 16 6 19 6 23 6 27 6 30 6 33 HISTORY irane aa aaea a Na aaiae history memory history Search ssssseessessessrsriessirrrsrerineererreens history waveform sssesseseeerieriserrerierrerrierirereeresrenes hold off time horizontal AXIS cece eee eee eeeeeeneeeeeeeeaes horizontal CUrSOM oo eee cece eee eeeees hysteresis c eee HR IMAGE SAVE occ eeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeeeeeeseseaeeeeeeaeeneeeaeene 1 6 image save IMMUNITY sci r iin area a i initialization iisi sinaosan danadana iade 2 32 initialiZi ng erreren aeea 4 13 INPUT COUPLING ssssseseeseesieereesiesrnesrerrnsirernnernerenrnnsrenrrnens 2 4 5 6 INPUL SOCTION i iih secs ctideische ted teed eiatvacessoredeevedions ohpcretetee 17 1 installation condition 000 0 cece cceeeseeseeeeeeeeesesseseeeeeeeeseseeea 3 3 installation POSITION oe eee e eee eee e tee eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaees 3 4 instrument information 13 43 instrument NUMDET ee ii integrating 9 10 integration we 2 21 INTSIISILY snieni ineedit aiheet a aa 15 6 interleave mode 2 14 7 3 interpolation 2 17 8 3 IQVONSION sreusiivccns
534. set on the DL1720E 10 V when the 10 V range is set on the DL1720E 0 1 Vp p for the DL1740E DL1740EL 0 1 Vp p when the 1 V range is set on the DL1720E 1 Vp p when the 10 V range is set on the DL1720E 2 V setting resolution is 5 mV on the DL1740E DL1740EL 1 V setting resolutions of 5 mV when the 1 V range is set on the DL1720E 10 V setting resolutions of 50 mV when the 1 V range is set on the DL1720E Input terminal For the DL1740E DL1740EL terminal on the rear panel EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN TRIG GATE IN 2 For the DL17420E terminal on the front panel 4MQ 20pF lt 40Vpk IM 701730 01E 14 1 u01 9aS O I Aseixny joueg we8y z 14 1 External Trigger Input External Clock Input and Trigger Gate Input External Clock Input Terminal Use this terminal if you wish to operate the instrument using an external clock signal see section 5 10 This terminal is also used as the external trigger input terminal EXT TRIG IN and the trigger gate input terminal TRIG GATE IN On the DL1740E DL1740EL the terminal is labeled EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN TRIG GATE IN rear panel and on the DL1720E it is labeled EXT front panel Item Description Connector type BNC Maximum input voltage 40 V DC ACpeak or 28 Vrms when the frequency is 10 kHz or Frequency range 40 Hz to 20 MHz continuous clock only Input impedance Approximately 1 MQ and approximately 20 pF Inpu
535. sets the value to 0 08 us Source fe Level Slope Coupling HF Re ject Hysteresis CH1 1 50 V ft AC OFF A x For Enhanced Triggers race SNAP HELP HISTORY Ta l l bv O O To exit the menu during operation press ESC Ee located above the soft keys X U setup _ pisPLa Copy mace save a snr For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 aaa oa 1 Press ENHANCED The ENHANCED menu appears 2 Press the Hold Off soft key Cea Type a count Hold Off et Pattern Levels us A gt BND Coupling 1 0 0 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the hold off time Pressing RESET resets the value to 0 08 us Note The hold off time setting applies to both simple and enhanced triggers 6 6 IM 701730 01E 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Explanation As shown in the figure below this setting prevents a trigger from being activated for a specified time even when the trigger conditions are met during this time This is useful when you wish to activate the trigger in sync with a periodic signal as in the figure below k Period of repetition T Trigger level Input signal Trigger source signal Trigger signal limited at hold off time t when trigger slope set to rising edge i T Selectable Range of the Hold Off Time The selectable range is 80 ns to 10 s the default val
536. sing the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and 4 2 For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 o ARCH 2o vzDIV TIME7DIV o Setting the Trigger Type 1 Press ENHANCED The ENHANCED menu appears 2 Press the Type soft key The Type menu appears count fatoid OFF Bet Pattern Level us Coupling 1 0 08 Type A gt BOND 3 Press the OR soft key NHANCED gt B N A Delay B Pattern Width OR TU Hold Off us 9 08 Setting the Window 4 Press the Window soft key and select ON or OFF If set to OFF a trigger is activated on the OR logic of the edge of each channel If set to ON a trigger is activated on the OR logic of the window condition of each channel ENHANCED Type la ry Window sHold OFF et Pattern Level us OR Coupling OFF pN 0 08 Setting Slope of the Edge Trigger of Each Channel 5 Press the Set Pattern soft key The Set Pattern dialog box opens The settings related to CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720E ENHANCED Type a i Window f Hold OFF et Pattern Level us OR coupling oF pN 0 08 6 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the slope of the edge trigger of each channel to f or IN OUT or if Window is ON When Window is OFF When Window is ON Set Pattern Set Patte
537. sition lt When displaying normal waveforms gt lt When displaying zoom waveforms gt The length of the Specified record length Z1 zoom position Z2 zoom position green frame bi indicates the ratio 1 z1 50k of the display SSSI z2 Hi record length with aaa areen rame E eT Display position Display position of the normal waveform Internal processing indication Specified record length See section 7 2 Indicates the current processing status by the color of the Sample rate See appendix 1 3 symbol Green Computing power spectrum or accumulating Acquisition mode See section 7 5 history waveforms Normal Normal mode Yellow Automated measurement of parameters in progress Env Envelope mode or searching Avg Averaging mode Blue Sending mail executing a command of the FTP BoxAvg Box average mode server function or executing an HTTP command If the horizontal axis scale is changed when waveform acquisition is stopped the new horizontal axis scale and Waveform acquisition status ave a 2 sample rate are displayed highlighted at the position where the Stopped Display record ache nae Running acquisition in progress length gt App 1 acquisition mode is displayed Running Pre acquiring pre data Horizontal axis scale time axis T div Running Post acquiring post data See section 5 11 Running Waiting for Trigger Tri so Oras rigger position Connected to the network Date time See mark See sec
538. splay example see Display Example When Displaying X Y Waveforms in section 1 3 Lissajous waveform Phase angle 0 Phase angle 45 Phase angle 90 Frequency ratio X Y Snapshot lt For the setup procedure see section 8 6 gt When the trigger mode is set to a mode other than Single or Single N the displayed waveforms are periodically updated or displayed in roll mode see page 2 7 Therefore to hold the waveform you are currently viewing you must stop waveform acquisition By using the snapshot function you can temporarily hold the waveform snapshot waveform that would be cleared when the screen is updated on the screen The snapshot waveform is displayed in white allowing for easy comparison against the updated waveform The snapshot waveform is a screen image waveform You can save load and print the screen image data but cursor measurements automated measurement of waveform parameters zoom and computation cannot be performed on it Snapshot waveforms NI NA Clear Trace lt For the setup procedure see section 8 6 gt You can clear the snapshot waveform and restart averaging and accumulation using one key operation Pressing the SHIFT key followed by the SNAP SHOT key clears only the snapshot waveforms IM 701730 01E 2 19 suon uny jo uoneuejdxg 2 4 Waveform Acquisition and Display Conditions Other Waveform Display Settings Graticule lt For the setup pr
539. ss the START STOP to stop the waveform 7 1 acquisition is in progress acquisition first 806 GO NO GO is in execution Abort GO NO GO 10 9 10 10 Please press the Abort key 814 Duplicated label Set a different label 8 9 819 Cannot change when Channel Display is OFF Turn ON the channel display or set the 5 1 9 1 or Math settings are invalid computation 821 Cannot change when ExtClock is active Set the time base to Internal 5 10 836 Cannot change settings during action on trigger Abort abort on trigger 6 15 7 1 840 Cannot set the acquisition mode to Average Change the acquisition mode or change the 6 1 7 5 when the trigger mode is set to Single or trigger mode Single N 841 It is not possible to make a setting that will Set the trigger mode to a mode other than 6 1 result in the repetitive mode when the trigger Single N mode is set to Single N 842 Cannot specify A gt B N Turn OFF the trigger gate 6 16 and A Delay B when the trigger gate is active 843 Cannot set the trigger mode to Single or Change the acquisition mode or change the 6 1 7 5 Single N when the acquisition mode is Average trigger mode 846 Cannot set the trigger mode to Single N Turn OFF the repetitive mode lower T div or 5 11 7 4 during repetitive sampling mode shorten the record length 847 Cannot set this parameter during repetitive Turn OFF the repetitive mode lower T div or 5 11 7 4 sampling mode shorten the record length 848 Not possible during the in
540. t or X 6 7 Likewise set condition B Condition Tupe F i 7 fade lay Cus feHold OFF t Patter Level cus A Delay i coupling 0 00 0 08 8 Press ESC The Set Pattern dialog box closes IM 701730 01E 6 17 6 9 Setting the A Delay B Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Level Hysteresis Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection 9 10 11 Press the Level Coupling soft key The Level Coupling dialog box opens The settings related to CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720E ENHANCED Tupe a SDelaycus faHold OFF et Pattel Level us A Delay B Coupling 0 09 0 09 Levei Coupling 1 Setting the level of each channel 2 Set the hysteresis of each corr ou tse vr eT channel to ZZ or 7 CH2 1 50 V I I DC I OFF Level Hys Coupling HF Rej 3 Set the trigger coupling of each channel to DC or AC 4 Set the HF rejection of each channel to OFF 20 MHz or 15 kHz CH3 1 50 vI I DC I OFF CH4 1 00 VI DC I OFF Like in the case of the A gt B N trigger see section 6 8 set the level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection Press ESC The Level Coupling dialog box closes Setting the Delay 12 Press the Delay soft key to set the delay Pressing RESET resets the value to 0 003 us ENHANCED Type a fede lay us faHold OFf et Pattern Level uS A Delay B Coupling 0 00 0 08 Settin
541. t OFF pr 9 00div DCMR 10 1 0 000kU Full EA 3 Press the Linear Scl AX B soft key to select ON CH1 Variable inear Sci Label X B Back 0 500 U a ON CH1 272 4 Press the A B soft key to set the jog shuttle control to A 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the A value 6 Likewise set the B value 7 To attach a unit press the Unit soft key to display the keyboard and enter the unit name CHI Variable inear Sof O A Unit Label X B 1 0000E 01 Back 9 500 U OFF pN CH1 272 Note Linear scaling is not available for the following waveforms Snapshot waveforms Accumulated waveforms however linear scaling is possible on the accumulated waveform acquired last Linear scaling is set for each channel The scaling coefficient A and offset value B that you entered are held even if you turn OFF the linear scaling function Computation is performed using the linear scaling results IM 701730 01E 5 15 sexy JE UOZHOH pUe JeIIHA eo 5 9 Using the Linear Scaling Function Explanation The computation shown below is executed using the specified scaling coefficient A and offset B The cursor measurement values and automated measurement values of waveform parameters are displayed using the scaled values Also units can be added to the displayed linear scaling results Y AX B where X is the measured value and Y is the linear scaling result Setting Scaling Coefficient A and Offset Value B Selectable range of
542. t Frequency range DC to 400 MHz DC to 6 MHz When used on the instrument Rise time Within 900 ps Within 58 ns When used on the instrument Maximum input 600 V DC ACpeak or voltage 424 Vrms and frequencyis 100 kHz or less Connector type BNC BNC Total length 1 5m 1 5m When using the instrument with the attenuation set to 1 1 use the probe at a voltage less than or equal to the maximum input voltage of the instrument Precautions to Be Taken When Using Probes Other Than Those Provided with the Instrument When measuring a signal containing frequency components near 500 MHz use a probe with a frequency range of 500 MHz or higher Note that measured values cannot be displayed correctly when using a probe with an attenuation other than 1 1 10 1 100 1 and 1000 1 Setting the Probe Attenuation Follow the procedures given in section 5 5 and set the attenuation current to voltage conversion ratio of the instrument according to the probe attenuation current to voltage conversion ratio Correct measured values can be displayed only if the setting is correct When Using the FET Probe Current Probe or Differential Probe AN When using FET probes 700939 current probes 700937 701930 701931 or 701932 or differential probes 701920 or 701922 made by YOKOGAWA use the probe power supply on the rear panel of the instrument CAUTION Do not use the probe power supply terminals on the rear panel of the instrum
543. t MAX MIN the maximum value MAX and minimum value MIN within the range are set to high and low values respectively Trace Dist Proy CH1 Unit fe Distal f Mesial 907 50 MEASURE Proxima f High Low Back 10 MaxMii 272 Explanation This section explains the setup procedures for performing automated measurement on various measurement parameters on the displayed waveform within the display record length see appendix 1 Up to 24000 data points of the results of automated measurements can be saved to a file see section 12 8 Limitations Automated measurement of waveform parameters cannot be performed on the following waveforms Snapshot waveforms e Accumulated waveforms however measurement is possible on the accumulated waveform acquired last Automated Measurement Mode The following modes are available in automated measurement of waveform parameters OFF Automated measurement is not performed ON Measures the specified parameters Statistics Cycle Statistics and History Statistics Performs statistical processing on the measured results of the specified parameters See section 10 7 Number of Measurement Parameters Measurements can be made on twenty six types of parameters and delay between waveforms Up to 24000 data points of measurement parameters of all waveforms can be saved Number of Parameters That Can Be Displayed Automated Measurement Mode Number of Display
544. t cannot be verified therefore it cannot be trusted Problem listed below The test root has not been enabled as a trusted root Do you want to install and run Yokogawa TM Web Soft signed on an unknown date time and distributed by YOKOGAWA Corporation Yes More Info You cannot open multiple Internet Explorer windows on the same PC and simultaneously use multiple identical features of the Web Server function When using the storage function of the FTP server function on the Web browser data capture function or the log display on the same PC other Web server functions cannot be used When using the storage function of the FTP server function on the Web browser data capture function or the log display on a PC other PCs cannot use the Web server function The Web server functions use the Ethernet interface for communication If the Ethernet interface is configured for controlling the instrument using a communication command see the Communication Interface User s Manual IM701730 17E the Ethernet interface cannot be used simultaneously e The Web server function cannot be used while the DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL is printing or operating files file operation from the front panel key or file transfer using the FTP server function or while the Windows network drive is being used 13 22 IM 701730 01E 13 7 Using the Web Server Function Preparations for Using the Web Server Function Connect
545. t range 2 V for the DL1740E DL1740EL 1 V when the 1 V range set on the DL1720E 10 V when the 10 V range set on the DL1720E Threshold level 2 V setting resolution is 5 mV on the DL1740E DL1740EL 1 V setting resolutions of 5 mV when the 1 V range set on the DL1720E 10 V setting resolutions of 50 mV when the 10 V range set on the DL1720E Minimum input amplitude 0 1 Vp p for the DL1740E DL1740EL 0 1 Vp p when the 1 V range set on the DL1720E 1 Vp p when the 10 V range set on the DL1720E Minimum pulse width 10 ns or more for High and Low Input terminal For the DL1740E DL1740EL For the DL17420E terminal on the rear panel terminal on the front panel 4MQ 20pF lt 40Vpk Note The threshold level for the external clock input and the trigger level for the external trigger input are common 14 2 IM 701730 01E 14 1 External Trigger Input External Clock Input and Trigger Gate Input Trigger Gate Input Terminal The terminal is used when you wish to activate the trigger using an external signal see section 6 16 This terminal is also used as the external trigger input terminal EXT TRIG IN and the external clock input terminal EXT CLOCK IN On the DL1740E DL1740EL the terminal is labeled EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN TRIG GATE IN rear panel and on the DL1720E it is labeled EXT front panel Item Description Connector type BNC Maximum input vo
546. t the time when the backlight will automatically turn OFF LCD MISC Auto OFF je Time Ea OFF Ea OFF DN Inin Setting the Backlight Brightness 6 Press the Brightness soft key Bright ness 4 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the backlight brightness LCD NISC Auto OFF Ea OFF Ea pF oN Turning the Backlight ON and OFF Bright E 7 Press the LCD OFF Exec soft key The backlight turns OFF Pressing any panel key turns the backlight ON allowing the screen to be viewed LCD MISC Auto OFF DFF oN LCD OFF Exec Bright ness IM 701730 01E 15 9 suo1 e1ado 19410 al 15 5 Turning OFF the Backlight and Setting the Brightness of the Backlight Explanation Turning the Backlight ON and OFF You can turn ON OFF the LCD backlight e Pressing the LCD OFF EXEC soft key turns OFF the backlight e Pressing any panel key turns the backlight ON allowing the screen to be viewed Backlight Auto OFF The backlight automatically turns OFF if there is no key operation for the specified time The selectable time is 1 to 60 min and the resolution is 1 min Backlight Brightness You can change the brightness of the backlight Dimming the backlight brightness or leaving the backlight turned OFF prolongs its life The selectable range is 1 to 4 levels and the resolution is 1 level 15 10 IM 701730 01E Chapter 16 Troubleshooting Maintenance and
547. ta to a storage medium IMAGE SAVE MENU Key Sections 12 9 and 12 10 e Displays a menu used to save screen image data to a storage medium e You can display thumbnails of the screen image data that are saved 1 6 IM 701730 01E 1 2 Panel Keys and Knobs is Calibration Ethernet Communications and Other Operations ELE m A m MISC Key gt Sections 3 6 4 6 4 7 6 16 chapters 13 and 15 sections 16 3 16 4 and the Communication Interface User s Manual IM701730 17E Displays a menu used to set the date time calibration input signal delay time correction trigger gate Ethernet communications menu and message language ON OFF of the click sound USB keyboard language ON OFF of the application of the offset voltage to the measured and computed results screen color and intensity backlight self test and remote control Displays the setup data and system condition the presence absence of options firmware version etc sued JO suonouny pue sowen SNAP SHOT Key Section 8 6 Freezes the currently displayed waveform on the screen in black and white default setting CLEAR TRACE Key Section 8 6 Clears the snapshot waveforms and accumulated waveforms HELP Key Section 4 8 Turns the help window that provides description about the procedure ON and OFF IM 701730 01E 1 7 1 3 Display Screens Normal Display Screen Record length display po
548. tage Set the unit of computed waveform Math1 Turn ON OFF zooming When performing integration operator Integ set the integration start point This item does not appear when performing differentiation 9 10 IM 701730 01E 9 5 Differentiating and Integrating Waveforms Explanation Turning the Computed Waveform Display and Computed Waveform Label ON and OFF See section 9 1 Operator Select the differentiation operator Diff or integration operator Integ as the operator for Math1 and Math2 The waveform to be computed can be differentiated or integrated Waveform to Be Computed The waveforms on which computation can be performed are as follows e For the DL1740E DL1740EL Computation Name Source Math1 One channel from CH1 to CH4 Math2 One channel from CH1 to CH4 or Math1 On the menu CH1 to CH4 may be indicated as C1 to C4 and Math1 as M1 Mathi and Math2 can be computed simultaneously e For the DL17420E Computation Name Source Math1 CH1 or CH2 On the menu CH1 to CH2 may be indicated as C1 and C2 Scaling The operation is the same as for addition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 Unit of Computed Waveforms The operation is the same as for addition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 Smoothing The operation is the same as for addition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 Integration Start Point You can set the start point of integr
549. tandard Power Cord Part No A1054WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A AS Standard Power Cord Part No A1024WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A GB Standard Power Cord complies with the CCC Part No A1064WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A Built in media drive J1 J3 Floppy disk drive PC card interface Option specifications B5 Optional C10 P2 P4 F5 Built in printer Ethernet interface Probe power 2 outputs for the DL1720E Probe power 4 outputs for the DL1740E DL1740EL IC SPI Bus Signal Analysis Function 1 Select floppy disk drive or PC card interface for the built in media drive 2 One roll paper B9850NX is included NO Instrument Number When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the instrument please give them the instrument number IM 701730 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Accessories The standard accessories below are supplied with the instrument Check that no accessories are missing or damaged Power Cord one of the following power cords is supplied according to the instrument s suffix codes a ee 400 MHz passive repo gandard ype Standard BS Standard AS Standard GB Standard probe A1006W A1009WD A1054WD A1024WD A1064WD 700988 Printer roll Power fuse Rubber feet Probe case Ekal ae cover paper2 A1352EF 1 sheet 4 pcs B9918EZ transparent
550. tart Rec or End Rec e If you select Start Rec you can select the first record number displayed on the history map If you select End Rec you can select the last record number displayed on the history map HISTORY fe Select Display jeostart nega parch Mod Record o Show Map One All ff End Rec OFF 12 Turn the jog shuttle to set the first or last record number displayed on the history map Press the Show Map soft key The record numbers and time stamps time when acquisition was completed of the waveforms in the range of Start Rec to End Rec on the menu are listed History Memory Map a 0096 15 19 0097 15 19 26 ji H 0107 15 19 31 18 0083 15 19 31 58 0108 15 19 31 16 Selecting the Waveform to Be Displayed 5 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the waveform to be displayed The selected waveform is displayed and the record number of the selected waveform is indicated in Select Record on the menu e If Display is set to One only the selected waveform is displayed Ifthe Display is set to All the selected waveform is highlighted 2064 05 07 15 23 28 j ick Normal Stopped 469 y 5MS S_ZOOHS div HT lt Main Ik gt gt CHI 10 1 0 500 Udiyv DC Full la Edge CH1 F fe Select Display eStart Rega Bearch Node Record 59 Show Map 96 all End Rec OFF 122 10 2 IM 701730 01E 10 1 Displaying History Waveforms Explanatio
551. tected and enabled approximately six seconds after it is connected USB PERIPHERAL _ USB Storage DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL Compatible USB Storage The instrument is compatible with USB mass storage class devices including hard disk drives MO drives and flash memory devices Note ____ Do not connect USB devices other than a USB keyboard USB mouse USB printer or USB storage device to the USB PERIPHERAL connector The instrument has two USB PERIPHERAL connectors but two USB devices with maximum consumption currents exceeding 100 mA cannot be connected at the same time 12 6 IM 701730 01E 12 3 Connecting USB Storage MO Disk Drive Hard Disk Flash Memory to the USB PERIPHERAL Interface CAUTION Do not remove the USB storage device or turn the power to the instrument OFF while the device is being accessed Doing so can destroy the data on the medium e While the USB storage device is being accessed an accessing icon appears in the upper left part of the screen General Handling Precautions of USB Storage For the general handling precautions of the USB storage device read the instruction manual that came with the device IM 701730 01E 12 7 ejeq Huipeo7 pue Burnes 12 4 Formatting the Storage Medium AN CAUTION Do not remove the storage medium disk or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the storage medium is blinking Doing so can da
552. ted above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the term jog X Y __ MENU MENU setup pispLay ory MAGE SAVE D shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of selecting setting items and entering values using VERTICAL D C HORIZONTAL v E CD Gaon veDIV aC GD TIME sDIV O TRIG D 2 the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys Qa D For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and ACTION DELAY 4 2 For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 f Note Before carrying out the procedures in this section you must first carry out the procedures for displaying and labeling computed waveforms in section 9 1 The setup procedures for computed waveform Math1 are described below Perform similar steps for Math2 Press the M1 Setup soft key The M1 Setup dialog box opens C mm 2 Display ja Z Setup M2 Label BFF on c3 C4 Math2 1 Dispiad M ii Label OFF phy C1 C2 Mathi Setting the Equation Scaling Unit and Smoothing 2 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the Pass Thru operator and the waveform on which to perform computation When the M1 Setup dialog box is closed by pressing ESC or another key the specified equation appears in the M1 Setup menu column Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the scaling unit and smoothing of computed waveform Math1 Press ESC The M1 Setup dialog box closes
553. tems on the Top Menu Click the item you wish to select The setup menu corresponding to the selected item is displayed on the right side of the screen The top menu is cleared from the screen Pointing to items with a sub menu items with a gt mark displayed to their right displays the sub menu As with the top menu click the item you wish to select and left click the item Top menu Right click to display the top menu Sub menu Items that have layers under the top Pointer menu are displayed as sub menus 2004 05 20 15 15 21 ick Normal 674 Stopped 4 y AMS s _Insftiv CH1 10 1 ACQ 50 0 Vzdi TRIGGER N gt SIMPLE DC Full CHANNEL gt ENHANCED CH2 10 1 PRESET MODE 50 0 Udiv DISPLAY POSITION DC Full Z00M ACTION CH3 10 1 X Y DELAY 50 0 Vzdi MEASURE DC Full H CURSOR CH4 10 1 MATH 50 0 Vzdi PHASE DC Full HISTORY SEARCH GO NO GO H MISC SETUP FILE COPY MENU Edge CH1 f IMAGE MENU Auto START STOP 0 0 V coPyY IMAGE SAVE SNAPSHOT CLEAR TRACE 4 The setup menu appears DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace Accumulate Value Label Next Dual Sine y EA oFF p FF pN OFF a Note The following key names do not appear on the top menu ESC RESET SELECT HELP and arrow keys The top menu also displays characters that are marked in purple
554. teps 20 mV div 2 0 mV 50 0 mV 0 2 mV 50 mV div 5 0 mV 100 0 mV 0 5 mV 100 mV div 10 mV 200 mV 1mvV 200 mV div 20 mV 500 mV 2 mV 500 mV div 50 mV 1000 mV 5 mV 1 Vidiv 0 10 V 2 00 V 0 01 V 2 Vidiv 0 20 V 5 00 V 0 02 V 5 Vidiv 0 50 V 10 00 V 0 05 V 10 V div 1 0 V 20 0 V 0 1 V 20 V div 2 0 V 50 0 V 0 2 V 50 V div 5 0 V 100 0 V 0 5 V 100 V div 10 V 200 V 1V The values are 1 10th 10 times and 100 times the values shown above if the probe attenuation is 1 1 100 1 and 1000 1 respectively Ifthe probe current to voltage conversion ratio is 10 A 1 V 0 01 V A the values are the same values shown above with the unit changed to A If the ratio is 100 A 1 V 0 01 V A the values are ten times the values shown above with the unit changed to A IM 701730 01E 5 3 sexy JE UOZHOH pUe JeIIHA eo 5 3 Setting the Vertical Position of the Waveform lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 3 gt Procedure Trace zgr SHOT HELP HISTORY SA ba O O e To exit the menu during operation press ESC ais od Ed im located above the soft keys setup oispLay ory mace save o SHIFT e Fora description of the operation using a USB oS Games keyboardora USB ion 4 3 i s eyboard or a mouse see section 4 3 owe owes ACTION DELAY Cre S TIME sDIV 1 Press one of the CH1 to CH4 2 keys to select the channel The CH menu appears 2 Press the Position soft k
555. terleave mode Turn OFF interleave mode 7 3 850 Not possible in the current record length Change the record length 7 2 851 Cannot carry out computation at the current Change the record length 7 2 record length 852 The operation is not possible when waveforms Execute unload 12 5 are loaded Unload the loaded files from the FILE menu IM 701730 01E 16 5 a uonsedsuy pue eoueusjulel BunooysajqnoiL 16 2 Messages and Corrective Actions Code Message Corrective Action Sections 853 Setting or executing is not possible during the Abort the search 10 2 to 10 4 search operation 854 Search pattern does not exist Change the search conditions and search again 10 4 Execute the search 855 Settings cannot be changed or executed during Abort the search 10 2 10 3 the history search operation 856 The record cannot be selected Check the record number using Show Map 10 2 10 3 857 History record does not exist History record is not possible in average mode 7 4 7 5 repetitive sampling mode and roll mode 858 Settings or executing is not possible during FFT Set Display Mode on the HISTORY menu to One 10 1 recalculation Abort the operation by setting the history Display Mode to One 860 Cannot be configured or executed while updating Set Display Mode on the HISTORY menu to One 10 1 the history all display Aborted when history display mode is set to One 861 Cannot
556. termination operation until the waveform acquisition count described below is reached If the waveform acquisition count is set to Infinite determination operation repeats until it is aborted Waveform Acquisition Count ACQ Count You can set the number of waveform acquisitions Infinite Continues until waveform acquisition is aborted using the START STOP key or Abort soft key 1 65536 Waveform acquisition and determination operation stop when the specified number of waveforms are acquired 10 62 IM 701730 01E 10 9 Performing GO NO GO Determination Using Zones Instrument Action When the Condition Is Met You can select the action that instrument takes when the condition is met When the condition is met it is counted as a failure Buzzer Sounds a buzzer Save to File Saves data to the storage medium floppy disk PC card Net Drive or USB storage specified in the FILE menu Hard Copy Outputs the screen image data to the destination built in USB or Net Print1 specified by Copy to in the COPY menu Image Save Saves screen image data to the storage medium floppy disk PC card Net Drive or USB storage specified in the IMAGE menu Send Mail Sends a mail message Set the mail send count in the range from 1 to 1000 For details see section 13 5 When the Ethernet interface option is installed e Save to File Hard Copy Image Save Operation The operation follows the settings specified on the FILE PRINT o
557. tes You can simultaneously display the waveforms input on channels 1 through 4 or channels 1 and 2 for the DL1720E For channels that are turned ON the LED to the left of the channel key illuminates Note e The screen can be split into up to six display areas or up to three on the DL1720E using the DISPLAY menu see section 8 1 Scale values see section 8 8 and waveform labels see section 8 9 can also be displayed If waveforms are recalled from the history waveforms or loaded from a storage medium such as a floppy disk or PC card the input waveform cannot be displayed To compare them you can use the Snapshot function see section 8 6 IM 701730 01E 5 1 sexy JE UOZHOH pUe JeIIHA eo 5 2 Setting V div Procedure lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 3 gt CLEAR SNAP HELP TRACE ESC SHOT HISTORY Ta SA a O O To exit the menu during operation press ESC Cefar Crs use Joonoed mary located above the soft keys X Y setup oiseLay ory mace save o SHIFT e Fora description of the operation using a USB CHORZONTAL A C mn D SEARCH PETER keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Qa o owe owes ACTION DELAY Cre S TIME sDIV Using the V div Knob 1 Press one of the CH1 to CH4 2 keys to select the channel The CH menu appears 2 Turn the V DIV knob to set the V div value Note e The displayed wavefor
558. the 1Cycle Mode soft key to select ON or OFF MEASURE Mode Cycle Modi faT Rangei Iten Delay 5 000dit Next ON Setup Setup ON BT Range2 A 5 000di Setting the Measurement Range 20 Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to T Range1 T Range2 or both T Range1 and T Range 2 If you select T Range1 you can move T Range1 If you select T Range2 you can move T Range2 If you select both T Range1 and T Range2 you can move T Range1 and T Range2 horizontally without changing the spacing between the two The value of the digit being specified by T Range1 changes MEASURE Mode ry Cycle Mod faT Range1 j im Item Delay 5 000di Next ON Setup Setup ON ST Rangez 172 5 000di 21 Turn the jog shuttle to set the measurement range Setting the Distal Mesial and Proximal Values 22 Press the Next 1 2 soft key The page 2 menu appears ara Mode Cycle Mod s T Range Item Delay 5 000 Next ON Setup Setup ON fjST Ranges 172 5 0006 Selecting the Waveform to Set 23 Press the Trace soft key The Trace menu appears CH1 Z Trace Dist Prox ffe Distal f Mesial Unit 24 Press the CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 or Math2 soft key to select the waveform to set e On the DL1740E DL1740EL you can select from CH1 to CH4 Math1 and Math2 On the DL1720E you can select CH1 CH2 and Math1 MEASURE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 Back 272 r
559. the Max Min Item2 soft key The measured values of the 2nd measurement parameter from the left of the list are searched and the cursor moves to the measured value with the maximum or minimum mark T or J 14 Likewise press the Max Min Item3 and Max Min Item4 soft keys The cursor moves to the corresponding measured values The cursor does not move if there is no maximum or minimum value Item1 Item2 Item3 tema MeasurP Parameter List P P C1 Max C1 Min C1 Avg C1 1 02083U 812 500mV 1 208 333mU 94 880mU 1 62083U 812 500mU 208 333mU 2 i i i i 1 02083V Biz S0onv r 208 333n0 l 94 672nU Mark indicating the maximum value 1 041670 812 500nU 1 229 _167mU 295 _398mU i i i ini 1 04167U B812 500MY s29 167M 294 465mU Mark indicating the minimum value 1 02083U 812 500mU 208 333mU 293 636mU 1 04167U 812 500mU 229 167mU 295 398mU 1 04167U 812 500mU 229 167mU 293 843mU 1 02083V 812 500nU 208 333nU 294 983nU 1 02083U 812 500mU 208 333mV 295 087mU 1 02083U 812 500mU 208 333mU 293 947mU 1 04167U 812 500mU 229 167mU 294 776nU 1 04167U t 833 333mU 208 333nU 294 672nU 1 020834 812 500mU 208 333nU 296 124mU 1 02083U 812 500mU 208 333mU 295 916mU 1 02083U 812 500mU 208 333mnU 293 947mU 1 02083U 812 500mU 208 333mU 294 983mU 1 04167U 812 500mU 229 167nU 294 983mU 1 04167U 812 500mU 229 167mU 294 362m MaxMin MaxMin MaxMin MaxMin Item1 Item2 Item3 Item4 Utility_
560. the TV Trigger ENHANCED e For 480 60p 8 to 2251 Line numbers inside the parentheses cannot be set 42H rueyry a l l fl Pot ot laylalelalele 7 liolatilighia Tasi 8 Line number 524 525 526 gt 568 2207 2208 2209 gt 2251 Frame Skip This function is used to skip frames such as when the color burst is inverted every frame You can select the number of frames at which this operation is repeated 1 Activates a trigger at the specified field every time 2 Skips 1 frames and activates a trigger at the specified field of the succeeding frame This operation is repeated every two frames 4 Skips three frames and activates a trigger at the specified field of the succeeding frame This operation is repeated every four frames 8 Skips seven frames and activates a trigger at the specified field of the succeeding frame This operation is repeated every eight frames Note Video signals can only be input to CH1 All other channels do not support video signals e Hold off trigger coupling and HF rejection settings are ignored IM 701730 01E 6 37 s n el 6 15 Setting the Action on Trigger Procedure lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 13 gt SNAP HELP ba SHOT To exit the menu during operation press ESC SELLI ueasure cursoR FILE misc conosco ya a VERTICAL CED reset VzDIV
561. the User Account soft key The User Account dialog box opens MISC a a F TCP IP User Mail Net Drive f Net Print Others Comect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to enter the User Name Specify anonymous if you wish to allow access to all users To restrict access enter the user name using up to fifteen characters Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to enter the Password using up to fifteen characters Enter the password again for confirmation If the user name is set to anonymous you do not have to enter the password Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to enter the time out time Time Out The connection to the network is automatically closed if there is no access to the instrument for the specified time __Iser_Account__ user Nane Camas j Enter a user name using up to fifteen characters Passuord ____ Enter a password using up to fifteen characters Please input a password tuice Reenter the password to confirm Set the timeout time from 1 to 3600 s Time Out sec C Executing the FTP Client Software 7 Execute an FTP client on the PC or workstation Perform file operations using the user name specified in step 4 13 18 IM 701730 01E 13 6 Accessing the Instrument from a PC or Workstation FTP Server Function Displaying the Log List 8 Press the Connect Log List soft key The data and time user name an
562. the menu during operation press ESC ENAP HELP located above the soft keys y e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog a shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of anions T PHASE aca sTaRT sTOP Cae Jase Gory mmc SAVE O SHIFT selecting setting items and entering values using e 7 D TERO R the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys o 2 w details on this operation see sections 4 1 and Ow e Fora description of the operation using a USB ef keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Entering Mail Settings 1 2 Press the MISC The MISC menu appears Press the Network soft key The Network menu appears tatibratio nenote network system ee Control Conf ig Press the Mail Setup soft key The Mail Setup dialog box opens 5 5 Network MIS Mail et Drive f Net Print Others Comect Setup etup Setup Log List Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to enter the Mail Server IP address of the mail server If you are using DNS you can specify the server by name Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to enter the Mail Address recipient mail address using up to forty characters As necessary use jog shuttle amp SELECT to enter a comment using up to thirty characters As necessary turn the jog shuttle to set Attached Image File to ON attach the image data or OFF not attach the image data Ea User Ea Account
563. the operation of MENU __ MENU seme SPL oer mace SAVE O SHIFT selecting setting items and entering values using ver O the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys Se e area For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and vsDIv TIME DIV 4 2 o s e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 Setting the Trigger Type 1 Press ENHANCED The ENHANCED menu appears 2 Press the Type soft key The Type menu appears Type m E Comt fatoid OFF Bet Pattern Level us A gt BOND Coupling 1 0 08 3 Press the Width soft key NHANCED gt BND A Delay B Pattern Width OR T Hold Off us 0 08 Setting the Width Type 4 Press the Width Type soft key The Width Type menu appears idth Type Width veal Pulse lt T 5 Press the Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 or Time Out soft key Pulse lt T Setting the Window 6 Press the Window soft key and select ON or OFF If set to OFF a trigger is activated on the time width over which the parallel pattern of the status H L or X of each channel is met or not met If set to ON a trigger is activated on the time over which the parallel pattern of the window condition IN OUT or X of each channel is met or not met ENHANCED feTimeCuS Window fHoild Off ot Patter tever us Coupling 6 001 OFF ph 0 08 ENHANCED feHoid OFF P
564. tical processing are performed on the 24000 values that can be listed and measurement and statistical processing are not performed on the rest of the waveform e Inthe list of the measurement and statistical processing of history waveforms you can select a number using the jog shuttle and press SELECT to display the history waveform of the selected number e In the list of the measurement per cycle and statistical processing within the measurement range you can select a number using the jog shuttle and press SELECT to display the waveform 1 cycle of the selected number zoomed Noe ee ee All soft keys except the Measure Abort soft key are disabled while the measurement and statistical processing are in progress Measurement per cycle and statistical processing within the measurement range are not possible in automated measurement of waveform parameters on dual areas see section 10 8 10 52 IM 701730 01E 10 8 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 29 gt Procedure o T TT LLIN 65 SOR FILE misc Gono co MATH a RESET SELECT Se MENU MEN PHASE ACQ START STOP e To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys In the procedural explanation below the term jog shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of SETUP pisPLav Cory mace savE o SHIFT
565. tical Processing Statistical processing is performed on all acquired waveforms while acquiring waveforms e Statistical Processing by Cycle The displayed waveform is separated into automatically determined cycles and statistical processing is performed on the measured values within each cycle Statistical processing is performed from the oldest data of the displayed waveforms When Own is selected as the waveform used to determine the cycle lt 4 In the left figure the number of Applicable cycles cycles of the channel whose Nth cycle is the slowest CH3 is 4 CH2 Therefore statistical processing iV VM MV is performed on the four oldest Applicable cycles cycles of data for CH1 and CH2 also The rest of the data is not used in statistical processing CH3 Applicable cycles CH3 not available on the DL1720E e Statistical Processing of History Waveforms Automated measurement is performed on the history waveforms in the selected range and statistical processing is performed Statistical processing is performed from the oldest data 2 28 IM 701730 01E 2 6 Analyzing and Searching Waveforms Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas lt For the setup procedure see section 10 8 gt You can specify two areas and perform automated measurement of waveform parameters on each area You can also perform computation on the parameters determined in the two areas Per cycle statistical p
566. tical cursor vertical POSITION c cccsiecavesececteccevteaeeenecedenscacenevetaresses vertical sensitivity 0 cece eee eeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeetseeeeaeenees VIDEO OUT VGA Ha video output terminal esssssssesiesinerrerireirerrnerrernnrresrnsrrners 14 6 W waveform acquisition oo ee eee cee ceee tee eteeeteeeeneeeeaeenees 1 5 Waveform data tees cacdeeneontineanienteaayerted 12 12 waveform label ccseeeeeee 2 20 8 16 waveform parameter search ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeteee 2 23 Web server 2 31 13 20 WebDAV ae niaan eeraa A aae oaa eaea CAO REEE ES 13 52 width trigger 2 10 6 24 WINGOW trigger csecesseseceeeseecssnseseeseseeeseessaeeesees 2 10 6 31 X X AXIS MOQE ceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseaes 8 12 XY WAVeTONM 222 kakenieis ekki nee adidas 8 10 X Y waveform display eee ce eee eects eeeeeteaeeeeeeeee 2 19 Z Zone SOAICH wieocdteewtveacegeeeleetaranatanaeataarelents 2 23 ZOOM ZOOM POSITION eee eee eee e eee eee eeeeeeeeeteaeseaeeseaeeseeseneenaaee 8 9 ZOOM ralo si oat Siac a ieee is nes ae 8 9 ZOOMING the waveform cceeeeeeeeeteeeteteeeeeeeeeeetenee 2 18 8 7 Index 4 IM 701730 01E
567. ting the Page Description Language or Printer Type 6 Press the Format soft key The Format menu appears COPY Copy to Fornat Color fa a Comment Select USB ESC P IF 7 Press ESC P ESC P2 LIPS3 PCL5 or BJ to select the page description language or printer type Copy to ESC P USB Turning Color Printing ON and OFF Selectable if the page description language or printer type is set to ESC P ESCP2 PCLS5 or BJ in step 7 8 Press the Color soft key to select ON or OFF COPY ESC P2 LIPS3 PCLS BJ COPY Color m oN Copy to Format N r Comment Select USB ESC P Entering Comments 9 Press the Comment soft key A keyboard used to enter values and strings appears 10 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the comment m a en of to Format Color coment se lect USB ESC P a en of ON Selecting the Output Resolution Selectable only if the page description language or printer type is set to BJ in step 7 11 Press the Resolution soft key The Resolution menu appears sobew use19S Hunund Ey COPY Select USB BJ OFF Copy to Format Color ja esolution Comment 180dpi 12 Press the 180dpi 300dpi 360dpi or 600dpi soft key to set the output resolution Copy to Format Color 300dpi 360dpi 600dpi USB BU OFF PN Printing 13 Press COPY The screen image is printed on the USB printer To abort printing press COPY while printing is
568. tion gt Chapter 13 section 3 6 6 2 2004 04 13 09 30 49 JE fjiok Normal ri Rectangular frame oe 40 0 V a lt ane gt gt OOS Store CH1 10 1 Enclosed by a rectangular s i fi h he ch li Label of the Waveform acquisition count i ed boing ae ispla waveform CH2 10 1 disp yed efo 20 0 U div Waveform display See section 8 9 DC Full channels Vertical axis sensitivity V div gt See section 5 2 Bandwidth limit gt Section 5 8 Scale value See section 8 8 Vertical position mark See section 5 3 tor att Ground level mark Input coupling See section 2 2 See section 5 4 Trigger level mark AAA A A Probe See section 2 3 i Se nie ciz attenuation current to Time from the trigger 17 0 V voltage conversion ratio iti gt Section 5 5 position to the left a and right ends of the Format T saas SPAY Trigger slope See waveform display frame Format interpol Graticule Scale Trace ccunu late i Value Label Next section 2 3 and chapter 6 Dual Sine gt G EX OFF pN OFF pN OFF 172 l J I I Trigger source See section 2 3 and chapter 6 Comment Displays the specified comment when printing or saving the screen image Setup menu Trigger level See section 2 3 and chapter 6 Trigger mode See section 6 1 Trigger type See section 2 3 and chapter 6 If the vertical axis scale is changed when waveform acquisition is stopped the new verti
569. tive sampling mode i NOW NMOOG sesecntesessct tance luna ene network beetesseettssettissttttnsenettntte tentten testen tentate testten entene tenat 13 1 roll mode display scccccccssssscccsssssssssesessssssseseessssessssssssseeeeee MOtWOPK G VE caseissceescctestedavesastsaesersecsesercsitensensssecrecredereesees 2 30 roll paper eesesseeeeeee network printer ASN pame sa 11 10 roller network printer LPR UATE seshecs eeiaceenian esteieearnt Erao rubber feet rnani nnn GANG R NOt a ainia erann AEAEE TERRA a KAET EETA A KRANER EELER ii normal ModE eee eee 2 11 2 14 6 1 7 6 normal statistical processing ceceeeeeeeees 2 28 10 46 S NTP Servei cninn e irera eE 3 14 BEET number of computed point sescssseesscsseeeseeseseesssssesseseeeees 9 13 Safety standard nc cescce2esscecdeseceneshcecedakcedenscennezactdassstsenscends 17 11 SAMPIO re U E eTA App 1 sampling mode 2 7 2 14 5 19 O save to file cecceeeeeeeeee 6 39 10 63 offset VORAJE visivi 2 5 5 9 15 5 so alla ala ea oe gee OPOrALOT sisirin eet S Bra Niy Sal JTS SCale Valet a r AEE 2 20 option SPOCIICALION scsiescvecasssiveecscseesiestecessbecsectestuduerenieereecyes ii SCALING ecccccccssssssseeeseseeeeeesese 9 4 9 7 9 9 9 11 9 13 9 15 OR trigger A O ee me eal scaling the Computed waveform ccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 21 other operation N SCIOCN COlOP ssccccccsciesssccsscssssesascevossssvocnestcavscesctnacsecsstsiseeeest output resoluti
570. to CH4 may be indicated as C1 to C4 and Math1 as M1 Mathi and Math2 can be computed simultaneously e For the DL17420E Computation Name Source Math1 CH1 or CH2 On the menu CH1 to CH2 may be indicated as C1 and C2 Scaling The operation is the same as for addition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 Unit of Computed Waveforms The operation is the same as for addition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 Smoothing The operation is the same as for addition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 Effects of Linear Scaling If linear scaling is performed on the channel to be computed computation is performed using linearly scaled values Maximum Record Length That Can Be Computed The operation is the same as for addition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 IM 701730 01E 9 15 uonendwog WAOJOAe e 9 8 Shifting the Phase lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 21 gt Procedure AIO ueasune cursoR FILE misc co e To exit the menu during operation press ESC zgr SHOT HELP located above the soft keys g O e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog MENU _ MENU 2 R Joo mace shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of setup pisPLaY Copy mace sa selecting setting items and entering values using C VERTICAL EO C ER D A ED P K ARCH eae the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys TCD For details on this ope
571. to the Z1 window C2 to Z2 Make Cursor2 jump to the Z2 window Note ____ The measured values of the X axis horizontal axis and time axis are displayed relative to the trigger position If measurement is not possible is displayed in the measured value display area When the T div setting is not repetitive sampling mode and the acquisition mode is not averaging mode sampled data may not exist at the vertical cursor position in the interpolation display1 area The measured value of the vertical cursor in this case is the value of the sampled data closest to the cursor on the right On the contrary marker cursors always move over the sampled data Interpolation display is used when there are less than 500 points of sampled data in ten divisions along the X axis or when the zoom waveform display format is Main amp Z1 amp Z2 and there are less than 250 points of sampled data in the zoom waveform display frame 10 38 IM 701730 01E 10 6 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 28 gt Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC race SNAP HELP located above the soft keys a O O O e Inthe procedural explanation below the term jog oO K D ae mee Jeavocd MATH Goa a ai shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of SETUP DISPLAY COPY MAGE SAVE O SHIFT selecting setting items and entering values using C ma A CORONA K 3 c
572. ttop window However the flattop window has a higher level of accuracy When the waveform being analyzed is a continuous signal select the proper window for the application FFT is performed on 1000 or 10000 points of measured data The data is converted to half the specified number of points and displayed Window Integral Power spectrum Rectangul oe er Ah F T Hanning window T NY Flattop window P T y r x l Rectangular window W t u t u t T U t Step function Hanning window W t 0 5 0 5cos 27 Flattop window W t 0 54 0 46 cos 2n h Sine wave FPA it F sin 2n 1 2t T 2n 1 2t T FFT Function Given that the complex function resulting after the FFT is G R jl the power spectrum can be expressed as follows DC component AC component 2442 10 log R2 12 10 tog R Real Part I Imaginary Part Reference value 0 dB of the logarithmic magnitude Log mag 1 Vrms 2 22 IM 701730 01E 2 6 Analyzing and Searching Waveforms Displaying History Waveforms lt For the setup procedure see section 10 1 gt History Search Past waveform data history waveforms stored in the acquisition memory can be displayed when waveform acquisition is stopped You can display a specified history waveform from the data up to 2048 waveforms or the number of triggers stored in the acquisition memory
573. tween two points using the resulting sine curve Sine interpolation is suitable for observing sine waves or similar waves sin x Pulse Interpolation Interpolates between two points in a step pattern Interpolation OFF Displays discrete dots without performing interpolation IM 701730 01E 2 17 suonoun jo uoneuejdxg s 2 4 Waveform Acquisition and Display Conditions Accumulated Display lt For the setup procedure see section 8 3 gt The display time of old waveforms can be set longer than the waveform update period so that newer waveforms appear overlapped accumulated on older waveforms Accumulated display is useful when observing jitters and temporary turbulence in waveforms The following two modes are available e Persist Accumulates waveforms using a single color for each channel The intensity is gradually reduced and the waveform disappears after the specified time e Color Accumulates waveforms using eight colors indicating data frequency information Zooming the Waveform lt For the setup procedure see section 8 4 gt The displayed waveform can be expanded along the time axis This function is useful when the waveform acquisition time is set long and you wish to observe a particular section of the waveform closely Zooming is not possible if the number of displayed points on the screen is less than or equal to 50 Zoomed waveforms of up to two locations
574. uayuren BunooysajqnoiL 16 2 Messages and Corrective Actions Error Messages A message such as an error message may appear during operation This section describes the meanings of the messages and their corrective actions The messages can be displayed either in English or Japanese see section 15 1 Contact the dealer from which you purchased the instrument if servicing is required The following messages appear in Japanese in the upper row and English in the bottom row In addition to the messages listed below there are communication error messages These messages are described in the Communication Interface User s Manual IM 701730 17E Status Messages Code Message Corrective Action Sections 0 Aborted hard copy 11 2 1 Aborted file operation Chapter 12 2 Completed data store 12 1 3 Completed data recall 12 1 4 Completed GO NO GO 10 9 10 10 10 Set to remote mode by communication Press SHIFT CLEAR TRACE to enable local commands mode 11 Local lockout by communication commands To operate the keys release lockout using communication commands 13 All settings will be initialized Power up with 4 4 the RESET key depressed 21 Completed action on trigger 6 15 22 Executed unload 12 5 12 7 23 Released the Preview mode 11 2 24 Some of the channels are set to 50 ohm DC input 5 4 To keep the settings press the SELECT key
575. ue is 80 ns and the resolution is 20 ns Notes on Setting the Hold Off Time The updating of the waveform may slow down when using repetitive sampling In this case set the hold off time to a smaller value If you are setting the hold off time to 100 ms or greater set the trigger mode to normal When used with A gt B N or A Delay B trigger the hold off time applies only to condition A IM 701730 01E 6 7 s n el 6 5 Setting the Edge Trigger SIMPLE lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 8 gt Procedure Trace SNAP HELP JO a SHOT HISTORY O O O To exit the menu during operation press ESC iis wd Ee im located above the soft keys RIG7D CeETuP JpisPLa orv mace save o SHIFT For a description of the operation using a USB Cmn 9 A O cH N D ge keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 o Smee elpances o CD TION DELAY MODE POSITION oa als Setting the Trigger Source 1 Press SIMPLE The SIMPLE menu appears 2 Press the Source soft key The Source menu appears SIMPLE Source 3 Level Slope Coupling HF Re ject Hysteresis fSHold Off us cH1 1 50 V amp Ft AC or H z 0 0 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired trigger source The CH3 and CH4 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720E SIMPLE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Ext Line pHold Off uS 0 08 Setting the Trigger Level 4 Pr
576. ulse gt T Bie Out i ENHANCED Type idth Type ja feTine Cus Window Hold OFF et Pattern Level cus width Pulse lt T Coup1 ing 0 8 0 6 24 IM 701730 01E 6 11 Activating a Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 and Time Out Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Status 7 Press the Set Pattern soft key The Set Pattern dialog box opens The settings related to CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720E p Type idth Typi y feTine us Window faHoid Off et Pattern Level uS Width Pulse lt T coupling 6 001 OFF pN 0 08 8 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set the status of each channel to H L or X IN OUT or X if Window is ON 9 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to set Condition to True or False When Window is OFF When Window is ON a H L or X for the cHt 17 Select IN OUT or X for status of each channel cH the window condition cH3 of each channel CH4 Condition Set Condition to True or False Condition Set Condition to True or False 10 Press ESC The Set Pattern dialog box closes Setting the Level Hysteresis Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection 11 Press the Level Coupling soft key The Level Coupling dialog box opens The settings related to CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720E 12 Like in the case of the A gt B N trigger see section 6 8 set the level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection If Window is ON set the
577. ulyoseas pue HulzAjeuy es 10 7 Statistical Processing of the Automated Measurement Values of Waveform Parameters Displaying Measured Values 9 10 11 Press the Show Result soft key The Measure Parameter List window appears and the measured values are listed Measured values with assigned numbers 00001 00002 and so on are displayed in the measured order The smallest assigned number corresponds to the measured value of the waveform at the left end of the screen oldest waveform MEASURE Hode Ja ucie Tray ja fjeT Ranget Iten Shou Measure 5 000aiq Next Cycle Setup cH1 Result Exec eT Rangez a Statistics 5 000d List Scroll Turn the jog shuttle to scroll the list up and down The Measure Parameter List window displays up to 25 measured values at once in the order of occurrence By scrolling the list up and down using the jog shuttle measured values beyond 25 data points can be displayed Press the lt or gt key arrow key to scroll the list left and right The Measure Parameter List window displays up to four measurement parameters at once in the order of parameters that are specified to be measured in the Item Setup dialog box see page 10 39 By scrolling the list left and right using lt and gt measured parameters beyond four parameters can be displayed Scroll left and right using lt or gt lt Measurement parameters gt Measure Parameter List P P C1 Max C1 Mi
578. unction cannot be used when using the FTP server function FTP client function the network printer function or the Web server function IM 701730 01E 12 25 e eq Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 12 7 Saving Loading the Snapshot Waveforms AN CAUTION Do not remove the storage medium disk or turn OFF the power when the access indicator or icon of the storage medium is blinking Doing so can damage the storage medium or destroy the data on the medium Procedure To exit the menu during operation press ESC TRACE zgr SHO HELP located above the soft keys HISTORY r O Bye In the procedural explanation below the term jog Os ueasure ca l nhe eanocd Sd Gea rarer sco srnrsror sanrsro E shuttle amp SELECT refers to the operation of setup pispLay Copy mace ame el selecting setting items and entering values using Gam Gane the jog shuttle and SELECT and RESET keys oS sexe ennianceD For details on this operation see sections 4 1 and a aX ACTON _ DELAY 4 2 aa C C as A e For a description of the operation using a USB keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press FILE The FILE menu appears 2 _ Press the File Item soft key The File Item setting menu appears FILE File Item a ja a Save Load Utility Setup 3 Press the Snap soft key J FILE Setup Waveform Snap Measure Image a Utility DL LT Saving Snapshot
579. upports 100BASE TX UTP cable or fo STP cable straight cable o DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL PC or workstation When Making a One to One Connection to the PC or Workstation 1 Turn OFF the power switch and main power switch to the instrument see section 3 3 and turn OFF the PC or workstation 2 Connect one end of the UTP or STP cable to the ETHERNET 100BASE TX terminal on the rear panel 3 Connect the other end of the UTP or STP cable to a hub or router Likewise connect the PC or workstation to a hub or router 5 Turn ON the power switch and main power switch to the instrument see section 3 3 A Hub or router that supports 100BASE TX x UTP cable or a STP cable straight cable DL1720E DL1740E DL1740EL PC or workstation Note When connecting the PC or workstation one to one a NIC a 10BASE T 100BASE TX autoswitching card is required for the PC or workstation e When using a UTP cable or STP cable straight cable be sure to use a category 5 or better cable e Avoid connecting the PC or workstation directly to the instrument without going through the hub or router Operations are not guaranteed for communications using direct connection 13 2 IM 701730 01E 13 2 Setting Up the TCP IP Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC SNO HELP located
580. used to enter items such as file names and comments see section 4 3 Keyboards conforming to USB Human Interface Devices HID Class Version 1 1 can be used ENG 104 keyboard and 89 keyboard JPN 109 keyboard and 89 keyboard The character that is entered through each key of the USB keyboard varies depending on the keyboard type For details see appendix 5 Checking the Connected Keyboard The USB devices that are connected can be listed Note For USB keyboards that have been tested for compatibility contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 15 4 IM 701730 01E 15 3 Measuring the Offset Voltage and Applying the Offset Voltage to the Computed Results Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys e For a description of the operation using a USB Coma A Conor t SEARCH L O TRIG D S E Qa o smece ENHANCED vsDIv TIME D1V keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 ACTION DELAY Sa SF a Explanation Press the MISC Press the System Cnfg soft key to display a configuration menu MISC a a a ja alibration Remote Netuorki System Ivervieu Next Control Conf ig 172 Press the Offset Cancel soft key to select ON or OFF The default setting is OFF system nf MISC Menu Message lick Sounda Language Language Date Time ENG JPN OFF pry ON Offset Trigger Cancel Gate The offset
581. using up to fifteen characters The characters that can be used are all the ASCII characters on the keyboard e Time Out Th e connection to the network is automatically closed if there is no access to the instrument for the specified time The default setting is 5 s Set the timeout to a long va lue when using dedicated FTP client software IM 701730 01E 13 19 Ieuondo suonesaiunwwos 3u1 34 3 g 13 7 Using the Web Server Function You can use the Web server function on the instrument to display the screen image of the instrument on your PC s Web browser and perform file operations on the instrument using the keys displayed in the Web browser This section contains the following information Overview of the Web server function gt See this page e Operating conditions PC environment gt See page 13 21 e instrument environment gt See page 13 22 e Preparations for using the Web server function e Preparations on the instrument gt See page 13 23 e Preparations on the PC gt See page 13 24 Using the web server function e Using the FTP server function gt See 13 28 e Performing data capture gt See page 13 29 e Displaying the measurement trend of waveform parameters gt See page 13 35 e Using control scripts gt See page 13 39 Showing the log gt See page 13 41 Showing the instrument information gt See page 13 43 e Viewing the link destination gt See page 13
582. ut Coupling lt For a description of this function refer to page 2 4 gt Procedure rick SNAP TRACE 750 SHOT HELP OC l ae OO 5 ourson Crue misc conosco mara RESET SELECT XY MENU MENU PHASE ACQ START STOP setup pispLay Copy mace Save o SHIFT To exit the menu during operation press ESC located above the soft keys e Fora description of the operation using a USB C mn D O TRIG D Qa o owe owes ACTION DELAY Cre S HORIZONTAL Ay SEARCH keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 1 Press one of the CH1 to CH4 2 keys to select the channel The CH menu appears 2 Press the Coupling soft key The Coupling menu appears CH1 Next 172 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired coupling If DC50 Q is selected a menu used to confirm the execution appears Press the Set to DC50 Q or Cancel soft key CHI MD H ACINe DCINa DCSen GND nduidth Next J 172 Probe fe Offset Bandwidth Display sPositioy f Coupling O O0div DCMR 10 1 0 000kU Full OFF DN Display OFF pN Full IM 701730 01E 5 6 5 4 Setting the Input Coupling Explanation Attenuation 0 dB 3 dB A Selecting the Input Coupling You can select the method of coupling the input signal to the vertical control circuit from the following AC1 MQ Acquires and displays only the AC component of the input si
583. utation of 1 kWord or 10 kWord Selecting the Time Window You can select the time window Rect Rectangular Best suited for transient signals that attenuate completely within the time window Hanning Window Best suited for continuous and non periodic signals Flattop Window Best suited for improving the accuracy of the level even if the frequency resolution is to be compromised Effects of Linear Scaling If linear scaling is performed on the channel to be computed computation is performed using the linearly scaled values and affects the level of the power spectrum computation result Maximum Record Length That Can Be Computed The operation is the same as for addition subtraction and multiplication See section 9 2 Note An asterisk is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen while power spectrum computation is in progress The power spectrum cannot be computed if the displayed record length is less than number of computed points In addition it cannot be computed when the number of data points after the computation start point is less than the number of computed points Power spectrum computation is performed on the data stored in the acquisition memory For waveforms acquired in envelope mode computation is performed on the maximum and minimum values per acquisition interval IM 701730 01E uoneyndwoy WAdJOAe e 9 7 Smoothing Waveforms Procedure e To exit the menu during operation press ESC loca
584. utation parameter User1 is as follows User1 M1 operator M2 M1 Measurement parameter of Area 1 of the measurement target waveform M2 Measurement parameter of Area 2 of the measurement target waveform Operator or The measurement target waveforms of M1 and M2 can be selected from CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 Math2 None or Const1 to Const4 On the DL1740E DL1740EL you can select from CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 None or Const1 to Const4 On the DL1720E you can select from CH1 to CH2 Math1 None or Const1 to Const2 If one of the measurement target waveform is set to None the measured value of the other measurement parameter is displayed If both measurement target waveforms are set to None the measurement value display area shows Turning the Computation Parameters ON and OFF The display of the computation parameters User1 to User4 can be turned ON OFF separately ON Displays the measurement parameter OFF Does not display the measurement parameter Unit of Computation Parameters Units can be assigned to computation parameters User1 to User4 using up to four characters e The type of characters that can be used are those displayed on the keyboard e The specified unit is displayed when the display of the measurement parameter is turned ON 10 56 IM 701730 01E 10 8 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas Measurement Range The selectable range is 5 divisions an
585. ve o SHIFT Fora description of the operation using a USB p perauon u A 9 keyboard or a USB mouse see section 4 3 aaa oa Applying a Video Signal 1 Connect the probe cable for applying the video signal to the CH1 input terminal Setting the Trigger Type 2 Press ENHANCED The ENHANCED menu appears 3 Press the Type soft key The Type menu appears Type a a f Count feHoid Off Bet Pattern Level us A gt B N D Coupling 0 08 4 Press the TV soft key NHANCED i o E A Delay B Pattern Width OR TU dold Off us 0 08 Selecting the Broadcasting Type of the Video Signal 5 Press the TV Type soft key The TV Type menu appears ENHANCED Tupe TU Type Polarity fe Level Field fj Line Frane Skip Tv NTSC eg Pos osav g2 x 5 H248 6 Press the soft key corresponding to the broadcast type of the video signal The menu contains two pages of selections ieee ATS NTSC PAL SECAM 1080 60i 1080 50i 720760p To Page 2 p gt SSS SS Selecting the Polarity 7 Press the Polarity soft key to select the polarity P ENHANCED Tupe TU Typey Polarity j Level Field fj Line Frane Skip Tv NTSC Pos osav g 2 x 5 H248 Setting the Trigger Level 8 Press the Level soft key 9 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger level Pressing RESET sets the trigger level to 0 5 divisions or 1 0 division depending on the TV Type broadcast type
586. waveforms however measurement is possible on the accumulated waveform acquired last 10 36 IM 701730 01E 10 5 Cursor Measurements Cursor Measurement Parameters The table below shows the parameters that can be measured and displayed using each type of cursors e When X Y Waveforms Are Not Displayed Horizontal cursors Measures the Y axis value at the cursor position Y1 Y axis vertical axis value of Cursor Y2 Y axis value of Cursor2 DY The difference between the Y axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 Vertical cursors Measures the X axis and Y axis values at the cursor position X1 X axis vertical axis value of Cursor1 X2 X axis value of Cursor2 DX The difference between the X axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 1 DX The inverse of the difference between the X axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 Y1 Y axis value at the cross point of Cursor and the waveform Y2 Y axis value at the cross point of Cursor2 and the waveform DY The difference between the Y axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 Marker cursors Measures the X axis value and Y axis value of the waveform Marker cursors move along the waveform M1 Marker 1 to M4 Marker 4 can be set on different waveforms X1 X4 X axis values of M1 to M4 DX2 The difference between the X axis values of M1 and M2 DX3 The difference between the X axis values of M1 and M3 DX4 The difference between the X axis values of M1 and M4 Y1 Y4 Y axis values of M1 to M4 DY2 Th
587. x Supported keyboards 104 keyboard US 109 keyboard Japanese and 89 keyboard US and Japanese conforming to USB HID Class Version 1 1 Supported printers ESC P ESC P2 LIPS3 PCL5 and BJ can be used on models that support the BUC 35 V native commands that support USB USB Printer Class Version 1 0 Supported mouse Mouse conforming to USB HID Class Version 1 1 Supports USB mass storage USB mass storage class hard disk drive MO disk drive and flash memory Power supply 5 V 500 mA per port Number of ports 2 Devices with maximum consumption currents exceeding 100 mA cannot be connected to two ports at the same time IM 701730 01E 17 7 ml a suoeaoads 17 9 Auxiliary I O Section External Trigger Input and Trigger Gate Input Item Description Connector type BNC Input bandwidth DC to 100 MHz Input impedance Approximately 1 MQ and approximately 20 pF Maximum input voltage 40 V DC ACpeak or 28 Vrms when the frequency is 10 kHz or less Trigger level 2 V setting resolution is 5 mV on the DL1740E DL1740EL 1 V setting resolution 5 mV when the 1 V range set on the DL1720E 10 V setting resolution 50 mV when the 10 V range set on the DL1720E 1 The external trigger input terminal and trigger gate input terminal are also used as external clock input terminals On the DL1740E DL1740EL the terminals are EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN TRIG GATE IN and on the DL1720E it is labeled E
588. xplanation Selecting the Copy Source Files You can copy all files that have an asterisk to the left of the file name There are two ways to select the files to be copied e Selecting the files one at a time Press the Set Reset soft key to place asterisks to the left of the files one at a time e Selecting all files at once Places an asterisk to the left of all the file names using the All Set soft key If you select a file and press the All Set soft key asterisks are placed on all the files in the current directory e Specifying the File to Be Displayed on the File List Window Specify the type of files to be displayed extension Displays only the data file that was selected in the File Item setup menu and the data type menu Displays all the files in the medium e Properties Displays information about the selected file including the name extension the file size the date the file was saved the attribute and the comment e Reduce Image Display on the File List When you select a screen image data file on the File List the reduced image of the screen image is displayed at the upper right section of the File List Reduced images are displayed only for screen image data Reduced images for waveform data and setup data are not displayed In addition reduce images do not display the file name and color information Note Files cannot be copied while the waveform acquisition is in progress e If an error occurs while copying multipl
589. y Sample record rate length S s Word Display Sample record rate length S s Word Display Sample record rate length S s Word Display Sample record rate length S s Word Sample rate S s Display record length Word Sample rate S s Display record length Word 20 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 50 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k Roll mode display 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 1G 10k Set to normal mode even if envelope mode is specified The values inside the thick frame are for repetitive sampling mode App 2 IM 701730 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Specified Record Length 50 kW When set to a mode other than envelope mode Rep Repetitive sampling mode When set to envelope mode When interleave mode is OFF When interleave mode is ON Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON When interleave mode is OFF When inte
590. z 10 6 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select the parameter to be measured 7 Press SELECT The mark to the left of the measurement parameter is highlighted The measurement parameter whose mark to the left of the parameter is highlighted is the parameter to be measured If you execute All Clear using jog shuttle amp SELECT all the highlighted displays are cleared and all parameters are not measured If you execute Copy To All Trace using jog shuttle amp SELECT the settings in the current Item Setup dialog box are copied to the Item Setup dialog boxes of all waveforms 8 Press ESC The Item Setup dialog box closes Setting the Delay Measurement between Waveforms 9 Press the Delay Setup soft key The Delay Setup dialog box opens MEASURE Mode a tycie Modi fat Ranget Iten Delay 5 000dit Next ON Setup Setup FF ON ST Rangez a2 5 000di Setting the Measurement Mode and Detection Conditions of the Waveform to Be Measured 10 Use jog shuttle amp SELECT to select the measurement mode Mode box 11 Press the CH1 to CH4 2 Math1 or Math2 soft key to select the waveform to measure e On the DL1740E DL1740EL you can select from CH1 to CH4 Math1 and Math2 e On the DL1720E you can select CH1 CH2 and Math1 Select the measurement mode Select which slope edge rising or falling is to be detected Delay Setup Mode Measure Set the edge det

DL1720E/DL1740E/DL1740EL Digital Oscilloscope User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents